You are on page 1of 2333

Reinforced Concrete Design

g I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 0
Syllabus
Reinforced Concrete Design

I
Instructor D N
Dr. Nader
d OkOkasha.
h

Email nao204@lehigh.edu

Offi Hours
Office H A needed.
As d d


Reinforced Concrete Design

This course iis only


Thi l offered
ff d for
f 2010 students
d who
h
have passed strength of materials.

If you d
dont
meet this
hi criteria
i i you will
ill not be
b
allowed to continue this course.


Reinforced Concrete Design

References:
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and
commentary (ACI 318M-08). American Concrete Institute,
2008.
2008

Design of Reinforced Concrete. 7th edition, McCormac, J.C.


and
nd N
Nelson,
l n JJ.K.,
K 2006.
2006

Reinforced Concrete Design. By Dr. Sameer Shihada.


Reinforced Concrete Design

Additional references (internationally recognized books in


reinforced concrete design):

Reinforced Concrete, A fundamental Approach. Edward Nawy.

Design of Concrete Structure. Nilson A. et al.

Reinforced Concrete Design.


Design Kenneth Leet.
Leet

Reinforced Concrete: Mechanics and Design. James K. Wight,


and James G G. MacGregor
MacGregor.

Reinforced Concrete Design

The art of design

Design
g is an analysis
y of trial sections. The strength
g
of each trial section is compared with the expected
load effect.

The load effect on a section is determined using


g
structural analysis and mechanics of materials.

The strength of a reinforced concrete section is


determined usingg the concepts
p taught
g in this class.


Reinforced Concrete Design


Reinforced Concrete Design

Course outline
Week Topic
Introduction:
Syllabus and course policies.
-Syllabus policies
-Introduction to reinforced concrete.
1
-Load types,
yp load p paths and tributaryy areas.
-Design philosophies and design codes.
Analysis and design of beams for bending:
-Analysis of beams in bending at service loads.
-Strength analysis of beams according to ACI Code.
2 3,4
2, 34 -Design of singly reinforced rectangular beams.
beams
-Design of T and L beams.
-Design of doubly reinforced beams.
4 Design of beams for shear.

5 Midterm
Midterm.

Reinforced Concrete Design

Course outline
Week Topic
Design of slabs: One way solid slabs One way
6
ribbed slabs.
7 Design of short concentric columns.
columns

7,8 Bond, development length, splicing and bar cutoff.

8,9 Design of isolated footings.

9 Staircase design.
10 Final


Reinforced Concrete Design

Grading

Course work: 20%


-Homework 4%
-Attendance 4%
-Project 12% .
Mid-term
t exam 20%
Final exam 60%

Reinforced Concrete Design

Exam Policy

Mid-term exam:
Only one A4 cheat-sheet is allowed.
Necessary figures and tables will be provided with the exam forms.

Final exam:
Open book.


Reinforced Concrete Design

Homework Policy

Show all your assumptions and work details. Prepare neat


sketches showing the reinforcement and dimensions.
Markingg will consider pprimarilyy neatness of presentation,
p ,
completeness and accuracy of results.

You may get the HW points if you copy the solution from
other students. However, you will have lost your chance in
practicing the concepts through doing the HW. This will lead
you to loosing points in the exams, which you could have
gained if you did your HWs on your own.

No late HWs will be accepted. Homework solutions will be



posted on upinar immediately after the submission deadline.
Reinforced Concrete Design

Policy towards cell


cell-phone
phone use


Reinforced Concrete Design

Policy towards discipline during class

Zero tolerance will be practiced.


practiced

No talking with other students is allowed.


allowed

Raise your hand before answering or asking questions


questions.

Leaving during class is not allowed (especially for


answering the cell-phone) unless a previous permission is
g
granted.
ed.

Violation of discipline
p rules mayy have you
y dismissed from
class and jeopardize your participation points.
Reinforced Concrete Design

Policy towards missed classes

Any collectively missed class MUST be made up.


up

A collectivelyy missed class will be made up


p either on a
Thursday or during the discussion lecture.

An absence from a lecture will loose you attendance points,


and the lecture will not be repeated for you. You are on your
own. You may use the h llecture videos.
id

No late students will be allowed in class.


class

Anything mentioned in class is binding.


binding No excuse for not
being there or not paying attention.
Reinforced Concrete Design

Units used in class

In all equations,
equations the input and output units are as follows:

Distance (L,b,d,h
L b d h): mm
Area (Ac,Ag,As): mm2
Volume (V): mm3
Force (P,V,N): N
Moment (M): N.mm
N mm
Stress (fy, fc): N/mm2 = MPa = 106 N/m2
Pressure (qs): N/mm2
Distributed load per unit length (wu): N/mm
Distributed load per unit area (qu): N/mm2
Weight per unit volume (): N/mm3
Reinforced Concrete Design

Units used in class

However these quantities may be presented as


However,

Distance (L,b,d,h
L b d h): cm , m
Area (Ac,Ag,As): cm2, m2
Volume (V): cm3, m3
Force (P,V,N): kN
Moment (M): kN.m
kN m
Pressure (qs): kN/m2
Distributed load per unit length (wu): kN/m
Distributed load per unit area (qu): kN/m2
Weight per unit volume (): kN/m3

Reinforced Concrete Design

Unit conversions
1 m = 102 cm = 103 mm
1 m2 = 104 cm2 = 106 mm2
1 m3 = 106 cm3 = 109 mm3
1 kN = 103 N
kN m = 106 N.mm
1 kN.m N mm
1 kN/m2 = 10-3 N/mm2
1 kN/m3 = 10-66 N/mm3

You MUST specify the unit of each result you obtain


Reinforced Concrete Design

ACI Equations
The equations taken from the ACI code will be indicated throughout the
slides by their section or equation number in the code provided in
shading.

Examples:
4 00 f c
Ec = 4700 ACI 8.5.1
851

f r = 0.62 f c ACI E
Eq. 9-10
9 10

Some of the original equations may have included the symbol = 1.0
for normal weight concrete and omitted in slides.


Reinforced Concrete Design

Advices for excelling in this course:

Keep up with the teacher and pay attention in class.


class

Study the lectures up to date.


date

Re-do
Re do the lecture examples
examples.

Look at additional resources.

DO YOUR HOMEWORK!!!!!
Check your solution with the HW solution uploaded to upinar.
upinar

Reinforced Concrete Design

ENJOY THE COURSE!!


Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 1
Introduction to reinforced concrete
Contents

1. Concrete-producing materials

2. Mechanical properties of concrete

3. Steel reinforcement

2
Part 1:
Concrete-Producing
Materials

3
Advantages of reinforced concrete
as a structural material
1. It has considerable compressive strength.

2. It has great resistance to the actions of fire and water.

3. Reinforced concrete structures are very rigid.

4. It is a low maintenance material.

5. It has very long service life.

4
Advantages of reinforced concrete
as a structural material
6. It is usually the only economical material for footings,
basement walls, etc.

7. It can be cast into many shapes.

8. It can be made from inexpensive local materials.

9. A lower grade of skilled labor is required for erecting.

5
Disadvantages of reinforced
concrete as a structural material
1. It has a very low tensile strength.
2. Forms are required to hold the concrete in place until it
hardens.
3. Concrete members are very large and heavy because of the
low strength per unit weight of concrete.
4. Properties of concrete vary due to variations in
proportioning and mixing.

6
Compatibility of concrete and steel
1. Concrete is strong in compression, and steel is strong in
tension.
2. The two materials bond very well together.
3. Concrete protects the steel from corrosive environments
and high temperatures in fire.
4. The coefficients of thermal expansion for the two
materials are quite close.

7
Concrete
Concrete is a mixture of cement, fine and coarse
aggregates, and water. This mixture creates a formable
paste that hardens into a rocklike mass.

8
Concrete Producing Materials

Portland Cement
Aggregates
Water
Admixtures

9
Portland Cement
The most common type of hydraulic cement used in the
manufacture of concrete is known as Portland cement, which is
available in various types.

Although there are several types of ordinary Portland cements,


most concrete for buildings is made from Type I ordinary
cement.

Concrete made with normal Portland cement require about two


weeks to achieve a sufficient strength to permit the removal of
forms and the application of moderate loads.

10
Types of Cement
Type I: General Purpose

Type II: Lower heat of hydration than


Type I

Type III: High Early Strength


Quicker strength
Higher heat of hydration

11
Types of Cement
Type IV: Low Heat of Hydration
Slowly dissipates heat less distortion (used for
large structures).

Type V: Sulfate Resisting


For footings, basements, sewers, etc. exposed to
soils with sulfates.

If the desired type of cement is not available, different


admixtures may be used to modify the properties of Type 1
cement and produce the desired effect.
12
Aggregates
Aggregates are particles that form about three-fourths of the
volume of finished concrete. According to their particle size,
aggregates are classified as fine or coarse.

Coarse Aggregates
Coarse aggregates consist of gravel or crushed rock particles
not less than 5 mm in size.

Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates consist of sand or pulverized rock particles
usually less than 5 mm in size.
13
Water
Mixing water should be clean and free of organic materials that
react with the cement or the reinforcing bars.

The quantity of water relative to that of the cement, called


water-cement ratio, is the most important item in determining
concrete strength.

An increase in this ratio leads to a reduction in the compressive


strength of concrete.

It is important that concrete has adequate workability to assure


its consolidation in the forms without excessive voids.

14
Admixtures

Applications:
Improve workability (superplasticizers)
Accelerate or retard setting and hardening
Aid in curing
Improve durability

15
Concrete Mixing
In the design of concrete mixes, three principal
requirements for concrete are of importance:

Quality
Workability
Economy

16
Part 2:
Mechanical Properties of
Concrete

17
Mechanical Concrete Properties
'
f
Compressive Strength, c

Normally, 28-day strength is used as the design


strength.

18
Mechanical Concrete Properties
'
f
Compressive Strength, c

It is determined through testing standard cylinders 15


cm in diameter and 30 cm in height in uniaxial
compression at 28 days (ASTM C470).

Test cubes 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm are also tested in


uniaxial compression at 28 days (BS 1881).

19
Mechanical Concrete Properties
'
f
Compressive Strength, c

The ACI Code is based on the concrete compressive


strength as measured by a standard test cylinder.

f c Cylinder 0.8f c Cube

For ordinary applications, concrete compressive


strengths from 20 MPa to 30 MPa are usually used.

20
Mechanical Concrete Properties
Compressive-Strength Test

21
Mechanical Concrete Properties
Modulus of Elasticity, Ec
Corresponds to the secant modulus at 0.45 c
'
f
For normal-weight concrete:
Ec 4700 f c ACI 8.5.1

22 0.002 0.003
Mechanical Concrete Properties
Tensile Strength
Tensile strength ~ 8% to 15% of f c'

Tensile strength of concrete is quite difficult to measure


with direct axial tension loads because of problems of
gripping the specimen and due to the secondary stresses
developing at the ends of the specimens.

Instead, two indirect tests are used to measure the tensile


strength of concrete. These are given in the next two slides.

23
Mechanical Concrete Properties
Tensile Strength
Modulus of Rupture, fr

f r 0.62 f c ACI Eq. 9-10

Modulus of Rupture Test (or flexural test):

P
unreinforced
concrete beam

fr
Mc 6M
fr 2
24 I bh
Mechanical Concrete Properties
Tensile Strength
Splitting Tensile Strength, fct

f ct 0.56 f c ACI R8.6.1

Split Cylinder Test


Concrete Cylinder P

Poissons
Effect

2P
f ct
Ld
25
Creep
Creep is defined as the long-term deformation caused
by the application of loads for long periods of time,
usually years.

Creep strain occurs due to sustaining the same load


over time.

26
Creep
The total deformation is divided into two parts; the first
is called elastic deformation occurring right after the
application of loads, and the second which is time
dependent, is called creep

27
Shrinkage
Shrinkage of concrete is defined as the reduction in
volume of concrete due to loss of moisture. As a
result, shrinkage cracks develop.
Shrinkage continues for many years, but under ordinary
conditions about 90% of it occurs during the first
year.

28
Part 3:
Steel Reinforcement

29
Steel Reinforcement
Tensile tests

30
Steel Reinforcement
Tensile tests

31
Steel Reinforcement
Stress-strain diagrams
fs = Es fy

Yield point

elastic plastic

All steel grades have same modulus of elasticity Es= 2x105 MPa
= 200 GPa 32
Steel Reinforcement
Bar sizes, f, #
Bars are available in nominal diameters ranging from 5mm
to 50mm, and may be plain or deformed. When bars have
smooth surfaces, they are called plain, and when they have
projections on their surfaces, they are called deformed.

Steel grades, fy
ksi MPa
40 276
60 414
80 552
33
Steel Reinforcement
Bars are deformed to increase bonding with concrete

34
Steel Reinforcement
Marks for ASTM Standard bars

35
Steel Reinforcement
Bar sizes according to ASTM Standards
U.S. customary units

36
Steel Reinforcement
Bar sizes according to ASTM Standards
SI Units

37
Steel Reinforcement
Bar sizes according to European Standard (EN 10080)
W Number of bars
mm N/m 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6 2.2 28 57 85 113 141 170 198 226 254 283
8 3.9 50 101 151 201 251 302 352 402 452 503
10 6.2 79 157 236 314 393 471 550 628 707 785
12 8.9 113 226 339 452 565 679 792 905 1018 1131
14 12.1 154 308 462 616 770 924 1078 1232 1385 1539
16 15.8 201 402 603 804 1005 1206 1407 1608 1810 2011 Areas
18 19.9 254 509 763 1018 1272 1527 1781 2036 2290 2545
20 24.7 314 628 942 1257 1571 1885 2199 2513 2827 3142
are in
22 29.8 380 760 1140 1521 1901 2281 2661 3041 3421 3801 mm2
24 35.5 452 905 1357 1810 2262 2714 3167 3619 4072 4524
25 38.5 491 982 1473 1963 2454 2945 3436 3927 4418 4909
26 41.7 531 1062 1593 2124 2655 3186 3717 4247 4778 5309
28 45.4 616 1232 1847 2463 3079 3695 4310 4926 5542 6158
30 55.4 707 1414 2121 2827 3534 4241 4948 5655 6362 7069
32 63.1 804 1608 2413 3217 4021 4825 5630 6434 7238 8042 38
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 2
Load types, load paths and tributary areas
Load paths
Structural systems transfer gravity loads from the floors
and roof to the ground through load paths that need to
be clearly identified in the design process.

Identifying the correct path is important for determining


the load carried by each structural member.

The tributary area concept is used to determine the load


that each structural component is subjected to.
2
Metal Deck/Slab System
Supports Floor Loads Above

Girders Support Joists

Joists Support Floor Deck

Columns Support Girders


The area tributary to a
joist equals the length of
the joist times the sum of
half the distance to each
adjacent joist.
The area tributary to a girder
equals the length of the
girder times the sum of half
the distance to each adjacent
girder.
Load paths loads on structural members

Load is distributed over the area of the floor. This distributed load
has units of (force/area), e.g. kN/m2.
w {kN/m}
q {kN/m2} Loads
P {kN}
Beam Beam Column

Slab Beam

Column Beam Beam

Footing
Slab

Beam Beam
Soil

6
Load paths loads on (one-way) beams

In order to design a beam, the tributary load from the floor carried
by the beam and distributed over its span is determined. This load
has units of (force/distance), e.g. kN/m.

Notes:
-In some cases, there may be concentrated loads carried by the beams as well.
-All spans of the beam must be considered together (as a continuous beam) for design.

w {kN/m}

7
Load paths loads on (one-way) beams
This tributary load is determined by multiplying q by the tributary
width for the beam.

w {kN/m} = q {kN/m2} (S1+S2)/2 {m}

8 S1 S2
Load paths loads on (two-way) beams
The tributary areas for a beam in a two way system are areas which
are bounded by 45-degree lines drawn from the corners of the
panels and the centerlines of the adjacent panels parallel to the long
sides.
A panel is part of the slab formed by column centerlines.

9
Load paths loads on (two-way) beams
An edge beam is bounded
by panels from one side.

An interior beam is
bounded by panels from
two sides.

qD

For edge beams:


D=S/2
qD
For interior beams:
D=S
10
Load paths loads on (two-way) beams

11
Load paths loads on (two-way) beams

12
Load paths loads on columns
The tributary load for the column is concentrated. It has units of
(force) e.g., kN. It is determined by multiplying q by the tributary
area for the column.

P {kN} = q {kN/m2} (x y){m2}

13
Load paths loads on structural members
Example
Determine the loads acting on beams B1 and B2 and columns C1
and C2. Distributed load over the slab is q = 10 kN/m2. This is a 5
story structure.
B1
4m
B2
5m

4.5 m C2
C1

6m 5.5 m
14
Load paths loads on structural members
Example
B1:
w = 10 (4)/2 = 20 kN/m

B1
4m
B2
5m

4.5 m C2
C1

6m 5.5 m
15
Load paths loads on structural members
Example
B2:
w = 10 (4+5)/2 = 45 kN/m

B1
4m
B2
5m

4.5 m C2
C1

6m 5.5 m
16
Load paths loads on structural members
Example
B1:
w = 20 kN/m

B2:
w = 45 kN/m

17
Load paths loads on structural members
Example
C1:
P = 10 (4.5/2 6/2) 5 = 337.5 kN
B1
4m
B2
5m

4.5 m C2
C1

6m 5.5 m
18
Load paths loads on structural members
Example
C2:
P = 10 [(4.5+5)/2 (6+5.5)/2] 5 = 1366 kN
B1
4m
B2
5m

4.5 m C2
C1

6m 5.5 m
19
Load types

Classification by direction

1- Gravity loads

2- Lateral loads

20
Load types

Classification by source and activity

1- Dead loads

2- Live loads

3- Environmental loads
21
Loads on Structures
All structural elements must be designed for all loads anticipated to
act during the life span of such elements. These loads should not
cause the structural elements to fail or deflect excessively under
working conditions.

Dead load (D.L)


Weight of all permanent construction
Constant magnitude and fixed location
Examples: * Weight of the Structure
(Walls, Floors, Roofs, Ceilings, Stairways, Partitions)
* Fixed Service Equipment

22
Minimum live Load values on slabs

Live Loads (L.L) Type of Use Uniform Live Load


kN/m2
Residential 2
The live load is a moving or Residential balconies 3
movable type of load such Computer use 5
Offices 2
as occupants, furniture, etc. Warehouses
Live loads used in designing Light storage 6
buildings are usually Heavy Storage 12
Schools
specified by local building
Classrooms 2
codes. Live loads depend on Libraries
the intended use of the Rooms 3
structure and the number of Stack rooms 6
occupants at a particular Hospitals 2
Assembly Halls
time. Fixed seating 2.5
Movable seating 5
See IBC 2009 TABLE Garages (cars) 2.5
1607.1 for more live loads. Stores
http://publicecodes.citation. Retail 4

com/icod/ibc/2009/index.ht Wholesale 5
Exit facilities 5
m?bu=IC-P-2009- Manufacturing
000001&bu2=IC-P-2009- Light 4
23
000019 Heavy 6
Environmental loads
Wind load (W.L)
The wind load is a lateral load produced by wind pressure and
gusts. It is a type of dynamic load that is considered static to
simplify analysis. The magnitude of this force depends on the
shape of the building, its height, the velocity of the wind and the
type of terrain in which the building exists.
Earthquake load (E.L) or seismic load
The earthquake load is a lateral load caused by ground motions
resulting from earthquakes. The magnitude of such a load depends
on the mass of the structure and the acceleration caused by the
earthquake.

24
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 3
Design philosophies and design codes
Design Versus Analysis
Design involves the determination of the type of structural system to
be used, the cross sectional dimensions, and the required
reinforcement. The designed structure should be able to resist all
forces expected to act during the life span of the structure safely and
without excessive deformation or cracking.

Analysis involves the determination of the capacity of a section of


known dimensions, material properties and steel reinforcement, if
any to external forces and moments.

2
Structural Design Requirements:
The design of a structure must satisfy three basic requirements:
1)Strength to resist safely the stresses induced by the loads in the
various structural members.
2)Serviceability to ensure satisfactory performance under service
load conditions, which implies providing adequate stiffness to
contain deflections, crack widths and vibrations within acceptable
limits.
3)Stability to prevent overturning, sliding or buckling of the
structure, or part of it under the action of loads.
There are two other considerations that a sensible designer should
keep in mind: Economy and aesthetics.
3
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:

Standards and Specifications: Detailed statement of


procedures for design (i.e., AISC Structural Steel Spec;
ACI 318 Standards, ANSI/ASCE7-05). Not legally
binding. Think of as Recommended Practice.

Code: Systematically arranged and comprehensive


collection of laws and regulations

4
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
Model Codes: Consensus documents that can be adopted
by government agencies as legal documents.

3 Model Codes in the U.S.


1. Uniform Building Code (UBC): published by International
Conference of Building Officials (ICBO).

2. BOCA National Building Code (NBC): published by Building


Officials and Code Administrators International (BOCA).

3. Standard Building Code (SBC): published by Southern Building


Code Congress International (SBCCI).

5
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
3 Model Codes in the U.S.

6
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
International Building Code (IBC): published by International
Code Council (2000 ,1st edition). To replace the 3 model codes for
national and international use.

Building Code: covers all aspects related to structural safety -


loads, structural design using various kinds of materials (e.g., structural
steel, reinforced concrete, timber), architectural details, fire protection,
plumbing, HVAC. Is a legal document. Purpose of building codes: to
establish minimum acceptable requirements considered necessary for
preserving public health, safety, and welfare in the built environment.

7
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:

Summary:

The standards that will be used extensively throughout


this course is Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete and commentary, known as the ACI 318M-08 code.

The building code that will be used for this course is


the IBC 2009, in conjunction with the ANSI/ASCE7-02.

8
Design Methods (Philosophies)
Two methods of design have long prevalent.
Working Stress Method focuses on conditions at service
loads.
Strength Design Method focusing on conditions at loads
greater than the service loads when failure may be imminent.
The Strength Design Method is deemed conceptually more realistic
to establish structural safety.
The Working-Stress Design Method
This method is based on the condition that the stresses caused by
service loads without load factors are not to exceed the allowable
stresses which are taken as a fraction of the ultimate stresses of the
materials, fc for concrete and fy for steel. 9
The Ultimate Strength Design Method
At the present time, the ultimate-strength design method is the
method adopted by most prestigious design codes.
In this method, elements are designed so that the internal forces
produced by factored loads do not exceed the corresponding
reduced strength capacities.

reduced strength provided factored loads

The factored loads are obtained by multiplying the working loads


(service loads) by factors usually greater than unity.
10
Safety Provisions (the strength requirement)
Safety is required to insure that the structure can sustain all expected
loads during its construction stage and its life span with an
appropriate factor of safety.
There are three main reasons why some sort of safety factor are
necessary in structural design
Variability in resistance. *Variability of fc and fy, *assumptions are made
during design and *differences between the as-built dimensions and those found in
structural drawings.
Variability in loading. Real loads may differ from assumed design loads,
or distributed differently.
Consequences of failure. *Potential loss of life, *cost of clearing the
debris and replacement of the structure and its contents and *cost to society.

11
Safety Provisions (the strength requirement)
The strength design method, involves a two-way safety measure. The
first of which involves using load factors, usually greater than unity
to increase the service loads. The second safety measure specified by
the ACI Code involves a strength reduction factor multiplied by the
nominal strength to obtain design strength. The magnitude of such a
reduction factor is usually smaller than unity

Design strength Factored loads

R i Li
i
ACI 9.3 ACI 9.2
12
Load factors
ACI 9.2.1
Dead only
U = 1.4D
Dead and Live Loads
U = 1.2D+1.6L
Dead, Live, and Wind Loads
U=1.2D+1.0L+1.6W
Dead and Wind Loads
U=1.2D+0.8W or U=0.9D+1.6W
Dead, Live and Earthquake Loads
U=1.2D+1.0L+1.0E
Dead and Earthquake Loads
U=0.9D+1.0E

13
Load factors
ACI 9.2

Symbols

14
Strength Reduction Factors ACI 9.3
According to ACI, strength reduction factors are given as follows:
a- For tension-controlled sections = 0.90
b- For compression-controlled sections,
Members with spiral reinforcement = 0.75
Other reinforced members = 0.65
c- For shear and torsion = 0.75

Tension-controlled section compression-controlled section

15
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 4
Analysis of beams in bending at service loads
Introduction
A beam is a structural member used to support the internal moments
and shears and in some cases torsion.

2
Basic Assumptions in Beam Theory
Plane sections remain plane after bending. This means that in an initially straight
beam, strain varies linearly over the depth of the section after bending.

Its cross section


Unloaded beam

Beam after bending 3


Strain distribution
Basic Assumptions in Beam Theory
The strain in the reinforcement is equal to the strain in the concrete at the same
level, i.e. s = c at same level.

Concrete is assumed to fail in compression, when c = 0.003.


Tensile strength of concrete is neglected in flexural strength.

Perfect bond is assumed between concrete and steel.

4
Stages of flexural behavior

w {kN/m}

If load w varies from zero to until the beam fails, the beam will
go through three stages of behavior:
1. Uncracked concrete stage
2. Concrete cracked Elastic Stress stage
3. Beam failure Ultimate Strength stage

5
Stage I: Uncracked concrete stage
At small loads, when the tensile stresses are less than the
modulus of rupture, the beam behaves like a solid rectangular
beam made completely of concrete.

6
Stage II: Concrete cracked Elastic Stress range
Once the tensile stresses reach the modulus of rupture, the
section cracks. The bending moment at which this
transformation takes place is called the cracking moment Mcr.

7
Stage III: Beam failure Ultimate Strength stage
As the stresses in the concrete exceed the linear limit (0.45
fc), the concrete stress distribution over the depth of the beam
varies non-linearly.

8
0.002 0.003
Stages of flexural behavior
w {kN/m}

9
Flexural properties to be determined:
1- Cracking moment.

2- Elastic stresses due to a given moment.

3- Moments at given (allowable) elastic stresses.

4- Ultimate strength moment (next lecture).

Note: In calculating stresses and moments (Parts 1 and 2),


you need to always check the maximum tensile stress with the
modulus of rupture to determine if cracked or uncracked
section analysis is appropriate.
10
Cracking moment Mcr
When the section is still uncracked, the contribution of the
steel to the strength is negligible because it is a very small
percentage of the gross area of the concrete.

Therefore, the cracking moment can be calculated using the


uncracked section properties.

11
Cracking moment Mcr
Example 1:
Calculate the cracking moment
for the section shown
750 mm
1500 mm2
1 3
Ig bh
12
1
I g (350)(750) 3 1.2305 1010 mm4
12 f c 30MPa
f r 0.62 f c 0.62 30 3.4MPa
fr I g 3.4 1.2305 1010
M cr 1.1143 108 N .mm 111.43kN.m
yt (750 / 2)
12
Elastic stresses Cracked section
After cracking, the steel bars carry the entire
tensile load below the neutral surface. The
upper part of the concrete beam carries the
compressive load.
In the transformed section, the cross sectional area
of the steel, As, is replaced by the equivalent area
nAs where
n = the modular ratio= Es/Ec
To determine the location of the neutral axis,
bx x n As d x 0
2
1 b x2 n As x n As d 0
2
The height of the concrete compression block is x.
The normal stress in the concrete and steel
My My
fc fs n
It It 13
Elastic stresses Cracked section
Example 2:
f c 30MPa
Calculate the bending stresses for the
section shown, M= 180 kN.m

Note: M > Mcr = 111 kN.m from previous 750 mm


example. Thus, section is cracked. 1500 mm2

E c 4700 f c 4700 30 25743MPa


E s 2 105
n 7.77
E c 25743
x
( 350 ) x ( ) 1500( 7.77 )( 700 x )
2
x 185.16mm
14
Elastic stresses Cracked section
Example 2:
1 f c 30MPa
I t bx 3 nA s ( d x ) 2
3
1
I t ( 350 )( 185.16 ) 3 7.77 1500( 700 185.16 ) 2
3
I t 3.8295 109 mm 4 750 mm
1500 mm2

My 180 106 185.16


fc 8.7 MPa
It 3.8295 10 9

f c 8.7 MPa 0.45f c 0.45( 30 ) 13.5MPa OK


My 180 106 ( 700 185.16 )
fs n 7.77 188MPa
It 3.8295 109

15
Elastic stresses Cracked section
Example 3:
Calculate the allowable moment for the f c 30MPa
section shown, f s(allowable)= 180 MPa,
f c(allowable)= 12 MPa
f s It 180 3.8295 109 750 mm
Ms 1500 mm2
ny ( 7.77 )( 700 185.16 )
M s 1.7234 108 N .mm 172.34kN .m

f c I t 12 3.8295 109
Mc
y 185.16
M c 2.4819 108 N .mm 248.19kN .m

M allowable 172.34kN .m
16
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 5
Strength analysis of beams according to ACI Code
Strength requirement for flexure in beams

Md Mu
M d Design moment strength (also known as moment resistance)
M u Internal ultimate moment

M u 1.2M D 1.6M L

Md Mn
M n Theoretical or nominal resisting moment.
2
The equivalent stress (Whitney) block

Actual Approximate
Strain
Stress Distribution Stress Distribution
Distribution

3
The equivalent stress (Whitney) block
The shape of the
stress block is not
important.
However, the
equivalent block must
provide the same
resultant (volume)
acting at the same
location (centroid).
The Whitney block
has average stress
0.85fc and depth
a=b1c. ACI 10.2.7.1
4
The equivalent stress (Whitney) block

The equivalent rectangular concrete stress distribution has what


is known as the b1 coefficient. It relates the actual NA depth to
the depth of the compression block by a=b1c.
b1 0.85 for f c ' 28 MPa ACI 10.2.7.1
0.05( f c '28)
b1 0.85 0.65 for f c ' 28 MPa 5
7
Derivation of beam expressions

Fx=0 C=T

6
Derivation of beam expressions

7
Derivation of beam expressions
Design aids can also be used:

Assume
Md = Mu = Mn

= Rn fMn=fRnbd2
Rn is given in tables and figures of design aids. 8
Design Aids

9
Design Aids

10
Tension strain in flexural members

fy
y
Es
t y ? Strain Distribution
11
Types of flexural failure:

Flexural failure may occur in three different ways

[1] Balanced Failure


(balanced reinforcement)

[2] Compression Failure


(over-reinforced beam)

[3] Tension Failure -


(under-reinforced beam)

12
Types of flexural failure:
[1] Balanced Failure
The concrete crushes and the steel yields simultaneously.
cu=0.003

cb

d
h

t = y
b

Such a beam has a balanced reinforcement, its failure mode is


brittle, thus sudden, and is not allowed by the ACI Strength Design
Method.
13
Types of flexural failure:
[2] Compression Failure
The concrete will crush before the steel yields.
cu=0.003
cu=0.003

c>c
c>cb b
d
h d
h

b t <t y< y
b

Such a beam is called over-reinforced beam, and its failure mode is


brittle, thus sudden, and is not allowed by the ACI Strength
Design Method.
14
Types of flexural failure:
[3] Tension Failure
The reinforcement yields before the concrete crushes.
cu=0.003
cu=0.003

c<cb
c<cb
d
h d
h

b
b

Such a beam is called under-reinforced beam, and its failure mode is


ductile, thus giving a sufficient amount of warning before
collapse, and is required by the ACI Strength Design Method
15
Types of sections according to the ACI Code
[1] Tension-controlled section ACI 10.3.4
The tensile strain in the tension steel is equal to or greater than 0.005
when the concrete in compression reaches its crushing strain of
0.003. This is a ductile section.

[2] Compression-controlled section


The tensile strain in the tension steel is equal to or less than y (y =
fy/Es=0.002 for fy =420 MPa) when the concrete in compression
reaches its crushing strain of 0.003. This is a brittle section.

[3] Transition section


The tensile strain in the tension steel is between 0.005 and y (y
=fy/Es=0.002 for fy =420 MPa) when the concrete in compression
reaches its crushing strain of 0.003.

16
Allowed strains for sections in bending ACI 10.3.5

17
Strength reduction factor
cu=0.003

y
y
Es
at
c
b1

t
d c
y
c
c

18
ACI R9.3.2.2
Balanced steel

0.003
cb d
0.003 f y E S

Es 2105 MPa

600
cb d
600 f y

=b1c

0.85 b1 f c ' 600


b
600 f


fy 19
y
Maximum allowed steel

0.003
cmax d
0.003 0.005
3
cmax d
8

3
=b1c b1cmax db1
8
3 0.85 b1 f c '
max
8 fy

20
Minimum steel allowed

ACI 10.5.1
0.25 f c
bw d
fy
A s,min max
1.4 b d
f
w
y

bw = width of section
d = effective depth of section

21
Design Aids

22
Summary:
To calculate the moment capacity of a section:
0.25 f c
bw d
fy
1-) As,min max
1.4 b d
f
w
y

if As,min > As,sup reject section

As f y df y
2-) a or a
0.85f c b 0.85f c

b1 0.85 for f c ' 28 MPa


3-)
0.05( f c '28)
b1 0.85 0.65 for f c ' 28 MPa
7
a
4-) c b 23
1
Summary:
d c
5-) t c 0.003
if t> 0.005: tension controlled f = 0.9
if 0.004 < t <0.005: in transition zone f =0.65+( t -0.002) (250/3)
if t < 0.004: compression controlled reject section

a
6-) M d M n As f y d
2
or fMn=fRnbd2 (find Rn from table)

7-) M u M n if not reject section


24
Example

A singly reinforced concrete beam has the cross-section shown in the figure
below. Calculate the design moment strength. Can the section carry an
Mu = 350 kN.m?
f y 414MPa

a) f c 20.7MPa, b) f c 34.5MPa, c) f c 62.1M Pa

25
Example
Solution
a) f c 20.7MPa
0.25 f c 0.25 20.7
bw d (254)(457)=319 mm 2
fy 414
1 A s,min max
1.4
bw d
1.4
(254)(457)=393 mm 2
fy 414

=393 mm 2 < A s,sup =2580 mm 2 OK

As f y 2580 414
2 a 239mm
0.85f c b 0.85 20.7 254

3 b1 0.85 for f c ' 20.7MPa 28 MPa


26
Example
Solution
a) f c 20.7MPa

a 239
4 c 281mm
b1 0.85
d c 457 281
5 t 0.003 0.003 0.00186
c 281
t 0.004 Section is compression controlled
==> Does not satisfy ACI requirements
==> Reject section

27
Example
Solution
b) f c 34.5MPa
0.25 f c 0.25 34.5
bw d (254)(457)=412 mm 2
fy 414
1 A s,min max
1.4
bw d
1.4
(254)(457)=393 mm 2
fy 414

=412 mm 2 < A s,sup =2580 mm 2 OK

As f y 2580 414
2 a 143.4mm
0.85f c b 0.85 34.5 254
0.05( f c ' 28 )
3 b1 0.85 0.65 for f c ' 34.5MPa 28 MPa
7
0.05( 34.5 28 )
b1 0.85 0.804 0.65 28
7
Example
Solution
b) f c 34.5MPa

a 143.4
4 c 178.5mm
b1 0.804

d c 457 178.5
5 t 0.003 0.003 0.00468
c 178.5
0.004 t 0.005 Section is in transision zone

f =0.65+( t -0.002) (250/3) =0.65+(0.00468-0.002) (250/3)=0.874

29
Example
Solution
b) f c 34.5MPa

a
6 M d M n A s f y d
2
143.4
0.874 2850 414 457 360 10 6
N .mm
2
360 kN .m
7 M u 350kN .m M n 360kN .m
Section is adequate

30
Example
Solution
c) f c 62.1MPa

0.25 f c 0.25 62.1


bw d (254)(457)=552 mm 2

fy 414
1 A s,min max
1.4
bw d
1.4
(254)(457)=393 mm 2
fy 414

=552 mm 2 < A s,sup =2580 mm 2 OK

As f y 2580 414
2 a 80mm
0.85f c b 0.85 62.1 254

31
Example
Solution
c) f c 62.1MPa

0.05( f c ' 28 )
3 b1 0.85 0.65 for f c ' 62.1MPa 28 MPa
7
0.05( 62.1 28 )
b1 0.85 0.61 0.65
7
b1 0.65

a 80
4 c 123mm
b1 0.65

d c 457 123
5 t 0.003 0.003 0.0081
c 123
t 0.005 Section is tension controlled
==> Satisfes ACI requirements ==> f =0.9 32
Example
Solution
c) f c 62.1MPa

a
6 M d M n A s f y d
2
80
0.9 2850 414 457 520 106 N .mm
2
520kN .m
7 M u 350kN .m M n 520kN .m
Section is adequate

33
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 6
Design of singly reinforced rectangular beams
Design of Beams For Flexure
The main two objectives of design is to satisfy the:
1) Strength and 2) Serviceability requirements

1) Strength
M d M n Mu
M d Design moment strength (also known as moment resistance)

M u Internal ultimate moment

Mn Theoretical or nominal resisting moment.

M u 1.2M D 1.6M L
2
Design of Beams For Flexure
Derivation of design expressions h d
As
Assume
Mn = Mu b
Beam cross section

Solve for r:

0.85 f c' 2M u
1 1 As = rbd
fy 0.85 f c' b d 2

3
Remember: 1 kN.m = 106 N.mm
Design of Beams For Flexure
Design aids can also be used:

0.85 f c' 2M u
1 1
fy 0.85 f c' b d 2

Calculate:

Then r is found from tables and figures of design aids.

4
Design Aids

5
Design of Beams For Flexure

2) Serviceability
The serviceability requirement ensures adequate performance
at service load without excessive deflection and cracking.

Two methods are given by the ACI for controlling deflections:


1) by calculating the deflection and comparing it with code
specified maximum values.
2) by using member thickness equal to the minimum values
provided in by the code as shown in the next slide.

6
Minimum Beam Thickness
ACI 9.5.2.2

hmin

l = span length measured center to center of support.

h d

h hmin As

b
7
Beam cross section
Detailing issues:
Concrete Cover
Concrete cover is necessary for protecting the reinforcement from
fire, corrosion, and other effects. Concrete cover is measured from
the concrete surface to the closest surface of steel reinforcement.

Side
cover

Bottom 8
ACI 7.7.1 cove
Detailing issues:
Spacing of Reinforcing Bars
The ACI Code specifies limits for bar spacing to permit concrete to
flow smoothly into spaces between bars without honeycombing.
According to the ACI code, S Smin must be satisfied, where:

bar diameter, d b
ACI 7.6.1
S min max 25 mm
4/3 maximum size of coarse aggregate

ACI 3.3.2
When two or more layers are used, bars in
the upper layers are placed directly above
the bars in the bottom layer with clear distance Clear
distance
between layers not less than 25 mm.
ACI 7.6.2 Clear spacing S 9
Estimation of applied moments Mu
Beams are designed for maximum moments along the spans in both
negative and positive directions.

Positive moment Negative moment

Tension at bottom Tension at top


Needs bottom reinforcement Needs top reinforcement

10
Estimation of applied moments Mu
The magnitude of each moment is found from structural analysis of the
beam. To find the moments in a continuous (indeterminate) beam, one
can use: (1) indeterminate structural analysis (2) structural analysis
software (3) ACI approximate method for the analysis.

Simply Supported Beams Continuous Beams


Determinate Indeterminate

+
+ +

11 Moment Diagram Moment Diagram


Estimation of applied moments Mu
Simply Supported Beams Continuous Beams

+
+ +

Moment Diagram Moment Diagram

Section at midspan Section over support

12
Estimation of applied moments Mu
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
ACI Code permits the use of the following approximate moments for
design of continuous beams, provided that:
There are two or more spans.
Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans
not greater than the shorter by more than 20 percent.
Loads are uniformly distributed.
Unfactored live load does not exceed three times the unfactored dead
load.
Members are of similar section dimensions along their lengths
(prismatic).

13
Estimation of applied moments Mu
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
More than two spans

14
Estimation of applied moments Mu
Approximate Structural Analysis ACI 8.3.3
Two spans

l n = length of clear
span measured
face-to-face of
supports.

For calculating
negative moments,
l n is taken as the
average of the
adjacent clear span
lengths.

15
Design procedures
Method 1: When b and h are unknown
1- Determine h (h>hmin from deflection control) and assume b.
Estimate beam weight and include it with dead load.
2- Calculate the factored load wu and bending moment Mu.
3- Assume that =0.9 and calculate the reinforcement ( and As).
4- Check solution:
(a) Check spacing between bars
(b) Check minimum steel requirement
(c) Check = 0.9 (tension controlled assumption)
(d) Check moment capacity (Md Mu ?)
5- Sketch the cross section and its reinforcement.

16
Design procedures
Method 2: When b and h are known
1- Calculate the factored load wu and bending moment Mu.
2- Assume that =0.9 and calculate the reinforcement ( and As).
3- Check solution:
(a) Check spacing between bars
(b) Check minimum steel requirement
(c) Check = 0.9 (tension controlled assumption)
(d) Check moment capacity (Md Mu ?)
4- Sketch the cross section and its reinforcement.

17
Example 1
Design a rectangular reinforced concrete beam having a 6 m simple span. A
service dead load of 25 kN/m (not including the beam weight) and a
service live load of 10 kN/m are to be supported.
Use fc =25 MPa and fy = 420 MPa. wd=25 kN/m & wl =10 kN/m

6m
Solution:-
b & d are unknown
1- Estimate beam dimensions and weight wu=50.5 kN/m
hmin = l /16 =6000/16 = 375 mm
Assume that h = 500mm and b = 300mm 6m
Beam wt. = 0.5x0.3x25 = 3.75 kN/m
2- Calculate wu and Mu
wu = 1.2 D+1.6 L =1.2(25+3.75)+1.6(10)
227.3 kN.m
=50.5 kN/m
Mu = wul2/8 = 50.5(6)2/8 =227.3 kN.m
18
Example 1
3- Assume that =0.9 and calculate and As
d = 500 40 8 (20/2) = 442 mm
(assuming one layer of 20mm reinforcement and 8mm stirrups)

0.85f c ' 2 Mu
1 1
fy 0.85f c ' b d 2

0.85(25) 2 227.3 106
1 1 0.0116
420 (0.9) 0.85(25) 300 (442) 2

As = b d = 0.0116(300)(442) =1536 mm2


Use 5 20 mm (As,sup=1571 mm2)

19
W Number of bars
mm N/m 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

6 2.2 28 57 85 113 141 170 198 226 254 283


8 3.9 50 101 151 201 251 302 352 402 452 503
10 6.2 79 157 236 314 393 471 550 628 707 785
12 8.9 113 226 339 452 565 679 792 905 1018 1131
14 12.1 154 308 462 616 770 924 1078 1232 1385 1539
16 15.8 201 402 603 804 1005 1206 1407 1608 1810 2011
18 19.9 254 509 763 1018 1272 1527 1781 2036 2290 2545
20 24.7 314 628 942 1257 1571 1885 2199 2513 2827 3142
22 29.8 380 760 1140 1521 1901 2281 2661 3041 3421 3801
24 35.5 452 905 1357 1810 2262 2714 3167 3619 4072 4524
25 38.5 491 982 1473 1963 2454 2945 3436 3927 4418 4909
26 41.7 531 1062 1593 2124 2655 3186 3717 4247 4778 5309
28 45.4 616 1232 1847 2463 3079 3695 4310 4926 5542 6158
30 55.4 707 1414 2121 2827 3534 4241 4948 5655 6362 7069
32 63.1 804 1608 2413 3217 4021 4825 5630 6434 7238 8042 20
Example 1
4- Check solution
520
a) Check spacing between bars
300 2 40 2 8 5 20
sc 26 mm d b 20 mm
5 1 300

25 mm OK
b) Check minimum steel requirement

0.25 f c 0.25 25
bw d (300)(442)=395 mm 2
fy 420
A s,min max
1.4
bw d
1.4
(300)(442)=442 mm 2
fy 420

=442 mm 2 < A s,sup =1571 mm 2 OK
21
Example 1
c) Check =0.9 (tension controlled assumption)
As f y 1571 420
a 103.5 mm
0.85f c ' b 0.85(25)300
a 103.5
1 0.85 for f c ' 25MPa 28 MPa c 121.7 mm
1 0.85
dc 442 121.7
t 0.003 0.003 0.0079 0.005
c 121.7
for t 0.005 0.90, the assumption is true the section is tension controlled

d) Check moment capacity


a
M d As f y d
2
103.5
0.90 1571 420 442 231.7 10 N.mm = 231.7 kN.m
6

2
M d 231.7 kN.m M u 227.3kN.m OK 22
Example 1

5- Sketch the cross section and its reinforcement

50 44.2

520

30

Beam cross section

23
Example 2
The rectangular beam B1 shown in the figure has b = 800mm and h =
316mm. Design the section of the beam over an interior support. Columns
have a cross section of 800x300 mm. The factored distributed load over the
slab is qu =14.4 kN/m2.
Use fc =25 MPa and fy = 420 MPa.
L1 = L2 = L3 = 6 m
S1 = S2= S3 = 4 m
B1

Solution:
b & d are known
1- Calculate wu and Mu
wu=4(14.4) = 57.6 kN/m
ln = 6 0.3=5.7 m
wu

24
Example 2

Moment diagram using the approximate ACI method:

Design for the maximum negative moment throughout the beam:

Mu = wu(ln )2/10 = 57.6 (5.7)2/10


Mu = 187.5 kN.m
25
Example 2
2- Assume =0.9 and calculate and As
d = 316 40 (16/2) 8 = 260 mm
(assuming one layer of 16 mm reinforcement and 8mm stirrups)

0.85f c ' 2 Mu
1 1
fy 0.85f c ' b d 2

0.85(25) 2 187.5 106
1 1 0.0102
420 (0.9) 0.85(25)800 (260) 2

As= b d = 0.0102(800)(260) = 2120 mm2

Use 11 16 mm (As,sup =11[(16)2/4]=2212 mm2)


26
Example 2

3- Check solution
a) Check spacing between bars
800 2 40 2 8 1116
sc 52.8 mm d b 16 mm
11 1
25 mm OK
b) Check minimum steel requirement
0.25 f c 0.25 25
bw d (800)(260)=620 mm 2
fy 420
A s,min max
1.4
bw d
1.4
(800)(260)=693 mm 2
fy 420

=693 mm 2 < A s,sup =2212 mm 2 OK
27
Example 2
c) Check =0.9
As f y 2212 420
a 55 mm
0.85f c ' b 0.85(25)800
a 55
1 0.85 for f c ' 25MPa 28 MPa c 64 mm
1 0.85
dc 260 64
t 0.003 0.003 0.0091 0.005
c 64
for t 0.005 0.90, the assumption is true the section is tension controlled

d) Check moment capacity


a
M d As f y d
2
55
0.9 2212 420 260 194.5 106 N.mm=194.5 kN.m
2
M d 194.5 kN.m M u 187.5 kN.m OK 28
Example 2

4- Sketch the cross section and its reinforcement

1116
316 260

800

29
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 7
Design of T and L beams
T Beams
Reinforced concrete systems may consist of slabs and dropped
beams that are placed monolithically. As a result, the two parts act
together to resist loads. The beams have extra widths at their tops
called flanges, which are parts of the slabs they are supporting, and
the part below the slab is called the web or stem.

Flange

web

2
Flange Width b

Parts of the slab near the webs are more highly stressed than areas
away from the web.

effective flange effective flange


width be width be

hf
d
stirrup

bw bw

L-beam T-beam

d: effective depth. hf : height of flange.


bw : width of web. be : effective width.
3
b: distance from center to center of adjacent web spacings
Effective Flange Width be

be is the width that is stressed uniformly to give the same compression


force actually developed in the compression zone of width b.

4
Effective Flange Width be
ACI Code Provisions for Estimating be ACI 8.12.2
According to the ACI code, the effective flange width of a T-beam,
be is not to exceed the smallest of:
1. One-fourth the span length of the beam, L/4.
2. Width of web plus 16 times slab thickness, bw +16 hf .
3. Center-to-center spacing of beams, b.
L /4

beff min b w +16hf
b

5
Effective Flange Width be
ACI Code Provisions for Estimating be ACI 8.12.3
According to the ACI code, the effective flange width of an L-beam,
be is not to exceed the smallest of:
1. bw + L/12.
2. bw + 6 hf .
3. bw + 0.5(clear distance to next web).
b w L /12

beff min b w 6hf
b 0.5b
w c

6
A T-beam does not have to look like a T

7
Various Possible Geometries of T-Beams

Single Tee

Double Tee

Box

8
Various Possible Geometries of T-Beams

Flange Flange

web web

Same as

9
T- versus Rectangular Sections
If the neutral axis falls within the slab depth: analyze the beam as a
rectangular beam, otherwise as a T-beam.

10
T- versus Rectangular Sections
When T-beams are subjected to negative moments, the flange is
located in the tension zone. Since concrete strength in tension is
usually neglected in ultimate strength design, the sections are treated
as rectangular sections of width bw.

When sections are subjected to positive moments, the flange is


located in the compression zone and the section is treated as a T-
section.

Tension
Compression zone zone

+ +
Section at midspan Section at support
11
Moment Diagram Positive moment Negative moment
Analysis of T-beams

Case 1: when a hf [Same as rectangular section]

T C
Asf y a
a M n A s f y d
0.85 f c b e 2

12
Analysis of T-beams

Case 2: when a > hf

C f 0.85 f c be bw hf
C w 0.85 f c bw a
T As f y
From equilibrium of forces
T C f Cw
A s f y 0.85 f c be bw hf
a
0.85 f c bw
a hf
M n C w d Cf d
2 2
13
Minimum Reinforcement, As,min
ACI 10.5.2

be

+ve Moment
hf
d
0.25 f c As
bw d
fy
A s,min max bw

1.4 b d
f
w be
y
As hf

-ve Moment
d

bw

14
Analysis procedure for calculating he ultimate strength of T-beams
To calculate the moment capacity of a T-section:
1- Calculate be
2- Check As,sup> As,min
3- Assume a hf and calculate a using:
Asf y
a
0.85 f c b e

If a hf a is correct

As f y 0.85 f c be bw hf
If a > hf a
0.85 f c bw

4- Calculate b1, c, and check t


5- Calculate Mn, and check M u M n
15
Example 1

Calculate Md for the T-Beam:


hf = 150 mm
d = 400 mm As = 5000mm2
fy = 420MPa fc= 25MPa
bw= 300mm L = 5.5m
b=2.15m
Determine be according to ACI requirements
L 5500
4 4 1370mm

be min 16hf b w 16 150 300=2700mm
b 2150 mm
16

Example 1

Check min. steel



0.25 f c ' 1.4
0.25 25
1.4

As,min max bw d ; bw d max 300 400 ; 300 400

fy fy
420
420

As,min 400 mm 2 As,sup 5000 mm 2 OK

Calculate a (assuming a<hf) and check the strain in the steel et

a
As f y

5000 420 71.9mm h 150mm OK
0.85f c b e 0.85 25 1370
f

a 71.9
c 85 mm
b1 0.85
d c 400 85
es 0.003 0.003 0.011 0.005 Tension controled
c 85
17
Example 1

Calculate Md
a
M d A s f y d
2
71.8
0.9 5000 420 400
2
688 106 N.mm 688 kN.m

18
Example 2

Determine the ACI design moment strength Md (Mn) of the T-beam


shown in the figure if fc =25 MPa and fy = 420 MPa.
90

10
Solution:- 10

h= 75
1- Check min. steel
25
d 750-40-10-32- 655.5mm 832
2
0.25 f c ' 1.4 30
A s,min max bw d ; bw d
f y fy
0.25 25 1.4
A s,min max 300 655.5 ; 300 655.5
420 420
A s,min 656 mm 2 A s,sup 6434 mm 2 OK
19
Example 2

2- Check if a < hf = 10cm

Asf y 6434 420


a 141.3mm 90

0.85 f c b e 0.85 25 900

10
10

h= 75
a= 141.3> hf = 100 mm
i.e. assumption is wrong
832

Section is T NA is in the web 30

20
Example 2

3- Calculate b1, c, and check t

A s f y - 0.85 f c be bw hf
a
0.85 f c bw
6434 420 0.85 25 900 300 100
a 224mm
0.85 25 300
a 224
c 264 mm
1 0.85
dc 655.5 264
t 0.003 0.003
c 264
t 0.00447 0.004 0.005 Transision zone

=0.65+(e t -0.002) (250/3) =0.65+(0.00447-0.002) (250/3)=0.855


21
Example 2

4- Calculate Md

Cf 0.85f c ' (be b w ) h f 0.85 25 900 300 100 1275 103 N 1275 kN
Cw 0.85f c ' a b w 0.85 25 224 300 1427.4 103 N 1427.4 kN

a hf
M d C w d C f
d
2 2
224 3 100
0.855 1427.4 103 655.5 1275 10 655.5
2 2
1323.4 106 N .mm 1323.4 kN .m

22
Design of T-Beams --- Positive moment

To analyze the section, the steel is divided in two portions: (1) Asf, which provides a
tension force in equilibrium with the compression force of the overhanging flanges, and
providing a section with capacity Muf and (2) Asw, the remaining of the steel, providing
a section with capacity Muw.
M u M uf M uw

Mu : Ultimate moment applied, requiring steel As.


23 Muf : Moment resisted by overhanging flange parts, requiring steel Asf.
Muw : Moment resisted by web, requiring steel Asw.
Design of T-Beams --- Positive moment

Step 1

24 Step 2
24
Design of T-Beams --- Positive moment

M u M uf M uw M uw M u M uf Step 3

0.85 f c ' 2M uw Step 4


1 1
fy 0.85 f c ' bw d 2

Asw bw d Step 5

As Asf Asw Step 6


25
Design of L-Beams --- Positive moment

be be

Same as
bw

26
Design of T-Beams --- Negative moment

be

bw
Design as a rectangular
section with width bw

27
Flange Reinforcement
When flanges of T-beams are in tension, part of the flexural
reinforcement shall be distributed over effective flange width, or a
width equal to one-tenth of the span, whichever is smaller
Additional Additional
Reinforcement min (beff & l/10)
Reinforcement
-ve moment

Main Reinforcement

If beff > l/10, some longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided in


outer portions of flange.
Design of T-Beams --- Positive moment
Design Procedure:
1- Establish h based on serviceability requirements of the slab and calculate d
2- Choose bw
3- Determine be according to ACI requirements.
4- Calculate As assuming that a < hf with beam width = be & =0.90
0.85 f c ' 2M b e

1 1 u
fy 0.85 f ' b d 2 hf
c e d
As f y As
As = be d a
0.85 f c ' b e bw
5- If a hf: the assumption is right continue as rectangular section
If a > hf: revise As using T-beam equations (steps 1-6).
6- Check the =0.90 assumption (t 0.005) and As,sup As,min
29
Example 3
A floor system consists of a 14.0cm
concrete slab supported by continuous
T-beams with a span L. Given that
bw=30cm and d=55cm, fc =28 MPa and
fy = 420 MPa.

Lm
Determine the steel required at
midspan of an interior beam to resist
a service dead load moment 320
kN.m and a service live load moment
3.0 m 3.0 m 3.0 m
250 kN.m in the following two cases:
hf Slab
(A) L = 8 m
Spandrel
(B) L = 2 m beam
bw

30
Solution (A) L = 8 m 200

14

784 kN.m
Determine be according to ACI requirements 55
As
L 8000
4 4 2000mm 30


be min 16hf b w 16 140 300=2540mm
b 3000 mm


be is taken as 2000 mm, as shown in the figure
Calculate As assuming that a < hf with beam width = be & =0.90
Mu = 1.2(320)+1.6(250)=784 kN.m

0.85 f c ' 2M u
1- 1-
fy 0.85 f c ' be d 2

31
Solution (A) L = 8 m 200

14

784 kN.m
0.85 28 2 784 10 6 55
1 1
420 0.9 0.85 28 2000 550 2 As

30
0.00354
As be d 0.00354 2000 550 3892 mm 2

Check a hf assumption
As f y 3892 420
a 34.3mm h f 140mm
0.85f c 'be 0.85 28 2000
The assumption is right Rectangular section design
Use 825mm (As,sup= 3927 mm2) arranged in two layers.
300 2 40 2 8 4 25
sc 34.5 mm d b 25 mm
4 1
32 25 mm OK
Solution (A) L = 8 m
Check the =0.90 assumption (t 0.005) and As,sup As,min

0.25 f c ' 1.4
0.25 28 1.4
As ,min max bw d ; bw d max 300 550 ; 300 550

fy fy
420
420

As,min 550 mm 2 As,sup 3927 mm 2 OK

As f y 3927 420 200


a 34.7 mm

14
0.85f c 'be 0.85 28 2000

55
a 34.7
c 40.8 mm 825
1 0.85 30
dc 550 40.8
t 0.003 0.003
c 40.8
33 0.0374 0.005 0.9 OK
Solution (A) L = 8 m
Check moment capacity

a
M d As f y d
2
34.7
0.9 3927 420 550
2
M d 790.7 106 N.mm 790.7 kN.m M u 784 kN.m

200

14
55 825
30

34
Solution (B) L = 2 m 50

14

784 kN.m
Determine be according to ACI requirements 55
L 2000 As
4 4 500mm 30

be min 16hf b w 16 140 300=2540mm
b 3000 mm


be is taken as 500 mm, as shown in the figure
Calculate As assuming that a < hf with beam width = be & =0.90
Mu = 1.2(320)+1.6(250)=784 kN.m

0.85 f c ' 2M u
1 1
fy 0.85 f c ' be d 2

35
Solution (B) L = 2 m 50

784 kN.m
14
0.85 28 2 784 10 6 55
1 1
420 0.9 0.85 28 500 550 2 As

30
0.0159
As be d 0.0159 500 550 4389 mm 2

Check a h assumption
f
As f y 4389 420
a 155mm > h f 140mm
0.85 f c ' be 0.85 28 500

The assumption is wrong T section design

36
Solution (B) L = 2 m
50

14
Calculate required reinforcement

55
0.85 f c '( b bw ) hf
Asf
fy 30

0.85 ( 28 )( 500 300 )140


Asf 1586mm 2
420

hf
M uf As f y d
2
140
0.9 1586 420 550 288 10 6
N .m
2
M uw M u M uf 784 106 288 106 496 106 N .m
37
Solution (B) L = 2 m

0.85 f c ' 2M u
1 1
fy 0.85 f c ' bw d 2

0.85 ( 28 ) 2( 496 ) 106


1 1 0.017
( 420 )
0.9 0.85 ( 28 ) ( 300 ) ( 550 ) 2

50

14
Asw bw d 0.017( 300 )( 550 ) 2808mm 2

55
828
As Asf Asw 1586 2808 4395mm 2
30

Use 828 mm (As,sup= 4926mm2) arranged in two layers.

Check solution: (Do as in Example 2) 38


Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 8
Design of doubly reinforced beams
Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
Beams having steel reinforcement on both the tension and
compression sides are called doubly reinforced sections. Doubly
reinforced sections are useful in the case of limited cross sectional
dimensions being unable to provide the required bending strength.
Increasing the area of reinforcement makes the section brittle.

2
Reasons for Providing Compression Reinforcement
1- Increased strength.

2- Increased ductility.

3- Reduced sustained load deflections due to shrinkage and creep.

4- Ease of fabrication. Use corner bars to hold & anchor stirrups.

3
Analysis of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
Divide the section:

Mn Mn2 Mn1

To analyze the section, the tension steel is divided in two portions: (1) As2, which is in
equilibrium with the compression steel, and providing a section with capacity Mn2 and
(2) As1, the remaining of the tension steel, providing a section with capacity Mn1.

4
Analysis of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
Find As1 and As2:

T s 2 C s As 2f y Asf s

Asf s
As 2 We need fs to find As2
fy
5
As As 1 As 2 A s 1 A s A s 2
Analysis of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
Find fs:

c d c
s 0.003
c

c d
f s sE s 0.003E s f y
c

E s 2 105 MPa

6
Analysis of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
Find c:

T C c C s

As f y 0.85f cab Asf s


c d
As f y 0.85f c1cb As 0.003E s
c
7
find c by solving the quadratic equation find fs from equation in slide 6
Analysis of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
Find Md:

a
M d M n As 1f y d - A s f s d - d '

2
8
Analysis of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
Procedure:
c d find c, a
1) As f y 0.85f c1cb As 0.003E s
c
c d
2) f s 0.003E s f y
c
3) As 2 Asf s
fy
4) As 1 As As 2
d c
5) Check if f = 0.9 s c 0.003 0.005?
a
6) M d M n As 1f y d - Asf s d - d '
2
9
Example 1
For the beam with double reinforcement shown in the figure,
calculate the design moment Md. 5.0
fc =35MPa and fy = 420 MPa. 225

60

632
Solution:-
30
0.05( f c ' 28 )
1 0.85 0.65 for f c ' 35MPa 28 MPa
7
0.05( 35 28 )
1 0.85 0.8 0.65
7
c d
As f y 0.85f c 1cb A s 0.003E s
c
c 50
10 4825(420) 0.85(35)(0.8)c (300) 982 0.003(2 10 5
)
c
Example 1

c 50
4825(420) 0.85(35)(0.8)c (300) 982 0.003(2 10 5
)
c
229.5c 2 1437300c 29460000 0 5.0
c 220mm 225

a 1c 0.8 220 176mm 60

632

c d
fs 0.003E s f y
c 30

220 50
f s 0.003(2 10 5
) 463 f y 420MPa
220
f s f y 420

11
Example 1 5.0
225
Asf s 982(420)
As 2 982mm 2 60
fy (420) 632

As 1 As As 2 4825 982 3843mm 2


30
d c
s 0.003 0.005?
c
600 220
s 0.003 0.0052 0.005 Tension Controlled , f 0.9
220
a
M d M n A s 1f y d - A sf s d - d '
2
176
M d 0.9 3843( 420 ) 600 982 ( 420 ) 600 50
2
12
M d 948 106 N .mm 948kN .m
Maximum allowed steel for a singly reinforced section

0.003
cmax d
0.003 0.005
3
cmax d
8

3
=1c 1cmax d1
8
3 0.85 1 f c '
max
8 fy
3 0.85 1f c '
As ,max bd
8 fy 13

Design of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections

1) Design the section as singly reinforced, and calculate t

2) If t < 0.004 Comp. steel is needed (or enlarge section if possible)

3) Design As1 for maximum reinforcement (slide 13) and find Mn1, a, c
4) M n M u
f
5) Mn2 = Mn Mn1
c d
6) f s sE s 0.003E s f y
c
M n2 Asf s
7) As As 2 As As 1 As 2
f s(d d ) fy 14
Example 2
Design the beam shown in the figure to resist Mu=1225 kN.m. If
compression steel is required, place it 70 mm from the compression
face.
fc =21 MPa and fy = 420 MPa.

Solution:
Try first to design the section as a singly reinforced section:
0.85f c ' 2 Mu
1 1
fy 0.85f c ' b d 2

0.85(21) 2 1225 106
1 1 0.0284
420 (0.9) 0.85(21) 350 (700) 2

As= b d = 0.0284(350)(700) = 6947 mm2
15 Use 10 32 mm in two rows (As,sup =7069 mm2)
Example 2
Check the ductility of the singly reinforced section:
As f y 7069 420 a 475
a 475 mm c 559mm
0.85f c ' b 0.85(21)350 1 0.85
dc 700 559
t 0.003 0.003 0.00076 0.004
c 559
Section is brittle! can not be used.
Use compression reinforcement.

Mu
1225
Mn 1361kN .m
f 0.9
3 0.85 1f c ' 3 0.85 ( 0.85 )( 21)
As 1 As ,max bd ( 350 )( 700 )
8 fy 8 ( 420 )

16
As 1 3307mm 2
Example 2
As f y 3307( 420 )
a 222.3mm
0.85f cb 0.85( 21)( 350 )
a 222.3
c 261.55mm
1 0.85
a 222.3
M n 1 A s f y d - ( 3307 )( 420 )( 700 )
2 2
M n 1 818 106 N .mm 818kN .m

Mn2 = Mn Mn1 = 1361 818 = 543 kN.m

17
Example 2
c d
f s 0.003E s f y
c
261.55 70
fs 0.003(2 10 5
) 439MPa f y 420MPa
261.55
f s f y 420
M n2 543 106
As 2052mm 2
f s(d d ) 420(700 70)

Asf s (2052)(420)
As 2 2052mm 2
fy (420)
As As 1 As 2 3307 2052 5359mm 2
Use 830 in two rows for tension steel (As,sup = 5655 mm 2 )
18 Use 4 26 for compression steel (As,sup = 2124 mm 2 )
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 9
Design of beams for shear
Shear Design vs Moment Design
Beams are usually designed
for bending moment first.
Accordingly, cross sectional
dimensions are determined
along with the required
amounts of longitudinal
reinforcement.

Once this is done, sections are


checked for shear to determine
whether shear reinforcement
is required or not.

2
Shear Design vs Moment Design

This by no means indicates that shear is less important than


bending. On the contrary, shear failure which is usually
initiated by diagonal tension, is far more dangerous than
flexural failure due to its brittle nature. It occurs without
warning. Therefore, beams are designed to rather fail in
bending. This is done by providing larger safety factor
against shear failure than those provided for bending.

3
Shear and flexural stresses

In linearly elastic beams, two types of stresses occur:

Flexural stresses:

Shear stresses:

An element of a beam not on the NA or an extreme fiber is


subjected to both stress types combined
4
Shear and flexural stresses

The combined stress (called principal stresses) are calculated


as:

which act on a direction inclined with respect to the beam


axis by the angle:

5
Shear and cracks in beams

6
Shear and cracks in beams

7
7
Types of Shear Cracks
Two types of inclined cracking occur in beams:
1- Web Shear Cracks
Web shear cracking begins from an interior point in a member at the level of
the centroid of the uncracked section and moves on a diagonal path to the
tension face when the diagonal tensile stresses produced by shear exceed the
tensile strength of concrete.

2- Flexure-Shear Cracks
The most common type, develops from the tip of a flexural crack at the tension
side of the beam and propagates towards mid depth until it reaches the
compression side of the beam.

8
Shear and cracks in beams
It is concluded that the shearing force acting on a vertical
section in a reinforced concrete beam does not cause direct
rupture of that section. Shear by itself or in combination with
flexure may cause failure indirectly by producing tensile
stresses on inclined planes. If these stresses exceed the
relatively low tensile strength of concrete, diagonal cracks
develop. If these cracks are not checked, splitting of the beam
or what is known as diagonal tension failure will take place.

9
Failure by shear in beams

10
Types of Shear Reinforcement
The code allows the use of three types of Shear Reinforcement
Vertical stirrups
Inclined stirrups
Bent up bars

Inclined Stirrups Vertical Stirrups

Bent up bars

11
Designing to Resist Shear
The strength requirement for shear that has to be satisfied is:

Vn Vu ACI Eq. 11-1


Vu = factored shear force at section
Vn = nominal shear strength
= strength reduction factor for shear = 0.75
The nominal shear force is generally resisted by concrete and shear
reinforcement:
Vn Vc Vs ACI Eq. 11-2
Vc = nominal shear force resisted by concrete
Vs = nominal shear force resisted by shear reinforcement

12
Strength of Concrete in Shear

For members subject to shear Vu and bending Mu only, ACI Code


gives the following equation for calculating Vc
Simple formula

Vc 0.17 f c ' bw d ACI Eq. 11-3


Detailed formula
Vu d
Vc 0.16 f c ' 17 w bw d 0.29 f c ' bw d ACI Eq. 11-5
Mu

As
where w
b wd
13
Strength of Concrete in Shear
For members subject to axial compression Nu plus shear Vu, ACI
Code gives the following equation for calculating Vc

N
Vc 0.17 1 u f c' bw d ACI Eq. 11-4
14 A
g

For members subject to axial tension Nu plus shear Vu, ACI Code
gives the following equation for calculating Vc

0.29 N u
Vc 0.17 1 f c' bw d ACI Eq. 11-8
A
14
g
Designing to Resist Shear
To find the force required to be resisted by shear reinforcement:

Vu Vn

Vn Vc Vs

Vu
V s V c

15
Three cases of shear requirement:

Case 1:
For Vu Vc shear reinforcement is required

Case 2:
For Vu 0.50Vc minimum shear reinforcement is required

Case 3:
For Vu < 0.50Vc no shear reinforcement is required

16
Design of Stirrups
Shear reinforcement required when
Vu
Vu Vc Vs

V c
ACI 11.4.7.1
The bar size of the stirrups is established and the spacing is calculated:
A vf yd Av f y d
Vs s ACI Eq. 11-15
s Vs
For inclined stirrups (with angle a)
Av f y d sin cos Av f y d sin cos
Vs s ACI Eq. 11-16
s Vs
where Av = the area of shear reinforcement within spacing s (for a 2-legged stirrup in
a beam: Av = 2 times the area of the stirrup bar). 17
ACI 11.4.6.1
Minimum Amount of Shear Reinforcement
1
Minimum Shear Reinforcement (Av,min) required when Vu Vc
2
bw s bw s
Av min 0.062 f c ' 0.35 ACI Eq. 11-13
f ys f ys

Av f ys Av f ys

s=min ;

0.062 f c ' bw 0.35 bw

except in:
(a) Footings and solid slabs
(b) Concrete joist construction
(c) Beams with h not greater than 250 mm
(d) Beams integral with slabs with h not greater than 600 mm and
not greater than the larger of 2.5 times the thickness of flange, and
0.5 times width of web. 18
Spacing limits for Shear Reinforcement
d
If V s 0.33 f c bw d s max min ;600mm
2
ACI 11.4.5
d
If V s 0.33 f c bw d s max min ;300mm
4

Upper limit for Vs


ACI Code requires that the maximum force resisted by shear
reinforcement Vs is as follows

V s 0.66 f c ' bw d ACI 11.4.7.9

If this condition is not satisfied


Section dimensions must be increased
19
Critical Section for Shear ACI 11.1.3.1
Critical section for shear may be taken a distance d away from the
face of the support if:
(a) Support reaction, introduces compression into the end regions of member;
(b) Loads are applied at or near the top of the member;
(c) No concentrated load occurs between face of support and location of critical
section.

20
Critical Section for Shear ACI 11.1.3.1
Critical section for shear may be taken a distance d away from the
face of the support as in cases (a) and (b), but must be taken at face
of the support as in cases (c) and (d).

21
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
ACI Code permits the use of the following approximate shears for design
of continuous beams, provided:
There are two or more spans.
Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans
not greater than the shorter by more than 20 percent.
Loads are uniformly distributed.
Unfactored live load does not exceed three times the unfactored dead
load.
Members are of similar section dimensions along their lengths
(prismatic).

22
Approximate Structural Analysis

ACI 8.3.3
More than two spans

23
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
Two spans

l n = length of clear
span measured
face-to-face of
supports.

24
Summary of ACI Shear Design Procedure for Beams
1- Draw the shearing force diagram and establish the critical section
for shear Vu.
2- Calculate the nominal capacity of concrete in shear Vs.
Vc 0.17 f c ' bw d
3- Calculate the force required to be resisted by shear reinforcement
Vu
V s V c

4- Check the code limit on Vs
Vu
V s V c 0.66 f c ' bw d

If this condition is not satisfied, the concrete dimensions should be
increased.
25
Summary of ACI Shear Design Procedure for Beams
5- Classify the factored shearing forces acting on the beam according
to the following
* For Vu < 0.50Vc , no shear reinforcement is required.
* For Vu 0.50Vc , minimum shear reinforcement is required

Av f ys Av f ys

s=min ;

0.062 f c ' bw 0.35 bw

*For Vu Vc , shear reinforcement is required (in addition, check min shear)
A v f yd Av f y d sin cos
For vertical
stirrups
s For inclined
s
Vs stirrups Vs
6- Maximum spacing smax must be checked
d
If V s 0.33 f c bw d s max min ;600mm
2
d
26 If V s 0.33 f c bw d s max min ;300mm
4
Example
A rectangular beam has the dimensions shown in the figure and is
loaded with a uniform service dead load of 40 kN/m (including own
weight of beam) and a uniform service live load of 25 kN/m.
Design the necessary shear reinforcement given that fc =28 MPa and
fy=420 MPa. Width of support is equal to 30 cm.

wD=40 kNm & wL=25 kN/m

60

0.3m 0.3m
30
7.0 m

27
Example
Solution:
wu=1.2(40)+1.6(25)=88 kN/m
Assuming 8 mm stirrups and
20 mm flexural steel,
d=60-4-0.8-1.0=54.2 cm 0.3m
54.2
7.0 m

308 kN 247.1 kN
1- Draw shearing force diagram:
Critical section for shear is located
at a distance of d = 54.2 cm from the face 308 kN
of support.

Vu,critical is equal to 247.1 kN.

28
Example
2- Calculate the shear capacity of concrete:
V c 0.17 f c ' bw d 0.17 28 300 542 146.3 103 N 146.3kN
V c 0.75 144.2kN 109.7kN
V c
54.85 kN
2
3- Calculate the force required to be resisted by shear reinforcement Vs.
V 247.1
V s u V c 146.3 183.2kN
0.75
4- Check the code limit on Vs :
0.66 f c ' bw d 0.66 28 300 542 567. 9 103 N 567. 9kN

V s 183.2kN 0.66 f c ' bw d 567.9kN OK


29
Example
5- Classify the factored shear force:
Vu= 247.1 kN > Vc = 109.7 kN, shear reinforcement is required.

The beam can be designed to resist shear based on Vu= 247.1 kN over the
entire span. However, to reduce reinforcement cost, the beam will not be
designed for this shear over the entire span. The span will rather be divided
into zones of different shear demands as shown below
308 kN
247.1 kN

Vc=109.7 kN

Zone C 0.5Vc=54.85 kN
Zone B
Zone A

0.61 m
1.23 m
30
Example
Zone (A): [ Vu 0.5Vc ]
No shear reinforcement is required, but it is recommended to use minimum
area of shear reinforcement.
Try 8 mm vertical stirrups

Av f ys Av f ys
s=min ;
0.062 f c ' bw 0.35 bw
2(50) 420 2(50) 420
s min 427mm ; 400 mm s 400mm
0.0062 28 300 0.35 300

Maximum stirrup spacing is not to exceed the smaller of d/2 = 271 mm or


600mm. So, use 8 mm vertical stirrups spaced at 250 mm.

31
Example

Zone (B): [Vc > Vu > 0.5Vc ]


minimum shear reinforcement is required.
use 8 mm vertical stirrups spaced at 25 cm (Calculated from Zone A).

Zone (C): [Vu > Vc ]


V s 183.2kN
Trying two-legged 8 mm vertical stirrups,
A v f yd 2 50 420 542
s 125 mm
Vs 183.2 10 3

32
Example
Check maximum stirrup spacing:

0.33 f c ' bw d 0.33 28 300 542 284 kN V s 183.2kN


Maximum stirrup spacing is not to exceed the smaller of d/2 = 271 mm or 600mm.

Check with minimum stirrup requirement:


Av f ys Av f ys
s max =min ;
0.062 f c ' bw 0.35 bw
2(50) 420 2(50) 420
s max min 427mm ; 400 mm 400mm
0.062 28 300 0.35 300

So, use 8 mm vertical stirrups spaced at 12 cm.


33
Example

308 kN
247.1 kN

Vc=109.7 kN 8@25 60

Zone C 0.5Vc=54.85 kN
8@12 Zone B Zone A
8@25 8@25 30
Section in zones A&B
0.61 m
1.23 m

8@12 60

8@12 8@25 30
Section in zone C

34
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 10
Design of slabs
Regula
(3

y
Introduction Plate/Shell (2D) z
x z x
A slab is a structural element whose thickness is small compared
t<<(x,z) to
its own length and width.
h
t L , S zS
t t
Lx
Slabs in buildings are usually used to transmit the loads on floors and
roofs to the supporting beams Loads
Dimensional Hierarchy of Structural

Beam Beam Column

Slab Beam

Column Beam Beam

Footing
Slab

Beam Beam
Soil

2
Introduction
Slabs are flexural members. Their flexure strength requirement may
be expressed by
Mu M n
Types of Slabs
Solid slabs :- which are divided into
- One way solid slabs One-way slab
- Two way solid slabs

Ribbed slabs :- which are divided into


- One way ribbed slabs
- Two way ribbed slabs Two-way slab

3
Solid Slab

L L
Two way slab 2 One-way slab 2
S S
Ribbed Slab (joist construction)

4 Two way slab One-way slab


Ribbed slab with hollow blocks

5
Ribbed slab with hollow blocks

6
One-way solid slabs
A one-way solid slab curves under loads in one direction only.
Accordingly, slabs supported on two opposite sides only and slabs
supported on all four sides, but L/S 2 are classified as one-way
slabs.

shrinkage Reinft.
Main Reinft.

Main reinforcement is placed in the shorter direction, while the


longer direction is provided with shrinkage reinforcement to limit
cracking.
7
Two-way solid slabs
A two-way solid slab curves under loads in two directions.
Accordingly slabs supported on all four sides, and L/S < 2 are
classified as two-way slabs.

Main Reinft.
S

Main Reinft.

Bending will take place in the two directions in a dish-like form.


Accordingly, main reinforcement is required in the two directions.
8
One-way v.s two-way ribbed slabs
If the ribs are provided in one direction only, the slab is classified as
being one-way, regardless of the ratio of longer to shorter panel
dimensions. It is classified as two-way if the ribs are provided in two
directions .

9
Minimum thickness of one way slabs ACI Table 9.5(a)

Minimum Cover ACI 7.7.1


a - Concrete exposed to earth or weather
for <16mm------40 mm and for >16mm----- 50 mm
b - Concrete not exposed to earth or weather
10
for <32mm------20 mm, otherwise ------ 40 mm
Spacing of Reinforcement Bars
a- Flexural Reinforcement Bars
Flexural reinforcement is to be spaced not farther than three times the slab
thickness (hs), nor farther apart than 45 cm, center-to-center.
3 hs
Smax smaller of ACI 10.5.4
45cm
b- Shrinkage Reinforcement Bars
Shrinkage reinforcement is to be spaced not farther than five times the slab
thickness, nor farther apart than 45 cm, center-to-center.
5 hs
Smax smaller of ACI 7.12.2.2
45cm

11
Loads Assigned to Slabs
wu=1.2 D.L + 1.6 L.L

a- Dead Load (D.L) :


1- Weight of slab covering materials
2-Equivalent partition weight
3- Own weight of slab

b- Live Load (L.L)

12
a- Dead Load (D.L)
1- Weight of slab covering materials, total =2.315 kN/m2
tiles (2.5cm thick) =0.02523 = 0.575 kN/m2
cement mortar (2.5cm thick) =0.02521 = 0.525 kN/m2
sand (5.0cm thick) =0.0518 = 0.9 kN/m2
plaster (1.5cm thick) =0.01521 = 0.315 kN/m2

tiles 2.5 cm
cement mortar 2.5 cm
sand 5 cm

slab

plaster 1.5 cm

13
2-Equivalent partition weight
This load is usually taken as the weight of all walls (weight of 1m span
of wall total spans of all walls) carried by the slab divided by the floor
area and treated as a dead load rather than a live load.
To calculate the weight of 1m span of wall:
Each 1m2 surface of wall contains 12.5 blocks
A block with thickness 10cm weighs 10 kg
A block with thickness 20cm weighs 20 kg

Each face of 1m2 surface has 30kg plaster

Load / 1m2 surface for 10 cm block =


12.5 10 +230=185 kg/m2 = 1.85 kN/m2

Load / 1m2 surface for 20 cm block =


20 cm
12.5 20 +230=310 kg/m2 = 3.1 kN/m2

Weight of 1m span of wall with height 3m:


For 10 cm block wt. = 1.85 kN/m2 3 = 5.6 kN/m
14 For 20 cm block wt. = 3.1 kN/m2 3 = 9.3 kN/m
3- Own weight of slab
1- Solid slab:
Own weight of solid slab (per 1m2)= gc h = 25 h kN/m2

2- Ribbed slab:
Example
Find the total ultimate load per rib for the ribbed slab shown:

Assume depth of slab = 25 cm (20cm block +5cm toping slab)

Hollow blocks are 40 cm 25 cm 20 cm in dimension

Assume ribs have 10 cm width of web

Assume equivalent partition load = 0.75 kN/m2

Consider live load = 2 kN/m2.

15
3- Own weight of slab
Solution
Total volume (hatched) = 0.5 0.25 0.25 = 0.03125 m3

Volume of one hollow block = 0.4 0.20 0.25 = 0.02 m3

Net concrete volume = 0.03125 - 0.02 = 0.01125 m3

Weight of concrete = 0.01125 25= 0.28125 kN

Weight of concrete /m2 = 0.28125 /[(0.5)(0.25)] = 2.25 kN/ m2

Weight of hollow blocks /m2 = 0.2/[(0.5)(0.25)] = 1.6 kN/ m2

Total slab own weight= 2.25 + 1.6= 3.85kN/m2

Load per rib


Total dead load= 3.85 + 2.315 + 0.75 = 6.915 kN/m2
Ultimate load = 1.2(6.915) + 1.6(2) = 11.5 kN/m2

16 Ultimate load per rib = 11.5 0.5 = 5.75 kN/m


Minimum live Load values on slabs
Type of Use Uniform Live Load
kN/m2
Residential 2
Residential balconies 3
Computer use 5
b- Live Load (L.L) Offices 2
Warehouses
It depends on the function for Light storage 6
which the floor is constructed. Heavy Storage 12
Schools
Classrooms 2
Libraries
rooms 3
Stack rooms 6
Hospitals 2
Assembly Halls
Fixed seating 2.5
Movable seating 5
Garages (cars) 2.5
Stores
Retail 4
wholesale 5
Exit facilities 5
Manufacturing
Light 4
17 Heavy 6
Loads Assigned to Beams
Beams are usually designed to carry the following loads:
- Their own weight
- Weights of partitions applied directly on them
- Floor loads

S1 S2

18
Design of one way SOLID slabs

19
One-way solid slabs
One-way solid slabs are designed as a number of independent 1 m
wide strips which span in the short direction and are supported on
crossing beams. These strips are designed as rectangular beams.

1m
S1 S2
L

0.85f c 2M u
1 1 2

fy
0.85 f c bd
S1 S2

20
One-way solid slabs

shrinkage Reinft.

Main Reinft.

21
Check on tension/compression control (maximum allowed steel)

Method 1: Check et

Method 2: Check max


0.003
cmax d
0.003 0.005
3
cmax d
8
3
=b1c b1cmax db1
8

3 0.85 b1 f c '
max
8 fy
22
Shrinkage Reinforcement Ratio
According to ACI Code and for fy =420 MPa ACI 7.12.2.1
shrinkage 0.0018 As ,shrinkage 0.0018 b h
where, b = width of strip, and h = slab thickness

Minimum Reinforcement Ratio for Main Reinforcement

As ,min As ,shrinkage 0.0018 b h ACI 10.5.4

Check shear capacity of the section


V u V c 0.17 f c ' bwd
Otherwise enlarge depth of slab
23
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
ACI Code permits the use of the following approximate moments and
shears for design of continuous beams and one-way slabs, provided:
There are two or more spans.
Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans
not greater than the shorter by more than 20 percent.
Loads are uniformly distributed.
Unfactored live load does not exceed three times the unfactored dead
load.
Members are of similar section dimensions along their lengths
(prismatic).

24
Approximate Structural Analysis
Bending Moment
ACI 8.3.3
More than two spans

25
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
Bending Moment
Two spans

l n = length of clear
span measured
face-to-face of
supports.

For calculating
negative moments,
l n is taken as the
average of the
adjacent clear span
lengths.

26
Approximate Structural Analysis
Shear ACI 8.3.3
More than two spans

27
Approximate Structural Analysis
Shear ACI 8.3.3
Two spans

28
Summary of One-way Solid Slab Design Procedure
1- Select representative 1m wide design strip/strips to span in the
short direction.
2- Choose a slab thickness to satisfy deflection control requirements.
When several numbers of slab panels exist, select the largest
calculated thickness.
3- Calculate the factored load wu
4- Draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams for each of
the strips.
5- Check adequacy of slab thickness in terms of resisting shear by
satisfying the following equation: V u 0.17 f c ' b d
where b = 1000 mm
If the previous equation is not satisfied, go ahead and enlarge the
thickness to do so.

29
Summary of One-way Solid Slab Design Procedure
6- Design flexural and shrinkage reinforcement:
Flexural reinforcement ratio is calculated from the following
equation
0.85f c 2M u
1 1 2

fy
0.85 f c bd
where b = 1000 mm

You need to check tension controlled requirement, minimum


reinforcement requirement and spacing of selected bars.

Compute the area of shrinkage reinforcement, where


Ashrinkage=0.0018bh, where b = 1000 mm.

7- Draw a plan of the slab and representative cross sections showing


the dimensions and the selected reinforcement.
30
Example 1
Using the ACI-Code approximate structural analysis, design for a
warehouse, a continuous one-way solid slab supported on beams 4.0 m
apart as shown in the figure. Assume that the beam webs are 30 cm wide.
The dead load is 3kN/m2 in addition to the own weight of the slab, and the
live load is 3kN/m2.
Use fc=28MPa, fy=420MPa

8.0 m

4.0 m 4.0 m 4.0 m

31
Solution:
1- Select a representative 1 m wide slab strip:
The selected representative strip is shown in the figure

2- Select slab thickness:


1.0 m

8.0 m
For one-end continuous spans,
17cm
hmin = l/24 =4.0/24=0.167m
Slab thickness is taken as 17 cm
4.0 m 4.0 m 4.0 m
Wu

32
Solution:
3- Calculate the factored load wu per unit length of the selected strip:
Own weight of slab = 0.17 25 = 4.25 kN/m2
wu= 1.20 (3+4.25) +1.60 (3)= 13.5 kN/m2
For a strip 1 m wide, wu=13.5 kN/m
4- Evaluate the maximum factored shear forces and bending moments
in the strip:
The clear span length, ln = 4.0 0.30 = 3.70 m
wu=13.5 kN/m

33
Solution:

18.5 18.5
16.8 16.8
7.7 7.7

16.8
16.8

Units of moment are in kN.m


34
Solution:

25 28.7
25

25 25
28.7

Units of shear are in kN


35
Solution:
5- Check slab thickness for beam shear:
Effective depth d = 17 2 0.60 = 14.40 cm, assuming 12 mm bars.
Vu,max = 28.7 kN.
V c 0.17 f c ' bd 0.75 0.17 28 1000 144 95.8 kN

i.e. , slab thickness is adequate in terms of resisting beam shear.

6- Design flexural and shrinkage reinforcement:


Assume that =0.9 0.85f c 2M u
1 1 2

fy
0.85 f c bd
Where b = 1000 mm & d = 144mm

36
Solution:
For max. negative moment, Mu = 18.5 kN.m

0.85 28 2 18.5 106


1 1 2
0.00241
420
0.85 0.9 28 1000 144

3 0.85 b1f c ' 3 0.85 0.85 28
max 0.01806 0.90

8 fy 8 420
As, ve 0.002411000 144 347 mm 2
As,min 0.0018 1000 170 306 mm 2 As, ve OK
347mm 2 79
10 S 227.5 mm
1000mmstrip S
Smax min(450 or 3 170) 450mm use 10@20cm

37
Solution:
For max. positive moment, Mu = 16.8 kN.m

0.85 28 2 16.8 106


1 1 2
0.00219

420
0.85 0.9 28 1000 144
3 0.85 b1f c ' 3 0.85 0.85 28
max 0.01806 0.90
8 fy 8 420
As, ve 0.00219 1000 144 315 mm 2
As,min 0.0018 1000 170 306 mm 2 As, ve OK
315mm 2 7910
S 251mm
1000mmstrip S
Smax min(450 or 3 170) 450 use 10@25cm

38
Solution:
Calculate the area of shrinkage reinforcement:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement = 0.0018 (100) (17) = 306 mm2
For shrinkage reinforcement use 10 mm @ 25 cm (from previous slides calculations)

Shrinkage reinft.
10@25 10@25 10@20 10@20 10@25

17cm

10@25 10@25 10@25

See Lecture 12 for information on detailing requirements

39
Solution:

10@25 10@20 10@20 10@25


8.0 m

10@25 10@25 10@25

4.0 m 4.0 m 4.0 m

40
Design of one way RIBBED slabs

41
One-way ribbed slabs
Ribbed slabs consist of regularly spaced ribs monolithically built
with a toping slab. The voids between the ribs may be either light
material such as hollow blocks [figure 1] or it may be left unfilled
[figure 2].

Topping slab

Rib Hollow block Temporary form


Figure [1] Hollow block floor Figure [2] Moulded floor

The use of these blocks makes it possible to have smooth ceiling


which is often required for architectural considerations and have
good sound and temperature insulation properties besides reducing
the dead load of the slab greatly. 42
Key components of one-way ribbed slabs
a. Topping slab: ACI 8.13.6.1
Topping slab thickness (t) is not to be less than 1/12 the clear
distance (lc) between ribs, nor less than 50 mm
lc

t 12
50 mm
lc
and should satisfy for a unit strip: Slab thickness (t)

w u l c2
t
1240 f c

Shrinkage reinforcement is provided in the topping slab in both


directions in a mesh form.
43
Key components of one-way ribbed slabs
b. Regularly spaced ribs:
Minimum dimensions:
Ribs are not to be less than 100 mm in width, and a depth of not
more than 3.5 times the minimum web width and clear spacing
between ribs is not to exceed 750 mm.
ACI 8.13.2
l 750 mm
c
ACI 8.13.3

h 3.5 bw

bw 100

44
Key components of one-way ribbed slabs
Shear strength: ACI 8.13.8
Shear strength provided by rib concrete Vc may be taken 10% greater
than those for beams.

Flexural strength:
Ribs are designed as rectangular beams in the regions of negative
moment at the supports and as T-shaped beams in the regions of
positive moments between the supports.

Effective flange width be is taken as half the distance between ribs,


center-to-center. b
e

45
Key components of one-way ribbed slabs
Hollow blocks:
Hollow blocks are made of lightweight concrete or other lightweight
materials. The most common concrete hollow block sizes are 40 25
cm in plan and heights of 14, 17, 20, and 24 cm.

46
Summary of one-way ribbed slab design procedure
1. The direction of ribs is chosen.
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both
directions.
4. The factored load on each of the ribs is computed.
5. The shear force and bending moment diagrams are drawn.
6. The strength of the web in shear is checked.
7. Design the ribs as T-section shaped beams in the positive moment
regions and rectangular beams in the regions of negative moment.
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the
reinforcement are to be prepared.

47
Example
Design a one-way ribbed slab to cover a 3.8 m x 10 m panel, shown in the
figure below. The covering materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent
partition load is equal to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live load is 2 kN/m2.
Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420MPa
3.8 m

10 m

48
Solution
1. The direction of ribs is chosen:
Ribs are arranged in the short direction as shown in the figure

3.8 m

5.0 m 5.0 m
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t:
From ACI Table 9.5(a), hmin = 380/16 = 23.75cm use h = 24 cm.
Let width of web, bw =10 cm
Use hollow blocks of size 40 cm 25 cm 17 cm (weight=0.17 kN)
Topping slab thickness = 24 17 = 7cm > lc/12 =40/12= 3.3cm > 5cm OK
For a unit strip of topping slab:
wu=[1.2(0.07 25 + 0.75 + 2.25) + 1.6(2)] 1m = 8.9 kN/m = 8.9 N/mm
w u l c2 8.9( 400 ) 2
t 16mm OK
1240 f c ( 0.9 )1240 25
49
Solution
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both directions:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement, As=0.0018(1000)70=126 mm2
Use 5 6 mm/m in both directions.

4. The factored load on each of the ribs is to be computed:


Total volume (in 1m2 surface) 1.0 m
= 1.0 1.0 0.24 = 0.24 m3
Volume of hollow blocks in 1m2
= 8 0.4 0.25 0.17 = 0.136 m3 0.05 m
Net concrete volume in 1m2

1.0 m
= 0.24- 0.136 = 0.104 m3

0.25 m
Weight of concrete in 1m2
= 0.104 25 = 2.6 kN/m2
Weight of hollow blocks in 1m2
= 8 0.17= 1.36 kN/m2

7 cm
0.4 m 0.1 m 0.4 m
Total dead load /m2
= 2.25 + 0.75 + 2.6 + 1.36
0.24 m

= 7.0 kN/m2
50
Solution
wu=1.2(7)+1.6(2)=11.6 kN/m2
wu/m of rib =11.6x0.5= 5.8 kN/m of rib
5. Critical shear forces and bending moments are determined (simply supported beam):
Maximum factored shear force = wul/2 = 5.8 (3.8/2) = 11 kN
Maximum factored bending moment = wul2/8 = 5.8 (3.8)2/8 = 10.5 kN.m
6. Check rib strength for beam shear:
Effective depth d = 2420.60.6 =20.8 cm, assuming 12mm reinforcing
bars and 6 mm stirrups.

1.1V c 1.1 0.75 0.17 25 100 208 14400 N = 14.4 kN Vu,max 11kN

Though shear reinforcement is not required, 4 6 mm stirrups per meter


run are to be used to carry the bottom flexural reinforcement.

51
Solution
7. Design flexural reinforcement for the ribs:
There is only positive moments over the simply supported beam, and the
section of maximum positive moment is to be designed as a T-section
Assume that a<70mm and =0.90Rectangular section with b = be =500mm
0.85 25 50
2 10.5 106
1 1

105 kN.m
7
420 0.9 0.85 25 500 2082

24
As
0.0013
10
As be d 0.0013 500 208 135 mm 2

Use 210mm (As,sup= 157 mm2)

As f y 157 420
a 6.2 mm 70mm
0.85f c 'be 0.85 25 500
The assumption is right

52
Solution
Check As,min

0.25 f c ' 1.4

As,min max bw d ; bw d
fy
fy

As,min 70 mm 2 A s,sup 157 mm 2 OK

Check =0.9
a 6.2
c 7.3 mm
1 0.85
dc 208 7.3
t 0.003 0.003
c 7.3
t 0.083 0.005 0.9 OK

53
Solution
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the reinforcement are to be
prepared

110 m

110 m
110 m

110 m
3.8 m

A A

5.0 m 5.0 m
6mm stirrups 6mm mesh
@25 cm @20 cm
7cm
24cm
17cm

210mm 10 40 cm 10 210mm

Section A-A

See Lecture 12 for information on detailing requirements


54
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 11
Design of short concentric columns
Columns

Columns are vertical compression members of a structural frame intended to support the
load-carrying beams. They transmit loads from the upper floors to the lower levels and then
to the soil through the foundations.

Loads

Beam Beam
P Column
h Slab

b Beam
Column Beam Beam
h l
b Slab
Footing
Beam Beam

Soil

2
Columns
Usually columns carry bending moment as well, about one or both axes of the cross
section, and the bending action may produce tensile forces over a part of the cross
section.

The main reinforcement in a columns is longitudinal, parallel to the direction of the load
and consists of bars arranged in a square, rectangular, or circular shape.

3
Length of the column in relation to its lateral dimensions
Columns can be classified as
1- Short Columns, for which the strength is governed by the strength of the materials
and the dimensions of the cross section

2- Slender Columns, for which the strength may be significantly reduced by lateral
deflections.

Position of the load on the cross-section


Columns can be classified as
1-Concentrically loaded columns, which are subjected to axial force only
2-Eccentrically loaded columns, which are subjected to moment in addition to the
axial force.

4
Analysis and Design of Short Columns

Column Types:
1. Tied
2. Spiral
3. Composite

5
Behavior of Tied and Spirally-Reinforced Columns
Axial load tests have proven that tied and spirally reinforced columns
having the same cross-sectional areas of concrete and steel reinforcement
behave in the same manner up to the ultimate load.
At that load, tied columns fail suddenly due to excessive cracking in
the concrete section followed by buckling of the longitudinal reinforcement
between ties within the failure region. For spirally reinforced columns, once the
ultimate load is reached, the concrete shell covering the spiral starts to spall off
but the core will continue to carry additional loads because the
spiral provides a confining force to the concrete core, thus enabling
the column to sustain large deformations before final collapse.
6
Behavior of Tied and Spirally-Reinforced Columns

Failure of a tied column Failure of a spiral column

7
Nominal Capacity under Concentric Axial Loads

P0 0.85f c Ag Ast f y Ast


or
P0 Ag 0.85f c Ast (f y 0.85f c)

Ag = gross area = b*h


Ast = area of longitudinal steel
fc =concrete compressive strength
fy = steel yield stress
8
Maximum Nominal Capacity under Concentric Axial Loads

Pn rP0
Pn r Ag 0.85f c Ast (f y 0.85f c)

r = Reduction factor to account for accidental eccentricity


r = 0.80 ( tied )
ACI 10.3.6.3
r = 0.85 ( spiral )

9
Design Capacity under Concentric Axial Loads

Pn Pu
Pn r Ag 0.85f c Ast f y 0.85f c Pu
or
Pn r A g 0.85f c g f y 0.85f c Pu
where g = Ast / Ag

ACI 9.3.2.2 ACI 10.3.6.3


= 0.65 for tied columns r = 0.80 ( tied )

10
= 0.75 for spiral columns r = 0.85 ( spiral )
Design of Short Concentrically Loaded Columns

Pn Pu

Pn r Ag 0.85f c g f y 0.85f c Pu

Both Ag and g are unknown in this equation. There are


two options to design the column:
1- Select Ag and calculate g. The Ag may be selected from initial
sizing (Ag = Pu / 0.5fc ).
2- Select g and calculate Ag. Usually g is assumed as 2% as a
starting point.
11
Calculation of required cross section, if steel ratio is known

Pn Pu

Pn r Ag 0.85f c g f y 0.85f c Pu

* when g is known or assumed:


Pu
Ag
r 0.85f c g f y 0.85f c

12
Calculation of required steel ratio, if cross section is known

Pn Pu

Pn r Ag 0.85f c g f y 0.85f c Pu

* when Ag is known or assumed:

Pu 1
g 0.85f c
r A g f y 0.85f c
13
Design of spirals

Spiral Reinforcement Ratio, s

Volume of Spiral 4 Asp


s
Volume of Core Dc s

Asp D c
from: s
[( / 4 ) D c ] s
2

Asp cross-sectional area of spiral reinforcement


D c core diameter: outside edge to outside edge of spiral
s spacing pitch of spiral steel (center to center)
14
Design of spirals

Spiral Reinforcement Spacing, s


A g f c
s 0.45 1
ACI Eq. 10-5
Ac fy
4Asp
s from previous slide
D cs
4Asp
s
Ag fc '
0.45Dc 1

Ac f y
D c2
A c core area
4
D2
15 A g gross area
4
Design Considerations

Longitudinal Steel

- Limits on reinforcement ratio:

ACI 10.9.1

0.01Ag Ast 0.08Ag


or
0.01 g 0.08

16
Design Considerations

Longitudinal Steel

- Minimum number of bars

ACI 10.9.2

min. of 6 bars in spiral arrangement


min. of 4 bars in rectangular or circular ties
min. of 3 bars in triangular ties

17
Design Considerations

Longitudinal Steel
- Clear Distance between Reinforcing Bars (Longitudinal Steel)
For tied or spirally reinforced columns, clear
distance between bars, shown in the figure, is not to
be less than the larger of 1.50 times bar diameter or
40 mm. This is done to ensure free flow of concrete
among reinforcing bars.

ACI 7.6.3
S c max 1.5 d b , 40mm
18
Design Considerations

Lateral Ties

- Arrangement of ties and longitudinal bars:


ACI 7.10.5.3
1.) At least every other longitudinal bar shall have lateral
support from the corner of a tie with an included angle
135o.
2.) No longitudinal bar shall be more than 150 mm clear
on either side from a laterally supported bar.
19
Design Considerations

Lateral Ties

- Arrangement of ties and longitudinal bars:


ACI 7.10.5.3

20 Ties shown dashed may be omitted if x < 150 mm


Design Considerations

Lateral Ties

- Maximum vertical spacing:

ACI 7.10.5.2

s 16 db ( db = diameter for longitudinal bars )


s 48 dstirrup (dstirrup = diameter for stirrups)
s least lateral dimension of column

21
Design Considerations

Lateral Ties

- Minimum size of ties

ACI 7.10.5.1

size 8 bar if longitudinal bar 30 bar


12 bar if longitudinal bar 32 bar
12 bar if longitudinal bars are bundled

22
Design Considerations

Spirals

- Size and spacing of spiral


ACI 7.10.4.2

size 10 mm diameter

ACI 7.10.4.3

25mm clear spacing


between spirals 75mm
23
Design Considerations
Concrete Protection Cover ACI 7.7.1
The clear concrete cover is not to be taken less than 4 cm for columns not exposed to
weather or in contact with ground.

Minimum Cross Sectional Dimensions


The ACI Code does not specify minimum cross sectional dimensions for columns.
Column cross sections 20 25 cm are considered as the smallest practicable sections.
For practical considerations, column dimensions are taken as multiples of 5 cm.

Lateral Reinforcement
Ties are effective in restraining the longitudinal bars from buckling out through the
surface of the column, holding the reinforcement cage together during the construction
process, confining the concrete core and when columns are subjected to horizontal
forces, they serve as shear reinforcement.
24
Design Procedure for Short Concentrically Loaded Columns
1. Evaluate the factored axial load Pu acting on the column. This can be done by:
a- Tributary Area Method
b- Pu is the sum of the reactions of the beams supported by the column.

2. Assume a starting reinforcement ratio g that satisfies ACI Code limits. Usually a
2 % ratio is chosen for economic considerations.

3. Determine the gross sectional area Ag of the concrete section.

4. Choose the dimensions of the cross section based on its shape.

5. Readjust the reinforcement ratio by substituting the actual cross sectional area in the
respective equation. This ratio has to fall within the specified code limits.

25
Design Procedure for Short Concentrically Loaded Columns
6. Calculate the needed area of longitudinal reinforcement ratio based on the adjusted
reinforced ratio and the chosen concrete dimensions.
7. From reinforcement tables, choose the number and diameters of needed reinforcing
bars. For rectangular sections, a minimum of four bars is needed, while a minimum
of six bars is used for circular columns.
8. Design the lateral reinforcement according to the type of column, either ties or
spirals.
9. Check whether the spacing between longitudinal reinforcing bars satisfies ACI
Code requirements.
10. Draw the designed section showing concrete dimensions and with required
longitudinal and lateral reinforcement.

26
Example 1
The cross section of a short axially loaded tied column is shown in the
figure. It is reinforced with 616mm bars. Calculate the design load
capacity of the cross section. Ties 8@25cm

Use fc =28 MPa and fy = 420 MPa.


25 616
Solution:
A 1206 40
g st 0.012 1.21%
A g 250 400 Figure [1]

min 1 % g 1.21% max 8% OK Sc=12.8 cm

Clear distance between bars Sc 25 616


40 2(4) 2(0.8) 3(1.6)
Sc 12.8cm
3 1 40
max 1.5 d b 2.4cm , 4cm <Sc 12.8cm
Only, one tie is required for the cross section
27
Example 1

The spacing between ties


16 db =16(1.6) = 25.4 cm S = 25 cm
48 ds = 48(0.8) = 38.4 cm S = 25 cm
smaller of b or d = 25 cm S = 25 cm

Thus, ACI requirements regarding reinforcement ratio, clear distance


between bars and tie spacing are all satisfied.

The design load capacity Pn


Pn 0.65(0.8) A g 0.85f c g f y 0.85f c

Pn 0.52A g 0.85f c ' g f y 0.85f c '


Pn 0.65(0.8) 400 250 0.85 28 0.0121 420 0.85 28
Pn 1487 kN
28
Example 2

Design a short tied column to support a factored concentric load


of 1000 kN, with one side of the cross section equals to 25 cm.

f c 30MPa f y 420MPa

Solution
Assume first that g 2%
Pu
Ag

0.65 0.8 0.85f c g f y 0.85f c

1000 103
Ag
0.65 0.8 0.85 30 0.02 420 0.85 30

29 A g 57594mm 2
Example 2

A g 57594mm 2
b 250mm
h 230mm
use column 25cm 25cm

Determine adjusted steel ratio


Pu 1
g
0.85f c
r A g f y 0.85f c
1000 103 1
g = 0.85(30) =0.0134
0.65 0.8 250 250 420 0.85(30)
0.01<g <0.08 OK
A s g bh 0.0134(250)(250) 835mm 2
30 Use 614 (A s,sup = 924 mm 2 )
Example 2
Check spacing
h (No. of bars/2) d b 2 cover 2 d stirrup
s
(No. of bars/2) 1
250 (6 / 2) 14 2 40 2(8)
56mm
3 1

max 1.5 d b 21mm , 40mm 56mm < 150mm OK

Stirrup design
Use 8 mm (for longitudinal bars with 14 mm < 30 mm)

16d b 16 14cm 224mm governs



s max min 48d stirrup 48 8 384mm
smaller of b or d 250mm

Use 8 mm @ 200 mm
31
Example 2 6 14 mm

8 mm @ 200 mm 250 mm

250 mm

32
Example 3

Design a short, spirally reinforced column to support a service


dead load of 800 kN and a service live load of 400 kN.
f c 28MPa f y 420MPa Use g 1%

Solution

Pu 1.20 PD 1.60 PL 1.2 800 1.6 400 1600kN


Pu
Ag

0.75 0.85 0.85f c g f y 0.85f c

1600 103
Ag
0.75 0.85 0.85 28 0.01 420 0.85 28
A g 90405mm 2
33
Example 3
360/N
A g 90405mm 2
Ag
for circular column D= =339mm
4
use column with D = 350 mm 0.5D


A s 0.01 (3502 ) 962mm 2
4
use 714 (A s,sup =1078 mm 2 )

Check spacing between longitudinal bars


360/N
D =350-2(40)-2(8)-14=240 mm,
N=7 2
360/N 51.43
S D'sin 240 sin 104.1mm
2 2 0.5D
Sc 104.1 14 90.1mm 1.5(14)=21mm
40mm OK
34
0.5Sc = 0.5D sin(360/N/2)
Example 3
Design the needed spiral, try 8
Dc 350 2(40) 270 mm
4 A sp 4 50
S
Ag fc' /4 350 2 28
0.45Dc 1 0.45 270 1

/4 270 420
2
Ac f y
S 36.3mm, taken as 35 mm (center to center)
Sc 35 8/2 8/2 27 mm,i.e within ACI code limit ( 25mm & 75mm)
Use 8mm spiral with a pitch of 35mm center to center.

35
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 12 Part I
Bond, development length, and splicing
Bond

2
Concept of Bond Stress

Bond stresses are existent whenever the tensile stress or force in a reinforcing bar
changes from point to point along the length of the bar in order to maintain equilibrium.
Without bond stresses, the reinforcement will pull out of the concrete.

Concrete

Reinforcing bar

PL/4
M
M+dM
avg
dx

Moment diagram

3
Concept of Bond Stress

F 0.0
T2 T1 Fbond
If this equation is not true (bond force Fbond is not strong enough), the bar will pull out

A bar f s2 f s1 avg A surface T1=fs1Ab db


=Bond stress
d 2
b
fs2 fs1 avg ( d b ) l
4

avg
f - f d
= s2 s1 b
l T2=fs2Ab

fs2=fs1+fs
4l

avg= average bond stress

4
Mechanism of Bond Transfer

A smooth bar embedded in concrete develops bond by adhesion between concrete &
reinforcement, and a small amount of friction.

This is different in a deformed bar. Once adhesion is lost at high bar stress and some
slight movement between the reinforcement and the concrete occurs, bond is then
provided by friction and bearing on the deformations of the bar. At much higher bar
stress, bearing on the deformations of the bar will be the only component contributing to
bond strength.

(a) Forces on bar


(b) Forces on concrete

5
Splitting cracks

The radial component of the bearing


force will cause circumferential
stress on the concrete that may
cause splitting that creates cracks.

6
Splitting cracks

Splitting of concrete may occur along the bars, either in vertical planes as in
figure (a) or in horizontal plane as in figure (b).

7
Splitting cracks

The load at which splitting failure develops is a function of :

The minimum distance from the bar to the surface of the concrete or to the
next bar. The smaller the distance, the smaller is the splitting load.

The tensile strength of the concrete. The higher the tensile strength, the
higher is the splitting resistance.

The average bond stress. The higher the average bond stress, the higher is the
splitting resistance.

If the concrete cover and bar spacing are large compared to the bar diameter,
a pullout failure can occur, where the bar and the ring of concrete between
successive deformations pullout along a cylindrical failure surface joining
the tips of the deformations.

8
Development Length

9
Development Length

The bars found to be needed at a section from design calculations have to be


embedded a certain distance into the concrete. This distance has to be equal or
larger than the development length (ld).

10
Development Length

The development length ld is that length of embedment necessary to develop the full
tensile strength of the bar (on both sides of sections where fy stress is required),
controlled by either pullout or splitting.

avg =
f s2 f s1 d b
4l
f s2 f s1 f y

f y db
ld , where avg,u is the value avg at bond failure
4 avg,u
11
Development Length of Deformed Bars in Tension

The development length for deformed bars in tension is given by

fy
ld d b 300 mm,
1.1 f c C K tr ACI Eq. 12-1

db
C K tr
where 2.5 ACI 12.2.3
db

where,
ld = development length
db = nominal diameter of bar
fy = specified yield strength of reinforcement
C = spacing or cover dimension (see next slide)
Ktr = transverse reinforcement index (see slide 12)
12 abgl = see next slides
Development Length of Deformed Bars in Tension [contd.]

C is the smaller of ACI 12.2.4


(a) the smallest distance measured from the center of the bar to the nearest concrete
surface
(b) one-half the center-to-center spacing of bars being developed.
is a bar location factor
(a) Horizontal reinforcement so placed that more than 30 cm of
fresh concrete is cast in the member below the development
length or splice. 1.3
(b) Other reinforcement.. 1.0
is a coating factor that reflects the adverse effects of epoxy coating
(a) Epoxy-coated bars or wires with cover less than 3db
or clear spacing less than 6db . 1.5
(b) All other epoxy-coated bars or wires............. 1.2
(c) Uncoated reinforcement 1.0

13 However, the product is not to be greater than 1.7.


Development Length of Deformed Bars in Tension [contd.]

ACI 12.2.4
is a reinforcement size factor that reflects better performance of the smaller diameter
reinforcement
(a) 20mm and smaller bars... 0.8
(b) 22mm and larger bars..... 1.0

is a lightweight aggregate concrete factor that reflects lower tensile strength of


lightweight concrete, & resulting reduction in splitting resistance.
(a) When lightweight aggregate concrete is used... 0.8
(b) When normal weight concrete is used... 1.0

14
Development Length of Deformed Bars in Tension [contd.]

Ktr is a transverse reinforcement index that represents the contribution of confining


reinforcement
40 Atr
K tr ACI Eq. 12-2
sn
where:
Atr = total cross sectional area of all transverse reinforcement within the spacing s,
which crosses the potential plane of splitting along the reinforcement being developed
within the development length
s = maximum center-to-center spacing of transverse reinforcement within development
length ld
n = number of LONGITUDINAL bars being developed along the plane of splitting.

Note: It is permitted to use Ktr= 0.0 as Atr


design simplification even if transverse
reinforcement is present.
Potential plane
of splitting
15
n=4
Development Length of Deformed Bars in Tension [contd.]

Excessive Reinforcement ACI 12.2.5


Reduction in development length is allowed where As provided > As required. the
reduction is given by
As required
Reduction factor
As provided
-Except as required for seismic design
-Good practice to ignore this factor, since the use of the structure may change over time.

Simplified Expression for Development Length

See ACI 12.2.2. This will not be used in this class

16
Example 1

Determine the development length in tension required for the uncoated bottom bars as
shown in the figure. If (a) Ktr is calculated (b) Ktr is assumed = 0.0
Use fc = 25 MPa normal weight concrete and fy = 420 MPa
(c) Check if space is available for bar development in the beam shown

60 cm
10@20
420

40 cm

Cover is 4 cm on all sides

Section A-A

17
Example 1

Determine the development length in tension required for the uncoated bottom bars as
shown in the figure. If (a) Ktr is calculated (b) Ktr is assumed = 0.0
Use fc = 25 MPa normal weight concrete and fy = 420 MPa
(c) Check if space is available for bar development in the beam shown

Solution:

60 cm
(a) Ktr is calculated 10@20
420
=1.0 for bars over concrete < 30 cm thick
=1.0 for uncoated bars 40 cm

=1.0 <1.7 OK Cover is 4 cm on all sides

=0.8 for 20mm,


=1.0 for normal weight concrete,
C the smallest of 40+10+(20/2)=60 mm
{[400-2(40)-2(10)-2(20/2)]/(3)}/(2)=46.7 mm
18 i.e., C is taken as 46.7 mm
Example 1 [contd.]

40A tr 40(2 79)


K tr 7.9 mm
sn (200)(4)
C K tr 46.7 7.9
2.73 2.5
db 20
C K tr

60 cm
i.e., use 2.5 10@20
db 420
fy
ld d b 300 mm
1.1 f c C K tr
40 cm

db Cover is 4 cm on all sides

420 (1.0)(1.0)(0.8)(1.0)
ld 20 489 mm 300 mm OK
1.1 25 2 .5

b) Assuming K tr 0.0
C K tr 467 0
2.33 2.5 OK
db 20
420 (1.0)(1.0)(0.8)(1.0)
ld 20 524 mm 300 mm OK
19 1.1 25 2.33
Example 1 [contd.]

(c) Check if space is available for bar development

60 cm
10@20
420

40 cm

Cover is 4 cm on all sides

Section A-A

Available length for bar development = 2000+ 150 40 = 2110 mm


> ld = 524 mm
OK

20
Development Length of Deformed Bars in Compression ACI 12.3
Shorter development lengths are required for compression than for tension since
flexural tension cracks are not present for bars in compression. In addition, there is
some bearing of the ends of the bars on concrete.

The development length ld for deformed bars in compression is computed as the product
of the basic development length ldc and applicable modification factors, but ld is not to
be less than 200 mm.
ld = ldc x applicable modification factors 200 mm.

The basic development length ldb for deformed bars in compression is given as


0.24 f y d b

ldc max ;0.043 f y d b

fc '

21
Development Length of Deformed Bars in Compression [contd.] ACI 12.3
Applicable Modification Factors
1. Excessive reinforcement factor =As required / As provided
2. Spirals or Ties: the modification factor for reinforcement, enclosed with spiral
reinforcement 6mm in diameter and 10 cm pitch or within 12mm ties spaced at
10 cm on center is given as 0.75

Development Lengths for Bundled Bars ACI 12.4


Development length of individual bars within a bundle, in tension or compression, is
taken as that for individual bar, increased 20% for three-bar bundle, and 33% for four-
bar bundle.
For determining the appropriate modification factors, a unit of bundled bars is treated as
a single bar of a diameter derived from the equivalent total area of bars.

22
Critical
section
ldh

Development of Standard Hooks in Tension

Hooks are used to provide additional anchorage


when there is insufficient length available
to develop a bar.

Development length ldh for deformed bars in tension terminating in a standard hook is
computed as the product of the basic development length lhb and applicable
modification factors, but ldh is not to be less than 8db, nor less than 150 mm.
ldh = lhb x applicable modification factors 15 cm or 8db.
The basic development length lhb for hooked bars is given as
0.24 e f y
ACI 12.5.1
lhb db
l fc '
For lightweight aggregate concrete, l = 0.75. ACI 12.5.2
For epoxy-coated reinforcement, e= 1.2.
Otherwise, l = 1.0, e= 1.0
23
Development of Standard Hooks in Tension [contd.]
ACI 12.5.3
Applicable Modification Factors
1. Concrete cover: for db 36mm, side cover (normal to plane of hook) 65 mm, and
for 90 degree hook, cover on bar extension beyond hook 50 mm, the modification
factor is taken as 0.7.

not less than 50 mm

65 mm

65 mm

24
Development of Standard Hooks in Tension [contd.]
ACI 12.5.3
Applicable Modification Factors
2. Excessive reinforcement factor =As required / As provided
3. Spirals or Ties: for db 36mm, hooks enclosed vertically or horizontally within ties
or stirrups spaced along the full development length ldh not greater than 3db , where db is
the diameter of the hooked bar, and the first tie or stirrup shall enclose the bent portion of
the hook, within 2db of the outside of the bend, the modification factor is taken as 0.8.

25
Development of Standard Hooks in Tension [contd.]
ACI 7.1
90-degree hook
Development length ldh is measured
from the critical section of the bar
to the out-side end or edge of the
hooks. Either a 90 or a 180-degree
hook, shown in the figure, may be used
ldh

Development of reinforcement- General Part (a)


* Hooks are not considered effective
in compression and may not be used 180-degree hook
as anchorage.
ACI 12.5.5

* The values of f c ' used in this 4db 65mm 10 through 25

lecture shall not exceed 8.3 MPa. 28 through 36

44 through 56

26
ACI 12.1.2 ldh

Part (b)
Development of Standard Hooks in Tension [contd.]
ACI 12.5.4
Confinement of hooks
For bars being developed by a standard hook at discontinuous ends of members with both
side cover and top (or bottom) cover over hook less than 65 mm, the hooked bar shall be
enclosed within ties or stirrups perpendicular to the bar being developed, spaced not
greater than 3db along ldh. The first tie or stirrup shall enclose the bent portion of the
hook, within 2db of the outside of the bend, where db is the diameter of the hooked bar.

27
Example 2
Determine the development length or anchorage required for the epoxy-coated top bars
of the beam shown in the figure. The beam frames into an exterior 80cm x 30cm
column (the bars extend parallel to the 80 cm side). Show the details if:
(a) If a 180-degree hook is used
(b) If a 90-degree hook is used
Use fc = 28 MPa and fy = 420 MPa 432

50 cm
12@15

Solution:
=1.3 for bars over concrete > 30 cm thick 40 cm

=1.5 for coated bars (take the larger of 1.2 and 1.5 conservatively)
=1.3x1.5 = 1.95 > 1.7 use 1.7
=1.0 for 32mm, =1.0 for normal weight concrete
C the smallest of 40+12+16=68 mm
{[400-2(40)-2(12)-32]/(3)}/(2)=44 mm
i.e., C is taken as 44 mm
28
Example 2 [contd.]

40Atr 2( 113 )
K tr 15.1 mm
sn ( 150 )( 4 )
C K tr 44 15 432
1.85 2.5

50 cm
OK
db 32 12@15
fy
ld d b 300 mm
1.1 f c C K tr

40 cm
db
420 ( 1.7 )( 1.0 )( 1.0 )
ld 32 2127 mm 300 mm OK
1.1 28 1 .85

Available length for bar development = 800 40 = 760 mm < ld = 2127 cm

Thus, a standard hook is required at column side

ldh = lhb x applicable modification factors 150 mm or 8db.


(use a factor 1.2 for epoxy-coated hooks. Modification factors are inapplicable)

0.24 e f y 0.24 1.2 420


l dh db 32 732 mm
l fc' 1.0 28
29
150mm 8( 32 ) 256mm OK
Example 2 [contd.]
ldh=732 mm
(b) If a 180-degree hook is used

4db =128 mm
Critical section
5db =160 mm
180o hook

(c) If a 90-degree hook is used ldh=732 mm


12db=384 mm

Critical section

30 90o hook
Splicing

31
Splices of Reinforcement
ACI 12.14
Splicing of reinforcement bars is necessary, either because the available bars are not
long enough, or to ease construction, in order to guarantee continuity of the
reinforcement according to design requirements.

Types of Splices:
(a) Welding (b) Mechanical connectors
(c) Lap splices (simplest and most economical method)

In a lapped splice, the force in one bar is transferred to the concrete, which transfers it to
the adjacent bar.
Splice length is the distance over which the two bars overlap.

Forces on bar at splice

32
Splice length
Splices of Reinforcement

Important note:
Lap splices have a number of disadvantages, including congestion of reinforcement at
the lap splice and development of transverse cracks due to stress concentrations. It is
recommended to locate splices at sections where stresses are low.

Types of Lap Splices:


1. Direct Contact Splice

T T
ls Direct contact

2. Non-Contact Splice (spaced) the distance between two bars cannot be greater than
1/5 of the splice length nor 15 cm
ACI 12.14.2.3
T
s
T
ls Bars are spaced

33
Splices of Deformed Bars in Tension
ACI 12.15
ACI code divides tension lap splices into two classes, A and B. The class of splice used
is dependent on the level of stress in the reinforcing and on the percentage of steel that
is spliced at particular location.

ACI 12.15.1
Class A:
A splice must satisfy the following two conditions to be in this class:
(a) the area of reinforcement provided is at least twice that required by analysis over the
entire length of the splice; and
(b) one-half or less of the total reinforcement is spliced within the required lap length.

Class B:
If conditions above are not satisfied classify as Class B.

The splice lengths for each class of splice are as follows:


Class A splice: 1.0 ld 300 mm
ACI 12.15.2
Class B splice: 1.3 ld 300 mm

34
Example 3

To facilitate construction of a cantilever retaining wall, the vertical reinforcement


shown in the figure, is to be spliced with dowels extending from the foundation.
Determine the required splice length when all reinforcement bars are spliced at the same
location.
Use fc = 30 MPa and fy = 420 MPa
16 @ 250
Cover = 7.5 cm

Solution:
Class B splice is required where ls = 1.3 ld
=1.0, =1.0 =1.0 < 1.7 OK
ls
=1.0, =1.0
C the smallest of 75+8=83 mm
250/2=125 mm 16 @ 250

i.e., C is taken as 83 mm Cover = 7.5 cm

Ktr =0.0, since no stirrups are used


35
Example 3 [contd.]
C K tr 83 0 C K tr
5.19 2.5 i .e., 2.5
db 16 db
420 ( 1.0 )( 1.0 )( 1.0 )
ld 16 446 mm
1.1 30 2.5
Required splice length ls 446( 1.3 ) 580 mm 300 OK

16 @ 25

ls=58 cm

16 @ 25

36
Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression
ACI 12.16
Bond behavior of compression bars is not complicated by the problem of transverse
tension cracking and thus compression splices do not require provisions as strict as
those specified for tension

Compression lap splice length shall be: ACI 12.16.1


0.071 fy db 300 mm for fy 420 MPa
(0.13 fy 24) db 300 mm for fy > 420 MPa

The computed splice length should be increase by 33% if fc<21 MPa

When bars of different size are lap-spliced in compression, splice length shall be the
larger of either development length of the larger bar, or splice length of the smaller bar.

ACI 12.16.2
ACI 12.15.3
37
Example 4

Design a compression lap splice for a tied column whose cross section is shown in the
figure when:
(a) 16 mm bars are used on both sides of the splice.
(b) 16 mm bars are lap spliced with 18 mm bars.
Use fc = 30 MPa and fy = 420 MPa

Solution:
(a) For bars of same 16 mm diameter
Splice length in compression and for fy =420 MPa
is equal to 0.071 fy db = 0.071 (420)(16)
= 477 mm >300 mm
taken as 480 mm

38
Example 4 [contd.]

(b) For bars of different diameters


The development length of the larger bar
ldc = ldb x applicable modification factors

0.24f y d b 0.24 420 18


331mm
l dc max fc' 30 333mm
0.043 f d 0.043 420 18=333mm
y b

Splice length of smaller diameter bar was calculated in part (a) as 477 mm. Thus, the
splice length is taken as 480 mm.

39
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 12 PART II
Bar cutoff
Bar cutoff

It is economical to cut unnecessary bars as shown in the scenario below.

2
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Example

3
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Example

4
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Example

5
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Example

6
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Using moment diagrams drawn to scale:

7
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Using moment envelopes drawn to scale:

8
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/11, +1/16, -1/11)

9
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/16, +1/14, -1/10)

10
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/24, +1/14, -1/10)

11
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: 0, +1/11, -1/10)

12
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Development length requirements

ACI 12.10.3
Reinforcement shall extend
beyond the point at which it is no
longer required to resist flexure
for a distance equal to d or 12db,
whichever is greater, except at
supports of simple spans and at
free end of cantilevers.
ACI 12.10.4
Continuing reinforcement shall
have an embedment length not
less than ld beyond the point
where bent or terminated tension
reinforcement is no longer
required to resist flexure.

13
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Development length requirements ACI 12.10.5


The ACI Code does not permit flexural reinforcement to be cutoff in a tension zone
unless at least one of the special conditions, shown below, is satisfied:

a. Factored shear force at the cutoff point does not exceed two-thirds of the design shear
strength, Vn .

b. Stirrup area exceeding that required for shear and torsion is provided along each
cutoff bar over a distance from the termination point equal to three-fourths of the
effective depth of the member. Excess stirrup area Av is not to be less than 0.41bwS /fy .
Spacing S is not to exceed d/8b where b is the ratio of area of reinforcement cutoff to
total area of tension reinforcement at the section.

c. For 36 mm bars and smaller, continuing reinforcement provides double the area
required for flexure at the cutoff point and factored shear does not exceed three-fourths
of the design shear strength, Vn .

14
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Development length requirements

Positive moment:
At least one-third the positive moment reinforcement in simple members and
one-fourth the positive moment reinforcement in continuous members shall
extend along the same face of member into the support. In beams, such
reinforcement shall extend into the support at least 150 mm. ACI 12.11.1

At simple supports and at points of inflection, positive moment tension


reinforcement shall be limited to a diameter such that
ACI 12.11.3
Mn is calculated assuming all reinforcement at the section to be stressed to fy;
Vu is calculated at the section;
la at a support shall be the embedment length beyond the center of support; or:
la at a point of inflection shall be limited to d or 12db, whichever is greater.

An increase of 30 percent in the value of Mn /Vu shall be permitted when the


15 ends of reinforcement are confined by a compressive reaction.
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Development length requirements

Positive moment:

ACI 12.11.3

16
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Development length requirements

Positive moment:

17
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Development length requirements

Positive moment:

18
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Development length requirements

Positive moment:

19
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Development length requirements

Negative moment:
Negative moment reinforcement in a continuous, restrained cantilever member, or in
any member of rigid frame, is to be anchored in or through the supporting member
by development length, hooks, or mechanical anchorage.
ACI 12.12.1
At least one-third the total tension reinforcement provided for negative moment at a
support shall have an embedment length beyond the point of inflection not less than
d, 12db, or ln/16, whichever is greater
ACI 12.12.3

20
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 12 PART III


Detailing of reinforcement
References for detailing

ACI-318

2
References for detailing

ACI-315

ACI Detailing Manual

3
References for detailing

CRSI Design Handbook

4
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent

Development length requirements

Positive moment:
At least one-third the positive
moment reinforcement in simple
members and one-fourth the
positive moment reinforcement in
continuous members shall extend
along the same face of member into
the support. In beams, such
reinforcement shall extend into the
support at least 150 mm.
Negative moment:
At least one-third the total tension
reinforcement provided for negative
moment at a support shall have an
embedment length beyond the point
of inflection not less than d, 12db, or
ln/16, whichever is greater
5
Typical details for one way solid slabs

6
Requirements for using standard detailing for beams and one
way slabs:
ACI 8.3.3
There are two or more spans.
Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans
not greater than the shorter by more than 20 percent.
Loads are uniformly distributed.
Unfactored live load does not exceed three times the unfactored dead
load.
Members are of similar section dimensions along their lengths
(prismatic).

7
Typical details for one way solid slabs
Straight bars

8
Typical details for one way solid slabs
Straight bars

9
Typical details for one way solid slabs
Straight bars

10
Typical details for one way solid slabs
Bent-up bars

11
Typical details for beams
Straight bars

12
Typical details for beams
Straight bars

13
Typical details for beams
Straight bars

14
Typical details for columns

15
Typical details for columns

16
17
18
19
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 13
Design of isolated footings
Footing
Introduction
Footings are structural elements used to support columns and walls and transmit their
loads to the underlying soil without exceeding its safe bearing capacity below the
structure.
Loads

B B Column

L L Beam
P P
M

Footing

Soil

2
Footing
Introduction
The design of footings calls for the combined efforts of geotechnical and structural
engineers.

The geotechnical engineer, on one hand, conducts the site investigation and on the light
of his findings, recommends the most suitable type of foundation and the allowable
bearing capacity of the soil at the suggested foundation level.

The structural engineer, on the other hand, determines the concrete dimensions and
reinforcement details of the approved foundation.

3
Types of Footing
Isolated Footings
Isolated or single footings are used to support single columns. This is one of the most
economical types of footings and is used when columns are spaced at relatively long
distances. P kN

B C2
C1

4
Types of Footing
Isolated Footings

Shapes of isolated footings


5
Types of Footing
Isolated Footings

Shapes of isolated footings


6
Types of Footing
Wall Footings
Wall footings are used to support structural walls that carry loads from other floors or to
support nonstructural walls.
W kN/m

Secondary reinft

Main reinft.

7
Types of Footing
Combined Footings
Combined footings are used when two columns are so close that single footings cannot
be used. Or, when one column is located at or near a property line. In such a case, the
load on the footing will be eccentric and hence this will result in an uneven distribution
of load to the supporting soil.
P1 P2
P2 kN

L
PP1 kN
1 kN

B C2 C2
C1 C1

L1 L2 L2

8
Types of Footing
Combined Footings
The shape of a combined footing in plan shall be such that the centroid of the
foundation plan coincides with the centroid of the loads in the columns. Combined
footings are either rectangular or trapezoidal. Rectangular footings are favored due to
their simplicity in terms of design and construction. However, rectangular footings are
not always practicable because of the limitations that may be imposed on their
longitudinal projections beyond the two columns or the large difference that may exist
between the magnitudes of the two column loads. Under these conditions, the provision
of a trapezoidal footing is more economical.

9
Types of Footing
Continuous Footings
Continuous footings support a row of three or more columns.

P1 P2 P3 P4 P4 kN

P3 kN

P2 kN
L
P1 kN

10
Types of Footing
Strap (Cantilever) footings
Strap footings consists of two separate footings, one under each column, connected
together by a beam called strap beam. The purpose of the strap beam is to prevent
overturning of the eccentrically loaded footing. It is also used when the distance
between this column and the nearest internal column is long that a combined footing
will be too narrow.
P2 kN
P1 P2
property line

Strap Beam
P1 kN

L1 L2

B1 C2 C2 B2
C1 C1

11
Types of Footing
Mat (Raft) Footings
Mat footings consist of one footing usually placed under the entire building area. They
are used when soil bearing capacity is low, column loads are heavy and differential
settlement for single footings are very large or must be reduced.

12
Types of Footing
Pile caps

Pile caps are thick slabs used to tie a group of piles together to support and transmit
column loads to the piles.
P

13
Footing Loading
Distribution of Soil Pressure
The distribution of soil pressure under a footing is a function of the type of soil, the
relative rigidity of the soil and the footing, and the depth of the foundation at the level
of contact between footing and soil.

P P P

Centroidal axis

L L L

Footing on sand Footing on clay Equivalent uniform distribution

For design purposes, it is common to assume the soil pressure is uniformly distributed.
The pressure distribution will be uniform if the centroid of the footing coincides with
the resultant of the applied loads.

14
Footing Loading
Pressure Distribution Below Footings
The maximum intensity of loading at the base of a foundation which causes failure of
soil is called ultimate bearing capacity of soil, denoted by qu.
The allowable bearing capacity of soil is obtained by dividing the ultimate bearing
capacity of soil by a factor of safety on the order of 2.50 to 3.0.

The allowable soil pressure for soil may be either gross or net pressure permitted on the
soil directly under the base of the footing.

The gross pressure represents the total stress in the soil created by all the loads above
the base of the footing. For design, the net soil pressure is used instead of the gross
pressure value.
P

Df
hc

15
Footing Loading
Concentrically Loaded Footings
If the resultant of the loads acting at the base of the footing coincides with the centroid
of the footing area, the footing is concentrically loaded and a uniform distribution of
soil pressure is assumed in design.

Centroidal axis

P/A

16
Footing Loading
Eccentrically Loaded Footings
Footings are often designed for both axial load and moment. Moment may be caused by
lateral forces due to wind or earthquake, and by lateral soil pressures.

A footing is eccentrically loaded if the supported column is not concentric with the
footing area or if the column transmits at its juncture with the footing not only a vertical
load but also a bending moment.

P
P
e
M
Centroidal axis Centroidal axis

y y
L L

P/A P/A
Pey/I My/I

17
Design of Isolated Footings

Deformation of isolated footings

18
Design of Isolated Footings

Deformation of isolated footings

19
Design of Isolated Footings

The design of isolated rectangular footings is detailed in the following steps:

1- Select a trial footing depth.


Depth of footing above reinforcement is not to be less than 15 cm.
ACI 15.7

Note that 7.5 cm of clear concrete cover is required if concrete is cast against
soil.
ACI 7.7.1

20
Design of Isolated Footings

2- Evaluate the net allowable soil pressure:


qall (net) = qall (gross) - c hc - s (Df - hc)
P

Df
hc

qall(net)
where
hc is the assumed footing depth,
df is the distance from ground surface to the contact surface between footing base and soil,
c is the weight density of concrete, and
s is the weight density of soil on top of footing.

21
Design of Isolated Footings
3- Establish the required base area of the footing
Base area of footing is determined from unfactored forces transmitted by footing to soil
and the allowable soil pressure evaluated through principles of soil mechanics.
PD PL
Areq
qall (net ) ACI 15.2.2

where PD and PL are column service dead and live loads, respectively.
Select appropriate L, and B values, if possible, use a square footing to achieve greatest
economy.

4- Evaluate the net factored soil pressure:


1.2PD 1.6PL ACI 15.2.1
qu (net )
LB

22
Design of Isolated Footings

5- Check footing thickness for punching shear.


When loads are applied over small areas of slabs and footings with no beams, punching
failure may occur. The sloping failure surface takes the shape of a truncated pyramid in
case of rectangular columns, and a truncated cone in case of circular columns.

The ACI Code assumes that failure takes place on vertical planes located at distance d/2
from the faces of the column.
ACI 11.11.1.2

23
Design of Isolated Footings

5- Check footing thickness for punching shear [contd.]


The depth of the footing must be checked so that the shear capacity of the concrete
equals or exceeds the critical shear forces produced by factored loads
Vu Vc
The critical punching shear forceVu can be evaluated as follows

Vu qu (net )L B C1 d C2 d
C1 + d

C1
ACI 11.11.1.2
C2 + d

C2

B
L

Since there are two layers of reinforcement, an average value of d may be used:
d = h 7.5cm db , where db is the bar diameter. 24
Design of Isolated Footings
5- Check footing thickness for punching shear [contd.]
Punching shear force resisted by concrete Vc is given as the smallest of

2
V C 0.17 1 f c 'bo d
C1 + d

c
V C 0.33 f c 'bo d C1

C2 + d

C2

B
s d
V C 0.083 2 f c 'bo d
b
L
c = long side/short side of column,
s = 40 for interior, 30 for side, and 20 for corner columns,
bo =length of critical perimeter around the column = 2[(C1+d)+(C2+d)]
Interior
ACI 11.11.2.1

Corner Exterior 25
Design of Isolated Footings

6- Check footing thickness for beam shear in each direction.


If Vu Vc, thickness will be adequate for resisting beam shear.
The critical section for beam shear is located at distance d from column faces.

In the short direction: Critical section for beam shear


(short direction)
The factored shear force is given by x

L C 1
Vu qu (net ) B x qu (net ) B d
2 C1
d

C2

B
The factored beam shear capacity of the
concrete is given as
L
V c 0.17 f c ' B d

ACI 11.2.1.1
26
Design of Isolated Footings

6- Check footing thickness for beam shear in each direction [contd.]

In the long direction:


The factored shear force is given by

Critical section for beam


Shear (long direction)
B C 2
Vu qu (net ) L y qu (net ) L d
C1

C2
2

B
d
The factored beam shear capacity of the

y
concrete is given as L

V c 0.17 f c ' L d ACI 11.2.1.1

Increase footing thickness if necessary until the condition Vu Vc is satisfied.

27
Design of Isolated Footings
7-Compute the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction.
The footing is designed as rectangular-section beam in both directions. The critical
section for bending is located at the face of the column.
ACI 15.4.2 Critical section for moment

Reinforcement in the long direction: (L-C1)/2

B L C1
2

M u qu (net )
2 2 C1

C2

B
0.85f c 2M u
1 1 2

fy
0.85 f c B d
L
As ,req B d
As ,min 0.0018Bh As , req
ACI 15.4.1
ACI 10.5.4
ACI 7.12.2.1 28
Design of Isolated Footings
7-Compute the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction [contd.]

Reinforcement in the short direction

Critical section for moment


L B C2
2

M u qu (net ) C1
2 2

C2

B
(B-C2)/2
0.85f c 2M u
1 1 2

fy 0.85 f L d L
c

As ,req L d
ACI 15.4.1
As ,min 0.0018Lh As ,req

ACI 10.5.4
ACI 7.12.2.1
29
Design of Isolated Footings

7-Compute the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction [contd.]


For square footings, the reinforcement is identical in both directions.
For rectangular footings, the reinforcement in the long direction is uniformly
distributed. However, a portion of the total reinforcement in the short direction, sAs is
distributed uniformly over a band width (centered on centerline of column) as shown in
the figure. Remainder of reinforcement required in the short direction, (1 s)As, shall
be distributed uniformly outside the center band width of the footing.
2 Band width
s
1

where long side of footing B



short side of footing

B
L
ACI 15.4.4
30
Design of Isolated Footings

8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete


All forces applied at the base of a column or wall must be transferred to the
footing by bearing on concrete and/or by reinforcement.
ACI 15.8.1

Bearing on concrete for column and footing must not exceed the concrete
bearing strength.
ACI 15.8.1.1
Pn Pu

Otherwise, the joint would fail by crushing of the concrete at the bottom of the
column where the column bars are no longer effective or by crushing the
concrete in the footing under the column.

Pn min Pn ,c ; Pn ,f
31
Design of Isolated Footings

8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete [contd.]


For a supported column, the allowed bearing capacity Pn,c is

Pn ,c 0.85f cA1 ACI 10.14.1

For a supporting footing where the supporting surface is wider on all sides than the
loaded area, the allowed bearing capacity Pn,f is


A2

Pn ,f min 0.85f cA1 ; 2 0.85f cA1

A1

= strength reduction factor for bearing = 0.65
A1= column cross-sectional area
A2= area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered
wedge contained wholly within the footing and having for its upper base the loaded
area, and having side slopes of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal (see next slide)
32
Design of Isolated Footings
8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete [contd.]

A2= area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge
contained wholly within the footing and having for its upper base the loaded area, and
having side slopes of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal

33
Design of Isolated Footings
8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete [contd.]

A2= area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge
contained wholly within the footing and having for its upper base the loaded area, and
having side slopes of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal

34
Design of Isolated Footings

8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete [contd.]


Dowel Reinforcement:

If Pn Pu :
Reinforcement in the form of dowel bars must be provided to transfer the
excess load.
Pu Pn ACI 15.8.1.2
As ,req
f y
The dowel bars are usually extended into the
footing, bent at the ends, and tied to the main
footing reinforcement.

35
Design of Isolated Footings

8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete [contd.]

Minimum Dowel Reinforcement:

If Pn Pu ::
Use minimum dowel reinforcement.

As ,min 0.005A1 ACI 15.8.2.1

36
Design of Isolated Footings
9- Check for anchorage of the reinforcement

> ls (compn.)

10-Prepare neat design drawings showing footing dimensions and provided


reinforcement. 37
Example
Design an isolated rectangular footing to support an interior column 4040cm in cross
section and carry a dead load of 800 kN and a live load of 600 kN. One of the
dimensions of the footing must not exceed 3.2 m.
PD= 800 kN
Use fc= 25 MPa and fy = 420 MPa, PL= 600 kN

qall (gross) = 200 kN/m2, soil =17 kN/m3, conc =25 kN/m3
Df=1.0

40
40

38
Example
Solution
1- Select a trial footing depth:
Assume that the footing is 55 cm thick.
2- Evaluate the net allowable soil pressure:
qall (net) = qall (gross) - s (Df - hc) - c hc
qall net 200 ( 1 0.55 ) 17 0.55 25 178.6 kN/m2

3- Establish the required base area of the footing :


P P 800 600
40
A req D L 7.839 m 2

245
40
q all (net) 178.6
7.84
Let L 3.20 m , B 2.45 m
3.20 320
Use 320x245x55 cm footing
4- Evaluate the net factored soil pressure
Pu 1.2PD 1.6PL 1.2 800 1.6 600 1920 kN
Pu 1920
q u net 244.9 kN /m 2
LB 3.2 2.45 39
40+45.9
Example

40+45.9

245
5- Check footing thickness for punching shear:
Average effective depth d avg 55-7.5-1.6 45.9cm
320
bo 2[ 40 45.9 40 45.9 ] 343.6 cm
Vu 244.9 3.2 2.45 0.40 0.459 0.40 0.459 1740 kN
VC is the smallest of
0.33 f c ' b o d 0.75 0.33 25 3436 459 1952 kN
2 2
0.17 f c ' 1 b o d 0.75 0.17 25 1 3436 459 3016 kN
c 0.4/0.4
s d 40 459
0.083 f c ' 2 b
o d 0.75 0.083 25 2 3436 459 3605 kN
b o 3436
VC 1952 kN Vu 1740 kN OK

i.e. footing thickness is adequate for resisting punching shear.

40
Example
6- Check footing thickness for beam shear in each direction:
In short direction

Vc 0.75 0.17 25 2450 459 717 kN 45.9

245
Vu is located at distance d from face of column
3.2 0.4
Vu 244.9 2.45 0.459 565 kN
2
320
Vc= 717 kN > Vu= 565 kN OK

In long direction

Vc 0.75 0.17 25 3200 459 936 kN

245
45.9
Vu is located at distance d from face of column

2.45 0.4
Vu 244.9 3.2 0.459 444 kN

320
2
Vc= 936 kN > Vu= 444 kN OK
41
Example
7- Calculate the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction:
a- Reinforcement in the long direction:
The critical section for bending is shown in the figure Critical section for moment

1.4
B L C1 2.45 3.2 0.4
2 2

M u q u net 244.9
2 2 2 2
588 kN .m

245
0.85 25 2 588 106
1- 1- 2
420 0.9
0.85 25 2450 459 320

0.0031 A s 0.0031 459 2450 3500 mm 2


24.49 x 2.45

A s,min 0.0018 550 2450 2430 mm 2


A s,req 3500 mm 2 2314mm in long direction

42
Example
7- Calculate the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction:
b- Reinforcement in the short direction:
The critical section for bending is shown in the figure

L B C2 3.2 2.45 0.4


2 2

M u q u net 244.9
2 2 2 2
412 kN .m
Critical section for moment

245
0.85 25 2 412 106

1.025
1- 1- 2
420 0.9 0.85 25 3200 459 320

0.0016 A s 0.0016 459 3200 2411mm 2

24.49 x 2.8
1.025
A s,min 0.0018 550 3200 3170 mm 2
A s,req 317 0 mm 2

43
Example
7- Calculate the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction:
b- Reinforcement in the short direction:
The distribution of the reinforcement is as follows:
L 3.2
1.3
42.5 Width band =245 42.5

B 2.45
2
Central band reinft. As
1

214 B
1814 B
214 B

245
2
3170 2757 mm 2

1.3 1
320
Use 18 14 mm in the central band.
3170 2756
For each of the side bands, A s 207 mm 2

2
Use 214 mm in each of the two side bands.

44
Example
8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete

For the column


A1 400 400 160000mm 2
Pn ,c 0.85f cA1 0.65( 0.85 25 160000 ) 2210 103 N 2210kN
For the footing

In short direcion: 1025mm 1100mm Use 1025 mm

1400

1100
245

h= 550
1025

1
320
45
Example
8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete

A 2 400 2 1025 400 2 1025 6002500 mm 2


A 2
Pn ,f min 0.85f cA1 ; 2 0.85f cA1
A1
6002500
Pn ,f min 2210 ; 2 2210 4420kN
160000
Pn min Pn ,c ; Pn ,f min 2210; 4420 2210kN Pu 1920 kN
Use minimum dowel reinforcement
1025 + 400+ 1025
1025 + 400+ 1025

46
Example
8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete

Minimum dowel reinforcement

As ,min 0.005A1 0.005 400 400 800mm 2

Use 416, As,sup = 804 mm2

47
Example
9- Check for anchorage of the reinforcement
Bottom longitudinal reinforcement (14mm)
=1.0 for bottom bars, =1.0 for uncoated bars
1.4
=1.0 <1.7 OK
=0.8 for 14mm, =1.0 for normal weight concrete
C the smallest of 7.5+0.7=8.3 cm

245
[245-2(7.5)-1.4]/(22)/(2)=5.2 cm
i.e., C is taken as 5.2 cm 320
C K tr 5.2 0 C K tr
3.7 2.5 i.e.,use 2.5
db 1.4 db
420 (1.0)(1.0)(0.8)(1.0)
ld 1.4 34 cm
1.1 25 2.5

Available length in long direction =140-7.5=132.5 > 34 cm

48
Example
9- Check for anchorage of the reinforcement
Bottom reinforcement in short direction (14mm)
=1.0 for bottom bars, =1.0 for uncoated bars
=1.0 <1.7 OK
=0.8 for 14mm, =1.0 for normal weight concrete

245
C the smallest of 7.5+0.7=8.3 cm

1.025
[320-2(7.5)-1.4]/(19)/(2)=8 cm
i.e., C is taken as 5.2 cm 320

C K tr 8 0 C K tr
5.7 2.5 i.e.,use 2.5
db 1.4 db
420 (1.0)(1.0)(0.8)(1.0)
ld 1.4 34 cm
1.1 25 2.5

Available length in short direction =102.5-7.5=95 > 34 cm

49
Example
9- Check for anchorage of the reinforcement
Dowel reinforcement (16mm):

0.24f y d b 0.24 420 16


323mm
l dc max fc' 25 323mm 200mm
0.043 f d 0.043 420 16=289mm
y b
Available length = 550-75-14-14 = 447 mm > 323 mm OK

Column reinforcement splices:


Considering that the column is reinforced with 16 bars
ls 0.071f y d b 0.071 420 16 478 mm 300 mm
taken as 48cm > ls (compn.)

50
Example
10- Prepare neat design drawings showing footing dimensions and provided
reinforcement

48cm
55 cm 245 (1814)
3.20 m

214 B
214 B

1814 B

2.45 m
2314 B

42.5 Width band =245 42.5

51
Reinforced Concrete Design I

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 14
Staircase Design
Stair Types

2
Stair Types

3
Stair Types

4
Stair Types

5
Technical terms
Going: horizontal upper portion of a step.
Rise: vertical distance between two consecutive treads.
Flight: a series of steps provided between two landings.
Landing: a horizontal slab provided between two flights.
Waist: the least thickness of a stair slab.

6
Technical terms
Winder: radiating or angular tapering steps.
Soffit: the bottom surface of a stair slab.
Nosing: the intersection of the going and the riser.
Headroom: the vertical distance from a line connecting the nosings of
all treads and the soffit above.

7
General Design Requirements

8
Stair type based on the structural loading type

Simply supported stair Simply supported stair


(transversely supported) (longitudinally supported)

9 Cantilever stair
Design of transversely supported stairs

Loading:
a. Dead load:
The dead load includes own weight of the step, own weight of the waist
slab, and surface finishes on the steps and on the soffit.

b. Live Load:
Live load is taken as building design live load plus 1.5 kN/m2, with a
maximum value of 5 kN/m2.

10
Design of transversely supported stairs
Direction of bending

Main reinforcement

Shrinkage reinforcement

11 Direction of bending
Design of transversely supported stairs
Design for Shear and Flexure:
Each step is designed for shear and
flexure as if it is a beam. Main
reinforcement runs in the transverse
direction at the bottom side of the t
steps while shrinkage reinforcement
runs at the bottom side of the slab in
the longitudinal direction. Since the
step is not rectangular, the effective
depth d is found by an equivalent
rectangular section that can be used
with an average height equal to: R
havg

12
t
Design of transversely supported stairs
Example 1
Design a straight flight stair in a residential building
supported on reinforced concrete walls 1.5 m apart (center
to center), given:
L.L = 3 kN/m2; covering material = 0.5 kN/m; The risers
are 16 cm and goings are 30 cm; fc=25 MPa, fy= 420 MPa

13
Loads and Analysis
l 1.5
t 0.075m
20 20
t

0.075 0.16
have 0.165m
0.30
0.34 2
D.L(O.W) =0.340.075 25 + (1/2) 0.16 0.3 25=1.24 kN/m
D.L (covering material) = 0.5 kN/m
0.3
D.L (total) = 1.74 kN/m 0.16
L.L =30.3 =0.9 kN/m
0.302 0.162 0.34

1.5 m
14
Shear diagram

Moment diagram

15
Design for moment
M u 1kN .m
d 165 20 6 139mm
bw 300mm
0.85 f c ' 2M u
1 1
fy 0.85 f c ' b d 2
0.85 25 2 1106
1 1 2
0.0005

420
0.9 0.85 25 300 139
A s 0.0005 300 139 20.9mm 2
A s ,min 0.0018 300 165 89.1mm 2 A s
A s A s ,min 89.1mm 2
Use 112 for each step

16
Design for shear
V C 0.75 0.17 25 139 300 /1000 26kN V u 2.65kN OK

17
Design of longitudinally supported stairs

Direction of bending

Shrinkage reinforcement

Main reinforcement

18
Design of longitudinally supported stairs

19
Design of longitudinally supported stairs
Deflection Requirement:
Since a flight of stairs is stiffer than a slab of thickness equal to the waist t,
minimum required slab depth is reduced by 15 %.
Effective Span:
The effective span is taken as the horizontal distance between centerlines of
supporting elements.

n = number of goings

X = Width of
supporting landing slab
at one end of the stairs
slab

Y = Width of
supporting landing slab
at the other end of the
20 stairs slab.
Design of longitudinally supported stairs
Deflection Requirement:
Since a flight of stairs is stiffer than a slab of thickness equal to the waist t,
minimum required slab depth is reduced by 15 %.
Effective Span:
The effective span is taken as the horizontal distance between centerlines of
supporting elements.

n = number of goings

X = Width of
supporting landing slab
at one end of the stairs
slab

Y = Width of
supporting landing slab
at the other end of the
21 stairs slab.
Design of longitudinally supported stairs
Loading:
a. Dead Load:
The dead load, which can be calculated on horizontal plan, includes:
Own weight of the steps.
Own weight of the slab.
Surface finishes on the flight and on the landings.
Note: For flight load calculations, the part of load acting on slope is to be increased
by dividing it by cos. This is because analysis for moment and shear is conducted on
the horizontal span of the flight, but the load is that carried on the inclined span.
P
P= wo.w.Linc

.Linc

22
w=P/L= wo.w.Linc/L= wo.w./cos
.L
Design of longitudinally supported stairs

Loading:

b. Live Load:
Live load is taken as the building design live load plus 1.5 kN/m2, with a
maximum value of 5 kN/m2. Live load is always given on the horizontal
projection.

23
Design of longitudinally supported stairs
Joint detail:
The stairs slab is designed for maximum shear and flexure. Main
reinforcement runs in the longitudinal direction, while shrinkage
reinforcement runs in the transverse direction. Special attention has to be
paid to reinforcement detail at opening joints.

24
Design of longitudinally supported stairs

Example 2
Design the U- stair in a residential building shown in the
figure, given:
L.L = 3 kN/m2; covering material = 2 kN/m2; The rises are 16
cm and goings are 30 cm, fc=25 MPa, fy= 420 MPa

25
Loads and Analysis

l 525
t 0.85 22cm
20 20

cos() = 0.3/ 0.34 = 0.88


Take a unit strip along the span:
D.L (slab) = 0.221.025/0.88 =6kN/m
0.3
D.L (step) = (1/2) 0.161.0 25=2 kN/m 0.16
D.L (covering material) = 21.0=2 kN/m 0.34

D.L (flight) = 10 kN/m


D.L (landing) = 8 kN/m
L.L =3 1.0=3 kN/m

Wu (flight) = 1.2(10)+1.6(3)=16.8kN/m
Wu (landing) = 1.2(8)+1.6(3)=14.4kN/m
26
Moment and shear diagram
16.8kN/m
14.4kN/m 14.4kN/m

27
Design for moment
M u 52.2kN .m
d 22 2 0.6 19.4cm 194mm
bw 1000mm

0.85 25 2 52.2 106


1 1 2
0.0037

420
0.85 0.9 25 1000 194
A s 0.0037 1000 194 718mm 2
A s ,min 0.0018 1000 220 396mm 2 A s OK
Use 812

(22)=3.96 cm2/m

Design for shear


28
V C 0.75 0.17 25 194 1000 / 1000 127.3kN V u 38.25kN OK
29
Design of quarter-turn stairs

A landing may be shared on two different stair slabs. The load of the shared
landing can be assumed to be divided equally and each stair slab carries on
30 half.
Design of stair beams

Ls ws

P
P=wsLs/2
w=P/(L/2)

31
L/2
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 0
Syllabus
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Instructor Dr. Nader Okasha.

Email nao204@lehigh.edu

Office Hours As needed.

2
Reinforced Concrete Design II

This course is only offered for students who have


passed concrete design I.

If you dont meet this criteria you will not be


allowed to continue this course.

3
Reinforced Concrete Design II

References:
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and
commentary (ACI 318M-08). American Concrete Institute,
2008.

Design of Reinforced Concrete. 7th edition, McCormac, J.C.


and Nelson, J.K., 2006.

Reinforced Concrete Design. By Dr. Sameer Shihada.

4
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Additional references (internationally recognized books in


reinforced concrete design):

Reinforced Concrete, A fundamental Approach. Edward Nawy.

Design of Concrete Structure. Nilson A. et al.

Reinforced Concrete Design. Kenneth Leet.

Reinforced Concrete: Mechanics and Design. James K. Wight,


and James G. MacGregor.
5
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Course outline
Week Topic
Analysis and design of beams and two way slabs:
1 -Syllabus and course policies.
-Analysis of continuous beams in single and multistory
2 structures.
-Introduction to ETABS.
-Introduction to two way structural systems.
3
-Calculation of the depth of two way slabs.
4 -Direct design method (DDM).
5 -Equivalent frame method (EFM)
-Design of hollow block and ribbed slabs using coefficient
6
methods.
7 -Load transfer in two way slabs
8 -Midterm. 6
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Course outline
Week Topic
Analysis and design of columns:
9 -Analysis of column cross sections using strain compatibility.
10,11 -Design of short columns subjected to axial load and bending.

12,13 -Design of slender columns.


13 -Design of columns subjected to biaxial moments
Design of footings:
-Design of eccentrically loaded single footings.
14,15
-Design of combined footings.
16 -Final.

7
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Grading

Course work 20%


Mid-term exam 20%
Final exam 60%

8
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Exam Policy

Mid-term exam:
Open book.

Final exam:
Open book.

9
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Homework Policy

Show all your assumptions and work details. Prepare neat


sketches showing the reinforcement and dimensions.
Marking will consider primarily neatness of presentation,
completeness and accuracy of results.

You may get the HW points if you copy the solution from
other students. However, you will have lost your chance in
practicing the concepts through doing the HW. This will lead
you to loosing points in the exams, which you could have
gained if you did your HWs on your own.

No late HWs will be accepted.


10
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Policy towards cell-phone use

11
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Policy towards discipline during class

Zero tolerance will be practiced.

No talking with other students is allowed.

Raise your hand before answering or asking questions.

Leaving during class is not allowed (especially for


answering the cell-phone) unless a previous permission is
granted.

Violation of discipline rules may have you dismissed from


class and jeopardize your participation points. 12
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Policy towards missed classes

Any collectively missed class MUST be made up.

A collectively missed class will be made up either on a


Thursday or during the discussion lecture.

An absence from a lecture will loose you attendance points,


and the lecture will not be repeated for you. You are on your
own. You may use the lecture videos.

No late students will be allowed in class.

Anything mentioned in class is binding. No excuse for not


being there or not paying attention. 13
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Units used in class

In all equations, the input and output units are as follows:

Distance (L,b,d,h): mm
Area (Ac,Ag,As): mm2
Volume (V): mm3
Force (P,V,N): N
Moment (M): N.mm
Stress (fy, fc): N/mm2 = MPa = 106 N/m2
Pressure (qs): N/mm2
Distributed load per unit length (wu): N/mm
Distributed load per unit area (qu): N/mm2
Weight per unit volume (g): N/mm3 14
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Units used in class

However, these quantities may be presented as

Distance (L,b,d,h): cm , m
Area (Ac,Ag,As): cm2, m2
Volume (V): cm3, m3
Force (P,V,N): kN
Moment (M): kN.m
Pressure (qs): kN/m2
Distributed load per unit length (wu): kN/m
Distributed load per unit area (qu): kN/m2
Weight per unit volume (g): kN/m3
15
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Unit conversions
1 m = 102 cm = 103 mm
1 m2 = 104 cm2 = 106 mm2
1 m3 = 106 cm3 = 109 mm3
1 kN = 103 N
1 kN.m = 106 N.mm
1 kN/m2 = 10-3 N/mm2
1 kN/m3 = 10-6 N/mm3

You MUST specify the unit of each result you obtain

16
Reinforced Concrete Design II

ACI Equations
The equations taken from the ACI code will be indicated throughout the
slides by their section or equation number in the code provided in
shading.

Examples:
Ec 4700 f c ACI 8.5.1

f r 0.62 f c ACI Eq. 9-10

Some of the original equations may have included the symbol l = 1.0
for normal weight concrete and omitted in slides.

17
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Advices for excelling in this course:

Keep up with the teacher and pay attention in class.

Study the lectures up to date.

Re-do the lecture examples.

Look at additional resources.

DO YOUR HOMEWORK!!!!!

18
Reinforced Concrete Design II

ENJOY THE COURSE!!

19
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 1
Analysis of continuous beams in single
and multistory structures.
Continuity in beams
Continuity tends to reduce the maximum moment on a beam and makes
it stiffer.

Indeterminate analysis is needed to solve for the internal forces and


deflections.

For statically determinate beams, load arrangement is often obvious it


is not for continuous beams.

Some loads are fixed in their location and/or distribution, others can be
everywhere, somewhere or no where.

Influence lines can be used to determine where to place moveable loads. 2


Continuous beams in single story
structures:

1- Analysis by computer

3
Continuity in beams Influence lines

Qualitative Influence Lines

The Muller-Breslau principle states:

The influence line for a function (reaction,


shear, moment) is to the same scale as the
deflected ) shape of the beam when the beam is
acted on by the function.

4
Continuity in beams Influence lines

Qualitative Influence Lines

The Muller-Breslau principle:

Influence line for positive moment at a point in a beam:

5
Continuity in beams Influence lines

Qualitative Influence Lines

The Muller-Breslau principle:

Influence line for positive moment at a point in a beam:

6
Continuity in beams Influence lines

Qualitative Influence Lines

The Muller-Breslau principle:

Influence line for positive moment at a point in a beam:

7
Continuity in beams Influence lines

Qualitative Influence Lines

The Muller-Breslau principle:

Influence line for positive moment at a point in a beam:

8
Continuity in beams Influence lines

Qualitative Influence Lines

9
Continuity in beams Load patterns
Load Patterns using Qualitative Influence Lines

Alternate span loading

Adjacent span loading 10


Continuity in beams Load patterns
Load Patterns using Qualitative Influence Lines

Max. Positive Loading for Max. Negative Loading for


Moment at Moment at

11
Continuity in beams Load patterns

12
Continuity in beams Load envelopes

13
Continuity in beams Load envelopes

14
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/11, +1/16, -1/11)

15
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/16, +1/14, -1/10)

16
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/24, +1/14, -1/10)

17
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: 0, +1/11, -1/10)

18
Continuous beams in single story
structures:

2- Approximate analysis for hand


calculation

19
Continuity in beams ACI approximate method
Requirements: ACI 8.3.3
ACI Code permits the use of the following approximate moments and
shears for design of continuous beams and one-way slabs, provided:
There are two or more spans.
Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans
not greater than the shorter by more than 20 percent.
Loads are uniformly distributed.
Unfactored live load does not exceed three times the unfactored dead
load.
Members are of similar section dimensions along their lengths
(prismatic).

20
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3

l n = length of clear
span measured face-
to-face of supports.

For calculating negative


moments, l n is taken as
the average of the
adjacent clear span
lengths.
21
ACI approximate method

Support is column

Spandrel girder

Support is spandrel girder

22
Continuous beams in multistory
structures

23
Equivalent rigid frame method (for gravity loads)

24
Equivalent rigid frame method (for gravity loads)

Model of a beam supported by girders Model of a roof beam


supported by columns

Analysis of each equivalent


frame in its entirety shall be
permitted. Alternatively, for
gravity loading, a separate
analysis of each floor or roof
with far ends of columns
considered fixed shall be Model of a beam supported by columns
permitted.
ACI 13.7.2.5 25
Equivalent rigid frame method (for gravity loads)

Model of a beam supported by columns

For T beams, only the web is


considered because the moment of
inertia is much larger when the
moment is positive than when the
moment is negative.

26
ACI approximate method
ACI 8.3.3

27
Equivalent rigid frame method (for lateral loads)

For analysis of lateral loads, the entire frame must be


considered.

28
Example 1
The figure below shows a plan of a typical floor in a multistory reinforced concrete
building with 3m typical story height. The column dimensions are all 40cmX40cm. The
slab depth is 25 cm, and the beam depth is 50 cm. The live load is 2 kN/m2. The covering
materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live
load is 2 kN/m2. Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420 MPa. Determine using a computer program the
design moments in the beams in rows A and B and an exterior column. Beam B carries a
10 cm brick wall. A B

3@6 = 24
3@3 = 9
29 4@9 = 36
Continuous beam A
Ultimate own weight of slab = 1.20.2525 = 7.5 kN/m2
Ultimate own weight of beam = 1.20.50.425 = 6 kN/m
Ultimate floor covering material & partition load = 1.2(2.25+0.75) = 3.6 kN/m2
Ultimate floor live load = 1.62 = 3.2 kN/m2

wuL= 3.23=9.6 kN/m

wuD= 3.63+7.5(3-0.4)+6 =36.3 kN/m

E c 4700 f c 4700 25 23500MPa


30
Continuous beam A Dead load case

31
Continuous beam A Live load case 1

32
Continuous beam A Live load case 2

33
Continuous beam A
Design moment:

1 2 3 4 5

Load Case 1 2 3 4 5
DL 104.47 130.42- 32.93 130.42- 104.47
LL1 34.81 17.25- 17.25- 17.25- 34.81
LL2 8.625 17.25- 25.95 17.25- 8.625
LL3 25.28 40.13- 18.51 11.61- 5.805
LL4 2.815 5.63- 11.44 22.88- 32.47
LL5 32.47 22.88- 11.44 5.63- 2.815
LL6 5.805 11.61- 18.51 40.13- 25.28
Maximum
34 Combo 139.28 170.55- 58.88 170.55- 139.28
Continuous beam A
Design moment:

150

100

50

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

-50

-100

-150

Maximum
35
Combo 139.28 170.55- 58.88 170.55- 139.28
Continuous beam B
Ultimate own weight of slab = 1.20.2525 = 7.5 kN/m2
Ultimate own weight of beam = 1.20.50.425 = 6 kN/m
Ultimate floor covering material load = 1.22.25 = 2.7 kN/m2
Ultimate partition load = 1.25.6 = 6.72 kN/m
Ultimate floor live load = 1.62 = 3.2 kN/m2

wuL= 3.23=9.6 kN/m

wuD= 2.73+6.72+7.5(3-0.4)+6 =40.32 kN/m

E c 4700 f c 4700 25 23500MPa


36
Continuous beam B Frame model

37
Continuous beam B Dead load case

38
Continuous beam B Live load case 1

39
Continuous beam B Live load case 2

40
Continuous beam B Design moment:

Load Case 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
DL 83- 72.42 135- 57.65 135- 72.42 83-
LL1 22.4- 19.72 24.5- 4.96- 24.5- 19.72 22.4-
LL2 2.64 2.6- 7.6- 18.7 7.6- 2.6- 2.64
LL3 19.5- 17 33- 16.2 21.5- 3 2.3
LL4 0.33 0.5- 3- 2 25.5- 19.4 22-
LL5 22- 19.4 25.5- 2 3- 0.5- 0.33
LL6 2.3 3 21.5- 16.2 33- 17 19.5-
Max
41 Combo 105.4- 92.14 168- 76.35 168- 92.14 105.4-
Continuous beam B Design moment:

100

50

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

-50

-100

-150

Max
42
Combo 105.4- 92.14 168- 76.35 168- 92.14 105.4-
Exterior column moment

+ = 52.76 kN.m

DL max LL
43
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 2
Introduction to two way structural
systems
Introduction:
One way slabs:
When the ratio of the longer to the shorter side (L/S) of the solid slab is at least
equal to 2.0, it is called one-way slab. Under the action of loads, it is deflected
in the short direction only, in a cylindrical form. Therefore, main reinforcement
is placed in the shorter direction, while the longer direction is provided with
shrinkage reinforcement to limit cracking.

2
Introduction:
One way slabs:

Strip a

Strip c
3 Strip b
Introduction:
One way slabs:

When the ratio (L/S) is less than 2.0, the solid


slab is called two-way slab. Bending will take
place in the two directions in a dish-like form.
Accordingly, main reinforcement is required in
the two directions.

Strip 4 Strip 1,2


4
Introduction:
Moments in rectangular slabs supported at the corners:

Discretized
model
Two way slab

5
Introduction:
Moments in rectangular slabs supported at the corners:

6
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:

1- Flat Plates (simple slabs)


A flat plate floor is a two-way slab with
no supporting beams, only columns.
The slab has smooth under surfaces
without column capitals or drop panels.
This type of two-way slabs is suited for
light loads associated with apartment
construction. Use of flat plates is
limited by their punching shear
capacities where large thickness is
required in case of heavy loads or large
spans, thus rendering the system
uneconomical. Deflection may be
excessive.
7
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
1- Flat Plates (simple slabs)

8
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
2- Flat Slabs
A two-way slab with column capitals or
drop panels, or both. This system is
appropriate for heavier loads encountered
in warehouses, parking or industrial
buildings.

9
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
2- Flat Slabs

10
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
3- Edge supported solid slabs (slabs on beams)

In this system, beams provide moment


interaction with the columns especially
when moment resisting frames are used to
resist lateral loads.

11
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
3- Edge supported solid slabs (slabs on beams)

12
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
4- Waffle Slab
The waffle slab is capable of
providing the largest spans of
the conventional concrete
floor systems. Waffle slab
construction consists of
orthogonal sets of ribs with
solid parts at the columns.
The ribs are formed with
fiberglass or metal dome
forms (pans). The ribs are
usually 0.60 to 0.90 meter on
center. Shear is transferred to
the columns by using beams
or shear heads.
13
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
4- Waffle Slab

14
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
5- Edge supported ribbed slabs
It is similar to the waffle slab but the voids between ribs are filled with hollow blocks.
Hidden or drop beams can be used with this system depending on their spans.

15
Introduction:
Deciding the type of floor system:

16
Introduction:
Design methods:

17
R i f
Reinforced
dCConcrete
t DDesign
i II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 3
Calculation of the depth of two way
slabs
D fi iti
Definitions

Panel: A panel is part of the slab formed by column centerlines.


centerlines

An edge beam: is bounded by panels from one side.


An interior beam: is bounded by panels from both sides.

Methods of limiting deflections in two way slabs:


ACI 9.5.3.4
Two methods are given by the ACI for controlling deflections:
1) by calculating the deflection and comparing it with code
specified values given in ACI Table 9.5(b).
2) bby pro
providing
iding minimum
minim m values
al es for the member thickness as
give in the next slides.

Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
Case Deflection control Limiting thickness
method ((mm))
No INTERIOR Table 9.5(c) 125*
Beams m = 0.0

m 0.2 T bl 9.5(c)
Table 9 5( ) 125*

0.2 < m 2 ACI Eq 9-12 125

2 < m ACI Eq 9-13 90

* 100 mm for slabs with drop panels


ACI 9.5.3

Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o

ACI 9.5.3

Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
Definition of and ln

longer clear span


=
shorter clear span
p

ln =Clear span of the panel considered in the long direction measured face to face of support.

Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
Definition of fm
In order l l fm, the
d to calculate h parameter needs
d to be
b calculated
l l d forf eachh
side of the panel.

1
1 + 2 + 3 + 4 2 4
fm =
4 3

In order to calculate for a side of the panel, the moment of inertia of the
beam Ib and the moment of inertia of the slab Is need to be calculated.

Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
Definition of fm

Eb I b
= 1
Es I s
2 4
Eb = M
Modulus
d l off elasticity
l ti it off beam
b
3
E s = Modulus of elasticity of slab

I b = Moment of inertia for beam

Is = Moment of inertia for slab

1 + 2 + 3 + 4
fm =
4

Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
Definition of Ib and Is

Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o

Definition of the equivalent beam:


ACI 13.2.4
be = bw+X
be = bw+2X

X= min(hb, 4 hf)

Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o

Definition of the standard drop panel:


ACI 13.2.5

Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o

ACI 9.5.3
Ed b
Edge beam requirement:
i t

Example 1

Solution:
l n = 760 45.7 = 714.3cm
ln 714.3
h min = = = 23.8
23 8cm > 12.5
12 5cm
30 30
Use h = 24 cm
Example 2
Determine the minimum thickness for the slab shown to satisfy ACI
deflection requirements for panels A and B. All columns are
30x30 cm in cross section.
section Use fy= 420 MPa.
MPa

6.8 m

6.5 m B A

6.8 m

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution:
PANEL A:
1- Determine initial depth of slab:
Anyy initial value can be assumed. Assume slab is not supported
pp
with interior beams and use Table 9.5(c):
l n = 680 30 = 650cm
ln 650
h in = = = 19.7cm
33 33
Try h = 18 cm

2- Determine initial depth of beam:


Use Table 9.5(a):
l 680
h in = = = 36.8 m m
18.5 18.5
Try h = 50 cm 94 cm
3- Determine dimensions of equivalent beam
X=min(hb, 4 hf) = min(50-18=32
min(50 18=32 , 4(18)=72)=32 50 cm
18 cm
be = bw+2X = 30 + 2(32) =94 cm
30 cm
Solution:
4- Determine the centroid of the T-section beam:

Y =
Ay
=
( )( ) / 2 + 94(18)(32
30(32)(32) ( )( + 18 / 2))
= 31.95
31 95cm
A 30(32) + 94(18)
94 cm

Y
50 cm
18 cm
30 cm

5- Determine the moment of inertia of the T-section beam:

1
I = (30)(32) 3 + (30)(32)(32 / 2 31.95) 2
12
1
+ (94)(18) 3 + (94)(18)(32 + 18 / 2 31.95) 2
12
= 510409.4cm 4

Solution:
6- Determine the moment of inertia of the slab:
Direction 1
In direction 1:
(600 + 620)
l2 = = 610cm
2 6.8 m

1
I = (610)(18) 3 = 296460cm 4
12

65m
6.5

In direction 2:
(650 + 680) Direction 2
l2 = = 665cm
2 6.8 m

1
I = (665)(18) 3 = 323190cm 4
12
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m

Solution:
7- Determine fm:
Due to symmetry
y y 1 = 3 ; 2 = 4

510409.4
1 = = 1.72 6.8 m
296460
510409.4
2 = = 1.57 2
323190
+ 2 65m
6.5 1 3
fm = 1 = 1.65 4
2

8- Determine : 6.8 m

longer clear span


=
shorter clear span
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m
650 30
= = 1.0877
600 30

Solution:
9- Determine hmim:
0.2 < m 2 ACI Eq 9-12

fy 420
l n 0.8 + (650 30) 0.8 +
h= 1400
= 1400
= 15.54
15 54cm > 12.5
12 5cm
36 + 5 ( m 0.2 ) 36 + 5 1.0877 (1.65 0.2 )

Try 16 andd repeat solution:


l i
517955 517955
1 = = 2.49 2 = = 2.28
208213.3 226986.7
+2
fm = 1 = 2.4
2
m > 2 ACI E
Eq 9-13
9 13

f
l n 0.8 + y ((650 30)) 0.8 + 420
h=
1400 1400
= = 14.9cm > 9cm hmin = 15 cm
36 + 9 36 + 9(1.0877)

Solution:
PANEL B:
1- Determine initial depth of slab:
y h = 15 cm as found from Panel A
Try

2- Determine initial depth of beam:


Try h = 50 cm as before

3 Determine dimensions of equivalent edge beam


3-
65 cm
X=min(hb, 4 hf) = min(50-15=35 , 4(15)=60)=35
Y
be = bw+X
X = 30 + 35 =65
65 cm 50 cm
15 cm
44- Determine the centroid of the L
L-section
section beam: 30 cm

Y =
Ay =
30(35)(35) / 2 + 65(15)(35 + 15 / 2)
= 29.54cm
A ( ) + 65(15)
30(35) ( )

Solution:

5- Determine the moment of inertia of the L-section beam:


1
I = (30)(35) 3 + (30)(35)(35 / 2 29.54) 2 65 cm
12
1
+ (65)(15) 3 + (65)(15)(35 + 15 / 2 29.54)
29 54) 2 Y
12
50 cm
= 441441cm 4
15 cm
30 cm

Determine the moment of inertia of the T-section beam:


Since h = 15 cm, the moment of inertia for the interior beams is found in a manner
similar to slide 16: 100 cm

I = 521342cm 4
50 cm
15 cm
30 cm
Solution:
6- Determine the moment of inertia of the slab:
Direction 1
In direction 1:

Interior side:
(600 + 620) 6.8 m
l2 = = 610cm
2
1
I = (610)(15) 3 = 171563cm 4
12
65m
6.5
Exterior side:
620 30
l2 = + = 325cm
2 2 Direction 2
1
I = (325)(15) 3 = 91406cm 4 6.8 m
12

In direction 2:
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m
(650 + 680)
l2 = = 665cm
2
1
I = (665)(15) 3 = 187031cm 4
12
Solution:
7- Determine fm:
Due to symmetry
y y 2 = 4.
521342
1 = = 3.04
171563
521342
2 = = 2.79 6.8 m
187031
441441
3 = = 4.83 2
91406
+ 2 2 + 3 6.5 m 3 1
fm = 1 = 3.36 4
4

8- Determine : 6.8 m

longer clear span


=
shorter clear span
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m
650 30
= = 1.051
620 30

Solution:
9- Determine hmim:

m = 3.36 > 2 ACI Eq 9-13

f
l n 0.8 + y (650 30) 0.8
0 8+
420

h= 1400
= 1400
= 15cm > 9cm hmin = 15 cm
36 + 9 36 + 9(1.051)

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 3
Calculation of the depth of two way
slabs
Methods of limiting deflections in two way slabs:

Two methods are given by the ACI for controlling deflections:


1) by calculating the deflection and comparing it with code
specified values given in ACI Table 9.5(b).
2) by providing minimum values for the member thickness as
give in the next slides.

2
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
Case Deflection control Limiting thickness
method (mm)
No INTERIOR Table 9.5(c) 125*
Beams m 0.0

m 0.2 Table 9.5(c) 125*

0.2 m 2 ACI Eq 9-12 125

2 m ACI Eq 9-13 90

* 100 mm for slabs with drop panels

3
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection

4
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
Definition of b and ln

longer clear span


b
shorter clear span

ln =Clear span of the panel considered in the long direction measured face to face of support.
5
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
Definition of fm
In order to calculate fm, the parameter needs to be calculated for each
side of the panel.

1
1 2 3 4 2 4
fm
4 3

In order to calculate for a side of the panel, the moment of inertia of the
beam Ib and the moment of inertia of the slab Is need to be calculated.

6
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
Definition of fm

Eb I b
1
Es Is
2 4
E b Modulus of elasticity of beam
3
E s Modulus of elasticity of slab

I b Moment of inertia for beam

I s Moment of inertia for slab

1 2 3 4
fm
4
7
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
Definition of Ib and Is

8
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection

Definition of the equivalent beam:

be = bw+X
be = bw+2X

X= min(hb, 4 hf)

9
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection

Definition of the standard drop panel:

10
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection

Edge beam requirement:

11
Example 1

Solution:
ln 760 45.7 714.3cm
ln 714.3
hmin 23.8cm 12.5cm
30 30
12 Use h = 24 cm
Example 2
Determine the minimum thickness for the slab shown to satisfy ACI
deflection requirements for panels A and B. All columns are
30x30 cm in cross section. Use fy= 420 MPa.

6.8 m

6.5 m B A

6.8 m

13
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m
Solution:
PANEL A:
1- Determine initial depth of slab:
Any initial value can be assumed. Assume slab is not supported
with interior beams and use Table 9.5(c):
ln 680 30 650cm
ln 650
hin 19.7cm
33 33
Try h = 18 cm

2- Determine initial depth of beam:


Use Table 9.5(a):
l 680
hin 36.8mm
18.5 18.5
Try h = 50 cm 94 cm
3- Determine dimensions of equivalent beam
X=min(hb, 4 hf) = min(50-18=32 , 4(18)=72)=32 50 cm
18 cm
14 be = bw+2X = 30 + 2(32) =94 cm
30 cm
Solution:
4- Determine the centroid of the T-section beam:

Y
Ay
30(32)(32) / 2 94(18)(32 18 / 2)
31.95cm
A 30(32) 94(18)
94 cm

Y
50 cm
18 cm
30 cm

5- Determine the moment of inertia of the T-section beam:

1
I (30)(32)3 (30)(32)(32 / 2 31.95) 2
12
1
(94)(18)3 (94)(18)(32 18 / 2 31.95) 2
12
510409.4cm 4

15
Solution:
6- Determine the moment of inertia of the slab:
Direction 1
In direction 1:
(600 620)
l2 610cm
2 6.8 m

1
I (610)(18)3 296460cm 4
12

6.5 m

In direction 2:
(650 680) Direction 2
l2 665cm
2 6.8 m

1
I (665)(18)3 323190cm 4
12
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m

16
Solution:
7- Determine fm:
Due to symmetry 1 = 3 ; 2 = 4

510409.4
1 1.72 6.8 m
29640
510409.4
2 1.57 2
323190
2 6.5 m 1 3
fm 1 1.65 4
2

8- Determine b: 6.8 m

longer clear span


b
shorter clear span
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m
650 30
b 1.0877
600 30

17
Solution:
9- Determine hmim:
0.2 m 2 ACI Eq 9-12

f 420
l n 0.8 y (650 30) 0.8
h 1400
1400
15.54cm 12.5cm
36 5b m 0.2 36 5 1.0877 1.65 0.2

Try 16 and repeat solution:


517955 517955
1 2.49 2 2.28
208213.3 226986.7
2
fm 1 2.4
2
m 2 ACI Eq 9-13

f
l n 0.8 y (650 30) 0.8 420
h
1400 1400
14.9cm 9cm hmin = 15 cm
36 9b 36 9(1.0877)
18
Solution:
PANEL B:
1- Determine initial depth of slab:
Try h = 15 cm as found from Panel A

2- Determine initial depth of beam:


Try h = 50 cm as before

3- Determine dimensions of equivalent edge beam


65 cm
X=min(hb, 4 hf) = min(50-15=35 , 4(15)=60)=35
Y
be = bw+X = 30 + 35 =65 cm 50 cm
15 cm
4- Determine the centroid of the L-section beam: 30 cm

Y
Ay
30(35)(35) / 2 65(15)(35 15 / 2)
29.54cm
A 30(35) 65(15)

19
Solution:

5- Determine the moment of inertia of the L-section beam:


1
I (30)(35)3 (30)(35)(35 / 2 29.54) 2 65 cm
12
1
(65)(15)3 (65)(15)(35 15 / 2 29.54) 2 Y
12
50 cm
441441cm 4
15 cm
30 cm

Determine the moment of inertia of the T-section beam:


Since h = 15 cm, the moment of inertia for the interior beams is found in a manner
similar to slide 13: 100 cm

I 521342cm 4
50 cm
15 cm
20 30 cm
Solution:
6- Determine the moment of inertia of the slab:
Direction 1
In direction 1:

Interior side:
(600 620) 6.8 m
l2 610cm
2
1
I (610)(15)3 171563cm 4
12
6.5 m
Exterior side:
620 30
l2 325cm
2 2 Direction 2
1
I (325)(15)3 91406cm 4 6.8 m
12

In direction 2:
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m
(650 680)
l2 665cm
2
1
I (665)(15)3 187031cm 4
21 12
Solution:
7- Determine fm:
Due to symmetry 2 = 4.
521342
1 3.04
171563
521342
2 2.79 6.8 m
187031
441441
3 4.83 2
91406
2 2 3 6.5 m 3 1
fm 1 3.36 4
4

8- Determine b: 6.8 m

longer clear span


b
shorter clear span
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m
650 30
b 1.051
620 30
22
Solution:
9- Determine hmim:

m 3.36 2 ACI Eq 9-13

f
l n 0.8 y (650 30) 0.8 420
h
1400 1400
15cm 9cm hmin = 15 cm
36 9b 36 9(1.051)

23
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 4
Direct Design Method
(DDM)
R i Li
i

D fi iti
Definitions

Panel: A panel is part of the slab formed by column centerlines.


centerlines

An edge beam: is bounded by panels from one side.


An interior beam: is bounded by panels from both sides.





Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:

Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t

The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:

Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:

Column and Middle Strip:

Middle strip:
p Design
g stripp bounded byy two column strips.
p
The width of the beam-slab is bounded laterally by centerlines of

adjacent panels on each side of the beam.


Moment in ((longitudinal)
g ) direction of bending
g considered:

W l n2
8

Moments in a simply
p y supported
pp beam Moments in a simply supported beam
with negative end moments

Moment in ((longitudinal)
g ) direction of bending
g considered:

Moments in a fixed-fixed beam Moments in a multi-span beam

Moment in (longitudinal) direction of bending considered:

Moment in (transverse) direction of bending considered:


Determination of the total factored static moment:

Determination of the total factored static moment:

Determination of the total factored static moment:

Longitudinal Distribution of Moments in Slabs

Longitudinal Distribution of Moments in Slabs

Longitudinal Distribution of Moments in Slabs


E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.

P
P. P.

P.: Positive Moment

I.N.: Interior
Negative Moment

E.N: Exterior
Negative

Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

Transverse distribution of the longitudinal moments to middle


and column strips is a function of l2/l1, 1, and t.

E cb I b E cbC
1 = t =
E cs I s 2E cs I s
l 2h 3
Is =
12
0.63
0 63x x 3y
C = 1 torsional constant
y 3

Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 t i l constant
torsional t t
y 3

where x is the shorter overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section


and y is the longer overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section.
The cross section is to be divided into separate rectangular parts and
carrying out the summation given in such away to give the largest value of C,
as shown in the figure
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.

P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

Only in exterior panels

EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.

P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.

P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the middle strips)

Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the beam)

Design of Beams for Shear

Design of Beams for Shear

Minimum Reinforcement Requirements

Maximum Spacing of Reinforcement

Smax 2 h s

5 hs
Smax smaller of

45cm
Reinforcement Detailing


Example
Design
D i the
th interior
i t i strip
t i shown
h for
f the
th structural
t t l plan l usingi DDM.
DDM TheTh
column dimensions are all 30cmX30cm. The slab depth is 15 cm, and the
beam depth is 50 cm. Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.

6.8 m

6.5 m

6.8 m

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Middle Panels
1- Determine strip size and dimensions:
l1=6.0 m,, l2=6.5 m,, l2=6.8 m
min(l1/4=1.5m, l2/4=1.63m)=1.5 m
min(l1/4=1.5m, l2/4=1.7m)=1.5 m
l2/2=3.25m 6.8 m
1.5 m
l2/2=3.4m
3.25 m
1.5 m
l1=6.0 m 1.5 m
ln=6.0
6 0 0.3
0 3 = 5.7 m 3.4 m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m 1.5 m
6.5 m

6.0 m
Solution
Middle Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:

I b = 521342cm 4 50 cm
15 cm
(650 + 680)
l2 = = 665cm 30 cm
2
1
Is = (15)(665) 3 = 187031cm 4 6.8 m
12
521342
2 = = 2.79
187031
6.5 m

l 2 665
= = 1.1083
l1 600
l 6.8 m
1 2 = 2.79(1.083) = 3.09
l1

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Middle Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:

Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8

Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.7 2 = 405kN .m
8

44- Distribute the total static moment in the longitudinal direction:

M c = 0.35M o = (0.35)405 = 141.8kN .m


M s = 0.65
0 65M o = (0.65)405
(0 65)405 = 262.3
262 3kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

0.75 0.45
0.75-0.45
0
0.75+ (1 1083 11.0)
(1.1083 0) = 0.7175
0 1
1.0-2.0
M scs = 0.7175
0 7175M s
M scs = (0.7175)262.3 = 188.9kN .m

M sms = 262.3 188.9 = 74.4kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels

6- Distribute the positive moment to the column and middle strips:

0.75-0.45
0 75 0 45
0.75+ (1.1083 1.0) = 0.7175
1.0-2.0

M ccs = 0.7175M c
M ccs = (0.7175)141.8
(0 7175)141 8 = 101
101.7
7 kN .m

M cms = 141.8 101.7 = 40.1kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels
7- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:

1 (l2/l1) = 3.09 > 1.0


85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned to
the beam and balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab in the
column strip.

Interior negative Positive


M sb = 0.85M scs M cb = 0.85M ccs
M sb = (0.85)188.9 = 160kN .m M cb = (0.85)101.7 = 86.5kN .m
M ss = 0.15M scs M cs = 0.15M ccs
M ss = (0.15)188.9 = 28.4kN .m M cs = (0.15)101.7 = 15.3kN .m

Middle Panels
Results

141.8 262.3

101.7 188.9

86.5 160

15.3 28.4

40.1 74.4

Middle Panels
R l +ve moment
Results

40.1/2
15 3/2
15.3/2

86.5 101.7 141.8


15.3/2

40.1/2

Solution
Middle Panels
8- Check shear capacity of the slab

Beam shear is checked at a distance d from the face of the beam:


d = 150 20 16 /2 = 114 mm
l
1 2 = 3.09 > 1.0
l1
Based on ACI 13.6.8.1,, the beam is loaded as shown in the figure
g

V c = 0.17 f c ' bw d = 0.75 0.17 30 1000 114


V c = 79.6 103 N = 79.6kN 1m
0. 3
V u = 15 3.4 0.114 1.0
2 3 4m
3.4m
V u = 3165kN < V c
OK d=11 4cm
d=11.4cm
30cm
6.0m
Solution
Exterior Panels
1- Determine strip size and dimensions:
l1=6.2 m,, l2=6.5 m,, l2=6.8 m
min(l1/4=1.55m, l2/4=1.63m)=1.55 m
min(l1/4=1.55m, l2/4=1.7m)=1.55 m
l2/2=3.25m 6.8 m
1.55m
l2/2=3.4m
3.25 m
1.55m

l1=6.2 m 1.55m
ln=6.2
6 2 0.3
0 3 = 5.9
9m 3.4 m
1.55m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m
6.5 m

6.2 m
Solution
Exterior Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
From interior p
panel calculations
50 cm
I b = 521342cm 4 15 cm
30 cm
I s = 187031cm 4

2 = 2.79
6.8 m
l 2 665
= = 1.075
l1 620
l2
1 = 2.79(1.075) = 3.0 6.5 m
l1

6.8 m

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Exterior Panels
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
0.63x x 3 y
65 cm
C = 1
y 3
0.63(30) 303 (35) 50 cm
C = (1 )( )+
35 3 15 cm
0.63(15) 153 (65) 30 cm
(1 )( ) = 207394cm 4
65 3

0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 65 cm
y 3
0.63(30) 303 (50)
C = (1 )( )+ 50 cm
50 3
0 63(15) 153 (35)
0.63(15) 15 cm
(1 )( ) = 308644cm 4 30 cm
35 3

C = max(205394,308644) = 308644cm 4
E cbC 308644

t = = = 0.825
2E cs I s 2(187031)
Solution
Exterior Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:

Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8

Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.92 = 434kN .m
8

44- Distribute the total static moment in the longitudinal direction:

M c = 0.57 M o = (0.57)434 = 247 kN .m


M si = 0.7
0 7 M o = (0.7)434
(0 7)434 = 303.8
303 8kN .m
M se = 0.16M o = (0.16)434 = 69.5kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

0.75 0.45
0.75-0.45
0
0.75+ (1 0 11.0)
(1.075 0) = 0.728
0 28
1.0-2.0
M scs = 0.728
0 728M s
M scs = (0.728)303.8 = 221.3kN .m

M sms = 303.8 221.3 = 82.6kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels

6- Distribute the positive moment to the column and middle strips:

0.75-0.45
0 75 0 45
0.75+ (1.075 1.0) = 0.728
1.0-2.0

M ccs = 0.728M c
M ccs = (0.728)247 = 180.2kN .m

M cms = 247 180.2 = 67.2kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels
7- Distribute the exterior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

l1/l2
t
.3

.

. 3
.3
M scs = 0.91M s
M scs = (0.91)69.5
(0 91)69 5 = 63.2
63 2kN .m
M sms = 69.5 63.2 = 6.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
8- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:

1 (l2/l1) = 3 > 1.0


85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned to
the beam and balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab in the
column strip.

Interior negative Positive Exterior negative


M sb = 0.85M scs M cb = 0.85M ccs M sb = 0.85
0 85M scs
M sb = (0.85)221.3 M cb = (0.85)180.2 M sb = (0.85)63.2
= 188.1kN
k .m = 153.2
153 2kN .m = 53.7
53 7 kN .m
M ss = 0.15M scs M cs = 0.15M ccs M ss = 0.15M scs
M ss = (0.15)221.3
(0 15)221 3 M cs = (0.15)180.2
(0 15)180 2 M ss = (0.15)63.2
(0 15)63 2
= 33.2kN .m = 27 kN .m = 9.5kN .m
Exterior Panels

Results

KN m
KN.m

69.5 247 303.8


0.91 0.728 0.728
63.2 180.2 221.3
0.85 0.85 0.85
9.5 27 33.2

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 4
Direct Design Method
(DDM)
R i Li
i

Definitions

Panel: A panel is part of the slab formed by column centerlines.

An edge beam: is bounded by panels from one side.


An interior beam: is bounded by panels from both sides.





Distribution of Moments
Th slab
The l b is
i treatedd as a series
i off frames
f in
i two directions:
di i

Distribution of Moments

The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:

Distribution of Moments
Th slab
The l b is
i treatedd as a series
i off frames
f in
i two directions:
di i

Column and Middle Strip:

Middle strip: Design strip bounded by two column strips.


The width of the beam-slab is bounded laterally by centerlines of

adjacent panels on each side of the beam.


Moment in (longitudinal) direction of bending considered:

W l n2
8

Moments in a simply supported beam


Moments in a simply supported beam
with negative end moments

Moment in (longitudinal) direction of bending considered:

Moments in a fixed-fixed beam Moments in a multi-span beam

Moment in (longitudinal) direction of bending considered:

Moment in (transverse) direction of bending considered:


Determination of the total factored static moment:

Determination of the total factored static moment:

Determination of the total factored static moment:

L
Longitudinal
it di l Distribution
Di t ib ti off Moments
M t in
i Slabs
Sl b

Longitudinal
g Distribution of Moments in Slabs

Longitudinal
g Distribution of Moments in Slabs
E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.

P. P.

P.: Positive Moment

II.N.:
N : Interior
Negative Moment

E.N:
E N EExterior
t ri r
Negative

Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the column strips)


p)

Transverse distribution of the longitudinal moments to middle


and column strips is a function of l2/l1, 1, and t.

E cb I b E cbC
1 = t =
E cs I s 2E cs I s
l 2h 3
Is =
12
0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 torsional constant
y 3

Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the column strips)


p)

0 63xx x 3 y
0.63
C = 1 torsional constant
y 3

where x is the shorter overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section


and y is the longer overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section.
The cross section is to be divided into separate rectangular parts and
carrying
i out the h summation
i given
i in
i suchh away to give
i the
h largest
l value
l off C,
C
as shown in the figure
Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the column strips)
p)

E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.

P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the column strips)
p)

Only in exterior panels

E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.

P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the column strips)
p)

E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.

P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the middle strips)
p)

Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the beam))

Design
g of Beams for Shear

Design
g of Beams for Shear

Minimum Reinforcement Requirements


q

Maximum Spacing of Reinforcement

Smax 2 h s

5 hs
Smax smaller
ll off

45cm
Reinforcement Detailing


Example
Design the interior strip shown for the structural plan using DDM. The
column dimensions are all 30cmX30cm. The slab depth is 15 cm, and the
cm Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
beam depth is 50 cm.

6.8 m

6.5 m

6.8 m

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Middle Panels
1- Determine strip size and dimensions:
l1=6.0
6 0 m, l2=6.5
6 5 m, l2=6.8
68m
min(l1/4=1.5m, l2/4=1.63m)=1.5 m
min(l1/4=1.5m, l2/4=1.7m)=1.5 m
l2/2=3.25m 6.8 m
15m
1.5
l2/2=3.4m
3.25 m
1.5 m
l1=6.0 m 1.5 m
ln=6.0 0.3 = 5.7 m 3.4 m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m 1.5 m
6.5 m

6.0 m
Solution
Middle Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:

I b = 521342cm 4 50 cm
15 cm
(650 + 680)
l2 = = 665cm 30 cm
2
1
Is = (15)(665) 3 = 187031cm 4 6.8 m
12
521342
2 = = 2.79
187031
6.5 m

l 2 665
= = 1.1083
l1 600
l2 6.8 m
1 = 2.79(1.083) = 3.09
l1

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Middle Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:

Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8

Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.7 2 = 405kN .m
8

4- Distribute the total static moment in the longitudinal direction:

M c = 0.35M o = (0.35)405 = 141.8kN .m


M s = 0.65M o = (0.65)405 = 262.3kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

0.75-0.45
0.75+ (1.1083 1.0) = 0.7175
1 0-2 0
1.0-2.0
M scs = 0.7175M s
M scs = (0.7175)262.3 = 188.9kN .m

M sms = 262.3 188.9 = 74.4kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels

6- Distribute the p
positive moment to the column and middle strips:
p

0.75-0.45
0.75+ ((1.1083 1.0)) = 0.7175
1020
1.0-2.0

M ccs = 0.7175
0 7175M c
M ccs = (0.7175)141.8 = 101.7 kN .m

M cms = 141.8 101.7 = 40.1kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels
7- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:

1 (l2/l1) = 3.09 > 1.0


85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned to
the beam and balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab in the
column strip.

Interior negative Positive


M sb = 0.85M scs M cb = 0.85M ccs
M sb = (0.85)188.9 = 160kN .m M cb = (0.85)101.7 = 86.5kN .m
M ss = 0.15M scs M cs = 0.15
0 15M ccs
M ss = (0.15)188.9 = 28.4kN .m M cs = (0.15)101.7 = 15.3kN .m

Middle Panels
Res lts
Results

141.8 262.3

101.7 188.9

86.5 160

15.3 28.4

40.1 74.4

Middle Panels
Results +ve moment

40.1/2
15.3/2

86.5 101.7 141.8


15.3/2

40.1/2

Solution
Middle Panels
8- Check shear capacity of the slab

Beam shear is checked at a distance d from the face of the beam:


d = 150 20 16 /2 = 114 mm
l
1 2 = 3.09 > 1.0
l1
Based on ACI 13.6.8.1, the beam is loaded as shown in the figure

V c = 0.17 f c ' bw d = 0.75 0.17 30 1000 114


V c = 79.6 103 N = 79.6kN 1m
0 .3
V u = 15 3.4 0.114 1.0
2 3.4m
V u = 3165kN < V c
OK d=11.4cm
30
30cm
6.0m
Solution
Exterior Panels
1- Determine strip size and dimensions:
l1=6.2
6 2 m, l2=6.5
6 5 m, l2=6.8
68m
min(l1/4=1.55m, l2/4=1.63m)=1.55 m
min(l1/4=1.55m, l2/4=1.7m)=1.55 m
l2/2=3.25m 6.8 m
1 55m
1.55m
l2/2=3.4m
3.25 m
1.55m

l1=6.2 m 1.55m
ln=6.2 0.3 = 5.9 m 3.4 m
1.55m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m
6.5 m

6.2 m
Solution
Exterior Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
F
From iinterior
i panell calculations
l l i
50 cm
I b = 521342cm 4 15 cm
30 cm
I s = 187031cm 4

2 = 2.79
2 79
6.8 m
l 2 665
= = 1.075
l1 620
l2
1 = 2.79(1.075) = 3.0 6.5 m
l1

6.8 m

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Exterior Panels
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
65 cm
0 63x x 3 y
0.63
C = 1
y 3
0 63(30) 303 (35)
0.63(30) 50 cm
C = (1 )( )+
35 3 15 cm
0.63(15) 153 (65) 30 cm
(1 )( ) = 207394cm 4
65 3

0 63xx x 3 y
0.63
C = 1 65 cm
y 3
0.63(30) 303 (50)
C = (1 )( )+ 50 cm
50 3
0.63(15) 153 (35) 15 cm
(1 )( ) = 308644cm 4 30 cm
35 3

C = max(205394,308644) = 308644cm 4
E C 308644

t = cb = = 0.825
2E cs I s 2(187031)
Solution
Exterior Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:

Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8

Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.92 = 434kN .m
8

4- Distribute the total static moment in the longitudinal direction:

M c = 0.57 M o = (0.57)434 = 247 kN .m


M si = 0.7 M o = (0.7)434 = 303.8kN .m
M se = 0.16M o = (0.16)434 = 69.5kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

0.75-0.45
0.75+ (1.075 1.0) = 0.728
1 0-2 0
1.0-2.0
M scs = 0.728M s
M scs = (0.728)303.8 = 221.3kN .m

M sms = 303.8 221.3 = 82.6kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels

6- Distribute the p
positive moment to the column and middle strips:
p

0.75-0.45
0.75+
0.75 (1.075 1.0) = 0.728
1.0-2.0

M ccs = 0.728
0 728M c
M ccs = (0.728)247 = 180.2kN .m

M cms = 247 180.2 = 67.2kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels
7- Distribute the exterior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

l1/l2
t
1 1.0723 2
0 100 100 100
0.825 91
2.5 75 72.823 45
M scs = 0.91M s
M scs = ((0.91)69.5
.9 ) 9. = 63.2
. kN
N .m
M sms = 69.5 63.2 = 6.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
8- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:

1 (l2/l1) = 3 > 1.0


85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned to
the beam and balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab in the
column strip.

Interior negative Positive Exterior negative


M sb = 0.85M scs M cb = 0.85M ccs M sb = 0.85M scs
M sb = (0.85)221.3 M cb = (0.85)180.2 M sb = (0.85)63.2
= 188.1kN .m = 153.2kN .m = 53.7 kN .m
M ss = 0.15M scs M cs = 0.15M ccs M ss = 0.15M scs
M ss = (0.15)221.3
(0 15)221 3 M cs = (0.15)180.2
(0 15)180 2 M ss = ((0.15)63.2
)
= 33.2kN .m = 27 kN .m = 9.5kN .m
Exterior Panels

Results

KN.m

69.5 247 303.8


0.91 0.728 0.728
63.2 180.2 221.3
0.85 0.85 0.85
9.5 27 33.2

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 4
Direct Design Method
(DDM)
R i Li
i

Definitions

Panel: A panel is part of the slab formed by column centerlines.

An edge beam: is bounded by panels from one side.


An interior beam: is bounded by panels from both sides.





Distribution of Moments
Th slab
The l b is
i treatedd as a series
i off frames
f in
i two directions:
di i

Distribution of Moments

The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:

Distribution of Moments
Th slab
The l b is
i treatedd as a series
i off frames
f in
i two directions:
di i

Column and Middle Strip:

Middle strip: Design strip bounded by two column strips.


The width of the beam-slab is bounded laterally by centerlines of

adjacent panels on each side of the beam.


Moment in (longitudinal) direction of bending considered:

W l n2
8

Moments in a simply supported beam


Moments in a simply supported beam
with negative end moments

Moment in (longitudinal) direction of bending considered:

Moments in a fixed-fixed beam Moments in a multi-span beam

Moment in (longitudinal) direction of bending considered:

Moment in (transverse) direction of bending considered:


Determination of the total factored static moment:

Determination of the total factored static moment:

Determination of the total factored static moment:

L
Longitudinal
it di l Distribution
Di t ib ti off Moments
M t in
i Slabs
Sl b

Longitudinal
g Distribution of Moments in Slabs

Longitudinal
g Distribution of Moments in Slabs
E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.

P. P.

P.: Positive Moment

II.N.:
N : Interior
Negative Moment

E.N:
E N EExterior
t ri r
Negative

Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the column strips)


p)

Transverse distribution of the longitudinal moments to middle


and column strips is a function of l2/l1, 1, and t.

For all spans:


E I
1 = cb b
E cs I s
l 2h 3
Is =
12

For exterior spans:


E C
t = cb t i l
torsional constant
t t
2E cs I s
0.63x x 3 y
C = 1
y 3

Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the column strips)


p)

0 63xx x 3 y
0.63
C = 1 torsional constant
y 3

The cross section is to be divided into separate rectangular parts and


carrying out the summation given in such away to give the largest value of C,
as shown in the figure.
x is
i the
h shorter
h dimension
di i off the
h rectangular
l part off the
h cross section
i
and y is the longer dimension of the rectangular part of the cross section.
Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the column strips)
p)

E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.

P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the column strips)
p)

Only in exterior panels

E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.


P. P.

Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the column strips)


p)

E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.

P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the middle strips)
p)

Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the beam))

Design
g of Beams for Shear

S
L

Design
g of Beams for Shear

S
L

Minimum Reinforcement Requirements


q

Maximum Spacing of Reinforcement

Smax 2 h s

5 hs
Smax smaller
ll off

45cm
Reinforcement Detailing


Example
Design the interior strip shown for the structural plan using DDM. The
column dimensions are all 30cmX30cm. The slab depth is 15 cm, and the
cm Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
beam depth is 50 cm.

6.8 m

6.5 m

6.8 m

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Middle Panels
1- Determine strip size and dimensions:
l1=6.0
6 0 m, l2=6.5
6 5 m, l2=6.8
68m
min(l1/4=1.5m, l2/4=1.63m)=1.5 m
min(l1/4=1.5m, l2/4=1.7m)=1.5 m
l2/2=3.25m 6.8 m
15m
1.5
l2/2=3.4m
3.25 m
1.5 m
l1=6.0 m 1.5 m
ln=6.0 0.3 = 5.7 m 3.4 m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m 1.5 m
6.5 m

6.0 m
Solution
Middle Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:

I b = 521342cm 4 50 cm
15 cm
(650 + 680)
l2 = = 665cm 30 cm
2
1
Is = (15)(665) 3 = 187031cm 4 6.8 m
12
521342
2 = = 2.79
187031
6.5 m

l 2 665
= = 1.1083
l1 600
l2 6.8 m
1 = 2.79(1.083) = 3.09
l1

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Middle Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:

Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8

Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.7 2 = 405kN .m
8

4- Distribute the total static moment in the longitudinal direction:

M c = 0.35M o = (0.35)405 = 141.8kN .m


M s = 0.65M o = (0.65)405 = 262.3kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

0.75-0.45
0.75+ (1.1083 1.0) = 0.7175
1 0-2 0
1.0-2.0
M scs = 0.7175M s
M scs = (0.7175)262.3 = 188.9kN .m

M sms = 262.3 188.9 = 74.4kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels

6- Distribute the p
positive moment to the column and middle strips:
p

0.75-0.45
0.75+ ((1.1083 1.0)) = 0.7175
1020
1.0-2.0

M ccs = 0.7175
0 7175M c
M ccs = (0.7175)141.8 = 101.7 kN .m

M cms = 141.8 101.7 = 40.1kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels
7- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:

1 (l2/l1) = 3.09 > 1.0


85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned to
the beam and balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab in the
column strip.

Interior negative Positive


M sb = 0.85M scs M cb = 0.85M ccs
M sb = (0.85)188.9 = 160kN .m M cb = (0.85)101.7 = 86.5kN .m
M ss = 0.15M scs M cs = 0.15
0 15M ccs
M ss = (0.15)188.9 = 28.4kN .m M cs = (0.15)101.7 = 15.3kN .m

Middle Panels
Res lts
Results

141.8 262.3

101.7 188.9

86.5 160

15.3 28.4

40.1 74.4

Middle Panels
Results +ve moment

40.1/2
15.3/2

86.5 101.7 141.8


15.3/2

40.1/2

Solution
Middle Panels
8- Check shear capacity of the slab

Beam shear is checked at a distance d from the face of the beam:


d = 150 20 16 /2 = 114 mm
l
1 2 = 3.09 > 1.0
l1
Based on ACI 13.6.8.1, the beam is loaded as shown in the figure

V c = 0.17 f c ' bw d = 0.75 0.17 30 1000 114


V c = 79.6 103 N = 79.6kN 1m
0 .3
V u = 15 3.4 0.114 1.0
2 3.4m
V u = 3165kN < V c
OK d=11.4cm
30
30cm
6.0m
Solution
Exterior Panels
1- Determine strip size and dimensions:
l1=6.2
6 2 m, l2=6.5
6 5 m, l2=6.8
68m
min(l1/4=1.55m, l2/4=1.63m)=1.55 m
min(l1/4=1.55m, l2/4=1.7m)=1.55 m
l2/2=3.25m 6.8 m
1 55m
1.55m
l2/2=3.4m
3.25 m
1.55m

l1=6.2 m 1.55m
ln=6.2 0.3 = 5.9 m 3.4 m
1.55m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m
6.5 m

6.2 m
Solution
Exterior Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
F
From iinterior
i panell calculations
l l i
50 cm
I b = 521342cm 4 15 cm
30 cm
I s = 187031cm 4

2 = 2.79
2 79
6.8 m
l 2 665
= = 1.075
l1 620
l2
1 = 2.79(1.075) = 3.0 6.5 m
l1

6.8 m

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Exterior Panels
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
65 cm
0 63x x 3 y
0.63
C = 1
y 3
0 63(30) 303 (35)
0.63(30) 50 cm
C = (1 )( )+
35 3 15 cm
0.63(15) 153 (65) 30 cm
(1 )( ) = 207394cm 4
65 3

0 63xx x 3 y
0.63
C = 1 65 cm
y 3
0.63(30) 303 (50)
C = (1 )( )+ 50 cm
50 3
0.63(15) 153 (35) 15 cm
(1 )( ) = 308644cm 4 30 cm
35 3

C = max(205394,308644) = 308644cm 4
E C 308644

t = cb = = 0.825
2E cs I s 2(187031)
Solution
Exterior Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:

Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8

Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.92 = 434kN .m
8

4- Distribute the total static moment in the longitudinal direction:

M c = 0.57 M o = (0.57)434 = 247 kN .m


M si = 0.7 M o = (0.7)434 = 303.8kN .m
M se = 0.16M o = (0.16)434 = 69.5kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

0.75-0.45
0.75+ (1.075 1.0) = 0.728
1 0-2 0
1.0-2.0
M scs = 0.728M s
M scs = (0.728)303.8 = 221.3kN .m

M sms = 303.8 221.3 = 82.6kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels

6- Distribute the p
positive moment to the column and middle strips:
p

0.75-0.45
0.75+
0.75 (1.075 1.0) = 0.728
1.0-2.0

M ccs = 0.728
0 728M c
M ccs = (0.728)247 = 180.2kN .m

M cms = 247 180.2 = 67.2kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels
7- Distribute the exterior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

l1/l2
t
1 1.0723 2
0 100 100 100
0.825 91
2.5 75 72.823 45
M scs = 0.91M s
M scs = ((0.91)69.5
.9 ) 9. = 63.2
. kN
N .m
M sms = 69.5 63.2 = 6.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
8- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:

1 (l2/l1) = 3 > 1.0


85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned to
the beam and balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab in the
column strip.

Interior negative Positive Exterior negative


M sb = 0.85M scs M cb = 0.85M ccs M sb = 0.85M scs
M sb = (0.85)221.3 M cb = (0.85)180.2 M sb = (0.85)63.2
= 188.1kN .m = 153.2kN .m = 53.7 kN .m
M ss = 0.15M scs M cs = 0.15M ccs M ss = 0.15M scs
M ss = (0.15)221.3
(0 15)221 3 M cs = (0.15)180.2
(0 15)180 2 M ss = ((0.15)63.2
)
= 33.2kN .m = 27 kN .m = 9.5kN .m
Exterior Panels

Results

KN.m

69.5 247 303.8


0.91 0.728 0.728
63.2 180.2 221.3
0.85 0.85 0.85
9.5 27 33.2

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 4
Direct Design Method
(DDM)
R i Li
i

D fi iti
Definitions

Panel: A panel is part of the slab formed by column centerlines.


centerlines

An edge beam: is bounded by panels from one side.


An interior beam: is bounded by panels from both sides.





Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:

Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t

The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:

Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:

Column and Middle Strip:

Middle strip:
p Design
g stripp bounded byy two column strips.
p
The width of the beam-slab is bounded laterally by centerlines of

adjacent panels on each side of the beam.


Moment in ((longitudinal)
g ) direction of bending
g considered:

W l n2
8

Moments in a simply supported beam


Moments in a simply supported beam
with negative end moments

Moment in ((longitudinal)
g ) direction of bending
g considered:

Moments in a fixed-fixed beam Moments in a multi-span beam

Moment in (longitudinal) direction of bending considered:

Moment in (transverse) direction of bending considered:


Determination of the total factored static moment:

Determination of the total factored static moment:

Determination of the total factored static moment:

Longitudinal Distribution of Moments in Slabs

Longitudinal Distribution of Moments in Slabs

Longitudinal Distribution of Moments in Slabs


E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.

P
P. P.

P.: Positive Moment

I.N.: Interior
Negative Moment

E.N: Exterior
Negative

Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

Transverse distribution of the longitudinal


g moments to middle
and column strips is a function of l2/l1, 1, and t.

F all
For ll spans:
E cb I b
1 =
E cs I s
l 2h 3
Is =
12

For exterior spans:


E cbC
t = torsional constant
2E cs I s
0 63x x 3 y
0.63
C = 1
y 3

Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 t i l constant
torsional t t
y 3

The cross section is to be divided into separate rectangular parts and


carrying out the summation given in such away to give the largest value of C,
as shown in the figure.
x is the shorter dimension of the rectangular part of the cross section
and y is the longer dimension of the rectangular part of the cross section.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.

P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

Only in exterior panels

E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.


N I.N.
P. P.

Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.

P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the middle strips)

Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the beam)

Design of Beams for Shear

S
L

Design of Beams for Shear

S
L

Minimum Reinforcement Requirements

Maximum Spacing of Reinforcement

Smax 2 h s

5 hs
Smax smaller of

45cm
Reinforcement Detailing


Example
Design
D i the
th interior
i t i strip
t i shown
h for
f the
th structural
t t l plan l usingi DDM.
DDM TheTh
column dimensions are all 30cmX30cm. The slab depth is 15 cm, and the
beam depth is 50 cm. Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.

6.8 m

6.5 m

6.8 m

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Middle Panels
1- Determine strip size and dimensions:
l1=6.0 m,, l2=6.5 m,, l2=6.8 m

The 6.5 side:


l2/2=3.25m 6.8 m
1.5 m
min(l1/4=1.5m, l2/4=1.63m)=1.5 m
3.4 m
1.5 m
The 6.8 side: 1.5 m
l2/2=3.4m
/2 3 4 3.25 m

min(l1/4=1.5m, l2/4=1.7m)=1.5 m 1.5 m


6.5 m

l1=6.0 m
ln=6
6.0
0 0.3
0 3 = 5.7
57m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m

6.0 m
Solution
Middle Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1 and 1:

I b = 521342cm 4 50 cm
15 cm
(650 + 680)
l2 = = 665cm 30 cm
2
1
Is = (15)(665) 3 = 187031cm 4 6.8 m
12
521342
1 = = 2.79
187031
6.5 m

l 2 665 1
= = 1.1083
l1 600
l 6.8 m
1 2 = 2.79(1.1083) = 3.09
l1

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Middle Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:

Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8

Mo =
(15 6.65) 5.7 2 = 405kN .m
8

44- Distribute the total static moment in the longitudinal direction:

M c = 0.35M o = (0.35)405 = 141.8kN .m


M s = 0.65
0 65M o = (0.65)405
(0 65)405 = 263.3
263 3kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

l2
= 1.1083
l1
l2
1 = 3.09
l1

0.45 0.75
0.45-0.75
0
0.75+ (1 1083 11.0)
(1.1083 0) = 0.7175
0 1
2.0-1.0
M scs = 0.7175
0 7175M s
M scs = (0.7175)263.3 = 188.9kN .m

M sms = 263.3 188.9 = 74.4kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels

6- Distribute the positive moment to the column and middle strips:


l2
= 1.1083
l1
l2
1 = 3.09
l1

0.45-0.75
0 45 0 75
0.75+ (1.1083 1.0) = 0.7175
2.0-1.0

M ccs = 0.7175M c
M ccs = (0.7175)141.8
(0 7175)141 8 = 101
101.7
7 kN .m

M cms = 141.8 101.7 = 40.1kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels
7- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:
l2
1 (l2/l1) = 3.09 > 1.0 = 1.1083
l1
85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned to 1
l2
= 3.09
the beam and the balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab in l1
the column strip.

Interior negative Positive


M sb = 0.85M scs M cb = 0.85M ccs
M sb = (0.85)188.9 = 160kN .m M cb = (0.85)101.7 = 86.5kN .m
M ss = 0.15M scs M cs = 0.15M ccs
M ss = (0.15)188.9 = 28.4kN .m M cs = (0.15)101.7 = 15.3kN .m

Middle Panels
Results

141.8 263.3

101.7 188.9

86.5 160

15.3 28.4

40.1 74.4

Middle Panels
R l +ve moment
Results

40.1/2
15 3/2
15.3/2

86.5 101.7 141.8


15.3/2

40.1/2

Solution
Middle Panels
8- Check shear capacity of the slab

Beam shear is checked at a distance d from the face of the beam:


d = 150 20 16 /2 = 114 mm
l
1 2 = 3.09 > 1.0
l1
Based on ACI 13.6.8.1,, the beam is loaded as shown in the figure
g

V c = 0.17 f c ' bw d = 0.75 0.17 30 1000 114


V c = 79.6 103 N = 79.6kN 1m
0. 3
V u = 15 3.4 0.114 1.0
2 3 4m
3.4m
V u = 47.07 kN < V c
OK d=11 4cm
d=11.4cm
30cm
6.0m
Solution
Exterior Panels
1- Determine strip size and dimensions:
l1=6.2 m,, l2=6.5 m,, l2=6.8 m

The 6.5 side:


l2/2=3.25m 6.8 m
1.55m
min(l1/4=1.55m, l2/4=1.63m)=1.55 m
3.4 m
1.55m

The 6.8 side: 1.55m


l2/2=3.4m
/2 3 4 3.25 m
1.55m
min(l1/4=1.55m, l2/4=1.7m)=1.55 m
6.5 m

l1=6.2 m
ln=6
6.2
2 0.3
0 3 = 5.9
59m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m

6.2 m
Solution
Exterior Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
From interior p
panels calculations
50 cm
I b = 521342cm 4 15 cm
30 cm
I s = 187031cm 4
1 = 2.79
6.8 m

l 2 665
= = 1.073
l1 620
6.5 m
l
1 2 = 2.79(1.073) = 3.0
l1

6.8 m

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Exterior Panels
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
0.63x x 3 y
65 cm
C = 1
y 3
0.63(30) 303 (35) 50 cm
C = (1 )( )+
35 3 15 cm
0.63(15) 153 (65) 30 cm
(1 )( ) = 207394cm 4
65 3

0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 65 cm
y 3
0.63(30) 303 (50)
C = (1 )( )+ 50 cm
50 3
0 63(15) 153 (35)
0.63(15) 15 cm
(1 )( ) = 308644cm 4 30 cm
35 3

C = max(205394,308644) = 308644cm 4
E cbC 308644

t = = = 0.825
2E cs I s 2(187031)
Solution
Exterior Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:

Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8

Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.92 = 434kN .m
8

44- Distribute the total static moment in the longitudinal direction:

M c = 0.57 M o = (0.57)434 = 247 kN .m


M si = 0.7
0 7 M o = (0.7)434
(0 7)434 = 303.8
303 8kN .m
M se = 0.16M o = (0.16)434 = 69.5kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

l2
= 1.073
l1
l2
1 = 3.0
l1
0.45-0.75
0 75+
0.75+ (1 073 11.0)
(1.073 0) = 0.728
0 728
2.0-1.0

M scs = 0.728
0 728M s
M scs = (0.728)303.8 = 221.3kN .m

M sms = 303.8 221.3 = 82.6kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels

6- Distribute the positive moment to the column and middle strips:

l2
= 1.073
l1
l2
1 = 3.0
l1

00.45-0.75
45 0 75
0.75+ (1.073 1.0) = 0.728
2.0-1.0

M ccs = 0.728M c
M ccs = (0.728)247 = 180.2kN .m

M cms = 247 180.2 = 67.2kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels
7- Distribute the exterior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

l2
= 1.073
l1
l2
1 = 3.0
l1

l1/l2
t = 0.825
t
1 1.0723 2
0 100 100 100
0.825 91
25
2.5 75 72 823
72.823 45
M scs = 0.91M s
M scs = (0.91)69.5
(0 91)69 5 = 63.2
63 2kN .m
M sms = 69.5 63.2 = 6.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
8- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:

l2
1 (l2/l1) = 3 > 1.0 l1
= 1.073

85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned to 1


l2
= 3.0
the beam and the balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab in l1
the column strip. t = 0.825

Exterior negative Positive Interior negative


M sb = 0.85
0 85M scs M cb = 0.85M ccs M sb = 0.85M scs
M sb = (0.85)63.2 M cb = (0.85)180.2 M sb = (0.85)221.3
= 53.7
53 7 kN .m = 153.2
153 2kN .m = 188.1kN
k .m
M ss = 0.15M scs M cs = 0.15M ccs M ss = 0.15M scs
M ss = (0.15)63.2
(0 15)63 2 M cs = (0.15)180.2
(0 15)180 2 M ss = (0.15)221.3
(0 15)221 3

= 9.5kN .m = 27 kN .m = 33.2kN .m
Exterior Panels

Results

KN m
KN.m

69.5 247 303.8


0.91 0.728 0.728
63.2 180.2 221.3
0.85 0.85 0.85
9.5 27 33.2
Middle strip
Middl ti
6.3 67.2 82.6
moments

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 4
Direct Design Method
(DDM)
R i Li
i

D fi iti
Definitions

Panel: A panel is part of the slab formed by column centerlines.


centerlines

An edge beam: is bounded by panels from one side.


An interior beam: is bounded by panels from both sides.





Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:

Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t

The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:

Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:

Column and Middle Strip:

Middle strip:
p Design
g stripp bounded byy two column strips.
p
The width of the beam-slab is bounded laterally by centerlines of

adjacent panels on each side of the beam.


Moment in ((longitudinal)
g ) direction of bending
g considered:

W l n2
8

Moments in a simply supported beam


Moments in a simply supported beam
with negative end moments

Moment in ((longitudinal)
g ) direction of bending
g considered:

Moments in a fixed-fixed beam Moments in a multi-span beam

Moment in (longitudinal) direction of bending considered:

Moment in (transverse) direction of bending considered:


Determination of the total factored static moment:

Determination of the total factored static moment:

Determination of the total factored static moment:

Longitudinal Distribution of Moments in Slabs

Longitudinal Distribution of Moments in Slabs

Longitudinal Distribution of Moments in Slabs


E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.

P
P. P.

P.: Positive Moment

I.N.: Interior
Negative Moment

E.N: Exterior
Negative

Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

Transverse distribution of the longitudinal


g moments to middle
and column strips is a function of l2/l1, 1, and t.

F all
For ll spans:
E cb I b
1 =
E cs I s
l 2h 3
Is =
12

For exterior spans:


E cbC
t = torsional constant
2E cs I s
0 63x x 3 y
0.63
C = 1
y 3

Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 t i l constant
torsional t t
y 3

The cross section is to be divided into separate rectangular parts and


carrying out the summation given in such away to give the largest value of C,
as shown in the figure.
x is the shorter dimension of the rectangular part of the cross section
and y is the longer dimension of the rectangular part of the cross section.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.

P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

Only in exterior panels

E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.


N I.N.
P. P.

Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)

EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.

P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the middle strips)

Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the beam)

Design of Beams for Shear

S
L

Design of Beams for Shear

S
L

Minimum Reinforcement Requirements

Maximum Spacing of Reinforcement

Smax 2 h s

5 hs
Smax smaller of

45cm
Reinforcement Detailing


Example
Design
D i the
th interior
i t i strip
t i shown
h for
f the
th structural
t t l plan l usingi DDM.
DDM TheTh
column dimensions are all 30cmX30cm. The slab depth is 15 cm, and the
beam depth is 50 cm. Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.

6.8 m

6.5 m

6.8 m

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Middle Panels
1- Determine strip size and dimensions:
l1=6.0 m,, l2=6.5 m,, l2=6.8 m

The 6.5 side:


l2/2=3.25m 6.8 m
1.9 m
min(l1/4=1.5m, l2/4=1.63m)=1.5 m
3.4 m
1.5 m
The 6.8 side: 1.5 m
l2/2=3.4m
/2 3 4 3.25 m

min(l1/4=1.5m, l2/4=1.7m)=1.5 m 1.75 m


6.5 m

l1=6.0 m
ln=6
6.0
0 0.3
0 3 = 5.7
57m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m

6.0 m
Solution
Middle Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1 and 1:

I b = 521342cm 4 50 cm
15 cm
(650 + 680)
l2 = = 665cm 30 cm
2
1
Is = (665)(15) 3 = 187031cm 4 6.8 m
12
521342 1
1 = = 2.79
187031
6.5 m

l 2 665
= = 1.1083
l1 600
l 6.8 m
1 2 = 2.79(1.1083) = 3.09
l1

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Middle Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:

Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8

Mo =
(15 6.65) 5.7 2 = 405kN .m
8

44- Distribute the total static moment in the longitudinal direction:

M c = 0.35M o = (0.35)405 = 141.8kN .m


M s = 0.65
0 65M o = (0.65)405
(0 65)405 = 263.3
263 3kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

l2
= 1.1083
l1
l2
1 = 3.09
l1

0.45 0.75
0.45-0.75
0
0.75+ (1 1083 11.0)
(1.1083 0) = 0.7175
0 1
2.0-1.0
M scs = 0.7175
0 7175M s
M scs = (0.7175)263.3 = 188.9kN .m

M sms = 263.3 188.9 = 74.4kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels

6- Distribute the positive moment to the column and middle strips:


l2
= 1.1083
l1
l2
1 = 3.09
l1

0.45-0.75
0 45 0 75
0.75+ (1.1083 1.0) = 0.7175
2.0-1.0

M ccs = 0.7175M c
M ccs = (0.7175)141.8
(0 7175)141 8 = 101
101.7
7 kN .m

M cms = 141.8 101.7 = 40.1kN .m

Solution
Middle Panels
7- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:
l2
1 (l2/l1) = 3.09 > 1.0 = 1.1083
l1
85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned to 1
l2
= 3.09
the beam and the balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab in l1
the column strip.

Interior negative Positive


M sb = 0.85M scs M cb = 0.85M ccs
M sb = (0.85)188.9 = 160kN .m M cb = (0.85)101.7 = 86.5kN .m
M ss = 0.15M scs M cs = 0.15M ccs
M ss = (0.15)188.9 = 28.4kN .m M cs = (0.15)101.7 = 15.3kN .m

Middle Panels
Results

141.8 263.3

101.7 188.9

86.5 160

15.3 28.4

40.1 74.4

Middle Panels
R l +ve moment
Results

40.1/2
15 3/2
15.3/2

86.5 101.7 141.8


15.3/2

40.1/2

Solution
Middle Panels
8- Check shear capacity of the slab

Beam shear is checked at a distance d from the face of the beam:


d = 150 20 16 /2 = 114 mm
l
1 2 = 3.09 > 1.0
l1
Based on ACI 13.6.8.1,, the beam is loaded as shown in the figure
g

V c = 0.17 f c ' bw d = 0.75 0.17 30 1000 114


V c = 79.6 103 N = 79.6kN 1m
0. 3
V u = 15 3.2 0.114 1.0
2 3 2m
3.2m
V u = 42.54kN < V c
OK d=11 4cm
d=11.4cm
30cm
6.0m
Solution
Exterior Panels
1- Determine strip size and dimensions:
l1=6.2 m,, l2=6.5 m,, l2=6.8 m

The 6.5 side:


l2/2=3.25m 6.8 m
1.85m
min(l1/4=1.55m, l2/4=1.63m)=1.55 m
3.4 m
1.55m

The 6.8 side: 1.55m


l2/2=3.4m
/2 3 4 3.25 m
1.7m
min(l1/4=1.55m, l2/4=1.7m)=1.55 m
6.5 m

l1=6.2 m
ln=6
6.2
2 0.3
0 3 = 5.9
59m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m

6.2 m
Solution
Exterior Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
From interior p
panels calculations
50 cm
I b = 521342cm 4 15 cm
30 cm
I s = 187031cm 4
1 = 2.79
6.8 m

l 2 665 1
= = 1.073
l1 620
6.5 m
l
1 2 = 2.79(1.073) = 3.0
l1

6.8 m

6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m


Solution
Exterior Panels
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
0.63x x 3 y
65 cm
C = 1
y 3
0.63(30) 303 (35) 50 cm
C = (1 )( )+
35 3 15 cm
0.63(15) 153 (65) 30 cm
(1 )( ) = 207394cm 4
65 3

0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 65 cm
y 3
0.63(30) 303 (50)
C = (1 )( )+ 50 cm
50 3
0 63(15) 153 (35)
0.63(15) 15 cm
(1 )( ) = 308644cm 4 30 cm
35 3

C = max(205394,308644) = 308644cm 4
E cbC 308644

t = = = 0.825
2E cs I s 2(187031)
Solution
Exterior Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:

Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8

Mo =
(15 6.65) 5.92 = 434kN .m
8

44- Distribute the total static moment in the longitudinal direction:

M c = 0.57 M o = (0.57)434 = 247 kN .m


M si = 0.7
0 7 M o = (0.7)434
(0 7)434 = 303.8
303 8kN .m
M se = 0.16M o = (0.16)434 = 69.5kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

l2
= 1.073
l1
l2
1 = 3.0
l1
0.45-0.75
0 75+
0.75+ (1 073 11.0)
(1.073 0) = 0.728
0 728
2.0-1.0

M scs = 0.728
0 728M s
M scs = (0.728)303.8 = 221.3kN .m

M sms = 303.8 221.3 = 82.6kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels

6- Distribute the positive moment to the column and middle strips:

l2
= 1.073
l1
l2
1 = 3.0
l1

00.45-0.75
45 0 75
0.75+ (1.073 1.0) = 0.728
2.0-1.0

M ccs = 0.728M c
M ccs = (0.728)247 = 180.2kN .m

M cms = 247 180.2 = 67.2kN .m

Solution
Exterior Panels
7- Distribute the exterior negative moment to the column and middle strips:

l2
= 1.073
l1
l2
1 = 3.0
l1

l1/l2
t = 0.825
t
1 1.0723 2
0 100 100 100
0.825 91
25
2.5 75 72 823
72.823 45
M scs = 0.91M s
M scs = (0.91)69.5
(0 91)69 5 = 63.2
63 2kN .m
M sms = 69.5 63.2 = 6.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
8- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:

l2
1 (l2/l1) = 3 > 1.0 l1
= 1.073

85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned to 1


l2
= 3.0
the beam and the balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab in l1
the column strip. t = 0.825

Exterior negative Positive Interior negative


M sb = 0.85
0 85M scs M cb = 0.85M ccs M sb = 0.85M scs
M sb = (0.85)63.2 M cb = (0.85)180.2 M sb = (0.85)221.3
= 53.7
53 7 kN .m = 153.2
153 2kN .m = 188.1kN
k .m
M ss = 0.15M scs M cs = 0.15M ccs M ss = 0.15M scs
M ss = (0.15)63.2
(0 15)63 2 M cs = (0.15)180.2
(0 15)180 2 M ss = (0.15)221.3
(0 15)221 3

= 9.5kN .m = 27 kN .m = 33.2kN .m
Exterior Panels

Results

KN m
KN.m

69.5 247 303.8


0.91 0.728 0.728
63.2 180.2 221.3
0.85 0.85 0.85
9.5 27 33.2
Middle strip
Middl ti
6.3 67.2 82.6
moments

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 5
Equivalent Frame Method
(EFM)
R i Li
i

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Analysis
y of each equivalent
q frame in its entiretyy shall be ppermitted.
Alternatively, for gravity loading, a separate analysis of each floor or
roof with far ends of columns considered fixed shall be permitted.

ACI 13.7.2.5

Steps of the EFM:


0- Extract
0 E a single
i l storey from
f 3D frame
f f separate
for
analysis.

1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members.

2- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns.


2.aa Determine the stiffness of the columns.
2 columns
2.b Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms.
3.c Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns.

3- Analyze the frame using a computer software to


obtain the longitudinal distribution of moments.

4- Distribute
4 Di ib the
h obtained
b i d moments in
i the
h transverse
direction using the same DDM procedure
1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):

kEI sb
Ks =
l1

1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):


Determination of k:

1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):


Determination of Isb:

2- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

C
Concept off E
Equivalent
i l Column:
C l
The joint rotations for the two cases below can be easily calculated
from structural analysis.

2- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

Concept of Equivalent Column:


In the case of a slab connected to a column as shown below, the rotation at Point
A is greater than that of Point C because there is less restraint at this point.
point Also
the rotation of the slab parts between A and A transforms the moment from the
slab to the column in the form of torsional moment. To account for these effects
in the analysis, the column is assumed to be attached to the slab beam by the
transverse torsional arms AC and CA. The obtained column above and below
the slab with torsional arms on both sides of the column is called an equivalent
column.

2- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

Concept of Equivalent Column:

2.a Stiffness of the Columns ((Kc)):


kEI
Kc =
lc

2.a Stiffness of the Columns ((Kc)):


kEI
Kc =
lc

2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):


Cross section of torsioanl arms ACI 13.7.5.1
Torsional members shall be assumed
to have a constant cross section
th
throughout
h t their
th i length
l th consisting
i ti off
the largest of (a),
(b), aand
d (c):

(a) A portion of slab having a width


equall tot that
th t off the
th column,
l bracket,
b k t or
capital in the direction of the span for
which
w c moments
o e ts area e being
be g determined;
dete ed;
(b) For monolithic or fully composite
construction, the portion of slab
specified
ifi d in
i (a)
( ) plus
l that
h part off
the transverse beam above and below
tthee slab;
s ab;
(c) The transverse beam as defined in

13.2.4.
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):
Cross section of torsioanl arms

Definition of the equivalent beam:


ACI 13.2.4
be = bw+X
be = bw+2X

X= min(hb, 4 hf)

2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):

Condition (a) No transverse beams framing into columns

9 E cs C
Kt = The summation is for the
c2 3
l 2 (1 ) arms on both sides
l2

Condition ((b)) Transverse beams framing


g into columns
I sb 9 E cs C
Kt =
Is
c2 3
l 2 (1 )
l2

2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):


Cross section constant C
0.63x x 3 y torsional constant
C = 1
y 3

The cross section is to be divided into separate rectangular parts and


carrying out the summation given in such away to give the largest value of C,
as shown in the figure.
x is
i the
h shorter
h dimension
di i off the
h rectangular
l part off the
h cross section
i
and y is the longer dimension of the rectangular part of the cross section.
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):
Cross section constant C

0.63x x 3y
C = 1
y 3

2.c- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

The summation is for the


columns top and bottom.

Stiffness of a column from the stiffness of the


equivalent column:
The equivalent column stiffness is distributed to the stiffness of the column
above and below the slab in proportion to their flexural stiffnesses.
c1
c2
4 EI c
K c1 =
lc
c 2c 13
Ic =
12

For symmetric conditions:

K eq
K c1 = K c 2 =
2

Arrangement of live load:

When the unfactored live load is variable but does not exceed three-
quarters of the unfactored dead load, or the nature of live load is such that
all
ll panels
l will
ill be
b loaded
l d d simultaneously,
i lt l it shall
h ll be
b permitted
itt d to
t assume
that maximum factored moments occur at all sections with full factored
live
ve load
oad on
o entire
e e slab
s ab system.
sys e .
ACI 13.7.6.2

Example
p
Find and analyze the equivalent 2D frame for a typical storey of the E-W
interior frame of the flat pplate structure shown below. The slab is 25 cm thick.
All columns are 35x35 cm in cross section. Storey height = 3.0 m. Ultimate
distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
76m
7.6 76m
7.6 76m
7.6 7.6 m

N
6.0 m

6.0 m

6.0 m

6.0 m

Solution
0- Extract a single storey from 3D frame for separate analysis

3.0 m

30m
3.0

7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m

Solution
1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members
l 2 h s3 600(25) 3
I sb = = = 781250cm 4
12 12
c1 35
= = 0.046
l 1 760
c2 35
= = 0.058
l 2 600
k = 4.047
kEI sb 4.047(781250) E
Ks = = = 4160 E
l1 760

Solution
2.a- Determine the stiffness of the columns
c 2c 13 35(35) 3
Ic = = = 125052cm 4
12 12
l c = 300cm
l u = 300 25 = 275cm
l c 300
= = 1.1
lu 275
t a = t a = 25 / 2 = 12.5
t a 12.5
= = 1.0
t b 12.5
k = 5.09
kEI c
Kc =
lc
5.09(125052) E
Kc = = 2122 E
300

Solution
2.b- Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms

0.63x x 3 y
C = 1
y 3 35cm

0.63(25) (25) 3 35
C = (1 )( ) = 100260cm 4 25cm
35 3
9 E cs C
Kt =
c2 3
l 2 (1 )
l2

9(100260) E
Kt = 2 = 3602 E
600(1 35 ) 3
600

Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns

Kt Kc
K ec =
Kt + Kc
3602 E (2 2122 E )
K ec = = 1948 E
3602 E + 2 2122 E

The stiffness of each of the columns (same dimensions):


K ec
K c1 = K c 2 = = 974 E
2
K l K l 974 E (300)
I r1 = I r2 = c 1 c = c 2 c = = 292243cm 4
E E E
K s l 1 4160 E (760)
I rs = = = 3161719cm 4
E E
Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns

292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4

3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4

292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4

Solution
3- Analyze the frame using ETABS to obtain the longitudinal distribution of
moments.
moments
wu = (15)(6) = 90 kN/m

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 5
Equivalent Frame Method
(EFM)
R i Li
i

2
Introduction:

3
Introduction:

4
Introduction:

5
Introduction:

6
Introduction:

7
Introduction:

8
Introduction:

Analysis of each equivalent frame in its entirety shall be permitted.


Alternatively, for gravity loading, a separate analysis of each floor or
roof with far ends of columns considered fixed shall be permitted.
ACI 13.7.2.5

Model of a beam supported by columns


9
Steps of the EFM:
0- Extract a single storey from 3D frame for separate
analysis.

1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members.

2- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns.


2.a Determine the stiffness of the columns.
2.b Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms.
3.c Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns.

3- Analyse the frame using a computer software to


obtain the longitudinal distribution of moments.

4- Distribute the obtained moments in the transverse


10 direction using the same DDM procedure
1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member (Ksb):

kEI sb
Ks
l1
11
1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member (Ksb):
Determination of k:

12
1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member (Ksb):
Determination of Isb:

13
2- Stiffness of the Equivalent Columns (Kec):

Concept of Equivalent Column:


The joint rotations for the two cases below can be easily calculated
from structural analysis.

14
2- Stiffness of the Equivalent Columns (Kec):

Concept of Equivalent Column:


In the case of a slab connected to a column as shown below, the rotation at
Point A is greater than that of Point C because there is less restraint at this
point. To account for this effect in the analysis, the column is assumed to be
attached to the slab beam by the transverse torsional arms AC and CA. The
obtained column above and below the slab with torsional arms on both sides
of the column is called an equivalent column.

15
2- Stiffness of the Equivalent Columns (Kec):

Concept of Equivalent Column:

16
2.a Stiffness of the Columns (Kc):
kEI
Kc
lc

17
2.a Stiffness of the Columns (Kc):
kEI
Kc
lc

18
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms (Kt):
Cross section of torsioanl arms ACI 13.7.5.1
Torsional members shall be assumed
to have a constant cross section
throughout their length consisting of
the largest of (a),
(b), and (c):

(a) A portion of slab having a width


equal to that of the column, bracket, or
capital in the direction of the span for
which moments are being determined;
(b) For monolithic or fully composite
construction, the portion of slab
specified in (a) plus that part of
the transverse beam above and below
the slab;
(c) The transverse beam as defined in
19
13.2.4.
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms (Kt):

Condition (a) No transverse beams framing into columns

9E csC
Kt The summation is for the
c2 3
l 2 (1 ) arms on both sides
l2

Condition (b) Transverse beams framing into columns


I sb 9E csC
Kt
Is
c
l 2 (1 2 )3
l2

20
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms (Kt):
Cross section constant C

0.63x x 3 y
C 1
y 3

21
2.c- Stiffness of the Equivalent Columns (Kec):

The summation is for the


columns top and bottom.
22
Stiffness of a column from the stiffness of the
equivalent column:
The equivalent column stiffness is distributed to the stiffness of the column
above and below the slab in proportion to their flexural stiffnesses.

4EI
K c1
lc

For symmetric conditions:

K eq
K ct
2

23
Arrangement of live load:

When the unfactored live load is variable but does not exceed three-
quarters of the unfactored dead load, or the nature of live load is such that
all panels will be loaded simultaneously, it shall be permitted to assume
that maximum factored moments occur at all sections with full factored
live load on entire slab system.
ACI 13.7.6.2

24
Example
Find the equivalent 2D frame for 1st storey of the E-W interior frame of the flate
plate structure shown below. The slab is 25 cm thick. All columns are 35 cm
square. Storey height = 3.0 m (from floor top to slab top). Ultimate distributed
load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m

6.0 m

6.0 m

6.0 m

6.0 m

25
Solution
0- Extract a single storey from 3D frame for separate analysis

3.0 m

3.0 m

7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m

26
Solution
1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members
l 2 hs3 600(25)3
I sb 781250cm 4
12 12
c1 35
0.046
l1 760
c2 35
0.058
l 2 600
k 4.047
kEI sb 4.047(781250) E
Ks 4160E
l1 760

27
Solution
2.a- Determine the stiffness of the columns
c1c 23 35(35)3
I sb 125052cm 4
12 12
l c 300cm
l u 300 25 275cm
l c 300
1.1
l u 275
t a t a 25 / 2 12.5
t a 12.5
1.0
t b 12.5
k 5.09
kEI c
Kc
lc
5.09(125052)E
Kc 2122E
300
28
Solution
2.b- Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms

0.63x x 3 y
C 1 35cm
y 3
0.63(25) (25)3 35
C (1 )( ) 100260cm 4 25cm
35 3
9E csC
Kt
c
l 2 (1 2 )3
l2
9(100260) E
K t 2( ) 3602E
35 3
600(1 )
600

29
Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns

Kt Kc
K ec
Kt Kc
3602E (2 2122E )
K ec 1948E
3602E 2122E

The stiffness of each of the columns (same dimensions):


K
K ct K cb ec 974E
2
K l 974E (300)
I rc ct c 292243cm 4
E E
K l 4160E (760)
I rs s 1 3161719cm 4
30 E E
Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns

292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4

3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4

292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4

31
Solution
3- Analyse the frame using ETABS to obtain the longitudinal distribution of
moments.
wu = (15)(6) = 90 kN/m

32
R i f
Reinforced
dCConcrete
t DDesign
i II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture
L t 6
Design of hollow block and ribbed slabs
PART I
One way ribbed slabs


Ribbed and hollow block slabs
Ribbed slabs consist of regularly spaced ribs monolithically built
with a toping slab. The voids between the ribs may be either light
material such as hollow blocks [figure 1] or it may be left unfilled
[figure 2].

Topping slab

Rib Hollow block Temporary form


Figure [1] Hollow block floor Figure [2] Moulded floor


Ribbed and hollow block slabs
The main advantage of using hollow blocks is the reduction in
weight by removing the part of the concrete below the neutral axis.
Additional advantages are:

1- Ease of construction.
2 Hollow
2- H ll bl k make
blocks k it possible
ibl to
t have
h smooth
th ceiling
ili which
hi h is
i
often required for architectural considerations.
33- Provides good sound and temperature insulation properties.

Hollow block floors proved economic for spans of more than 5 m


with light or moderate live loads, such as hospitals, offices or
residential buildings. They are not suitable for structures having
h
heavy li loads
live l d suchh as warehouses
h or parking
ki garages.

One-way v.s two-way ribbed slabs


If the ribs are provided in one direction only,
only the slab is classified as
being one-way, regardless of the ratio of longer to shorter panel
dimensions. It is classified as two-way if the ribs are provided in two
directions. One way spans typically span in the shorter direction.
One way ribbed slabs may be used for spans up to 6 - 6.5 m.

One-way slab Two-way slab


One-way ribbed (joist) slab

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Key components of ribbed slabs


a. Topping slab: ACI
C 8.
8.13.6.1
3.6.
Topping slab thickness (t) is not to be less than 1/12 the clear
distance (lc) between ribs, nor less than 50 mm
lc

t 12
50 mm
lc
andd sshould
ou d ssatisfy
s y for
o a uunit sstrip:
p: Slab thickness ((t))

w u l c2
t
1240 f c

Shrinkage reinforcement is provided in the topping slab in both


directions in a mesh form.

Key components of ribbed slabs


b. Regularly spaced ribs:
Minimum dimensions:
Ribs are not to be less than 100 mm in width, and a depth of not
more than
th 3.5
3 5 times
ti th minimum
the i i webb width
idth andd clear
l spacing
i
between ribs is not to exceed 750 mm.
ACI 8.13.2
l 750 mm
c
ACI 8.13.3

h 3.5 bw

bw 100

Key components of ribbed slabs


Shear strength:
g ACI 8.13.8
Shear strength provided by rib concrete Vc may be taken 10% greater
than those for beams.

Flexural strength:
Ribs are designed as rectangular beams in the regions of negative
moment at the supports and as T-shaped beams in the regions of
positive moments between the supports.

Effective
ff i flange
fl width
id h be is
i taken
k as half
h lf the
h distance
di b
between ribs,
ib
center-to-center. b
e

Keyy components
p of ribbed slabs
c. Hollow blocks:
Hollow blocks are made of lightweight
g g concrete or other
lightweight materials. The most common concrete hollow block
sizes are 40 25 cm in plan and heights of 14, 17, 20, and 24 cm.

Hollow blocks do not contribute to the strength of the slab. In fact,


theyy impose
p an additional weight
g on the slab. In some cases,, blocks
made of polystyrene, which is 1/15 of the weight of concrete
blocks, are used.

To avoid shear failures, the blocks are terminated near the support
and replaced
p byy solid pparts. Solid pparts are made under ppartitions
and concentrated walls.

To avoid cracking due to shrinkage in top concrete flange,


flange the
concrete blocks should be watered prior to concrete placing.

Cross (distribution) ribs


Transversal ribs or cross ribs are added to one one-way
way hollow block
floors for better distribution of the applied loads. They also help in
distributing the concentrated loads due to walls in the transverse
direction. The bottom reinforcement is taken as the reinforcement in
the main ribs, and the top reinforcement should be taken at least of
th bottom
the b tt reinforcement.
i f t Cross
C ribs
ib are usually
ll 10 cm wide.
id

Arrangement of regularly spaced cross rib according to Egyptian


code:

Cross (distribution) ribs

No cross ribs One cross rib Three cross ribs

Arrangement of hollow blocks and width of hidden beams


The number of blocks in each direction must be specified on the
construction drawings. Thus, the layout of the blocks must be
positioned so that enough solid parts are present near the supporting
beams. The normal width of solid part ranges between 0.8-2.0 m for
floors with hidden beams and ranges between 0.2-0.5 m for floors
with
ith projected
j t d beams.
b

The number of blocks (having sizes of 40 25 cm in plan) and the


width of the beams must satisfy:

In the rib direction (mm): Lc 1 = 250 n1 + 100 ncr

P
Perpendicular
di l to t rib
ib direction
di ti (mm):
( ) Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)

Arrangement of hollow blocks and width of hidden beams

bw =width of main rib


Lc 1 = 250 n1 + 100 ncr
Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)

Minimum thickness of one way slabs ACI Table 9.5(a)

Minimum Cover ACI 7.7.1


a - Concrete exposed to earth or weather
for <16mm------40 mm and for >16mm----- 50 mm
b - Concrete not exposed to earth or weather

for <32mm------20 mm, otherwise ------ 40 mm


Loads Assigned to Slabs
wu=1.2
1 2 D.L
D L + 1.6
1 6 L.L
LL

a- Dead Load (D
(D.L)
L) :
1- Weight of slab covering materials
2- Equivalent
q ppartition weight
g
3- Own weight of slab

b Live
b- Li LLoad
d (L
(L.L)
L)

a- Dead Load (D.L)


( )
1- Weight of slab covering materials, total =2.315 kN/m2
tiles (2.5cm thick) =0.02523 = 0.575 kN/m2
cement mortar (2.5cm thick) =0.02521 = 0.525 kN/m2
sand (5.0cm thick) =0.0518 = 0.9 kN/m2
plaster 0.015 21 = 0.315 kN/m2
(1.5cm thick) =0.01521

tiles 22.55 cm
cement mortar 2.5 cm
sand 5 cm

slab

plaster 1.5 cm

2-Equivalent partition weight


This load is usually taken as the weight of all walls (weight of 1m span
of wall total spans of all walls) carried by the slab divided by the floor
area and treated as a dead load rather than a live load.
To calculate the weight of 1m span of wall:
Each 1m2 surface of wall contains 12.5 blocks
A bl
blockk with
i h thickness
hi k 10 weighs
10cm i h 10 kg
k
A block with thickness 20cm weighs 20 kg

Each face of 1m2 surface has 30kg plaster

Load / 1m2 surface for 10 cm block =


12.5 10 +230=185 kg/m2 = 1.85 kN/m2

Load / 1m2 surface for 20 cm block =


20 cm
12.5 20 +230=310 kg/m2 = 3.1 kN/m2

Weight of 1m span of wall with height 3m:


For 10 cm block wt. = 1.85 kN/m2 3 = 5.6 kN/m
For 20 cm block wt. = 3.1 kN/m2 3 = 9.3 kN/m
3- Own weight of slab

Example
Find the total ultimate load per rib for the ribbed slab shown:

Assume depth of slab = 25 cm (20cm block +5cm toping slab)

Hollow blocks are 40 cm 25 cm 20 cm in dimension

Assume ribs have 10 cm width of web

Assume equivalent partition load = 0.75 kN/m2

Consider live load = 2 kN/m2.

3- Own weight of slab


Solution
Total volume (hatched) = 0.5 0.25 0.25 = 0.03125 m3

Volume of one hollow block = 0.4 0.20 0.25 = 0.02 m3

Net concrete volume = 0.03125 - 0.02 = 0.01125 m3

Weight of concrete = 0.01125 25= 0.28125 kN

Weight of concrete /m2 = 0.28125 /[(0.5)(0.25)] = 2.25 kN/m2

Weight of hollow blocks /m2 = 0.2/[(0.5)(0.25)] = 1.6 kN/m2

Total slab own weight


weight= 2.25
2 25 + 1.6 3 85 kN/m2
1 6 = 3.85

L dp
Load per rib
ib
Total dead load= 3.85 + 2.315 + 0.75 = 6.915 kN/m2
Ultimate load = 1.2(6.915) + 1.6(2) = 11.5 kN/m2

Ultimate load per rib = 11.5 0.5 = 5.75 kN/m


Minimum live Load values on slabs
Type of Use Uniform Live Load
kN/m2
Residential 2
Residential balconies 3
Computer use 5
b- Live Load ((L.L)) Offices 2
Warehouses
It depends on the function for Light storage 6
which the floor is constructed. Heavy Storage 12
Schools
Classrooms 2
Libraries
rooms 3
Stack rooms 6
Hospitals 2
Assembly Halls
Fixed seating 2.5
Movable seating 5
Garages (cars) 2.5
Stores
Retail 4
wholesale 5
Exit facilities 5
Manufacturing
Light 4
Heavy 6
Loads Assigned to Beams
Beams are usually designed to carry the following loads:
- Their own weight
- Weights of partitions applied directly on them
- Floor
Fl loads
l d

S1 S2

Shrinkage Reinforcement Ratio


According to ACI Code and for fy =420 MPa ACI 7.12.2.1
shrinkage = 0.0018 As , shrinkage = 0.0018 b h
where, b = width of strip, and h = slab thickness

Mi i
Minimum Reinforcement
R i f t Ratio
R ti for
f Main
M i Reinforcement
R i f t

min A s ,shrinkage
A s ,min shrinkage = 0.0018 b h ACI 10.5.4

Check shear capacity of the section


V u 1.1 V c = (1.1)0.17 f c ' b wd
Otherwise enlarge depth of slab

Spacing of Reinforcement Bars
a- Flexural Reinforcement Bars
Flexural reinforcement is to be spaced not farther than three times the slab
thickness (hs), nor farther apart than 45 cm, center-to-center.
3 hs
Smax smaller of ACI 10.5.4
45cm

b- Shrinkage Reinforcement Bars


Shrinkage reinforcement is to be spaced not farther than five times the slab
thickness, nor farther apart than 45 cm, center-to-center.
5 hs
Smax smaller
ll of ACI 7.12.2.2
7 12 2 2
45cm

Summary of one
one-way
way ribbed slab design procedure
1. The direction of ribs is chosen.
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both
directions.
4. The factored load on each of the ribs is computed.
5. The shear force and bending moment diagrams are drawn.
6. The strength of the web in shear is checked.
7. Design the ribs as T-section shaped beams in the positive moment
regions and rectangular beams in the regions of negative moment.
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the
reinforcement are to be prepared.
p p

Example 1
Determine the arrangement
of blocks and width of
hidden beams for the plan
p
shown. The blocks used
have the size of 40 20 cm
in plan. The live load is 4
kN/m2.

Solution

Note that the width of hollow blocks in Gaza is 250 mm NOT 200 mm

Solution

Solution

Solution

Example 2
Design a oneone-way
way ribbed slab to cover a 3.8
3 8 m x 10 m panel,
panel shown in the
figure below. The covering materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent
ppartition load is equal
q to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live load is 2 kN/m2.
Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420MPa
3.8 m

10 m

Solution
1. The direction of ribs is chosen:
Ribs are arranged in the short direction as shown in the figure

3.8 m
3
50m
5.0 50m
5.0
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t:
From ACI Table 9.5(a), hmin = 380/16 = 23.75cm use h = 24 cm.
L t width
Let b bw =10
idth off web, 10 cm
Use hollow blocks of size 40 cm 25 cm 17 cm (weight=0.17 kN)
pp g slab thickness = 24 17 = 7cm > lc/12 =40/12= 3.3cm > 5cm OK
Topping
For a unit strip of topping slab:
wu=[1.2(0.07 25 + 0.75 + 2.25) + 1.6(2)] 1m = 8.9 kN/m = 8.9 N/mm
w u l c2 8.9( 400 ) 2
t = = 16mm OK
1240 f c ( 0.9 )1240 25

Solution
3. Provide shrinkage
g reinforcement for the topping
pp g slab in both directions:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement, As=0.0018(1000)70=126 mm2
Use 5 6 mm/m in both directions.

4. The factored load on each of the ribs is to be computed:


Total volume (in 1m2 surface) 1.0 m
= 1.0 1.0 0.24 = 0.24 m3
Volume of hollow blocks in 1m2
= 8 0.4 0.25 0.17 = 0.136 m3 0.05 m
Net concrete volume in 1m2

1.0 m
= 0.24-
0 24 0.136 0 104 m3
0 136 = 0.104

0.25 m
Weight of concrete in 1m2
= 0.104 25 = 2.6 kN/m2
g of hollow blocks in 1m2
Weight
= 8 0.17= 1.36 kN/m2
0.4 m 0.1 m 0.4 m

7 cm
Total dead load /m2
= 2.25 + 0.75 + 2.6 + 1.36
0.244 m

= 7.0 kN/m2

Solution
wu=1.2(7)+1.6(2)=11.6
1.2(7) 1.6(2) 11.6 kN/m2
wu/m of rib =11.6x0.5= 5.8 kN/m of rib
5. Critical shear forces and bending moments are determined (simply supported beam):
Maximum factored shear force = wul/2 = 5.8 (3.8/2) = 11 kN
Maximum factored bending moment = wul2/8 = 5.8 (3.8)2/8 = 10.5 kN.m
6. Check rib strength for beam shear:
Effective depth d = 2420.60.6 =20.8 cm, assuming 12mm reinforcing
bars and 6 mm stirrups.
p

1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 25 100 208 = 14400 N = 14.4 kN > Vu,max = 11 kN

Though shear reinforcement is not required, 4 6 mm stirrups per meter


run are to be used to carry the bottom flexural reinforcement.

Solution
7. Design
g flexural reinforcement for the ribs:
There is only positive moments over the simply supported beam, and the
section of maximum positive moment is to be designed as a T-section
Assume that a<70mm and =0.90Rectangular
=0 90Rectangular section with b = be =500mm
50
0.85 25 2 10.5 106
= 1 1 7

kN.m
420 0.9 0.85
0 85 25 500 2082 24

105 k
As
= 0.0013
10
As = be d = 0.0013 500 208 = 135 mm 2

Use 210mm (As,sup= 157 mm2)

As f y 157 420
a= = = 6.2 mm < 70mm
0.85f c 'b e 0.85 25 500
The assumption is right

Solution
Check As,min
s min
0.25 f c ' 1.4
A s,min = max bw d ; bw d
f y fy
A s,min = 70 mm 2 < A s,sup = 157 mm 2 OK

Check =0.9
=0 9 (ductility of the section)
a 6.2
c= = = 7 .3 mm
1 00.85
85
dc 208 7 .3
t = 0.003 = 0.003
c 7.3
t = 0.083 >> 0 .005 Tension controlled = 0 .9 OK

Solution
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the reinforcement are to be
prepared

110 m

110 m
110 m

110 m
3.8 m A A

5.0 m 5.0 m
6mm stirrups 6mm mesh
@25 cm @20 cm
7cm
24cm
17cm

210mm 10 40 cm 10 210mm

S i A-A
Section AA

PART II
Two way ribbed slabs


Method of analysis

R i Li
i

Method of coefficients

1.0m
w = ws + wl

wS
S

w s = w

w l = w wl
L

Rectangularity ratio:

Case

L L 0.76L L L L 0.87L 0.76L 0.87L


r S S S 0.76S 0.87S S 0.87S 0.76S
S

Method of coefficients

ECP 203 load coefficients LL< 5kN/m2


r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85

0 35
0.35 0 29
0.29 0 25
0.25 0 21
0.21 0 18
0.18 0 16
0.16 0 14
0.14 0 12
0.12 0 11
0.11 0 09
0.09 0 08
0.08

Marcus load coefficients LL 5kN/m2


r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

0.292 0.355 0.411 0.470 0.526 0.577 0.623 0.663 0.699 0.730 0.757

0.292 0.240 0.198 0.165 0.137 0.114 0.095 0.079 0.067 0.056 0.047

Minimum slab thickness:


To avoid the complexity of calculating for a two way ribbed slab,
slab
one of three equations of the ACI 318-89 which provides an upper
bound for the deflection control of the slab thickness can be used for
simplicity.

l n (800 + f y /1.4)
h max =
36000

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:


The loads acting on beams have tributary areas which are bounded
by 45-degree lines drawn from the corners of the panels and the
centerlines of the adjacent panels parallel to the long sides.
S

S L

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:

qu(S/2)

Long beam
qu(S/2)
L

m
L
Short beam
S

An equivalent
q uniformlyy distributed load can be established for a beam in a two
way system.
For a triangular load distribution, the equivalent shear force coefficient Cs is
equal to 0.5 and the equivalent bending moment coefficient Cb is equal to 0.67.

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:


qu(S/2)

Lon
ng beam
qu(S/2)
L

L
Short beam
S

For a trapezoidal load distribution, Cs and Cb are given in the following table.
Shear and moment equivalent load coefficients for trapezoidal load distribution
r =L/S 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

Cs 0.500 0.545 0.583 0.615 0.643 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750

Cb 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.852 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:

Original distribution Equivalent distribution Equivalent distribution


for shear for moment

wu 0.5 wu 0.67 wu

S S S

wu Cs wu Cb wu

L L L

Summary of two-way ribbed slab design procedure

1. Evaluate overall slab thickness and key ribbed slab components.


2
2. Determine the total factored load on the slab.
slab
3. Determine load distributions in the two principal directions.
4
4. Determine the shear force and bending moments.
moments
5. Check web width for beam shear.
6
6. D i rib
Design ib reinforcement.
i f
7. Design drawing.

Example
p 3
Design the two-way ribbed slab shown in the figure below. The covering
materials weigh 1.5 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75,
kN/ 2, concrete
kN/m t hollow
h ll bl k are 40cm25cm17cm
blocks 40 25 17 i dimension,
in di i
each 17 kg in weight and the live load is 4 kN/m2. All beams are 30 cm
wide. Use fc=30 MPa, fy=420 MPa.

8.0 m

8.0 m

8.0 m 8.0 m
S l ti
Solution:

1- Evaluate overall slab thickness and key ribbed slab components:

l n = 800 30 = 770cm

The largest slab thickness is given by:


(770)(800 + 420 /1.4)
h max = = 23.5cm
36000

Take width of rib = 12 cm.

S l ti
Solution:

2- Determine
ee e thee total
o factored
c o ed load
o d on
o thee slab:
s b

Total volume (hatched) = 0.52 0.62 0.23 = 0.074152 m3

V l
Volume off hhollow
ll blocks 2[0 2 0.17
bl k = 2[0.2 0 17 0.5] 0 034 m3
0 5] = 0.034

Net concrete volume = 0.074152 - 0.034 = 0.040152 m3

Weight of concrete = 0.040152 25= 1.0038 kN

Weight of concrete /m2 = 0.28125 /[(0.52)(0.62)] = 3.11 kN/m2

Weight of hollow blocks /m2 = 0.17(2)/[(0.52)(0.62)] = 1.05 kN/m2

Total dead load= 3.11+1.05 + 1.5 + 0.75 = 6.41 kN/m2

Ultimate load = 1.2(6.41) + 1.6(4) = 14.1 kN/m2

S l ti
Solution:

33- Determine load distributions in the two principal directions: 0 52 m


0.52

L 8
r= = =1.0
S 8

8m
w1=w2=0.35(14.1) =4 92 kN/m2
=0 35(14 1) =4.92

Load per rib in the first direction:

8m
0.62 m
wu/m of rib =14.1x0.62=
=14 1x0 62= 3.06
3 06 kN/m of rib

Load per rib in the second direction:


wu/m of rib =14
14.1x0.52
1x0 52= 2.56
2 56 kN/m of rib 8m 8m

00.5
Direction 1
0.4
S l ti
Solution:

4- Determine
ee e thee shear
s e force
o ce and
d bending
be d g moments:
o e s

Using the ACI 8.3 coefficients


3 06 kN/m
3.06

Direction 1

Maximum factored shear force = 1.15wuln/2 = 1.15(3.06) (7.7/2) = 13.5 kN


Maximum factored negative moment = wuln2/9 = 3.06(7.7)2/9 = 20.2 kN.m
M i
Maximum factored iti momentt = wuln2/14 = 3.06(7.7)
f t d positive 3 06(7 7)2/14 = 12.9
12 9 kN.m
kN
2.56 kN/m
Direction 2

Maximum factored shear force = 1.15w


1 15wuln/2 = 1.15(2.56)
1 15(2 56) (7
(7.7/2)
7/2) = 11.4
11 4 kN
Maximum factored negative moment = wuln2/9 = 2.56(7.7)2/9 = 16.9 kN.m
Maximum factored positive moment = wuln2/14 = 2.56(7.7)2/14 = 10.9 kN.m
S l ti
Solution:

55- C
Check
ec web width
w d for
o be
beam sshear:
e
Direction 1
Reinforcement is closest to the outside surface of concrete.
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 0.8 = 19.6 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.

1 1V c = 1.1
1.1 1 1 0.75
0 75 0.17
0 17 30 120 196 = 18067 N
= 18.1 kN > Vu,max = 13.5 kN
Direction 2
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 1.6 - 0.8 = 18.0 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.

1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 30 120 180 = 16593 N


= 16.6 kN > Vu,max = 11.4 kN

All though shear reinforcement is not required, 4 6 mm stirrups per meter


run are used to carry the bottom flexural reinforcement.

S l ti
Solution:

66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e

Direction 1

Positive moment Negative moment


Mu = 12.9 kN.m Mu = 20.2 kN.m

Use mm 1 100 aandd mm 1 12 Use mm 2 16 in each rib.


rib
reinforcing bars in each rib.

S l ti
Solution:

66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e

Direction 2

Positive moment Negative moment


Mu = 10.9 kN.m Mu = 16.9 kN.m

Use mm 1 100 aandd mm 1 12 Use mm 2 16 in each rib.


rib
reinforcing bars in each rib.

S l ti
Solution:

77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g

S l ti
Solution:

77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g

R i f
Reinforced
dCConcrete
t DDesign
i II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture
L t 6
Design of hollow block and ribbed slabs
PART I
One way ribbed slabs


Ribbed and hollow block slabs
Ribbed slabs consist of regularly spaced ribs monolithically built
with a toping slab. The voids between the ribs may be either light
material such as hollow blocks [figure 1] or it may be left unfilled
[figure 2].

Topping slab

Rib Hollow block Temporary form


Figure [1] Hollow block floor Figure [2] Moulded floor


Ribbed and hollow block slabs
The main advantage of using hollow blocks is the reduction in
weight by removing the part of the concrete below the neutral axis.
Additional advantages are:

1- Ease of construction.
2 Hollow
2- H ll bl k make
blocks k it possible
ibl to
t have
h smooth
th ceiling
ili which
hi h is
i
often required for architectural considerations.
33- Provides good sound and temperature insulation properties.

Hollow block floors proved economic for spans of more than 5 m


with light or moderate live loads, such as hospitals, offices or
residential buildings. They are not suitable for structures having
h
heavy li loads
live l d suchh as warehouses
h or parking
ki garages.

One-way v.s two-way ribbed slabs


If the ribs are provided in one direction only,
only the slab is classified as
being one-way, regardless of the ratio of longer to shorter panel
dimensions. It is classified as two-way if the ribs are provided in two
directions. One way spans typically span in the shorter direction.
One way ribbed slabs may be used for spans up to 6 - 6.5 m.

One-way slab Two-way slab


One-way ribbed (joist) slab

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Key components of ribbed slabs


a. Topping slab: ACI
C 8.
8.13.6.1
3.6.
Topping slab thickness (t) is not to be less than 1/12 the clear
distance (lc) between ribs, nor less than 50 mm
lc

t 12
50 mm
lc
andd sshould
ou d ssatisfy
s y for
o a uunit sstrip:
p: Slab thickness ((t))

w u l c2
t
1240 f c

Shrinkage reinforcement is provided in the topping slab in both


directions in a mesh form.

Key components of ribbed slabs


b. Regularly spaced ribs:
Minimum dimensions:
Ribs are not to be less than 100 mm in width, and a depth of not
more than
th 3.5
3 5 times
ti th minimum
the i i webb width
idth andd clear
l spacing
i
between ribs is not to exceed 750 mm.
ACI 8.13.2
l 750 mm
c
ACI 8.13.3

h 3.5 bw

bw 100

Key components of ribbed slabs


Shear strength:
g ACI 8.13.8
Shear strength provided by rib concrete Vc may be taken 10% greater
than those for beams.

Flexural strength:
Ribs are designed as rectangular beams in the regions of negative
moment at the supports and as T-shaped beams in the regions of
positive moments between the supports.

Effective
ff i flange
fl width
id h be is
i taken
k as half
h lf the
h distance
di b
between ribs,
ib
center-to-center. b
e

Keyy components
p of ribbed slabs
c. Hollow blocks:
Hollow blocks are made of lightweight
g g concrete or other
lightweight materials. The most common concrete hollow block
sizes are 40 25 cm in plan and heights of 14, 17, 20, and 24 cm.

Hollow blocks do not contribute to the strength of the slab. In fact,


theyy impose
p an additional weight
g on the slab. In some cases,, blocks
made of polystyrene, which is 1/15 of the weight of concrete
blocks, are used.

To avoid shear failures, the blocks are terminated near the support
and replaced
p byy solid pparts. Solid pparts are made under ppartitions
and concentrated walls.

To avoid cracking due to shrinkage in top concrete flange,


flange the
concrete blocks should be watered prior to concrete placing.

Cross (distribution) ribs


Transversal ribs or cross ribs are added to one one-way
way hollow block
floors for better distribution of the applied loads. They also help in
distributing the concentrated loads due to walls in the transverse
direction. The bottom reinforcement is taken as the reinforcement in
the main ribs, and the top reinforcement should be taken at least of
th bottom
the b tt reinforcement.
i f t Cross
C ribs
ib are usually
ll 10 cm wide.
id

Arrangement of regularly spaced cross rib according to Egyptian


code:

Cross (distribution) ribs

No cross ribs One cross rib Three cross ribs

Arrangement of hollow blocks and width of hidden beams


The number of blocks in each direction must be specified on the
construction drawings. Thus, the layout of the blocks must be
positioned so that enough solid parts are present near the supporting
beams. The normal width of solid part ranges between 0.8-2.0 m for
floors with hidden beams and ranges between 0.2-0.5 m for floors
with
ith projected
j t d beams.
b

The number of blocks (having sizes of 40 25 cm in plan) and the


width of the beams must satisfy:

In the rib direction (mm): Lc 1 = 250 n1 + 100 ncr

P
Perpendicular
di l to t rib
ib direction
di ti (mm):
( ) Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)

Arrangement of hollow blocks and width of hidden beams

bw =width of main rib


Lc 1 = 250 n1 + 100 ncr
Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)

Minimum thickness of one way slabs ACI Table 9.5(a)

Minimum Cover ACI 7.7.1


a - Concrete exposed to earth or weather
for <16mm------40 mm and for >16mm----- 50 mm
b - Concrete not exposed to earth or weather

for <32mm------20 mm, otherwise ------ 40 mm


Loads Assigned to Slabs
wu=1.2
1 2 D.L
D L + 1.6
1 6 L.L
LL

a- Dead Load (D
(D.L)
L) :
1- Weight of slab covering materials
2- Equivalent
q ppartition weight
g
3- Own weight of slab

b Live
b- Li LLoad
d (L
(L.L)
L)

a- Dead Load (D.L)


( )
1- Weight of slab covering materials, total =2.315 kN/m2
tiles (2.5cm thick) =0.02523 = 0.575 kN/m2
cement mortar (2.5cm thick) =0.02521 = 0.525 kN/m2
sand (5.0cm thick) =0.0518 = 0.9 kN/m2
plaster 0.015 21 = 0.315 kN/m2
(1.5cm thick) =0.01521

tiles 22.55 cm
cement mortar 2.5 cm
sand 5 cm

slab

plaster 1.5 cm

2-Equivalent partition weight


This load is usually taken as the weight of all walls (weight of 1m span
of wall total spans of all walls) carried by the slab divided by the floor
area and treated as a dead load rather than a live load.
To calculate the weight of 1m span of wall:
Each 1m2 surface of wall contains 12.5 blocks
A bl
blockk with
i h thickness
hi k 10 weighs
10cm i h 10 kg
k
A block with thickness 20cm weighs 20 kg

Each face of 1m2 surface has 30kg plaster

Load / 1m2 surface for 10 cm block =


12.5 10 +230=185 kg/m2 = 1.85 kN/m2

Load / 1m2 surface for 20 cm block =


20 cm
12.5 20 +230=310 kg/m2 = 3.1 kN/m2

Weight of 1m span of wall with height 3m:


For 10 cm block wt. = 1.85 kN/m2 3 = 5.6 kN/m
For 20 cm block wt. = 3.1 kN/m2 3 = 9.3 kN/m
3- Own weight of slab

Example
Find the total ultimate load per rib for the ribbed slab shown:

Assume depth of slab = 25 cm (20cm block +5cm toping slab)

Hollow blocks are 40 cm 25 cm 20 cm in dimension

Assume ribs have 10 cm width of web

Assume equivalent partition load = 0.75 kN/m2

Consider live load = 2 kN/m2.

3- Own weight of slab


Solution
Total volume (hatched) = 0.5 0.25 0.25 = 0.03125 m3

Volume of one hollow block = 0.4 0.20 0.25 = 0.02 m3

Net concrete volume = 0.03125 - 0.02 = 0.01125 m3

Weight of concrete = 0.01125 25= 0.28125 kN

Weight of concrete /m2 = 0.28125 /[(0.5)(0.25)] = 2.25 kN/m2

Weight of hollow blocks /m2 = 0.2/[(0.5)(0.25)] = 1.6 kN/m2

Total slab own weight


weight= 2.25
2 25 + 1.6 3 85 kN/m2
1 6 = 3.85

L dp
Load per rib
ib
Total dead load= 3.85 + 2.315 + 0.75 = 6.915 kN/m2
Ultimate load = 1.2(6.915) + 1.6(2) = 11.5 kN/m2

Ultimate load per rib = 11.5 0.5 = 5.75 kN/m


Minimum live Load values on slabs
Type of Use Uniform Live Load
kN/m2
Residential 2
Residential balconies 3
Computer use 5
b- Live Load ((L.L)) Offices 2
Warehouses
It depends on the function for Light storage 6
which the floor is constructed. Heavy Storage 12
Schools
Classrooms 2
Libraries
rooms 3
Stack rooms 6
Hospitals 2
Assembly Halls
Fixed seating 2.5
Movable seating 5
Garages (cars) 2.5
Stores
Retail 4
wholesale 5
Exit facilities 5
Manufacturing
Light 4
Heavy 6
Loads Assigned to Beams
Beams are usually designed to carry the following loads:
- Their own weight
- Weights of partitions applied directly on them
- Floor
Fl loads
l d

S1 S2

Shrinkage Reinforcement Ratio


According to ACI Code and for fy =420 MPa ACI 7.12.2.1
shrinkage = 0.0018 As , shrinkage = 0.0018 b h
where, b = width of strip, and h = slab thickness

Mi i
Minimum Reinforcement
R i f t Ratio
R ti for
f Main
M i Reinforcement
R i f t

min A s ,shrinkage
A s ,min shrinkage = 0.0018 b h ACI 10.5.4

Check shear capacity of the section


V u 1.1 V c = (1.1)0.17 f c ' b wd
Otherwise enlarge depth of slab

Spacing of Reinforcement Bars
a- Flexural Reinforcement Bars
Flexural reinforcement is to be spaced not farther than three times the slab
thickness (hs), nor farther apart than 45 cm, center-to-center.
3 hs
Smax smaller of ACI 10.5.4
45cm

b- Shrinkage Reinforcement Bars


Shrinkage reinforcement is to be spaced not farther than five times the slab
thickness, nor farther apart than 45 cm, center-to-center.
5 hs
Smax smaller
ll of ACI 7.12.2.2
7 12 2 2
45cm

Summary of one
one-way
way ribbed slab design procedure
1. The direction of ribs is chosen.
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both
directions.
4. The factored load on each of the ribs is computed.
5. The shear force and bending moment diagrams are drawn.
6. The strength of the web in shear is checked.
7. Design the ribs as T-section shaped beams in the positive moment
regions and rectangular beams in the regions of negative moment.
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the
reinforcement are to be prepared.
p p

Example 1
Determine the arrangement
of blocks and width of
hidden beams for the plan
p
shown. The blocks used
have the size of 40 20 cm
in plan. The live load is 4
kN/m2.

Solution

Note that the width of hollow blocks in Gaza is 250 mm NOT 200 mm

Solution

Solution

Solution

Example 2
Design a oneone-way
way ribbed slab to cover a 3.8
3 8 m x 10 m panel,
panel shown in the
figure below. The covering materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent
ppartition load is equal
q to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live load is 2 kN/m2.
Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420MPa
3.8 m

10 m

Solution
1. The direction of ribs is chosen:
Ribs are arranged in the short direction as shown in the figure

3.8 m
3
50m
5.0 50m
5.0
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t:
From ACI Table 9.5(a), hmin = 380/16 = 23.75cm use h = 24 cm.
L t width
Let b bw =10
idth off web, 10 cm
Use hollow blocks of size 40 cm 25 cm 17 cm (weight=0.17 kN)
pp g slab thickness = 24 17 = 7cm > lc/12 =40/12= 3.3cm > 5cm OK
Topping
For a unit strip of topping slab:
wu=[1.2(0.07 25 + 0.75 + 2.25) + 1.6(2)] 1m = 8.9 kN/m = 8.9 N/mm
w u l c2 8.9( 400 ) 2
t = = 16mm OK
1240 f c ( 0.9 )1240 25

Solution
3. Provide shrinkage
g reinforcement for the topping
pp g slab in both directions:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement, As=0.0018(1000)70=126 mm2
Use 5 6 mm/m in both directions.

4. The factored load on each of the ribs is to be computed:


Total volume (in 1m2 surface) 1.0 m
= 1.0 1.0 0.24 = 0.24 m3
Volume of hollow blocks in 1m2
= 8 0.4 0.25 0.17 = 0.136 m3 0.05 m
Net concrete volume in 1m2

1.0 m
= 0.24-
0 24 0.136 0 104 m3
0 136 = 0.104

0.25 m
Weight of concrete in 1m2
= 0.104 25 = 2.6 kN/m2
g of hollow blocks in 1m2
Weight
= 8 0.17= 1.36 kN/m2
0.4 m 0.1 m 0.4 m

7 cm
Total dead load /m2
= 2.25 + 0.75 + 2.6 + 1.36
0.244 m

= 7.0 kN/m2

Solution
wu=1.2(7)+1.6(2)=11.6
1.2(7) 1.6(2) 11.6 kN/m2
wu/m of rib =11.6x0.5= 5.8 kN/m of rib
5. Critical shear forces and bending moments are determined (simply supported beam):
Maximum factored shear force = wul/2 = 5.8 (3.8/2) = 11 kN
Maximum factored bending moment = wul2/8 = 5.8 (3.8)2/8 = 10.5 kN.m
6. Check rib strength for beam shear:
Effective depth d = 2420.60.6 =20.8 cm, assuming 12mm reinforcing
bars and 6 mm stirrups.
p

1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 25 100 208 = 14400 N = 14.4 kN > Vu,max = 11 kN

Though shear reinforcement is not required, 4 6 mm stirrups per meter


run are to be used to carry the bottom flexural reinforcement.

Solution
7. Design
g flexural reinforcement for the ribs:
There is only positive moments over the simply supported beam, and the
section of maximum positive moment is to be designed as a T-section
Assume that a<70mm and =0.90Rectangular
=0 90Rectangular section with b = be =500mm
50
0.85 25 2 10.5 106
= 1 1 7

kN.m
420 0.9 0.85
0 85 25 500 2082 24

105 k
As
= 0.0013
10
As = be d = 0.0013 500 208 = 135 mm 2

Use 210mm (As,sup= 157 mm2)

As f y 157 420
a= = = 6.2 mm < 70mm
0.85f c 'b e 0.85 25 500
The assumption is right

Solution
Check As,min
s min
0.25 f c ' 1.4
A s,min = max bw d ; bw d
f y fy
A s,min = 70 mm 2 < A s,sup = 157 mm 2 OK

Check =0.9
=0 9 (ductility of the section)
a 6.2
c= = = 7 .3 mm
1 00.85
85
dc 208 7 .3
t = 0.003 = 0.003
c 7.3
t = 0.083 >> 0 .005 Tension controlled = 0 .9 OK

Solution
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the reinforcement are to be
prepared

110 m

110 m
110 m

110 m
3.8 m A A

5.0 m 5.0 m
6mm stirrups 6mm mesh
@25 cm @20 cm
7cm
24cm
17cm

210mm 10 40 cm 10 210mm

S i A-A
Section AA

PART II
Two way ribbed slabs


Method of analysis

R i Li
i

Method of coefficients

1.0m
w = ws + wl

wS
S

w s = w

w l = w wl
L

Rectangularity ratio:

Case

L L 0.76L L L L 0.87L 0.76L 0.87L


r S S S 0.76S 0.87S S 0.87S 0.76S
S

Method of coefficients

ECP 203 load coefficients LL< 5kN/m2


r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85

0 35
0.35 0 29
0.29 0 25
0.25 0 21
0.21 0 18
0.18 0 16
0.16 0 14
0.14 0 12
0.12 0 11
0.11 0 09
0.09 0 08
0.08

Marcus load coefficients LL 5kN/m2


r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

0.292 0.355 0.411 0.470 0.526 0.577 0.623 0.663 0.699 0.730 0.757

0.292 0.240 0.198 0.165 0.137 0.114 0.095 0.079 0.067 0.056 0.047

Minimum slab thickness:


To avoid the complexity of calculating for a two way ribbed slab,
slab
one of three equations of the ACI 318-89 which provides an upper
bound for the deflection control of the slab thickness can be used for
simplicity.

l n (800 + f y /1.4)
h max =
36000

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:


The loads acting on beams have tributary areas which are bounded
by 45-degree lines drawn from the corners of the panels and the
centerlines of the adjacent panels parallel to the long sides.
S

S L

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:

qu(S/2)

Long beam
qu(S/2)
L

m
L
Short beam
S

An equivalent
q uniformlyy distributed load can be established for a beam in a two
way system.
For a triangular load distribution, the equivalent shear force coefficient Cs is
equal to 0.5 and the equivalent bending moment coefficient Cb is equal to 0.67.

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:


qu(S/2)

Lon
ng beam
qu(S/2)
L

L
Short beam
S

For a trapezoidal load distribution, Cs and Cb are given in the following table.
Shear and moment equivalent load coefficients for trapezoidal load distribution
r =L/S 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

Cs 0.500 0.545 0.583 0.615 0.643 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750

Cb 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.852 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:

Original distribution Equivalent distribution Equivalent distribution


for shear for moment

wu 0.5 wu 0.67 wu

S S S

wu Cs wu Cb wu

L L L

Summary of two-way ribbed slab design procedure

1. Evaluate overall slab thickness and key ribbed slab components.


2
2. Determine the total factored load on the slab.
slab
3. Determine load distributions in the two principal directions.
4
4. Determine the shear force and bending moments.
moments
5. Check web width for beam shear.
6
6. D i rib
Design ib reinforcement.
i f
7. Design drawing.

Example
p 3
Design the two-way ribbed slab shown in the figure below. The covering
materials weigh 1.5 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75,
kN/ 2, concrete
kN/m t hollow
h ll bl k are 40cm25cm17cm
blocks 40 25 17 i dimension,
in di i
each 17 kg in weight and the live load is 4 kN/m2. All beams are 30 cm
wide. Use fc=30 MPa, fy=420 MPa.

8.0 m

8.0 m

8.0 m 8.0 m
S l ti
Solution:

1- Evaluate overall slab thickness and key ribbed slab components:

l n = 800 30 = 770cm

The largest slab thickness is given by:


(770)(800 + 420 /1.4)
h max = = 23.5cm
36000

Take width of rib = 12 cm.

S l ti
Solution:

2- Determine
ee e thee total
o factored
c o ed load
o d on
o thee slab:
s b

Total volume (hatched) = 0.52 0.62 0.23 = 0.074152 m3

V l
Volume off hhollow
ll blocks 2[0 2 0.17
bl k = 2[0.2 0 17 0.5] 0 034 m3
0 5] = 0.034

Net concrete volume = 0.074152 - 0.034 = 0.040152 m3

Weight of concrete = 0.040152 25= 1.0038 kN

Weight of concrete /m2 = 0.28125 /[(0.52)(0.62)] = 3.11 kN/m2

Weight of hollow blocks /m2 = 0.17(2)/[(0.52)(0.62)] = 1.05 kN/m2

Total dead load= 3.11+1.05 + 1.5 + 0.75 = 6.41 kN/m2

Ultimate load = 1.2(6.41) + 1.6(4) = 14.1 kN/m2

S l ti
Solution:

33- Determine load distributions in the two principal directions: 0 52 m


0.52

L 8
r= = =1.0
S 8

8m
w1=w2=0.35(14.1) =4 92 kN/m2
=0 35(14 1) =4.92

Load per rib in Direction 1:

8m
0.62 m
wu/m of rib =4.92x0.62=
=4 92x0 62= 3.06
3 06 kN/m of rib

Load per rib in Direction 2:


wu/m of rib =44.92x0.52
92x0 52= 2.56
2 56 kN/m of rib 8m 8m

0.5
Direction 1
0.4
S l ti
Solution:

4- Determine
ee e thee shear
s e force
o ce and
d bending
be d g moments:
o e s

Using the ACI 8.3 coefficients


3 06 kN/m
3.06

Direction 1

Maximum factored shear force = 1.15wuln/2 = 1.15(3.06) (7.7/2) = 13.5 kN


Maximum factored negative moment = wuln2/9 = 3.06(7.7)2/9 = 20.2 kN.m
M i
Maximum factored iti momentt = wuln2/14 = 3.06(7.7)
f t d positive 3 06(7 7)2/14 = 12.9
12 9 kN.m
kN
2.56 kN/m
Direction 2

Maximum factored shear force = 1.15w


1 15wuln/2 = 1.15(2.56)
1 15(2 56) (7
(7.7/2)
7/2) = 11.4
11 4 kN
Maximum factored negative moment = wuln2/9 = 2.56(7.7)2/9 = 16.9 kN.m
Maximum factored positive moment = wuln2/14 = 2.56(7.7)2/14 = 10.9 kN.m
S l ti
Solution:

55- C
Check
ec web width
w d for
o be
beam sshear:
e
Direction 1
Reinforcement is closest to the outside surface of concrete.
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 0.8 = 19.6 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.

1 1V c = 1.1
1.1 1 1 0.75
0 75 0.17
0 17 30 120 196 = 18067 N
= 18.1 kN > Vu,max = 13.5 kN
Direction 2
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 1.6 - 0.8 = 18.0 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.

1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 30 120 180 = 16593 N


= 16.6 kN > Vu,max = 11.4 kN

All though shear reinforcement is not required, 4 6 mm stirrups per meter


run are used to carry the bottom flexural reinforcement.

S l ti
Solution:

66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e

Direction 1

Positive moment Negative moment


Mu = 12.9 kN.m Mu = 20.2 kN.m

Use mm 1 100 aandd mm 1 12 Use mm 2 16 in each rib.


rib
reinforcing bars in each rib.

S l ti
Solution:

66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e

Direction 2

Positive moment Negative moment


Mu = 10.9 kN.m Mu = 16.9 kN.m

Use mm 1 100 aandd mm 1 12 Use mm 2 16 in each rib.


rib
reinforcing bars in each rib.

S l ti
Solution:

77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g

S l ti
Solution:

77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g

R i f
Reinforced
dCConcrete
t DDesign
i II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture
L t 6
Design of hollow block and ribbed slabs
PART I
One way ribbed slabs


Ribbed and hollow block slabs
Ribbed slabs consist of regularly spaced ribs monolithically built
with a toping slab. The voids between the ribs may be either light
material such as hollow blocks [figure 1] or it may be left unfilled
[figure 2].

Topping slab

Rib Hollow block Temporary form


Figure [1] Hollow block floor Figure [2] Moulded floor


Ribbed and hollow block slabs
The main advantage of using hollow blocks is the reduction in
weight by removing the part of the concrete below the neutral axis.
Additional advantages are:

1- Ease of construction.
2 Hollow
2- H ll bl k make
blocks k it possible
ibl to
t have
h smooth
th ceiling
ili which
hi h is
i
often required for architectural considerations.
33- Provides good sound and temperature insulation properties.

Hollow block floors proved economic for spans of more than 5 m


with light or moderate live loads, such as hospitals, offices or
residential buildings. They are not suitable for structures having
h
heavy li loads
live l d suchh as warehouses
h or parking
ki garages.

One-way v.s two-way ribbed slabs


If the ribs are provided in one direction only,
only the slab is classified as
being one-way, regardless of the ratio of longer to shorter panel
dimensions. It is classified as two-way if the ribs are provided in two
directions. One way spans typically span in the shorter direction.
One way ribbed slabs may be used for spans up to 6 - 6.5 m.

One-way slab Two-way slab


One-way ribbed (joist) slab

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Key components of ribbed slabs


a. Topping slab: ACI
C 8.
8.13.6.1
3.6.
Topping slab thickness (t) is not to be less than 1/12 the clear
distance (lc) between ribs, nor less than 50 mm
lc

t 12
50 mm
lc
andd sshould
ou d ssatisfy
s y for
o a uunit sstrip:
p: Slab thickness ((t))

w u l c2
t
1240 f c

Shrinkage reinforcement is provided in the topping slab in both


directions in a mesh form.

Key components of ribbed slabs


b. Regularly spaced ribs:
Minimum dimensions:
Ribs are not to be less than 100 mm in width, and a depth of not
more than
th 3.5
3 5 times
ti th minimum
the i i webb width
idth andd clear
l spacing
i
between ribs is not to exceed 750 mm.
ACI 8.13.2
l 750 mm
c
ACI 8.13.3

h 3.5 bw

bw 100

Key components of ribbed slabs


Shear strength:
g ACI 8.13.8
Shear strength provided by rib concrete Vc may be taken 10% greater
than those for beams.

Flexural strength:
Ribs are designed as rectangular beams in the regions of negative
moment at the supports and as T-shaped beams in the regions of
positive moments between the supports.

Effective
ff i flange
fl width
id h be is
i taken
k as half
h lf the
h distance
di b
between ribs,
ib
center-to-center. b
e

Keyy components
p of ribbed slabs
c. Hollow blocks:
Hollow blocks are made of lightweight
g g concrete or other
lightweight materials. The most common concrete hollow block
sizes are 40 25 cm in plan and heights of 14, 17, 20, and 24 cm.

Hollow blocks do not contribute to the strength of the slab. In fact,


theyy impose
p an additional weight
g on the slab. In some cases,, blocks
made of polystyrene, which is 1/15 of the weight of concrete
blocks, are used.

To avoid shear failures, the blocks are terminated near the support
and replaced
p byy solid pparts. Solid pparts are made under ppartitions
and concentrated walls.

To avoid cracking due to shrinkage in top concrete flange,


flange the
concrete blocks should be watered prior to concrete placing.

Cross (distribution) ribs


Transversal ribs or cross ribs are added to one one-way
way hollow block
floors for better distribution of the applied loads. They also help in
distributing the concentrated loads due to walls in the transverse
direction. The bottom reinforcement is taken as the reinforcement in
the main ribs, and the top reinforcement should be taken at least of
th bottom
the b tt reinforcement.
i f t Cross
C ribs
ib are usually
ll 10 cm wide.
id

Arrangement of regularly spaced cross rib according to Egyptian


code:

Cross (distribution) ribs

No cross ribs One cross rib Three cross ribs

Arrangement of hollow blocks and width of hidden beams


The number of blocks in each direction must be specified on the
construction drawings. Thus, the layout of the blocks must be
positioned so that enough solid parts are present near the supporting
beams. The normal width of solid part ranges between 0.8-2.0 m for
floors with hidden beams and ranges between 0.2-0.5 m for floors
with
ith projected
j t d beams.
b

The number of blocks (having sizes of 40 25 cm in plan) and the


width of the beams must satisfy:

In the rib direction (mm): Lc 1 = 250 n1 + 100 ncr

P
Perpendicular
di l to t rib
ib direction
di ti (mm):
( ) Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)

Arrangement of hollow blocks and width of hidden beams

bw =width of main rib


Lc 1 = 250 n1 + 100 ncr
Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)

Minimum thickness of one way slabs ACI Table 9.5(a)

Minimum Cover ACI 7.7.1


a - Concrete exposed to earth or weather
for <16mm------40 mm and for >16mm----- 50 mm
b - Concrete not exposed to earth or weather

for <32mm------20 mm, otherwise ------ 40 mm


Loads Assigned to Slabs
wu=1.2
1 2 D.L
D L + 1.6
1 6 L.L
LL

a- Dead Load (D
(D.L)
L) :
1- Weight of slab covering materials
2- Equivalent
q ppartition weight
g
3- Own weight of slab

b Live
b- Li LLoad
d (L
(L.L)
L)

a- Dead Load (D.L)


( )
1- Weight of slab covering materials, total =2.315 kN/m2
tiles (2.5cm thick) =0.02523 = 0.575 kN/m2
cement mortar (2.5cm thick) =0.02521 = 0.525 kN/m2
sand (5.0cm thick) =0.0518 = 0.9 kN/m2
plaster 0.015 21 = 0.315 kN/m2
(1.5cm thick) =0.01521

tiles 22.55 cm
cement mortar 2.5 cm
sand 5 cm

slab

plaster 1.5 cm

2-Equivalent partition weight


This load is usually taken as the weight of all walls (weight of 1m span
of wall total spans of all walls) carried by the slab divided by the floor
area and treated as a dead load rather than a live load.
To calculate the weight of 1m span of wall:
Each 1m2 surface of wall contains 12.5 blocks
A bl
blockk with
i h thickness
hi k 10 weighs
10cm i h 10 kg
k
A block with thickness 20cm weighs 20 kg

Each face of 1m2 surface has 30kg plaster

Load / 1m2 surface for 10 cm block =


12.5 10 +230=185 kg/m2 = 1.85 kN/m2

Load / 1m2 surface for 20 cm block =


20 cm
12.5 20 +230=310 kg/m2 = 3.1 kN/m2

Weight of 1m span of wall with height 3m:


For 10 cm block wt. = 1.85 kN/m2 3 = 5.6 kN/m
For 20 cm block wt. = 3.1 kN/m2 3 = 9.3 kN/m
3- Own weight of slab

Example
Find the total ultimate load per rib for the ribbed slab shown:

Assume depth of slab = 25 cm (20cm block +5cm toping slab)

Hollow blocks are 40 cm 25 cm 20 cm in dimension

Assume ribs have 10 cm width of web

Assume equivalent partition load = 0.75 kN/m2

Consider live load = 2 kN/m2.

3- Own weight of slab


Solution
Total volume (hatched) = 0.5 0.25 0.25 = 0.03125 m3

Volume of one hollow block = 0.4 0.20 0.25 = 0.02 m3

Net concrete volume = 0.03125 - 0.02 = 0.01125 m3

Weight of concrete = 0.01125 25= 0.28125 kN

Weight of concrete /m2 = 0.28125 /[(0.5)(0.25)] = 2.25 kN/m2

Weight of hollow blocks /m2 = 0.2/[(0.5)(0.25)] = 1.6 kN/m2

Total slab own weight


weight= 2.25
2 25 + 1.6 3 85 kN/m2
1 6 = 3.85

L dp
Load per rib
ib
Total dead load= 3.85 + 2.315 + 0.75 = 6.915 kN/m2
Ultimate load = 1.2(6.915) + 1.6(2) = 11.5 kN/m2

Ultimate load per rib = 11.5 0.5 = 5.75 kN/m


Minimum live Load values on slabs
Type of Use Uniform Live Load
kN/m2
Residential 2
Residential balconies 3
Computer use 5
b- Live Load ((L.L)) Offices 2
Warehouses
It depends on the function for Light storage 6
which the floor is constructed. Heavy Storage 12
Schools
Classrooms 2
Libraries
rooms 3
Stack rooms 6
Hospitals 2
Assembly Halls
Fixed seating 2.5
Movable seating 5
Garages (cars) 2.5
Stores
Retail 4
wholesale 5
Exit facilities 5
Manufacturing
Light 4
Heavy 6
Loads Assigned to Beams
Beams are usually designed to carry the following loads:
- Their own weight
- Weights of partitions applied directly on them
- Floor
Fl loads
l d

S1 S2

Shrinkage Reinforcement Ratio


According to ACI Code and for fy =420 MPa ACI 7.12.2.1
shrinkage = 0.0018 As , shrinkage = 0.0018 b h
where, b = width of strip, and h = slab thickness

Mi i
Minimum Reinforcement
R i f t Ratio
R ti for
f Main
M i Reinforcement
R i f t

min A s ,shrinkage
A s ,min shrinkage = 0.0018 b h ACI 10.5.4

Check shear capacity of the section


V u 1.1 V c = (1.1)0.17 f c ' b wd
Otherwise enlarge depth of slab

Spacing of Reinforcement Bars
a- Flexural Reinforcement Bars
Flexural reinforcement is to be spaced not farther than three times the slab
thickness (hs), nor farther apart than 45 cm, center-to-center.
3 hs
Smax smaller of ACI 10.5.4
45cm

b- Shrinkage Reinforcement Bars


Shrinkage reinforcement is to be spaced not farther than five times the slab
thickness, nor farther apart than 45 cm, center-to-center.
5 hs
Smax smaller
ll of ACI 7.12.2.2
7 12 2 2
45cm

Summary of one
one-way
way ribbed slab design procedure
1. The direction of ribs is chosen.
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both
directions.
4. The factored load on each of the ribs is computed.
5. The shear force and bending moment diagrams are drawn.
6. The strength of the web in shear is checked.
7. Design the ribs as T-section shaped beams in the positive moment
regions and rectangular beams in the regions of negative moment.
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the
reinforcement are to be prepared.
p p

Example 1
Determine the arrangement
of blocks and width of
hidden beams for the plan
p
shown. The blocks used
have the size of 40 20 cm
in plan. The live load is 4
kN/m2.

Solution

Note that the width of hollow blocks in Gaza is 250 mm NOT 200 mm

Solution

Solution

Solution

Example 2
Design a oneone-way
way ribbed slab to cover a 3.8
3 8 m x 10 m panel,
panel shown in the
figure below. The covering materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent
ppartition load is equal
q to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live load is 2 kN/m2.
Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420MPa
3.8 m

10 m

Solution
1. The direction of ribs is chosen:
Ribs are arranged in the short direction as shown in the figure

3.8 m
3
50m
5.0 50m
5.0
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t:
From ACI Table 9.5(a), hmin = 380/16 = 23.75cm use h = 24 cm.
L t width
Let b bw =10
idth off web, 10 cm
Use hollow blocks of size 40 cm 25 cm 17 cm (weight=0.17 kN)
pp g slab thickness = 24 17 = 7cm > lc/12 =40/12= 3.3cm > 5cm OK
Topping
For a unit strip of topping slab:
wu=[1.2(0.07 25 + 0.75 + 2.25) + 1.6(2)] 1m = 8.9 kN/m = 8.9 N/mm
w u l c2 8.9( 400 ) 2
t = = 16mm OK
1240 f c ( 0.9 )1240 25

Solution
3. Provide shrinkage
g reinforcement for the topping
pp g slab in both directions:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement, As=0.0018(1000)70=126 mm2
Use 5 6 mm/m in both directions.

4. The factored load on each of the ribs is to be computed:


Total volume (in 1m2 surface) 1.0 m
= 1.0 1.0 0.24 = 0.24 m3
Volume of hollow blocks in 1m2
= 8 0.4 0.25 0.17 = 0.136 m3 0.05 m
Net concrete volume in 1m2

1.0 m
= 0.24-
0 24 0.136 0 104 m3
0 136 = 0.104

0.25 m
Weight of concrete in 1m2
= 0.104 25 = 2.6 kN/m2
g of hollow blocks in 1m2
Weight
= 8 0.17= 1.36 kN/m2
0.4 m 0.1 m 0.4 m

7 cm
Total dead load /m2
= 2.25 + 0.75 + 2.6 + 1.36
0.244 m

= 7.0 kN/m2

Solution
wu=1.2(7)+1.6(2)=11.6
1.2(7) 1.6(2) 11.6 kN/m2
wu/m of rib =11.6x0.5= 5.8 kN/m of rib
5. Critical shear forces and bending moments are determined (simply supported beam):
Maximum factored shear force = wul/2 = 5.8 (3.8/2) = 11 kN
Maximum factored bending moment = wul2/8 = 5.8 (3.8)2/8 = 10.5 kN.m
6. Check rib strength for beam shear:
Effective depth d = 2420.60.6 =20.8 cm, assuming 12mm reinforcing
bars and 6 mm stirrups.
p

1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 25 100 208 = 14400 N = 14.4 kN > Vu,max = 11 kN

Though shear reinforcement is not required, 4 6 mm stirrups per meter


run are to be used to carry the bottom flexural reinforcement.

Solution
7. Design
g flexural reinforcement for the ribs:
There is only positive moments over the simply supported beam, and the
section of maximum positive moment is to be designed as a T-section
Assume that a<70mm and =0.90Rectangular
=0 90Rectangular section with b = be =500mm
50
0.85 25 2 10.5 106
= 1 1 7

kN.m
420 0.9 0.85
0 85 25 500 2082 24

105 k
As
= 0.0013
10
As = be d = 0.0013 500 208 = 135 mm 2

Use 210mm (As,sup= 157 mm2)

As f y 157 420
a= = = 6.2 mm < 70mm
0.85f c 'b e 0.85 25 500
The assumption is right

Solution
Check As,min
s min
0.25 f c ' 1.4
A s,min = max bw d ; bw d
f y fy
A s,min = 70 mm 2 < A s,sup = 157 mm 2 OK

Check =0.9
=0 9 (ductility of the section)
a 6.2
c= = = 7 .3 mm
1 00.85
85
dc 208 7 .3
t = 0.003 = 0.003
c 7.3
t = 0.083 >> 0 .005 Tension controlled = 0 .9 OK

Solution
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the reinforcement are to be
prepared

110 m

110 m
110 m

110 m
3.8 m A A

5.0 m 5.0 m
6mm stirrups 6mm mesh
@25 cm @20 cm
7cm
24cm
17cm

210mm 10 40 cm 10 210mm

S i A-A
Section AA

PART II
Two way ribbed slabs


Method of analysis

R i Li
i

Method of coefficients

1.0m
w = ws + wl

wS
S

w s = w

w l = w wl
L

Rectangularity ratio:

Case

L L 0.76L L L L 0.87L 0.76L 0.87L


r S S S 0.76S 0.87S S 0.87S 0.76S
S

Method of coefficients

ECP 203 load coefficients LL< 5kN/m2


r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85

0 35
0.35 0 29
0.29 0 25
0.25 0 21
0.21 0 18
0.18 0 16
0.16 0 14
0.14 0 12
0.12 0 11
0.11 0 09
0.09 0 08
0.08

Marcus load coefficients LL 5kN/m2


r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

0.292 0.355 0.411 0.470 0.526 0.577 0.623 0.663 0.699 0.730 0.757

0.292 0.240 0.198 0.165 0.137 0.114 0.095 0.079 0.067 0.056 0.047

Minimum slab thickness:


To avoid the complexity of calculating for a two way ribbed slab,
slab
one of three equations of the ACI 318-89 which provides an upper
bound for the deflection control of the slab thickness can be used for
simplicity.

l n (800 + f y /1.4)
h max =
36000

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:


The loads acting on beams have tributary areas which are bounded
by 45-degree lines drawn from the corners of the panels and the
centerlines of the adjacent panels parallel to the long sides.
S

S L

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:

qu(S/2)

Long beam
qu(S/2)
L

m
L
Short beam
S

An equivalent
q uniformlyy distributed load can be established for a beam in a two
way system.
For a triangular load distribution, the equivalent shear force coefficient Cs is
equal to 0.5 and the equivalent bending moment coefficient Cb is equal to 0.67.

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:


qu(S/2)

Lon
ng beam
qu(S/2)
L

L
Short beam
S

For a trapezoidal load distribution, Cs and Cb are given in the following table.
Shear and moment equivalent load coefficients for trapezoidal load distribution
r =L/S 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

Cs 0.500 0.545 0.583 0.615 0.643 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750

Cb 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.852 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:

Original distribution Equivalent distribution Equivalent distribution


for shear for moment

wu 0.5 wu 0.67 wu

S S S

wu Cs wu Cb wu

L L L

Summary of two-way ribbed slab design procedure

1. Evaluate overall slab thickness and key ribbed slab components.


2
2. Determine the total factored load on the slab.
slab
3. Determine load distributions in the two principal directions.
4
4. Determine the shear force and bending moments.
moments
5. Check web width for beam shear.
6
6. D i rib
Design ib reinforcement.
i f
7. Design drawing.

Example
p 3
Design the two-way ribbed slab shown in the figure below. The covering
materials weigh 1.5 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75,
kN/ 2, concrete
kN/m t hollow
h ll bl k are 40cm25cm17cm
blocks 40 25 17 i dimension,
in di i
each 17 kg in weight and the live load is 4 kN/m2. All beams are 30 cm
wide. Use fc=30 MPa, fy=420 MPa.

8.0 m

8.0 m

8.0 m 8.0 m
S l ti
Solution:

1- Evaluate overall slab thickness and key ribbed slab components:

l n = 800 30 = 770cm

The largest slab thickness is given by:


(770)(800 + 420 /1.4)
h max = = 23.5cm
36000

Take width of rib = 12 cm.

S l ti
Solution:

2- Determine
ee e thee total
o factored
c o ed load
o d on
o thee slab:
s b

Total volume (hatched) = 0.52 0.62 0.23 = 0.074152 m3

V l
Volume off hhollow
ll blocks 2[0 4 0.25
bl k = 2[0.4 0 25 0.17] 0 034 m3
0 17] = 0.034

Net concrete volume = 0.074152 - 0.034 = 0.040152 m3

Weight of concrete = 0.040152 25= 1.0038 kN

Weight of concrete /m2 = 1.0038 /[(0.52)(0.62)] = 3.11 kN/m2

Weight of hollow blocks /m2 = 0.17(2)/[(0.52)(0.62)] = 1.05 kN/m2

Total dead load= 3.11+1.05 + 1.5 + 0.75 = 6.41 kN/m2

Ultimate load = 1.2(6.41) + 1.6(4) = 14.1 kN/m2

S l ti
Solution:

33- Determine load distributions in the two principal directions: 0 52 m


0.52

L 8
r= = =1.0
S 8

8m
w1=w2=0.35(14.1) =4 92 kN/m2
=0 35(14 1) =4.92

Load per rib in Direction 1:

8m
0.62 m
wu/m of rib =4.92x0.62=
=4 92x0 62= 3.06
3 06 kN/m of rib

Load per rib in Direction 2:


wu/m of rib =44.92x0.52
92x0 52= 2.56
2 56 kN/m of rib 8m 8m

0.5
Direction 1
0.4
S l ti
Solution:

4- Determine
ee e thee shear
s e force
o ce and
d bending
be d g moments:
o e s

Using the ACI 8.3 coefficients


3 06 kN/m
3.06

Direction 1

Maximum factored shear force = 1.15wuln/2 = 1.15(3.06) (7.7/2) = 13.5 kN


Maximum factored negative moment = wuln2/9 = 3.06(7.7)2/9 = 20.2 kN.m
M i
Maximum factored iti momentt = wuln2/14 = 3.06(7.7)
f t d positive 3 06(7 7)2/14 = 12.9
12 9 kN.m
kN
2.56 kN/m
Direction 2

Maximum factored shear force = 1.15w


1 15wuln/2 = 1.15(2.56)
1 15(2 56) (7
(7.7/2)
7/2) = 11.4
11 4 kN
Maximum factored negative moment = wuln2/9 = 2.56(7.7)2/9 = 16.9 kN.m
Maximum factored positive moment = wuln2/14 = 2.56(7.7)2/14 = 10.9 kN.m
S l ti
Solution:

55- C
Check
ec web width
w d for
o be
beam sshear:
e
Direction 1
Reinforcement is closest to the outside surface of concrete.
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 0.8 = 19.6 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.

1 1V c = 1.1
1.1 1 1 0.75
0 75 0.17
0 17 30 120 196 = 18067 N
= 18.1 kN > Vu,max = 13.5 kN
Direction 2
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 1.6 - 0.8 = 18.0 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.

1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 30 120 180 = 16593 N


= 16.6 kN > Vu,max = 11.4 kN

All though shear reinforcement is not required, 4 6 mm stirrups per meter


run are used to carry the bottom flexural reinforcement.

S l ti
Solution:

66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e

Direction 1

Positive moment Negative moment


Mu = 12.9 kN.m Mu = 20.2 kN.m

Use mm 1 100 aandd mm 1 12 Use mm 2 16 in each rib.


rib
reinforcing bars in each rib.

S l ti
Solution:

66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e

Direction 2

Positive moment Negative moment


Mu = 10.9 kN.m Mu = 16.9 kN.m

Use mm 1 100 aandd mm 1 12 Use mm 2 16 in each rib.


rib
reinforcing bars in each rib.

S l ti
Solution:

77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g

S l ti
Solution:

77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g

R i f
Reinforced
dCConcrete
t DDesign
i II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture
L t 6
Design of hollow block and ribbed slabs
PART I
One way ribbed slabs


Ribbed and hollow block slabs
Ribbed slabs consist of regularly spaced ribs monolithically built
with a toping slab. The voids between the ribs may be either light
material such as hollow blocks [figure 1] or it may be left unfilled
[figure 2].

Topping slab

Rib Hollow block Temporary form


Figure [1] Hollow block floor Figure [2] Moulded floor


Ribbed and hollow block slabs
The main advantage of using hollow blocks is the reduction in
weight by removing the part of the concrete below the neutral axis.
Additional advantages are:

1- Ease of construction.
2 Hollow
2- H ll bl k make
blocks k it possible
ibl to
t have
h smooth
th ceiling
ili which
hi h is
i
often required for architectural considerations.
33- Provides good sound and temperature insulation properties.

Hollow block floors proved economic for spans of more than 5 m


with light or moderate live loads, such as hospitals, offices or
residential buildings. They are not suitable for structures having
h
heavy li loads
live l d suchh as warehouses
h or parking
ki garages.

One-way v.s two-way ribbed slabs


If the ribs are provided in one direction only,
only the slab is classified as
being one-way, regardless of the ratio of longer to shorter panel
dimensions. It is classified as two-way if the ribs are provided in two
directions. One way spans typically span in the shorter direction.
One way ribbed slabs may be used for spans up to 6 - 6.5 m.

One-way slab Two-way slab


One-way ribbed (joist) slab

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Key components of ribbed slabs


a. Topping slab: ACI
C 8.
8.13.6.1
3.6.
Topping slab thickness (t) is not to be less than 1/12 the clear
distance (lc) between ribs, nor less than 50 mm
lc

t 12
50 mm
lc
andd sshould
ou d ssatisfy
s y for
o a uunit sstrip:
p: Slab thickness ((t))

w u l c2
t
1240 f c

Shrinkage reinforcement is provided in the topping slab in both


directions in a mesh form.

Key components of ribbed slabs


b. Regularly spaced ribs:
Minimum dimensions:
Ribs are not to be less than 100 mm in width, and a depth of not
more than
th 3.5
3 5 times
ti th minimum
the i i webb width
idth andd clear
l spacing
i
between ribs is not to exceed 750 mm.
ACI 8.13.2
l 750 mm
c
ACI 8.13.3

h 3.5 bw

bw 100

Key components of ribbed slabs


Shear strength:
g ACI 8.13.8
Shear strength provided by rib concrete Vc may be taken 10% greater
than those for beams.

Flexural strength:
Ribs are designed as rectangular beams in the regions of negative
moment at the supports and as T-shaped beams in the regions of
positive moments between the supports.

Effective
ff i flange
fl width
id h be is
i taken
k as half
h lf the
h distance
di b
between ribs,
ib
center-to-center. b
e

Keyy components
p of ribbed slabs
c. Hollow blocks:
Hollow blocks are made of lightweight
g g concrete or other
lightweight materials. The most common concrete hollow block
sizes are 40 25 cm in plan and heights of 14, 17, 20, and 24 cm.

Hollow blocks do not contribute to the strength of the slab. In fact,


theyy impose
p an additional weight
g on the slab. In some cases,, blocks
made of polystyrene, which is 1/15 of the weight of concrete
blocks, are used.

To avoid shear failures, the blocks are terminated near the support
and replaced
p byy solid pparts. Solid pparts are made under ppartitions
and concentrated walls.

To avoid cracking due to shrinkage in top concrete flange,


flange the
concrete blocks should be watered prior to concrete placing.

Cross (distribution) ribs


Transversal ribs or cross ribs are added to one one-way
way hollow block
floors for better distribution of the applied loads. They also help in
distributing the concentrated loads due to walls in the transverse
direction. The bottom reinforcement is taken as the reinforcement in
the main ribs, and the top reinforcement should be taken at least of
th bottom
the b tt reinforcement.
i f t Cross
C ribs
ib are usually
ll 10 cm wide.
id

Arrangement of regularly spaced cross rib according to Egyptian


code:

Cross (distribution) ribs

No cross ribs One cross rib Three cross ribs

Arrangement of hollow blocks and width of hidden beams


The number of blocks in each direction must be specified on the
construction drawings. Thus, the layout of the blocks must be
positioned so that enough solid parts are present near the supporting
beams. The normal width of solid part ranges between 0.8-2.0 m for
floors with hidden beams and ranges between 0.2-0.5 m for floors
with
ith projected
j t d beams.
b

The number of blocks (having sizes of 40 25 cm in plan) and the


width of the beams must satisfy:

In the rib direction (mm): Lc 1 = 250 n1 + 100 ncr

P
Perpendicular
di l to t rib
ib direction
di ti (mm):
( ) Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)

Arrangement of hollow blocks and width of hidden beams

bw =width of main rib


Lc 1 = 250 n1 + 100 ncr
Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)

Minimum thickness of one way slabs ACI Table 9.5(a)

Minimum Cover ACI 7.7.1


a - Concrete exposed to earth or weather
for <16mm------40 mm and for >16mm----- 50 mm
b - Concrete not exposed to earth or weather

for <32mm------20 mm, otherwise ------ 40 mm


Loads Assigned to Slabs
wu=1.2
1 2 D.L
D L + 1.6
1 6 L.L
LL

a- Dead Load (D
(D.L)
L) :
1- Weight of slab covering materials
2- Equivalent
q ppartition weight
g
3- Own weight of slab

b Live
b- Li LLoad
d (L
(L.L)
L)

a- Dead Load (D.L)


( )
1- Weight of slab covering materials, total =2.315 kN/m2
tiles (2.5cm thick) =0.02523 = 0.575 kN/m2
cement mortar (2.5cm thick) =0.02521 = 0.525 kN/m2
sand (5.0cm thick) =0.0518 = 0.9 kN/m2
plaster 0.015 21 = 0.315 kN/m2
(1.5cm thick) =0.01521

tiles 22.55 cm
cement mortar 2.5 cm
sand 5 cm

slab

plaster 1.5 cm

2-Equivalent partition weight


This load is usually taken as the weight of all walls (weight of 1m span
of wall total spans of all walls) carried by the slab divided by the floor
area and treated as a dead load rather than a live load.
To calculate the weight of 1m span of wall:
Each 1m2 surface of wall contains 12.5 blocks
A bl
blockk with
i h thickness
hi k 10 weighs
10cm i h 10 kg
k
A block with thickness 20cm weighs 20 kg

Each face of 1m2 surface has 30kg plaster

Load / 1m2 surface for 10 cm block =


12.5 10 +230=185 kg/m2 = 1.85 kN/m2

Load / 1m2 surface for 20 cm block =


20 cm
12.5 20 +230=310 kg/m2 = 3.1 kN/m2

Weight of 1m span of wall with height 3m:


For 10 cm block wt. = 1.85 kN/m2 3 = 5.6 kN/m
For 20 cm block wt. = 3.1 kN/m2 3 = 9.3 kN/m
3- Own weight of slab

Example
Find the total ultimate load per rib for the ribbed slab shown:

Assume depth of slab = 25 cm (20cm block +5cm toping slab)

Hollow blocks are 40 cm 25 cm 20 cm in dimension

Assume ribs have 10 cm width of web

Assume equivalent partition load = 0.75 kN/m2

Consider live load = 2 kN/m2.

3- Own weight of slab


Solution
Total volume (hatched) = 0.5 0.25 0.25 = 0.03125 m3

Volume of one hollow block = 0.4 0.20 0.25 = 0.02 m3

Net concrete volume = 0.03125 - 0.02 = 0.01125 m3

Weight of concrete = 0.01125 25= 0.28125 kN

Weight of concrete /m2 = 0.28125 /[(0.5)(0.25)] = 2.25 kN/m2

Weight of hollow blocks /m2 = 0.2/[(0.5)(0.25)] = 1.6 kN/m2

Total slab own weight


weight= 2.25
2 25 + 1.6 3 85 kN/m2
1 6 = 3.85

L dp
Load per rib
ib
Total dead load= 3.85 + 2.315 + 0.75 = 6.915 kN/m2
Ultimate load = 1.2(6.915) + 1.6(2) = 11.5 kN/m2

Ultimate load per rib = 11.5 0.5 = 5.75 kN/m


Minimum live Load values on slabs
Type of Use Uniform Live Load
kN/m2
Residential 2
Residential balconies 3
Computer use 5
b- Live Load ((L.L)) Offices 2
Warehouses
It depends on the function for Light storage 6
which the floor is constructed. Heavy Storage 12
Schools
Classrooms 2
Libraries
rooms 3
Stack rooms 6
Hospitals 2
Assembly Halls
Fixed seating 2.5
Movable seating 5
Garages (cars) 2.5
Stores
Retail 4
wholesale 5
Exit facilities 5
Manufacturing
Light 4
Heavy 6
Loads Assigned to Beams
Beams are usually designed to carry the following loads:
- Their own weight
- Weights of partitions applied directly on them
- Floor
Fl loads
l d

S1 S2

Shrinkage Reinforcement Ratio


According to ACI Code and for fy =420 MPa ACI 7.12.2.1
shrinkage = 0.0018 As , shrinkage = 0.0018 b h
where, b = width of strip, and h = slab thickness

Mi i
Minimum Reinforcement
R i f t Ratio
R ti for
f Main
M i Reinforcement
R i f t

min A s ,shrinkage
A s ,min shrinkage = 0.0018 b h ACI 10.5.4

Check shear capacity of the section


V u 1.1 V c = (1.1)0.17 f c ' b wd
Otherwise enlarge depth of slab

Spacing of Reinforcement Bars
a- Flexural Reinforcement Bars
Flexural reinforcement is to be spaced not farther than three times the slab
thickness (hs), nor farther apart than 45 cm, center-to-center.
3 hs
Smax smaller of ACI 10.5.4
45cm

b- Shrinkage Reinforcement Bars


Shrinkage reinforcement is to be spaced not farther than five times the slab
thickness, nor farther apart than 45 cm, center-to-center.
5 hs
Smax smaller
ll of ACI 7.12.2.2
7 12 2 2
45cm

Summary of one
one-way
way ribbed slab design procedure
1. The direction of ribs is chosen.
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both
directions.
4. The factored load on each of the ribs is computed.
5. The shear force and bending moment diagrams are drawn.
6. The strength of the web in shear is checked.
7. Design the ribs as T-section shaped beams in the positive moment
regions and rectangular beams in the regions of negative moment.
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the
reinforcement are to be prepared.
p p

Example 1
Determine the arrangement
of blocks and width of
hidden beams for the plan
p
shown. The blocks used
have the size of 40 20 cm
in plan. The live load is 4
kN/m2.

Solution

Note that the width of hollow blocks in Gaza is 250 mm NOT 200 mm

Solution

Solution

Solution

Example 2
Design a oneone-way
way ribbed slab to cover a 3.8
3 8 m x 10 m panel,
panel shown in the
figure below. The covering materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent
ppartition load is equal
q to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live load is 2 kN/m2.
Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420MPa
3.8 m

10 m

Solution
1. The direction of ribs is chosen:
Ribs are arranged in the short direction as shown in the figure

3.8 m
3
50m
5.0 50m
5.0
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t:
From ACI Table 9.5(a), hmin = 380/16 = 23.75cm use h = 24 cm.
L t width
Let b bw =10
idth off web, 10 cm
Use hollow blocks of size 40 cm 25 cm 17 cm (weight=0.17 kN)
pp g slab thickness = 24 17 = 7cm > lc/12 =40/12= 3.3cm > 5cm OK
Topping
For a unit strip of topping slab:
wu=[1.2(0.07 25 + 0.75 + 2.25) + 1.6(2)] 1m = 8.9 kN/m = 8.9 N/mm
w u l c2 8.9( 400 ) 2
t = = 16mm OK
1240 f c ( 0.9 )1240 25

Solution
3. Provide shrinkage
g reinforcement for the topping
pp g slab in both directions:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement, As=0.0018(1000)70=126 mm2
Use 5 6 mm/m in both directions.

4. The factored load on each of the ribs is to be computed:


Total volume (in 1m2 surface) 1.0 m
= 1.0 1.0 0.24 = 0.24 m3
Volume of hollow blocks in 1m2
= 8 0.4 0.25 0.17 = 0.136 m3 0.05 m
Net concrete volume in 1m2

1.0 m
= 0.24-
0 24 0.136 0 104 m3
0 136 = 0.104

0.25 m
Weight of concrete in 1m2
= 0.104 25 = 2.6 kN/m2
g of hollow blocks in 1m2
Weight
= 8 0.17= 1.36 kN/m2
0.4 m 0.1 m 0.4 m

7 cm
Total dead load /m2
= 2.25 + 0.75 + 2.6 + 1.36
0.244 m

= 7.0 kN/m2

Solution
wu=1.2(7)+1.6(2)=11.6
1.2(7) 1.6(2) 11.6 kN/m2
wu/m of rib =11.6x0.5= 5.8 kN/m of rib
5. Critical shear forces and bending moments are determined (simply supported beam):
Maximum factored shear force = wul/2 = 5.8 (3.8/2) = 11 kN
Maximum factored bending moment = wul2/8 = 5.8 (3.8)2/8 = 10.5 kN.m
6. Check rib strength for beam shear:
Effective depth d = 2420.60.6 =20.8 cm, assuming 12mm reinforcing
bars and 6 mm stirrups.
p

1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 25 100 208 = 14400 N = 14.4 kN > Vu,max = 11 kN

Though shear reinforcement is not required, 4 6 mm stirrups per meter


run are to be used to carry the bottom flexural reinforcement.

Solution
7. Design
g flexural reinforcement for the ribs:
There is only positive moments over the simply supported beam, and the
section of maximum positive moment is to be designed as a T-section
Assume that a<70mm and =0.90Rectangular
=0 90Rectangular section with b = be =500mm
50
0.85 25 2 10.5 106
= 1 1 7

kN.m
420 0.9 0.85
0 85 25 500 2082 24

105 k
As
= 0.0013
10
As = be d = 0.0013 500 208 = 135 mm 2

Use 210mm (As,sup= 157 mm2)

As f y 157 420
a= = = 6.2 mm < 70mm
0.85f c 'b e 0.85 25 500
The assumption is right

Solution
Check As,min
s min
0.25 f c ' 1.4
A s,min = max bw d ; bw d
f y fy
A s,min = 70 mm 2 < A s,sup = 157 mm 2 OK

Check =0.9
=0 9 (ductility of the section)
a 6.2
c= = = 7 .3 mm
1 00.85
85
dc 208 7 .3
t = 0.003 = 0.003
c 7.3
t = 0.083 >> 0 .005 Tension controlled = 0 .9 OK

Solution
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the reinforcement are to be
prepared

110 m

110 m
110 m

110 m
3.8 m A A

5.0 m 5.0 m
6mm stirrups 6mm mesh
@25 cm @20 cm
7cm
24cm
17cm

210mm 10 40 cm 10 210mm

S i A-A
Section AA

PART II
Two way ribbed slabs


Method of analysis

R i Li
i

Method of coefficients

1.0m
w = ws + wl

wS
S

w s = w

w l = w wl
L

Rectangularity ratio:

Case

L L 0.76L L L L 0.87L 0.76L 0.87L


r S S S 0.76S 0.87S S 0.87S 0.76S
S

Method of coefficients

ECP 203 load coefficients LL< 5kN/m2


r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85

0 35
0.35 0 29
0.29 0 25
0.25 0 21
0.21 0 18
0.18 0 16
0.16 0 14
0.14 0 12
0.12 0 11
0.11 0 09
0.09 0 08
0.08

Marcus load coefficients LL 5kN/m2


r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

0.292 0.355 0.411 0.470 0.526 0.577 0.623 0.663 0.699 0.730 0.757

0.292 0.240 0.198 0.165 0.137 0.114 0.095 0.079 0.067 0.056 0.047

Minimum slab thickness:


To avoid the complexity of calculating for a two way ribbed slab,
slab
one of three equations of the ACI 318-89 which provides an upper
bound for the deflection control of the slab thickness can be used for
simplicity.

l n (800 + f y /1.4)
h max =
36000

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:


The loads acting on beams have tributary areas which are bounded
by 45-degree lines drawn from the corners of the panels and the
centerlines of the adjacent panels parallel to the long sides.
S

S L

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:

qu(S/2)

Long beam
qu(S/2)
L

m
L
Short beam
S

An equivalent
q uniformlyy distributed load can be established for a beam in a two
way system.
For a triangular load distribution, the equivalent shear force coefficient Cs is
equal to 0.5 and the equivalent bending moment coefficient Cb is equal to 0.67.

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:


qu(S/2)

Lon
ng beam
qu(S/2)
L

L
Short beam
S

For a trapezoidal load distribution, Cs and Cb are given in the following table.
Shear and moment equivalent load coefficients for trapezoidal load distribution
r =L/S 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

Cs 0.500 0.545 0.583 0.615 0.643 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750

Cb 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.852 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:

Original distribution Equivalent distribution Equivalent distribution


for shear for moment

wu 0.5 wu 0.67 wu

S S S

wu Cs wu Cb wu

L L L

Summary of two-way ribbed slab design procedure

1. Evaluate overall slab thickness and key ribbed slab components.


2
2. Determine the total factored load on the slab.
slab
3. Determine load distributions in the two principal directions.
4
4. Determine the shear force and bending moments.
moments
5. Check web width for beam shear.
6
6. D i rib
Design ib reinforcement.
i f
7. Design drawing.

Example
p 3
Design the two-way ribbed slab shown in the figure below. The covering
materials weigh 1.5 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75
kN/ 2, concrete
kN/m t hollow
h ll bl k are 40cm25cm17cm
blocks 40 25 17 i dimension,
in di i
each 17 kg in weight and the live load is 4 kN/m2. All beams are 30 cm
wide. Use fc=30 MPa, fy=420 MPa.

8.0 m

8.0 m

8.0 m 8.0 m
S l ti
Solution:

1- Evaluate overall slab thickness and key ribbed slab components:

l n = 800 30 = 770cm

The largest slab thickness is given by:


l n (800 + f y /1.4)
h max =
36000
(770)(800 + 420 /1.4)
h max = = 23.5cm
36000

Take width of rib = 12 cm.

S l ti
Solution:

2- Determine
ee e thee total
o factored
c o ed load
o d on
o thee slab:
s b

Total volume (hatched) = 0.52 0.62 0.23 = 0.074152 m3

V l
Volume off hhollow
ll blocks 2[0 4 0.25
bl k = 2[0.4 0 25 0.17] 0 034 m3
0 17] = 0.034

Net concrete volume = 0.074152 - 0.034 = 0.040152 m3

Weight of concrete = 0.040152 25= 1.0038 kN

Weight of concrete /m2 = 1.0038 /[(0.52)(0.62)] = 3.11 kN/m2

Weight of hollow blocks /m2 = 0.17(2)/[(0.52)(0.62)] = 1.05 kN/m2

Total dead load= 3.11+1.05 + 1.5 + 0.75 = 6.41 kN/m2

Ultimate load = 1.2(6.41) + 1.6(4) = 14.1 kN/m2

S l ti
Solution:

33- Determine load distributions in the two principal directions: 0 52 m


0.52

L 8
r= = =1.0
S 8

8m
w1=w2=0.35(14.1) =4 92 kN/m2
=0 35(14 1) =4.92

Load per rib in Direction 1:

8m
0.62 m
wu/m of rib =4.92x0.62=
=4 92x0 62= 3.06
3 06 kN/m of rib

Load per rib in Direction 2:


wu/m of rib =44.92x0.52
92x0 52= 2.56
2 56 kN/m of rib 8m 8m

0.5
Direction 1
0.4
S l ti
Solution:

4- Determine
ee e thee shear
s e force
o ce and
d bending
be d g moments:
o e s

Using the ACI 8.3 coefficients


3 06 kN/m
3.06

Direction 1

Maximum factored shear force = 1.15wuln/2 = 1.15(3.06) (7.7/2) = 13.5 kN


Maximum factored negative moment = wuln2/9 = 3.06(7.7)2/9 = 20.2 kN.m
M i
Maximum ffactored iti momentt = wuln2/14 = 3.06(7.7)
t d positive 3 06(7 7)2/14 = 12.9
12 9 kN.m
kN
2.56 kN/m
Direction 2

Maximum factored shear force = 1.15w


1 15wuln/2 = 1.15(2.56)
1 15(2 56) (7
(7.7/2)
7/2) = 11.4
11 4 kN
Maximum factored negative moment = wuln2/9 = 2.56(7.7)2/9 = 16.9 kN.m
Maximum factored positive moment = wuln2/14 = 2.56(7.7)2/14 = 10.9 kN.m
S l ti
Solution:

55- C
Check
ec web width
w d for
o be
beam sshear:
e
Direction 1
Reinforcement is closest to the outside surface of concrete.
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 0.8 = 19.6 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.

1 1V c = 1.1
1.1 1 1 0.75
0 75 0.17
0 17 30 120 196 = 18067 N
= 18.1 kN > Vu,max = 13.5 kN
Direction 2
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 1.6 - 0.8 = 18.0 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.

1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 30 120 180 = 16593 N


= 16.6 kN > Vu,max = 11.4 kN

All though shear reinforcement is not required, 4 6 mm stirrups per meter


run are used to carry the bottom flexural reinforcement.

S l ti
Solution:

66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e

Direction 1

Positive moment Negative moment


Mu = 12.9 kN.m Mu = 20.2 kN.m

Use mm 1 100 aandd mm 1 12 Use mm 2 16 in each rib.


rib
reinforcing bars in each rib.

S l ti
Solution:

66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e

Direction 2

Positive moment Negative moment


Mu = 10.9 kN.m Mu = 16.9 kN.m

Use mm 1 100 aandd mm 1 12 Use mm 2 16 in each rib.


rib
reinforcing bars in each rib.

S l ti
Solution:

77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g

S l ti
Solution:

77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 7
Load transfer in two way slabs
Design
g Moment for Columns for DDM
ACI 13.6.9.2

Design
g Moment for Columns for DDM
For equal spans:

An exterior
A t i column
l can be
b considered
id d byb assuming
i the
th shorter
h t span
length is 0.

Design
g Moment for Columns for DDM

The moment is distributed to the stiffness of the column above and below
the slab in proportion to their flexural stiffnesses.

4 EI
4EI
K c1 =
lc

K c1
M u1 = Mu
c1
K + K c2

For symmetric
y conditions:

Mu
M u1 =
2

Transfer of Unbalanced Moment to Columns

A fraction of the unbalanced moment in the slab must be transferred to


columns by flexure and the balance must be transferred by shear on the
critical section for punching shear.

The moment transferred by flexure: ACI 13.5.3.2

The moment transferred by shear:

Transfer of Unbalanced Moment to Columns

ACI 13.5.3.2

Transfer of Unbalanced Moment to Columns


Concentration of reinforcement over the column

ACI 13.5.3.4

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv

V u v M v x 1
v 1,2 = +
Ac Jc

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv


The shear force Vu to be considered in calculating shear stresses in slabs is
calculated by considering the tributary areas shown:

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv


The depth of the slab must be checked so that the shear capacity of the concrete equals
or exceeds
d the
th critical
iti l shear
h stress
t produced
d d by b factored
f t d loads
l d
v u v c
P hi shear
Punching h stress
t resisted
i t d by t vc is
b concrete i given
i as the
th smallest
ll t off
2
v C = 0.17 1 + f c '
c
ACI 11.11.2.1
11 11 2 1
v C = 0.33 f c '
s d Interior
v C = 0.083 2 + fc '
bo

c = long side/short side of column,


s = 40 for interior,
interior 30 for exterior,
exterior and 20 for corner columns,
columns Corner Exterior

bo =length of critical perimeter around the column


Example
For the flat plate shown
sho n in the figure,
fig re check the slab for moment and shear transfer
at the exterior column indicated. From DDM calculations, the column strip (width
= 1375mm)) carries a moment of 78 kN.m,, and is reinforced with 520. The slab
thickness is 20 cm (d = 17cm). Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15
kN/m2. All columns are 40 cm square. Use fy = 420 kN/m2. and fc=25 kN/m2.

5.5 m

5.5 m

6.0 m 6.0 m
Solution

A- Moment transfer design:


A

1- Additional bars must be added over the column in a width = c + 3h=


40+3(20) = 100 cm
ACI 13.5.3.4

2- The additional bars need to be designed for the moment Mf:

d 17
b1 = c + = 40 + = 48.5cm
2 2
b2 = c + d = 40 + 17 = 57cm
1 1
= = = 0.62
2 b1 2 48.5
1+ 1+
3 b2 3 57
M f = f M u = 0.62(78) = 48.4kN .m

Solution
3- Add two 20 bars in the 100 cm width considered and check to see
whether
h th the
th momentt transfer
t f situation
it ti is i satisfactory.
ti f t To
T resist
i t the
th 48.4
48 4 kN.m
kN
moment, we now have the two bars just added in addition to three bars from
the column strip design (520 bars in total, As = 1570 cm2).
As f y 1570(420)
a= = = 31mm
0.85(25)(1000)
0.85 f c b
a
M n = As f y (d )
2
31
M n = 0.9(1570)(420)(170 ) = 91.7kN .m > 48.4kN .m OK
2

Column strip

1000 mm

1375 mm
Solution
B- Check the combined shear stress at the exterior column due to shear and
momentt transfer:
t f

1- Nominal moment strength of the full column strip with 720 bars:

As f y 2198(420)
a= = = 31.6mm

0.85f c b 0.85(25)(1375)
a
M n = A s f y (d )
2
31.6
31 6
M n = (2198)(420)(170 ) = 142kN .m
2

2- Fraction of the unbalanced moment carried by eccentricity of shear:

M v = (1 f ) M n = (1 0.62)(142) = 54.2kN .m

Solution

3- Calculate the properties of the critical section for shear

d 17
x = c + = 40 + = 48.5cm
2 2
y = c + d = 40 + 17 = 57cm
Ac = d (2x + y ) = 17(2(48.5)
17(2(48 5) + 57) = 2618cm 2

x1 =
yA
=
2(48.5)(17)(48.5 / 2)
= 15.3cm 4
Ac 2618
2dx 3 xd 3
Jc = (2x + y )dx 1 +
2

3 6
2(17)(48.5)3 48.5(17)3
Jc = (2(48.5) + 57)17(15.3) +
2

3 6
J c = 722000cm 4

Solution

4- Calculate the shear load to be transferred to the exterior column

l
V u = w u l 2 1 xy
2
6.0
V u = 15 5.5( ) 0.485(0.57) = 243.3kN
2

5- Calculate the combined shear stress


5
V u v M n x 1
vu = +
Ac Jc
243.3 103 0.38(142 106 )(153)
vu = +
2618 10 2
722000 104
v u = 2.1MPa

Solution

6- Calculate the shear capacity of the critical section


for punching shear

bo = 2x+y=2(48.5)+57=154cm

2 2
v C = 0.17 1 + f c ' = 0.17 1 + 25 = 2.55MPa
c (40 / 40)
v C = 0.33 f c ' = 0.33 25 = 1.65MPa < v u = 2.1 MP Not Good
s d 30(170)
v C = 0.083
0 083 2 + c
f ' = 0
0.083
083 2 + 25 = 2.7
2 7 MPa
bo 1540

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 7
Load transfer in two way slabs
Design Moment for Columns for DDM
ACI 13.6.9.2

Design Moment for Columns for DDM


For equal spans:

An exterior column can be considered by assuming the shorter span


length is 0.
0

Design Moment for Columns for DDM

The moment is distributed to the columns above and below the slab in
proportion
i to their
h i flexural
fl l stiffnesses.
iff

4EI
K c1 =
lc

K c1
M u1 = Mu
c1
K + K c2

For symmetric conditions:


Mu
M u1 =
2

Transfer of Unbalanced Moment to Columns

A fraction of the unbalanced moment in the slab must be transferred to


columns
l by
b flexure
fl andd the
h balance
b l must be
b transferred
f d by
b shear
h on theh
critical section for punching shear.

The moment transferred by flexure: ACI 13.5.3.2

The moment transferred by shear:

Transfer of Unbalanced Moment to Columns

ACI 13.5.3.2

Transfer of Unbalanced Moment to Columns


Concentration of reinforcement over the column

Width off concentrated


t t d ACI 13.5.3.4
13 5 3 4
reinforcement
c2 + 3h

c2
This is a typo in the
book It is 1.5
book. 1 5 h in the
code.

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv

Vu Mv x1
vu = +
Ac Jc

x1 =
yA

Ac
Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv

b 1 = c1 + d
b1
+ db 2b1
2db1
x1 =
yA
= 2
Ac 2db1 + 2db 2
b1 (db1 + db 2 ) b1
= =

2(db1 + db 2 ) 2
Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv

b1 = c1 + d/2

b1
2db1
x1 =
yA
= 2
Ac 2db1 + db 2

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv


For a corner column:

x1 =
yA
=
Ac

b1 = c1 + d/2

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv


For circular columns:

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv


The shear force Vu to be considered in calculating shear stresses in slabs is
calculated by considering the tributary areas shown:

Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv


The depth of the slab must be checked so that the shear capacity of the concrete equals
or exceeds the critical shear stress produced by factored loads
v u v c
Punching shear stress resisted by concrete vc is given as the smallest of
2
v C = 0.17 1 + f c '
c
ACI 11.11.2.1
v C = 0.33 f c '
s d Interior
v C = 0.083 2 + fc '
bo

c = long side/short side of column,


s = 40 for interior, 30 for exterior, and 20 for corner columns, C
Corner E
Exterior
i

bo =length of critical perimeter around the column


Example
For the flat plate shown in the figure, check the slab for moment and shear transfer
at the exterior column indicated. From DDM calculations, the column strip (width
= 1375mm) carries a moment of 78 kN.m, and is reinforced with 520. The slab
thickness is 20 cm (d = 17cm).
17cm) Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15
kN/m2. All columns are 40 cm square. Use fy = 420 kN/m2. and fc=25 kN/m2.

5.5 m

5.5 m

6.0 m 6.0 m
Solution

A- Moment transfer design:

1- Additional bars must be added over the column in a width = c + 3h=


40+3(20) = 100 cm
ACI 13.5.3.4

22- The additional bars need to be designed for the moment Mf:

d 17
b1 = c + = 40 + = 48.5cm
2 2
b2 = c + d = 40 + 17 = 57cm
1 1
= = = 0.62
2 b1 2 48.5
1+ 1+
3 b2 3 57
M f = f M u = 0.62(78) = 48.4kN .m

Solution
3- Add two 20 bars in the 100 cm width considered and check to see
y To resist the 48.4 kN.m
whether the moment transfer situation is satisfactory.
moment, we now have the two bars just added in addition to three bars from
the column strip design (520 bars in total, As = 1570 cm2).
As f y 1570(420)
a= = = 31mm
0.85(25)(1000)
0.85 f c b
a
M n = As f y (d )
2
31
M n = 0.9(1570)(420)(170 ) = 91.7 kN .m > 48.4kN .m OK
2

Column strip
p

1000 mm

1375 mm
Solution
B- Check the combined shear stress at the exterior column due to shear and
moment transfer:

1- Nominal moment strength of the full column strip with 720 bars:

As f y 2198(420)
a= = = 31.6mm
0 85f c b
0.85 0 85(25)(1375)
0.85(25)(1375)
a
M n = A s f y (d )
2
31.6
M n = (2198)(420)(170 ) = 142kN .m
2

2- Fraction of the unbalanced moment carried by eccentricity of shear:

M v = (1 f ) M n = (1 0.62)(142) = 54.2kN .m

Solution

3- Calculate the properties of the critical section for shear

d 17
x = b1 = c + = 40 + = 48.5cm
2 2
y = b 2 = c + d = 40 + 17 = 57cm
Ac = d (2x + y ) = 17(2(48.5) + 57) = 2618cm 2

x1 =
yA
=
2(48.5)(17)(48.5
2(48 5)(17)(48 5 / 2)
= 15.3cm 4
Ac 2618
2dx 3 xd 3
Jc = (2x + y )dx 1 +
2

3 6
2(17)(48.5)3 48.5(17)3
Jc = (2(48.5) + 57)17(15.3) +
2

3 6
J c = 722000cm 4

Solution

4- Calculate the shear load to be transferred to the exterior column

l
V u = w u l 2 1 xy
2
6.0
V u = 15 5.5( ) 0.485(0.57) = 243.3kN
2

5- Calculate the combined shear stress

Vu Mv x1
vu = +
Ac Jc
3 103 54.2
243.3
243 54 2 106 (153)
vu = +
2618 10 2
722000 104
v u = 2.1MPa

Solution

6- Calculate the shear capacity of the critical section


for punching shear

bo = 2x+y
2x+y=2(48
2(48.5)+57
5)+57=154cm
154cm

2 2
v C = 0.17 1 + f c ' = 0.17 1 + 25 = 2.55MPa
c (40 / 40)
v C = 0.33 f c ' = 0.33 25 = 1.65MPa < v u = 2.1 MP Not Good
s d 30(170)
30(170)
v C = 0.083 2 + c
f ' = 0.083 2 + 25 = 2.7 MPa
bo 1540

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 8
Analysis of column cross sections using
strain compatibility
Strain-compatibility
p y
P P
M M

Column Beam Beam Column

Strain-compatibility
p y

Every
Every pair of moment M and axial load P values causes a unique strain
distribution over a reinforced concrete section.

The
h section
i fails
f il if the
h strain
i in
i the
h extreme concrete fiber
fib reaches
h 0.003.
0 003

The
The compression zone is assumed to have a uniform stress of 0.85fc over
a depth of a=1c.

0.003
d c a Cc
s Cs
C
A
As
h

As fs
s
b
Strain Stress

Cross section distribution distribution


Strain-compatibility
p y

The strain in the steel may exceed the yield strain but the stress takes a
maximum value of fy.

Knowing the strain distribution, one can back calculate the P and M
values that caused this strain distribution.

0.003
d c a Cc
s Cs
C
A
As
h

As fs
s
b
Strain Stress

Cross section distribution distribution


Strain-compatibility
p y

The pproblem of strain compatibility


p y mayy be used for one of the followingg
purposes:

1- Determine
1 D t i the
th P andd M values
l that
th t cause a known
k strain
t i distribution
di t ib ti att failure.
f il
A strain distribution at failure can be defined by knowing the strain in the steel or
the depth
p of the neutral axis. For each value of strain or NA,, a ppair or P and M
exists.

2 Determine
2- D t i the
th value
l off M att failure
f il if a known
k value
l off P is
i applied
li d
- Special cases: If P=0
* Use the singly
g y reinforced analysis
y if the section is singly
g y reinforced.
* Use the doubly reinforced analysis if the section is doubly reinforced.

3 Determine
3- D t i the
th value
l off P att failure
f il if a known
k value
l off M is
i applied
li d
- Special case:
If M=0 useuse thee axial load
o d ccapacity
p c y equ
equation
o for
o thee co
column
u section.
sec o .

Strain-compatibility
p y

In sum: the strain compatibility can be used to:

1- Determine the P and M values that cause a known strain distribution at


failure.

2- Determine the value of M at failure if a known value of P is applied.

3- Determine the value of P at failure if a known value of M is applied.

Determine the P and M values that cause a known strain


distribution at failure

Example 1
For the column cross section shown in the figure, determine the nominal axial
force Pn and nominal bending moment Mn that produce the strain distribution at
failure shown. The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa, and fc' = 25 MPa.

0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
s f s
Mn

a
420 Cc
c
00.5 m

Pn

420
60 s =0.001 fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
1- Find the depth of the neutral axis:
d = 500 60 = 440mm
c 440-c
=
0.003 0.001
0.001c = 440(0.003) 0.003(c )
c (0.001 + 0.003) = 440(0.003)
440(0.003)
c= = 330mm
0.001 + 0.003
a = 1 c = 0.85(330) = 281mm
0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
s f s
Mn

a
420 Cc
c
00.5 m

Pn

420
60 s =0.001 fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
2- Find the strain and stress in the steel:
s' 00.003
003
=
c d' c
c d' 330 60 fy 420
s' = 0
0.003
003 = 0
0.003
003 = 0
0.002455
002455 > = = = 0.0021
0 0021
E s 2 10 5
y
c 330
f s ' = f y = 420MPa

s = 0.001 < y = 0.0021 f s = E s s = 2 105 0.001 = 200MPa

0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
s f s
Mn

a
420 Cc
c
00.5 m

Pn

420
60 s =0.001 fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution

3- Find the forces in the steel and concrete:


Cc = 0.85f c ' ab = 0.85 ( 25 )( 281)( 300 ) = 1788 kN
T = f s A s = 200(1257) = 251kN
Cs = A s (f s 0.85f c ') = 1257(420 0.85 ( 25 )) = 501kN

0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
s f s
Mn

a
420 Cc
c
00.5 m

Pn

420
60 s =0.001 fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
4- Find Pn and M n :
F = 0 P n +T C c C s ' = 0
Pn = C c + C s ' T = 1788 + 501 251 = 2038 kN
h a h h
M = 0 M n = C c
2 2
+ C '
s
2
d '

+ T

d
2

0.5 281
0 5 00.281 0.5
05 0 5
0.5
= 1788 + 501 0.06 + 251 0.44 = 352 kN .m
2 2 2 2

0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
s f s
Mn

a
420 Cc
c
00.5 m

Pn

420
60 s =0.001 fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Determine the P and M values that cause a known strain
distribution at failure

Example 2
For the column cross section shown in the figure, determine the nominal axial
force Pn and nominal bending moment Mn that produce the strain distribution at
failure shown, where the tension steel yields and the concrete crushes
simultaneously (balance failure). The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa, and
fc' = 25 MPa.
MPa
0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s

a
C

420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m

Pn

420
60 y =0.0021 fy T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
1- Find the depth of the neutral axis:
d = 500 60 = 440mm
c 440-c
=
0.003 0.0021
0.0021c = 440(0.003) 0.003(c )
c (0.0021 + 0.003) = 440(0.003)
440(0.003)
c= = 259mm
0.0021 + 0.003
a = 1 c = 0.85(259) = 220mm
0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s

a
C

420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m

Pn

420
60 y =0.0021 fy T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
2- Find the strain and stress in the steel:
s' 0 003
0.003
=
c d' c
c dd' 259 60 fy 420
s' = 0
0.003
003 = 0
0.003
003 = 0
0.0023
0023 > = = = 0.0021
0 0021
E s 2 10 5
y
c 259
f s ' = f y = 420 MPa

s = y = 0.0021 f s = f y = 420MPa

0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s

a
C

420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m

Pn

420
60 y =0.0021 fy T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution

3- Find the forces in the steel and concrete:


Cc = 0.85f c ' ab = 0.85 ( 25 )( 220 )( 300 ) = 1403 kN
T = f s A s = 420(1257)
( ) = 528kN
Cs = A s (f s 0.85f c ') = 1257(420 0.85 ( 25 )) = 501kN

0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s

a
C

420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m

Pn

420
60 y =0.0021 fy T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
4- Find Pn and M n :
F = 0 P n +T C c C s ' = 0
Pn = C c + C s ' T = 1403 + 501 528 = 1376 kN
h a h h
M = 0 M n = C c
2 2
+ C '
s
2
d '

+ T

d
2

0.5 0 22
0 5 0.22 0.5
05 0 5
0.5
= 1403 + 501 0.06 + 528 0.44 = 407 kN .m
2 2 2 2

0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s

a
C

420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m

Pn

420
60 y =0.0021 fy T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Determine the value of M at failure if a known value of P is
applied for a general section

Example 3
For the column cross section shown in the figure, determine using strain
compatibility the nominal bending moment Mn if there is no axial load acting on
the section
section. The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa,
MPa and fc' = 25 MPa.
MPa

0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s

a
C

420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m

420
60 s fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
1- Prepare equations for strain, stress and force in terms of c:
Tension steel
d c
s = 0.003
0 003
c
f s = min(f y , s E s )
T = f s As

0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s

a
C

420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m

420
60 s fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
1- Prepare equations for strain, stress and force in terms of c:
Compression steel
c d'
s' = 0.003
c
f s = min(f y , s E s )
C s = f sA s
Concrete
Cc = 0.85f c ' ab = 0.85f c ' 1cb = 0.85 ( 25 ) 0.85 ( 300 ) c

0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s

a
C

420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m

420
60 s fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
2- Try a value of c:
T c=100mm
Try 100
d c 440 100
s = 0.003 = 0.003=0.0102
c 100
f s = min(f y , s E s ) = min(420, 0.0102 2 105 = 2040) = 420MPa
T = f s A s = 420 1257 = 528kN
c d' 100 60
s ' = 0.003 = 0.003=0.0012
c 100
f s = min(f y , s E s ) = min(420, 0.0012 2 105 ) = 240MPa
C s = f sA s = 240 1257 = 302kN
Cc = 0.85f c ' ab = 0.85f c ' 1cb = 0.85 ( 25 ) 0.85 ( 300 )100 = 542kN

Solution

3- Check equlibrium:
F =T C c C s = 528 302 542 = 316kN P = 0
Must increase T must increase s reduce c
Try c=80 mm and repeat.....

0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s

a
C

420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m

420
60 s fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution

c s fs T s' fs' C's Cc Sum( F)


. . -
. . -
. .
. . .-
. . . .-

c=72.9mm
a = 1 c = 0.85(72.9)
0 85(72 9) = 62mm

Solution

4 Calculate
4- C l l t Mn :
a
M = 0 M n = C c

d
2
+ C s ' (d d ' )

0.062
= 395 0.44 + 133 ( 0.44 0.6 ) = 212 kN .m
2

0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s

a
C

420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m

420
60 s fy T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Determine the value of P at failure if M = 0 for a g
general section.

Example 4
For the column cross section shown in the figure, determine using strain
compatibility the nominal axial load Pn if there is no bending moment acting on
the section
section. The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa,
MPa and fc' = 25 MPa.
MPa

0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
420 fy
00.5 m

Pn
Cc
420
60 Cs
fy
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution

Pn = 0.85f c '(A g A st ) + f y A st
0 85 ( 25 ) [300 500 2513] + 420 ( 2513)
Pn = 0.85
Pn = 4190 kN

0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
420 fy
00.5 m

Pn
Cc
420
60 Cs
fy
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 9
Design of short columns subjected to
axial load and bending
Part I
Introduction
i

The concept of a beam column

P P
M M

Column Beam Beam Column

Sources of bending moments in columns:

(1)
End restraints resulting from monolithic
action between floor beams and columns.
Moments due to gravity loads.

(2)

Moments due to rotation of joints in


monolithic construction.

Sources of bending moments in columns:

(3)
Moments due to lateral loading such as wind
or earthquake loads.

Sources of bending moments in columns:

(4) Moments due to loads from eccentric


loading such as loads acting on
corbels.
corbels

(5)
Moments due to eccentricity in asymmetry in
column cross section.

The concept of eccentricity

Loading and strain distribution:

Pure axial load Pure moment Large moment Large axial load
relative to axial relative to
load moment
Eccentricity: is the distance in
the column from the load to the
plastic centroid of the column.

The plastic centroid

The plastic centroid is the location of the resultant force produced by the steel and the
co c ete.
concrete.

It is the point in the column cross section through which the resultant load must pass to
pproduce uniform strain at failure.

If the applied load does not pass through the plastic centroid, it will create bending as
well as compression. The moment created will be equal to the product of the axial force
times the distance between the force and the plastic centroid.

For locating the plastic centroid, all concrete is assumed to be stressed in compression to
0.85fc and all steel to fy.

If the cross section is symmetrical about Cs1


b th its
both it principal
i i l axes, the
th plastic
l ti centroid
t id
coincides with the intersection of the two Cc
axes of symmetry. Pn

Z =
zF Cs2
Z
Pn
Example
Locate the plastic centroid of the cross section.
The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa, and fc' = 25 MPa.

Solution
1- Calculate the compression
p forces:
C c = 0.85f cbh = 0.85(25)(300)(900) = 5737kN
C s 1 = A s 1 (f y 0.85f c) = 1500(420 0.85(25)) = 598kN
C s 2 = A s 2 (f y 0.85f c) = 400(420 0.85(25)) = 160kN
Pn = C c + C s 1 + C s 2 = 5373 + 598 + 160 = 6495kN
0 003
0.003 0 85fc
0.85f
50 Cs2
fy
400 mm2
0.9 m

Cc
Pn
1500 mm2 fy Cs1 Z
50

0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution

2- Calculate the plastic centroid location:

Z =
zF
=
5737(900 / 2) + 598(50) + 160(900 50)
= 423mm
Pn 6495

0 003
0.003 0 85fc
0.85f
50 Cs2
fy
400 mm2
0.9 m

Cc
Pn
1500 mm2 fy Cs1 Z
50

0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Bending moments in columns
No column can carry only axial load and be completely free of moment.
moment

Moments develop in columns due to:


1- applied loads
2- joint rotations
3- accidental eccentricities

Sources of accidental eccentricity:


Small variations in cross section produced due to voids, honeycombing, misalignment of
reinforcement and crookedness of forms pproduce variations in the position
p of the
centroid and contribute to the eccentricity of the axial load. Therefore, columns are
always designed for a minimum value of moment as well as for axial load even when
the loadingg conditions indicate that the column will be subject
j to onlyy axial load.

Interior v.s. exterior columns


If beams framing into an interior column are similar in span and carry approximately the
same load (the usual case), the end moments applied to each side of the joint are
approximately equal and largely balance each other, resulting in a small net unbalanced
moment applied to the columns. This moment is distributed to the columns above an
below the joint in proportion to the bending stiffness of the columns.

At exterior
t i joints,
j i t beams
b frame
f into
i t one side
id off a column
l only;
l therefore,
th f the
th total
t t l beam
b
moment is applied to the column framing into the joint. As a result, exterior columns
must be designed for higher moments and lower axial loads than interior columns.

R i f
Reinforcement
t iin columns
l

At any level, the axial load in a column is approximately proportional to the number of
floors that lie above the column; therefore, columns in the upper stories, carrying the
lightest axial loads, can be smaller in cross section or more lightly reinforced than those
i the
in th lower
l stories.
t i

Often, the cross section of a column is held constant throughout the height of a building
to simplify formwork,
formwork and the percentage of reinforcement and the strength of the
concrete is increased in the lower floors.

Primaryy v.s. secondary


y moments

Define sway & non- sway frame


A non sway (braced) frame: is a structural frame whose joints are restrained
non-sway
against lateral displacement by attachment to rigid elements or bracing.

A sway (un-braced)
( b d) frame:
f i a structurall frame
is f that
h isi not attached
h d to an
effective bracing element, but depends on the bending stiffness of the columns
and girders to provide resistance to the lateral displacement.
displacement

Define sway & non- sway frame


St bilit iindex
Stability d
Secondary moment Pu o ACI 10.10.5.2
Q = =
Primary moment V u lc
Q 0.05 Non-sway (braced)
Q > 0.05 Sway (unbraced)

Define sway & non- sway frame


E
Example:
l

o = 0.8cm
3m

S l i
Solution:

Q=
Pu o
=
((200 + 300 + 180)0.8
)
= 0.07
0 07
V u lc (8 + 12 + 6)300

Short v.s. long (slender) columns


It is not the absolute length of the member that categorizes a column as long but the
members flexibility, which is a function of its length, thickness and end restraint.

A short column will exhibit very small bending deformations because of its large
bending stiffness. The resulting secondary moment will be very small and can be
neglected.

If the secondary moment is less than %5 of the primary moment, the column is
classified as short.

Buckling of perfect columns

If a column is slender, it will fail by buckling into the shape shown in the figure when the
load reaches the Euler buckling load Pc. The smallest load that produces buckling in a pin-
ended column is



Buckling of perfect columns

Buckling of reinforced concrete columns

Buckling of reinforced concrete columns

Columns are categorized into short or slender (long) according to their slenderness ratio:



Part II
C
Classification
ifi i off short and slender columns

Influence of boundary conditions


The equation for the Euler buckling load was derived for a pin-ended column.
The ends of real columns are restrained against rotation by their supports and
thus bending moments develop.

In such cases, the buckling equation can still be used if the length is substituted
by the effective length of the column. The effective length is some proportion of
the actual column.

Influence of boundary conditions

Influence of boundary conditions

Influence of boundary conditions

The ends of real columns are neither hinged nor fixed. Girders provide some
resistance to the rotation of the column. The end restraint lies between the
hinged and fixed conditions. The actual k value can be estimated from the
Jackson and Moreland alignment charts.
ACI 10.10.1
K Factor calculatoin

=
E c I c / Lc
E g I g / Lg

ACI 10.10.4.1
K Factor calculatoin
S i l end
Special d conditions:
diti

if end is pinned =
if end is fixed = 0

K Factor calculatoin
ACI 10.10.1
Alignment Charts

K Factor calculatoin
S i l end
Special d conditions:
diti
ACI 10.10.6.3
F columns
For l iin nonsway frames,
f the
h effective
ff i length
l h factor
f k is
i permitted
i d to
be taken as 1.0.

Note:
According to the above, you may start your analysis of a column in a
nonsway frame by assuming k = 1.0. If the column is found to be long, you
should find k from the alignment chart.

The ACI Procedure for Classifying Short and Slender Column

Classification of short vs. long: ACI 10.10.1

(Th column
(The l is
i short
h t if):
if)

The ACI Procedure for Classifying Short and Slender Column

Classification of short vs. long: ACI 10.10.1

lu = unsupported length of member clear distance between floor slabs,


b
beams, or other
h members
b capablebl off providing
idi lateral
l l support.

ACI 10.10.2

r = radius of gyration associated with axis about which bending is


occurring.
r = 0.30
0 30 h for rectangular cross sections
r = 0.25 h for circular sections
(h = column dimension in the direction of bending)

The ACI Procedure for Classifying Short and Slender Column

Classification of short vs. long: ACI 10.10.1

M1 = smaller factored end moment on the column, positive if member is


bent in single curvature
curvature, negative if bent in double curvature.
curvature
M2 = larger factored end moment on the column.

M1 M1
>0 <0
M2 M2

Single curvature Double curvature


The ACI Procedure for Classifying Short and Slender Column

Classification of short vs. long: ACI 10.10.1

Column Design

Sway frame Non sway frame


Non-sway

Neglect
g k lu M
k lu 34 12 1 40
22 Slenderness
r r M2
[ Short ]

Moment
k lu k lu M
22 < 100 magnification 100 > > 34 12 1 .
r [ long ] r M2

Exact P
k lu k lu
> 100 analysis > 100
r [ long ]
r

Example
p
The frame shown in the figure consists of members with rectangular cross sections,
made of the same concrete.
concrete Considering buckling in the plane of the figure,
figure categorize
column bc as long or short if the frame is:
a)Nonsway
) y
b)Sway
270 kN.m 0.6x0.3
e
c
d

00.3x0.35
44.0 m

0.6x0.3
b
400 kN.m

0.3x00.4
4.5 m

9.0 m 7.5 m

S l ti
Solution

a- Nonsway
For a column to be short,
k lu M
34 12 1 40
r M2

lu = 4-0.3-0.3=3.40 m
k is
i conservatively
i l taken
k as 1.0
10
270 kN.m
k lu 1(3.4)
= = 32.38
r 00.3(0.35)
3(0 35)
M1 270
34 12 = 34 12 = 42.1 > 40 Use 40
M2 400
400 kN.m
kN
kl
u = 32.38 < 40
r Double curvature
The column is classified as beingg short

If the columns was found to be long based on this conservative

assumption, calculate the actual value of k and check again.


Solution
b- Sway
For a column to be short,
k lu
22
r
((0.3)(0.4)
)( )3
I ab = 0.7
0 7 = 0.0112
0 0112m 4
12
(0.3)(0.35)3
I bc = 0.7 = 0.00075m
4

12
(0.3)(0.6)3
I dc = 0.35 = 0.00189m
4

12
(0.3)(0.6)3
I ce = 0.35 = 0.00189m
4

12
0.00075
C =
E c c I / Lc
= 4 = 0.406
E g I g / Lg 0.00189 0.00189
+
9 7.5
0 00075 00.0112
0.00075 0112
+
b =
E c c I / Lc
= 4 4.5 = 0.945
E g I g / Lg 0.00189 0.00189
+
9 7.5
Solution

Solution

Using the appropriate alignment chart, k = 1.21, and


k lu 1.21(3.4)
= = 39.18 > 22
r 0.3 (0.35)
column is classified as being slender (long).
(long)

Part III
Interaction
i diagrams
i

Interaction diagrams
60

420
From the examples of lecture 8,
8 the

0.5 m
shown cross section was found to fail
420
in the conditions and under the applied
60
Pn andd Mn pairs
i shown
h in
i the
th table:
t bl
0.30m

Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4


Strain 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003
distribution s s

s =0.001 y =0.0021 s
Pn (kN) 2038 1376 0 4190
Mn (kN.m) 352 407 212 0
Interaction diagrams
60

420

0.5 m
Case 1: The section failed (the strain 420
in the concrete reached 0.003) when 60
the strain in the steel reached 0.001.
0.30m

Case 2: The section failed (the strain in the concrete reached 0.003)
0 003) when the
strain in the steel reached the yield strain. In other words, the concrete and
steel failed simultaneously. This condition is called balance failure. The
corresponding loads are called balance axial load Pb and balance moment Mb.

Case 3: No axial load is applied to the section. The section failed when the
strain in the concrete reached 0.003. The strain in the steel was unknown.

Case4: No bending moment is applied to the section.


section The section failed when
the strain in the entire section reached 0.003.

Interaction diagrams
60

420

0.5 m
The pairs
Th i off momentt andd axial
i l load
l d
found for the section can be plot 420
together. The obtained curve is called 60
the interaction diagram of the section.
0.30m

Fail region
(0,4190)

(352, 2038)
Case 4
Case 2
Pn Case 1
(407, 1376)
Safe region
(212 0)
(212,

Mn Case 3
Interaction diagrams
60

The interaction diagram represents all 420


possible combinations of axial
a ial load and

0.5 m
moment that produce failure of the 420
given section. 60
Any combination of Pn and Mn outside 0.30m
the envelope will cause failure and
inside will not.

Fail region
(0,4190)

(352, 2038)
Case 4
Case 2
Pn Case 1
(407, 1376)
Safe region
(212 0)
(212,

Mn Case 3
Interaction diagrams
60

By holding the eccentricity, e, constant and 420


increasing the axial
a ial load from zero
ero to its

0.5 m
ultimate value, a straight line starting from 420
the origin with slope Pn/Mn = 1/e is 60
obtained.
b i d This hi line
li shows
h all
ll combinations
bi i
0.30m
of P and M for this eccentricity.

(0,4190) ((Mn, Pn )
(352, 2038)

Pn
Pn 1 (407, 1376)
=
Mn e
(212 0)
(212,

Mn
Interaction diagrams
60

Any pair of combinations of Pn and Mn 420


bet een points A and B,
between B where
here the

0.5 m
eccentricity of the load is less than the 420
balance failure eccentricity, eb, produces a 60
f il
failure that
h initiates
i ii by
b crushing
hi off the
h
0.30m
concrete on the compression side of the
member.

A ((Mn, Pn )

D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C

Mn
Interaction diagrams
60

Any pair of combinations of Pn and Mn 420


bet een points B and C,
between C where
here the

0.5 m
eccentricity of the load is larger than the 420
balance failure eccentricity, eb, produces a 60
f il
failure that
h initiates
i ii by
b yielding
i ldi off steell before
b f
0.30m
the crushing of the concrete on the
compression side of the member (beam
behavior).

A ((Mn, Pn )

D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C

Mn
Interaction diagrams

Between A and B: Axial load carrying capacity decreases (almost)


linearly with increasing moment load.

Between B and
B dCC: Moment
M carrying
i capacity
i increases
i with
i h increasing
i i
axial load.

A ((Mn, Pn )

D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C

Mn
Interaction diagrams

A ((Mn, Pn )

D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C

Mn
Interaction diagrams

shown

825

820

820 bars

825

Pn 820

Mn
Design interaction diagrams
Tied columns:
Pn = r A g ( 0.85f c) + A st ( f y 0.85f c)

r = 0.80
= 0.65
0 65Po
0.65 = 0.65
0 65

0.52Po

0.65Mo
0

Design interaction diagrams


Spiral columns:
Pn = r A g ( 0.85f c) + A st ( f y 0.85f c)

r = 0.85
= 0.75

= 0.75

Design interaction diagrams

0.65

Design interaction diagrams

420 MPa

Design interaction diagrams


If e/h < 0.1 for tied e/h < 0.05 for spiral:
Th column
The l may be
b designed
d i d as concentrically
t i ll loaded
l d d (like
(lik in
i Design
D i I)

Pn = r A g ( 0.85f c) + A st ( f y 0.85f c)

This equation takes into account the limited amount of eccentricity by the factor r.

e
0.1
01
h

Dimensionless interaction diagrams

Dimensionless interaction diagrams are independent of column


dimensions. One way of preparing such curves is done by dividing the
design axial load Pn by the gross sectional area of the column Ag, and
dividing the design moment Mn by Agh. For every interaction diagram,
eight
i h curves are plotted,
l d eachh corresponding
di to a certain
i column
l
reinforcement ratio and ranging from 1 % to 8 %.

These diagrams are dependent on fc, fy and . In the


diagrams is equal to the distance from the center of bars on
one side of the column to the center of the bars on the other
side
id of the
h column
l di id d by
divided b h,
h where
h h is
i the
h depth
d h of the
h
column taken in the direction of bending.
You need to make
sure that the section
you design has the
same properties and
reinforcement
pattern.

1 MPa = 10 kg/cm2

You need to make


sure that the section
you design has the
same properties and
reinforcement
pattern.

1 ksi = 7 MPa

Part IV
Design
i off short columns subject
j to axial
i
loads and bending moment

Design
g pprocedure
1- Assume a cross section of the column. You may use (Ag = Pu/0.5fc).

2- Calculate e = Mu/Pu. If e/h < 0.1 for tied e/h < 0.05 for spiral, the column may be
designed as concentrically loaded (like in Design I). Otherwise continue.

3 Select
3- S l t th
the material
t i l properties l l t .
ti andd calculate
4- Determine the appropriate design interaction diagram. If a chart with the exact
value of is not found, interpolate between the reinforcement ratios found from the
charts for the nearest values of .

5- Calculate Pu/Ag.

6- Calculate Mu/Agh.
7- Read g from the interaction diagram.
If g < 0.01
0 01 use g =0.01
0 01 or reduce
d th
the size
i off the
th column
l andd repeatt from
f partt 2.
2
If g > 0.08 increase the size of the column and repeat from part 2.

8- Calculate the steel area from As = g Ag.

9- Determine the appropriate longitudinal and transverse reinforcement.


Example

Design the reinforcement for a 400 mm x 500 mm tied column. The column,
which is part of a braced frame, has an unsupported length of 3.0 m. It is
subjected to a factored axial load of 2400 kN in addition to the factored bending
moments as shown. The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa, and fc' = 30 MPa.

Solution
2400

500KN m
500KN.m

lu = 3.0
30m
k is conservatively taken as 1.0
k lu 1(3 0)
1(3.0)
= = 20.0
r 0.3(0.5)
M1 500 500KN.m
34 12 = 34 12 = 22.0 < 40.0
M2 500
k lu 2400
= 20.0 < 22.0 column is classified as being short
r
Solution
M u 500(103 )
e= = = 208mm
Pu 2400
e 208
= = 0.42
0 42 > 0.1
0 1 Cannot use the concentrically loaded column design equation
h 500

Assuming 30 mm bars
500 2(40) 2(10) 30
= = 0.74
500
Pn Pu 2400(103 )
= = = 12 MPa = 120kg / cm 2
Ag bh 400(500)
M n Mu 500(106 )
= = = 5 MPa = 50 kg / cm 2

Ag h b h 2 400(5002 )

Using the interaction diagram given for


fc =30 MPa, fy= 420 MPa and = 0.75 Read: = 0.035
As = 0.035(400)(500) =7000mm2 use 1030mm
Solution

Solution

Example

Solution

Trial and error design procedure

Trial and error design procedure

Example 2

Trial and error design procedure

Example 2

Trial and error design procedure

Example 2

Trial and error design procedure

Example 2

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 9
Design of short columns subjected to
axial load and bending
Part I
Introduction
i

The concept of a beam column

P P
M M

Column Beam Beam Column

Sources of bending moments in columns:

(1)
End restraints resulting from monolithic
action between floor beams and columns.
Moments due to gravity loads.

(2)

Moments due to rotation of joints in


monolithic construction.

Sources of bending moments in columns:

(3)
Moments due to lateral loading such as wind
or earthquake loads.

Sources of bending moments in columns:

(4) Moments due to loads from eccentric


loading such as loads acting on
corbels.
corbels

(5)
Moments due to eccentricity in asymmetry in
column cross section.

The concept of eccentricity

Loading and strain distribution:

Pure axial load Pure moment Large moment Large axial load
relative to axial relative to
load moment
Eccentricity: is the distance in
the column from the load to the
plastic centroid of the column.

The plastic centroid

The plastic centroid is the location of the resultant force produced by the steel and the
co c ete.
concrete.

It is the point in the column cross section through which the resultant load must pass to
pproduce uniform strain at failure.

If the applied load does not pass through the plastic centroid, it will create bending as
well as compression. The moment created will be equal to the product of the axial force
times the distance between the force and the plastic centroid.

For locating the plastic centroid, all concrete is assumed to be stressed in compression to
0.85fc and all steel to fy.

If the cross section is symmetrical about Cs1


b th its
both it principal
i i l axes, the
th plastic
l ti centroid
t id
coincides with the intersection of the two Cc
axes of symmetry. Pn

Z =
zF Cs2
Z
Pn
Example
Locate the plastic centroid of the cross section.
The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa, and fc' = 25 MPa.

Solution
1- Calculate the compression
p forces:
C c = 0.85f cbh = 0.85(25)(300)(900) = 5737kN
C s 1 = A s 1 (f y 0.85f c) = 1500(420 0.85(25)) = 598kN
C s 1 = A s 2 (f y 0.85f c) = 400(420 0.85(25)) = 160kN
Pn = C c + C s 1 + C s 2 = 5373 + 598 + 159.5 = 6495kN
0 003
0.003 0.85fc
50 Cs1
fy
400 mm2
0.9 m

Cc
Pn
1500 mm2 fy Cs2 Z
50

0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution

2- Calculate the plastic centroid location:

Z =
zF
=
5737(900 / 2) + 598(50) + 160(900 50)
= 423mm
Pn 6495

0 003
0.003 0.85fc
50 Cs1
fy
400 mm2
0.9 m

Cc
Pn
1500 mm2 fy Cs2 Z
50

0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Bending moments in columns
No column can carry only axial load and be completely free of moment.
moment

Moments develop in columns due to:


1- applied loads
2- joint rotations
3- accidental eccentricities

Sources of accidental eccentricity:


Small variations in cross section produced due to voids, honeycombing, misalignment of
reinforcement and crookedness of forms pproduce variations in the position
p of the
centroid and contribute to the eccentricity of the axial load. Therefore, columns are
always designed for a minimum value of moment as well as for axial load even when
the loadingg conditions indicate that the column will be subject
j to onlyy axial load.

Interior v.s. exterior columns


If beams framing into an interior column are similar in span and carry approximately the
same load (the usual case), the end moments applied to each side of the joint are
approximately equal and largely balance each other, resulting in a small net unbalanced
moment applied to the columns. This moment is distributed to the columns above an
below the joint in proportion to the bending stiffness of the columns.

At exterior
t i joints,
j i t beams
b frame
f into
i t one side
id off a column
l only;
l therefore,
th f the
th total
t t l beam
b
moment is applied to the column framing into the joint. As a result, exterior columns
must be designed for higher moments and lower axial loads than interior columns.

R i f
Reinforcement
t iin columns
l

At any level, the axial load in a column is approximately proportional to the number of
floors that lie above the column; therefore, columns in the upper stories, carrying the
lightest axial loads, can be smaller in cross section or more lightly reinforced than those
i the
in th lower
l stories.
t i

Often, the cross section of a column is held constant throughout the height of a building
to simplify formwork,
formwork and the percentage of reinforcement and the strength of the
concrete is increased in the lower floors.

Primaryy v.s. secondary


y moments

Define sway & non- sway frame


A non sway (braced) frame: is a structural frame whose joints are restrained
non-sway
against lateral displacement by attachment to rigid elements or bracing.

A sway (un-braced)
( b d) frame:
f i a structurall frame
is f that
h isi not attached
h d to an
effective bracing element, but depends on the bending stiffness of the columns
and girders to provide resistance to the lateral displacement.
displacement

Define sway & non- sway frame


St bilit iindex
Stability d
Secondary moment Pu o ACI 10.10.5.2
Q = =
Primary moment V u lc
Q 0.05 Non-sway (braced)
Q > 0.05 Sway (unbraced)

Define sway & non- sway frame


E
Example:
l

o = 0.8cm
3m

S l i
Solution:

Q=
Pu o
=
((200 + 300 + 180)0.8
)
= 0.07
0 07
V u lc (8 + 12 + 6)300

Short v.s. long (slender) columns


It is not the absolute length of the member that categorizes a column as long but the
members flexibility, which is a function of its length, thickness and end restraint.

A short column will exhibit very small bending deformations because of its large
bending stiffness. The resulting secondary moment will be very small and can be
neglected.

If the secondary moment is less than %5 of the primary moment, the column is
classified as short.

Buckling of perfect columns

If a column is slender, it will fail by buckling into the shape shown in the figure when the
load reaches the Euler buckling load Pc. The smallest load that produces buckling in a pin-
ended column is



Buckling of perfect columns

Buckling of reinforced concrete columns

Buckling of reinforced concrete columns

Columns are categorized into short or slender (long) according to their slenderness ratio:



Part II
C
Classification
ifi i off short and slender columns

Influence of boundary conditions


The ends of real columns are restrained against rotation by their supports and
bending moments develop.
develop

In such cases, the buckling equation can still be used if the length is substituted
by the effective length of the column. The effective length is some proportion of
the actual column.

Influence of boundary conditions

Influence of boundary conditions

Influence of boundary conditions

The ends of real columns are neither hinged nor fixed. Girders provide some
resistance to the rotation of the column. The end restraint lies between the
hinged and fixed conditions. The actual k value can be estimated from the
Jackson and Moreland alignment charts.
ACI 10.10.1
K Factor calculatoin

=
E c I c / Lc
E g I g / Lg

ACI 10.10.4.1
K Factor calculatoin
S i l end
Special d conditions:
diti

if end is pinned =
if end is fixed = 0

K Factor calculatoin
ACI 10.10.1
Alignment Charts

K Factor calculatoin
S i l end
Special d conditions:
diti
ACI 10.10.6.3
F columns
For l iin nonsway frames,
f the
h effective
ff i length
l h factor
f k is
i permitted
i d to
be taken as 1.0.

Note:
According to the above, you may start your analysis of a column in a
nonsway frame by assuming k = 1.0. If the column is found to be long, you
should find k from alignment chart.

The ACI Procedure for Classifying Short and Slender Column

Classification of short vs. long: ACI 10.10.1

(Th column
(The l is
i short
h t if):
if)

The ACI Procedure for Classifying Short and Slender Column

Classification of short vs. long: ACI 10.10.1

lu = unsupported length of member clear distance between floor slabs,


b
beams, or other
h members
b capablebl off providing
idi lateral
l l support.

ACI 10.10.2

r = radius of gyration associated with axis about which bending is


occurring.
r = 0.30
0 30 h for rectangular cross sections
r = 0.25 h for circular sections
(h = column dimension in the direction of bending)

The ACI Procedure for Classifying Short and Slender Column

Classification of short vs. long: ACI 10.10.1

M1 = smaller factored end moment on the column, positive if member is


bent in single curvature
curvature, negative if bent in double curvature.
curvature
M2 = larger factored end moment on the column.

M1 M1
>0 <0
M2 M2

Single curvature Double curvature


The ACI Procedure for Classifying Short and Slender Column

Classification of short vs. long: ACI 10.10.1

Column Design

Non sway frame


Non-sway Non sway frame
Non-sway

Neglect
g k lu M
k lu 34 12 1 40
22 Slenderness
r r M2
[ Short ]

Moment
k lu k lu M
22 < 100 magnification 100 > > 34 12 1 .
r [ long ] r M2

Exact P
k lu k lu
> 100 analysis > 100
r [ long ]
r

Example
p
The frame shown in the figure consists of members with rectangular cross sections,
made of the same concrete.
concrete Considering buckling in the plane of the figure,
figure categorize
column bc as long or short if the frame is:
a)Nonsway
) y
b)Sway
270 kN.m 0.6x0.3
e
d

00.3x0.35
44.0 m

0.6x0.3

400 kN.m

0.3x00.4
4.5 m

9.0 m 7.5 m

S l ti
Solution

a- Nonsway
For a column to be short,
k lu M
34 12 1 40
r M2

Lu = 4-0.3-0.3=3.40 m
k is
i conservatively
i l taken
k as 1.0
10
270 kN.m
k lu 1(3.4)
= = 32.38
r 00.3(0.35)
3(0 35)
M1 270
34 12 = 34 12 = 42.1 > 40 k = 40
M2 400
400 kN.m
kN
kl
u = 32.38 < 40
r Double curvature
The column is classified as beingg short

If the columns was found to be long based on this conservative

assumption, calculate the actual value of k and check again.


Solution
b- Sway
For a column to be short,
k lu
22
r
((0.3)(0.4)
)( )3
I ab = 0.7
0 7 = 0.0112
0 0112m 4
12
(0.3)(0.35)3
I bc = 0.7 = 0.00075m
4

12
(0.3)(0.6)3
I dc = 0.35 = 0.00189m
4

12
(0.3)(0.6)3
I ce = 0.35 = 0.00189m
4

12
0.00075
C =
E c c I / Lc
= 4 = 0.406
E g I g / Lg 0.00189 0.00189
+
9 7.5
0 00075 00.0112
0.00075 0112
+
b =
E c c I / Lc
= 4 4.5 = 0.945
E g I g / Lg 0.00189 0.00189
+
9 7.5
Solution

Solution

Using the appropriate alignment chart, k = 1.21, and


k lu 1.21(3.4)
= = 39.18 > 22
r 0.3 (0.35)
column is classified as being slender (long).
(long)

Part III
Interaction
i diagrams
i

Interaction diagrams
60

420

0.5 m
From examples of lecture 8, the shown
cross section was found to fail in the 420
conditions and under the applied
pp Pn 60
and Mn pairs shown in the table: 0.30m

Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4


Strain 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003
distribution s s

s =0.001 y =0.0021 s
Pn (kN) 2038 1376 0 4190
Mn (kN.m) 352 407 212 0
Interaction diagrams
60

420

0.5 m
Case 1: The section failed (the strain 420
in the concrete reached 0.003) when 60
the strain in the steel reached 0.001.
0.30m

Case 2: The section failed (the strain in the concrete reached 0.003)
0 003) when the
strain in the steel reached the yield strain. In other words, the concrete and
steel failed simultaneously. This condition is called balance failure. The
corresponding loads are called balance axial load Pb and balance moment Mb.

Case 3: No axial load is applied to the section. The section failed when the
strain in the concrete reached 0.003. The strain in the steel was unknown.

Case4: No bending moment is applied to the section.


section The section failed when
the strain in the entire section reached 0.003.

Interaction diagrams
60

420

0.5 m
The pairs
Th i off momentt andd axial
i l load
l d
found for the section can be plot 420
together. The obtained curve is called 60
the interaction diagram of the section.
0.30m

Fail region
(0,4190)

(352, 2038)
Case 4
Case 2
Pn Case 1
(407, 1376)
Safe region
(212 0)
(212,

Mn Case 3
Interaction diagrams
60

The interaction diagram represents all 420


possible combinations of axial
a ial load and

0.5 m
moment that produce failure of the 420
given section. 60
Any combination of Pn and Mn outside 0.30m
the envelope will cause failure and
inside will not.

Fail region
(0,4190)

(352, 2038)
Case 4
Case 2
Pn Case 1
(407, 1376)
Safe region
(212 0)
(212,

Mn Case 3
Interaction diagrams
60

By holding the eccentricity, e, constant and 420


increasing the axial
a ial load from zero
ero to its

0.5 m
ultimate value, a straight line starting from 420
the origin with slope Pn/Mn = 1/e is 60
obtained.
b i d This hi line
li shows
h all
ll combinations
bi i
0.30m
of P and M for this eccentricity.

(0,4190) ((Mn, Pn )
(352, 2038)

Pn
Pn 1 (407, 1376)
=
Mn e
(212 0)
(212,

Mn
Interaction diagrams
60

Any combination of combinations of Pn 420


and Mn between
bet een points A and B, B where
here the

0.5 m
eccentricity of the load is less than the 420
balance failure eb, produces a failure that 60
i ii
initiates by
b crushing
hi off the
h concrete on theh
0.30m
compression side of the member.

A ((Mn, Pn )

D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C

Mn
Interaction diagrams
60

Any combination of combinations of Pn and 420


Mn between
bet een points B and C, C where
here the

0.5 m
eccentricity of the load is larger than the 420
balance failure eb, produces a failure that 60
i ii
initiates by
b yielding
i ldi off steell before
b f the
h
0.30m
crushing of the concrete on the compression
side of the member (beam behavior).

A ((Mn, Pn )

D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C

Mn
Interaction diagrams

Between A and B: Axial load carrying capacity decreases (almost)


linearly with increasing moment load.

Between B and
B dCC: Moment
M carrying
i capacity
i increases
i with
i h increasing
i i
axial load.

A ((Mn, Pn )

D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C

Mn
Interaction diagrams

A ((Mn, Pn )

D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C

Mn
Interaction diagrams

shown

825

820

820 bars

825

Pn 820

Mn
Design interaction diagrams
Tied columns:
Pn = r A g ( 0.85f c) + A st ( f y 0.85f c)

r = 0.80
= 0.65
0 65Po
0.65 = 0.65
0 65

0.52Po

0.65Mo
0

Design interaction diagrams


Spiral columns:
Pn = r A g ( 0.85f c) + A st ( f y 0.85f c)

r = 0.85
= 0.75

= 0.75

Design interaction diagrams

0.65

Design interaction diagrams

420 MPa

Design interaction diagrams


If e/h < 0.1 for tied e/h < 0.05 for spiral:
Th column
The l may be
b designed
d i d as concentrically
t i ll loaded
l d d (like
(lik in
i Design
D i I)

Pn = r A g ( 0.85f c) + A st ( f y 0.85f c)

This equation takes into account the limited amount of eccentricity by the factor r.

e
0.1
01
h

Dimensionless interaction diagrams

Dimensionless interaction diagrams are independent of column


dimensions. One way of preparing such curves is done by dividing the
design axial load Pn by the gross sectional area of the column Ag, and
dividing the design moment Mn by Agh. For every interaction diagram,
eight
i h curves are plotted,
l d eachh corresponding
di to a certain
i column
l
reinforcement ratio and ranging from 1 % to 8 %.

These diagrams are dependent on fc, fy and . In the


diagrams is equal to the distance from the center of bars on
one side of the column to the center of the bars on the other
side
id of the
h column
l di id d by
divided b h.
h h is
i the
h depth
d h of the
h
column taken in the direction of bending.

Part IV
Design
i off short columns subject
j to axial
i
loads and bending moment

Design
g pprocedure
1- Assume a cross section of the column. You may use (Ag = Pu/0.5fc).

2- Calculate e = Mu/Pu. If e/h < 0.1 for tied e/h < 0.05 for spiral, The column may be
designed as concentrically loaded (like in Design I). Otherwise continue.

3 Select
3- S l t th
the material
t i l properties l l t . If an exactt
ti andd calculate
4- Determine the appropriate design interaction diagram. If a chart with the exact
value of is not found, interpolate between the reinforcement ratios found from the
charts for the nearest values of .

5- Calculate Pu/Ag.

6- Calculate Mu/Agh.
7- Read g from the interaction diagram.
If g < 0.01
0 01 use g =0.01
0 01 or reduce
d th
the size
i off the
th column
l andd repeatt from
f partt 2.
2
If g > 0.08 increase the size of the column and repeat from part 2.

8- Calculate the steel area from As = g Ag.

9- Determine the appropriate longitudinal and transverse reinforcement.


Example

Design reinforcement for a 400 mm x 500 mm tied column. The column, which
is part of a braced frame, has an unsupported length of 3.0 m. It is subjected to a
factored axial load of 2400 kN in addition to a factored bending moment as
shown. The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa, and fc' = 30 MPa.

Solution
2400

500KN m
500KN.m

Lu = 3.0
30m
k is conservatively taken as 1.0
k lu 1(3 0)
1(3.0)
= = 20.0
r 0.3(0.5)
M1 500 500KN.m
34 12 = 34 12 = 22.0 < 40.0
M2 500
k lu 2400
= 20.0 < 22.0 column is classified as being short
r
Solution
Pu 500(103 )
e= = = 208mm
Mu 2400
e
= 0.42
0 42 > 0.1
0 1 Cannot use the concentrically loaded column design equation
h

Assuming 30 mm bars
500 2(40) 2(10) 30
= = 0.74
500
Pn Pu 2400(103 )
= = = 12 MPa = 120kg / cm 2
Ag bh 400(500)
M n Mu 500(106 )
= = = 5 MPa = 50 kg / cm 2

Ag h b h 2 400(5002 )

Using the interaction diagram given for


fc =30 MPa, fy= 420 MPa and = 0.75 Read: = 0.035
As = 0.035(400)(500) =7000mm2 use 1030mm
Solution

Solution

Example

Solution

Trial and error design procedure

Trial and error design procedure

Example 2

Trial and error design procedure

Example 2

Trial and error design procedure

Example 2

Trial and error design procedure

Example 2

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 10
Design of slender columns
PART I: Non-sway frames

Primaryy v.s. secondary
y moments

One needs to find in order to determine the secondary moment and hence the
t t l design
total d i moment. t

One way in determining in elastic plastic beam-columns is to double integrate


the integral

Moment magnification
g method

The exact secondary analysis of reinforced concrete beam-columns is not


possible
ibl due
d to the
h difficulty
diffi l ini establishing
bli hi E andd I.
I

The ACI code specifies an approximate analytical procedure that permits


the maximum value of moment due to the primary and secondary
moments to be approximated by magnifying the maximum primary
moment from a conventional analysis,
y , i.e.,, one that does not consider
secondary moments created by axial loads.

The approximation method is called the moment magnification method.


method

The moment magnification


g method is limited to columns with:

k lu
< 100
r

Moment magnification
g method


Moment magnification
g method


E i l t momentt correction
Equivalent ti

If a bbeam-column
l in
i a non-sway
frame is loaded by unequal end
moments without transverse loads,
moments, loads
the maximum design moment will
occur either at one of the column
ends when the secondary moment
is small or between the two ends
when
h th the secondary
d momentt is
i
large, as shown in the figure.

E i l t momentt correction
Equivalent ti

To deal with this situation,


situation the maximum end moment M2 is
multiplied by an equivalent moment correcting factor Cm. This
factor is used to convert M2 into an equivalent
q uniform moment
which gives the same total moment due to the actual primary and
secondary moments.

Moment Magnification in Non


Non-sway
sway Frames

The non-swayy magnification


g factor, ns, will cause an increase
in the magnitude of the design moment.

ACI 10.10.6
10 10 6
M max = ns M 2 ns M 2,min
where
M2 = columns larger-end moment
ns = moment magnification factor for non-sway frame, given
by Cm
ns = 1.0
Pu
1
0.75Pc

Moment Magnification in Non


Non-sway
sway Frames
Pc = Eulers critical buckling load given by

2 EI
Pc = ACI 10.10.6
( klu )
2

and the stiffness, EI is taken as

0.2 Ec I g + Es I se 0.4 Ec I g ACI 10.10.6.1


EI =
N EI =
1 + d conservatively 1 + d

Ec and Es are modulus of elasticity of concrete and steel respectively


Ig = moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis, neglecting
reinforcement

Ise = moment of inertia of reinforcing bars about centroidal axis


Moment Magnification in Non
Non-sway
sway Frames

d = creepp effect factor equals


q to the ratio of the maximum factored axial
sustained load to the maximum factored axial load associated with the
same load combination.
combination
ACI 10.10.6.2
10 10 6 2
Max.Factored Sustained Load
d = 1.0
M F
Max.FactoreddAAxial
i lL
Load
d

The minimum allowable value of M2 is In mm

M 2, min = Pu (15.0 + 0.03 h ) ACI 10.10.6.5

Moment Magnification in Non


Non-sway
sway Frames

Cm = A coefficient relating the actual moment diagram to an


equivalent uniform moment diagram. For members without
transverse loads
ACI 10.10.6.4
M1
Cm = 0.6 + 0.4 0.4
M2
For other conditions, such as members with transverse loads
between supports, or when M2,min > M2 then Cm = 1.0

Moment Magnification in Non


Non-sway
sway Frames

M1 = smaller factored end moment on the column,column positive if member is


bent in single curvature, negative if bent in double curvature.
M2 = larger factored end moment on the column. ACI 10.10.6.4

M1 M1
>0 <0
M2 M2

Single
g curvature Double curvature

E
Example
l
Design
g a longg column in a non-swayy frame with an unsupported
pp
height of 7.0 m and a cross section of 50x50 cm that carries a service
dead load of 500 kN, a service live load of 400 kN and ultimate end
moments as shown
h bbelow.
l The
h material i are: fy = 420 MPa,
i l properties
and fc' = 28 MPa.
140KN.m

80KN m
80KN.m

140KN.m

Determine ultimate loads

80 kN.m
80KN.m
140 kN.m
kN m
Single curvature

Max.Factored Sustained Load


d = 1.0
10
Max.Factored Axial Load

E c = 4700 f c = 4700 28 = 24871MPa

0.4E c I g
EI =
1 + d
24871
3.49 1013

Pcr =
2 EI ( 3.49 10 )
13

7033kN
( kl u )
2

6- Determine the magnified moment


Cm
ns = 1.0
Pu
1
0.75Pc
00.83
83
s = = 1.08
1240
1
0.75 ( 7033)
(15.0 + 0.03 (500) )
M 2,min = 1240 = 37.2kN .m < 140 kN .m OK
1000

M 2 max = ns M 2ns

M 2 max = 1.08140 = 151.2kN.m


7- Design the reinforcement

MPa = 50 kg/cm2

MP = 12.1
MPa k / 2
12 1 kg/cm


Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 10
Design of slender columns
PART I: Non-sway frames

Primaryy v.s. secondary
y moments

One needs to find in order to determine the secondary moment and hence the
t t l design
total d i moment. t

One way in determining in elastic plastic beam-columns is to double integrate


the integral

Moment magnification
g method

The exact secondary analysis of reinforced concrete beam-columns is not


possible
ibl due
d to the
h difficulty
diffi l ini establishing
bli hi E andd I.
I

The ACI code specifies an approximate analytical procedure that permits


the maximum value of moment due to the primary and secondary
moments to be approximated by magnifying the maximum primary
moment from a conventional analysis,
y , i.e.,, one that does not consider
secondary moments created by axial loads.

The approximation method is called the moment magnification method.


method

The moment magnification


g method is limited to columns with:

k lu
< 100
r

Moment magnification
g method


Moment magnification
g method


E i l t momentt correction
Equivalent ti

If a bbeam-column
l in
i a non-sway
frame is loaded by unequal end
moments without transverse loads,
moments, loads
the maximum design moment will
occur either at one of the column
ends when the secondary moment
is small or between the two ends
when
h th the secondary
d momentt is
i
large, as shown in the figure.

E i l t momentt correction
Equivalent ti

To deal with this situation,


situation the maximum end moment M2 is
multiplied by an equivalent moment correcting factor Cm. This
factor is used to convert M2 into an equivalent
q uniform moment
which gives the same total moment due to the actual primary and
secondary moments.

Moment Magnification in Non


Non-sway
sway Frames

The non-swayy magnification


g factor, ns, will cause an increase
in the magnitude of the design moment.

ACI 10.10.6
10 10 6
M max = ns M 2 ns M 2,min
where
M2 = columns larger-end moment
ns = moment magnification factor for non-sway frame, given
by Cm
ns = 1.0
Pu
1
0.75Pc

Moment Magnification in Non


Non-sway
sway Frames
Pc = Eulers critical buckling load given by

2 EI
Pc = ACI 10.10.6
( klu )
2

and the stiffness, EI is taken as

0.2 Ec I g + Es I se 0.4 Ec I g ACI 10.10.6.1


EI =
N EI =
1 + d conservatively 1 + d

Ec and Es are modulus of elasticity of concrete and steel respectively


Ig = moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis, neglecting
reinforcement

Ise = moment of inertia of reinforcing bars about centroidal axis


Moment Magnification in Non
Non-sway
sway Frames

d = creepp effect factor equals


q to the ratio of the maximum factored axial
sustained load to the maximum factored axial load associated with the
same load combination.
combination
ACI 10.10.6.2
10 10 6 2
Max. Factored Sustained Axial Load
d = 1.0
M F
Max. Factored
dAAxial
i lL
Loadd

The minimum allowable value of M2 is In mm

M 2, min = Pu (15.0 + 0.03 h ) ACI 10.10.6.5

Moment Magnification in Non


Non-sway
sway Frames

Cm = A coefficient relating the actual moment diagram to an


equivalent uniform moment diagram. For members without
transverse loads
ACI 10.10.6.4
M1
Cm = 0.6 + 0.4 0.4
M2
For other conditions, such as members with transverse loads
between supports, or when M2,min > M2 then Cm = 1.0

Moment Magnification in Non


Non-sway
sway Frames

M1 = smaller factored end moment on the column,column positive if member is


bent in single curvature, negative if bent in double curvature.
M2 = larger factored end moment on the column. ACI 10.10.6.4

M1 M1
>0 <0
M2 M2

Single
g curvature Double curvature

E
Example
l
Design
g a longg column in a non-swayy frame with an unsupported
pp
height of 7.0 m and a cross section of 50x50 cm that carries a service
dead load of 500 kN, a service live load of 400 kN and ultimate end
moments as shown
h bbelow.
l The
h material i are: fy = 420 MPa,
i l properties
and fc' = 28 MPa.
140KN.m

80KN m
80KN.m

140KN.m

Determine ultimate loads

80 kN.m
80KN.m
140 kN.m
kN m
Single curvature

Check the minimum moment requirement


M 2,min = M 2,min = Pu (15.0 + 0.03 h )
(15.0 + 0.03 (500) )
M 2,min = 1240 = 37.2
37 2kN .m < 140 kN .m OK
1000

Max. Factored Sustained Load


d = 1.0
10
Max. Factored Axial Load
E c = 4700 f c = 4700 28 = 24871MPa
0.4E c I g
EI =
1 + d
24871
3.49 1013

Pcr =
2 EI ( 3.49 10 )
13

7033kN Note
N t that
th t k is
i conservatively
ti l
( kl u )
2
taken as 1.0

6- Determine the magnified moment


Cm 0.83
ns = 1.0
10 s = = 1.08
1 08
P 1240
1 u 1
0.75Pc 0.75 ( 7033)

M 2 max = ns M 2ns

M 2 max = 1.08140 = 151.2kN.m


7- Design the reinforcement

MPa = 50 kg/cm2

MP = 12.1
MPa k / 2
12 1 kg/cm


Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 10
Design of slender columns
PART II: Sway frames
Moment Magnification in Sway Frames
ACI 10.10.7
The design moments in a long column in a sway frame is permitted by the ACI
code to be found from elastic analysis
analysis. However
However, it is specified that the analysis
is carried out in two parts:

1 One
1- O partt iis for
f obtaining
bt i i the
th moments
t due
d to
t gravity
it loads
l d only.
l

2- The second part is for obtaining the moments due to lateral sway loads.

The final moments are then established by adding the moments from the first
part to magnified values of the moment from the second part.

The design moments M1,max and M2,max at the ends of a compression member
aaree taken
ta e as

M 1,max = M 1ns + s M 1s
M 2,max = M 2 ns + s M 2 s

Moment Magnification in Sway Frames
ACI 10.10.7

NS S
Nonsway Sway


Moment Magnification in Sway Frames
ACI 10.10.7

M1ns
1 = factored end moment at the end M1 that develops due to loads that cause no

sway calculated using a first-order elastic frame analysis


M2ns
2 = factored end moment at the end M2 that develops due to loads that cause no

sway calculated using a first-order elastic frame analysis


M1s = factored
acto ed end
e d moment
o e t at the
t e end
e d M1 tthat
at develops
deve ops due to loads
oads that
t at cause
substantial sway calculated using a first-order elastic frame analysis
M2s = factored end moment at the end M2 that develops
p due to loads that cause
substantial sway calculated using a first-order elastic frame analysis
s = moment magnification factor for sway frames to reflect lateral drift resulting
from lateral and gravity loads


Moment Magnification in Sway Frames

1 ACI 10.10.7.4
s = 1
1
P u

0.75 P cr


Moment Magnification in Sway Frames

2 EI
Pc = ACI 10.10.6
10 10 6
( klu )
2

0.4E c I g
EI = ACI 10.10.6.1
1 + d

Max. factored sustained SHEAR in the story


d =
Total factored SHEAR in the story ACI 10.10.4.2
d 1.0
d = 0 if shear is due to wind or EQ loads, why? ACI 10.10.7.4


Moment Magnification in Sway Frames
3. By using direct P- analysis

If it exceeds 1.5, it has to be calculated using


onee of
o o the
t e two methods
et ods described
desc bed in 1 aandd 2..

Q=
P u o ACI 10.10.7.3
V u lc


Moment Magnification in Sway Frames
Load combinations

You should consider each combination separately and perform a complete



design for each load combination. Use the design with the most reinforcement.
Example
For the frame shown in the figure, determine the design moments in column EF to
support a uniform gravity load wu and a short-term concentrated lateral load Pw
Use fc = 28 MPa and fy = 420 MPa

wD=60
60 kN/m , wL=40
40 kN/m

B F
PW=40 kN
0.6m D 0.6m
0.5m

5m
0.5m 0.5m

A C E

8m 8m

Columns 0.5x0.3
0 5x0 3 and Beams 0 6x0 3
0.6x0.3

Solution
1. Evaluate internal forces in story members
Effective moments of inertia are given by
Ibeam=0.35(0.3)(0.6)3/12=1.89x10-3 m4
Icolumn=0.7(0.3)(0.5)3/12=2.188x10-3 m4

The modules of elasticity of concrete is

Ec = 4700 28 = 24,870 MPa


MP

Using a computer program, the normal forces and bending moments are
determined in the following slides.

Solution

Case 1 U = 1.2D.L+1.6L.L

Wu=1.2(60)+1.6(40)=136kN/m
( ) ( )
B F
D
423.6 kN.m

A C E

487.8 kN 1200.5 kN 487.8 kN

Solution

Case 2 U = 1.2D.L+1.0L.L+1.6W.L

1.2(60)+1.0(40)=112kN/m

B F 1.6(40)=64kN
1.6(40) 64kN F
D B D
348.8 kN.m 89.2 kN.m

A C E A C E

401.7 kN 988.6 kN 401.7 kN 20.0 kN 20.0 kN

((a)) Loadingg 1.2D.L+1.0L.L ((b)) Loadingg 1.6W.L

The horizontal displacement at point B = 29.4 mm

Solution

Case 3 U = 0.9D.L+1.3W.L

0.9(60) =54kN/m

B F 1.3(40)=52
1.3(40) 52 kN F
D B D
84.09 kN.m 72.5 kN.m

A C E A C E

193.7 kN 476.7 kN 193.7 kN 16.25 kN 16.25 kN

((a)) Loadingg 0.9 D.L ((b)) Loadingg 1.3W.L

The horizontal displacement at point B = 23.8 mm

Solution

2. Check whether columns on the floor are sway or nonsway


Case (1) 1.2D+1.6L
In this case, the story is braced (nonsway).
Case (2) 1.2D+1.0L+1.6W
The stability index,

Q = u o =
P 112(16)(29.4 0)103
= 0.165 > 0.05
V u lc 64(5)

i.e., the story is unbraced (sway).

Case (3) 0.9D+1.3W


The stabilityy index,,
54(16)( 23.8 0)10 3
Q= = 0.079 > 0.05
52(5)
i e the story
i.e., stor is unbraced
nbr ed (sway).
(s )

Solution

3. Check whether the column is short or long


For column EF,
2.188(10) 3 / 5
F = 3
= 1.85 and
1.89(10) / 8
E = for pin ends ( For practical purposes, use10)

C (1) 1.2D+1.6L
Case 1 2D 1 6L
Using the appropriate alignment chart (nonsway), k = 0.9, and
k lu M
lu = 5.0-0.3=
5 0 0 3 4.7m
47 34 12 1 40
r M2
For column to be short,
k lu 0.9(4.7) 0
= = 28.2 34 12 = 34 40 O.K
r 0.3(0.5) 423.6

i column
i.e l i short.
is h

Solution

Case (2) 1.2D+1.0L+1.6W and Case (3) 0.9D+1.3W


Using the appropriate alignment chart (sway), k = 2.1, and
For column to be short,
k lu k lu 2.1(4.7)
22 = = 65.8 > 22
r r 0.3(0.5)
i e column is long
i.e long.

4. Sway and nonsway moments


Case (1) 1.2D+1.6L
1 2D+1 6L
Mns =423.6 kN.m , Ms =0 kN.m and Pu = 487.8 kN
Case ((2)) 1.2D+1.0L+1.6W
Mns =348.8 kN.m , Ms =89.2 kN.m and Pu = 421.7 kN
Case (3) 0.9D+1.3W

Mns =84.09 kN.m , Ms =72.5 kN.m and Pu = 210 kN

Solution
5- Critical buckling loads
1
d =
max. ffactored sustained shear in storyy
= 0 .0 s = 1
total factored shear in story 1
P u

0 . 75 P
E c = 4700 f c ' = 4700 28 = 24 ,870 MPa
cr

0 .4 ( 24870 )( 500 ) 3 (300 ) 0 4E


0.4 Ec I g
EI = = 3 .109 (10 )13 N .mm 2 EI =
12 (1 + 0 .0 ) 1 + d
ffor column AB and EF , K = 2 .1 2 EI
Pc =
( klu )
2
(3 .109 )(10 )
2 13
Pcr = = 3149 .57 kN
( 2 .1x 4700 ) 2 (1000 )
for column CD , c = take as 10
2 .188 (10 ) 3 / 5
D = 3
= 0 .926
2[1 .89 (10 ) / 8]
Using the appropriat e alignment chart, k = 1.85, and
2 (3 .109 )(10 )13
Pcr = = 4058 .65 kN
(1 .85 x 4700 ) 2 (1000 )

Solution
6- Magnification factors

Case (1) 1.2D+1.6L

The column is short no magnification


g factor

Case (2) 1.2D+1.0L+1.6w


1 1
s = = = 1.3
1
u
P
1
112 (16)
0.75 Pcr 0.75(2x3149.57 + 4058.65)

Case (3) 0.9D+1.3w


1 1
s = = = 1.13
1 P u 1
54(16)
0.75 P cr
0.75(2x3149.57 + 4058.65)

Solution

7 Evaluate the magnified moments


7.
Case (1) 1.2D+1.6L
Mmax =423.6
423.6 kN.m and Pu = 487.8 kN

Case (2) 1.2D+1.0L+1.6W


Mmax =348.8+1.3(89.2)=464.76 kN.m and Pu = 421.7 kN

Case (3) 0.9D+1.3W


Mmax =84.09+1.13(72.5)=166.01 kN.m and Pu = 210 kN

8. Design the reinforcement


Find the reinforcement ratio from interaction diagrams for each load combination and
design the column for the largest ratio obtained.

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 11
Design of columns subjected to biaxial
moments
Biaxial bending in columns

Most columns are subject to uniaxial bending.


Corner columns are commonly subject to biaxial bending.
If the eccentricity in the two directions is such that ey < 0.2 ex, neglect ey.
Circular columns have the same ultimate capacity in all directions.
Therefore the biaxial moment can be found by:
Therefore,

The failure surface

The failure surface

The load contour

Design equations

Design equations

The Bresler Equation

Interaction diagrams for biaxial bending

Design Procedure for biaxial bending:


A- Determine reinforcement based on the biaxial bending capacity:
A

1- Determine the dimensions based on a reasonable stress in the column.


2 Determine in the week axis direction (any direction for square sections).
2- sections)
3- Calculate the biaxial bending moment in the week axis direction.
4- Use an interaction diagram to design the reinforcement for the section in
thi direction
this di ti andd use theth same reinforcement
i f t for
f the
th strong
t axis
i direction.
di ti

B- Use the Bresler equation to check the axial capacity of the section:

1- Calculate Pnx from the interaction diagram assuming only Mux is applied.
2- Calculate Pny from the interaction diagram
g assumingg onlyy Muy is applied.
pp
3- Calculate P0.
4- Calculate Pn and check Pn Pu

Example 1
Determine the reinforcement of the square column shown in the figure below
and subjected to the shown factored biaxial bending moments and factored
axial load.

The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa,


MPa and fc' = 28 MPa.
MPa

Solution

1- Calculate the design moment:

100 + 80 = 180
180kN
kN .m

2D
2-Determine
i the
h reinforcement:
i f

400 2(40) 2(10) 16


= = 0.74 Assume db = 16mm and dstirrup = 10mm.
400
A g = 400 400 = 160000mm 2
Pn Pu 1000(103 ) 6.25
= = = 6.25 MPa = ksi = 0.9ksi
Ag Ag 160000 7
M n Mu 180(106 ) 2.8
= = = 2.8 MPa = ksi = 0.4ksi
Ag h A g h 160000(400)
( ) 7
Read = 0.01

A s = 0.01(160000) = 1600mm 2 Use 816 (A s,sup = 1608 mm 2 )



Solution

3- Check the axial load capacity

For Pny , consider bending about y-axis, M uy = 100kN.m


M uy 100
e= = = 0.1m
Pu 1000
e 0.1
01
= = 0.25
h 0.4
A 1608
= s = = 0.01
A g 160000
Pny
Read = 1.5ksi = 1.5 7 MPa = 10.5MPa
Ag
10.5A g 10.5 (160000)
Pny = = = 2585 103 N = 2585kN
0.65

Solution

3- Check the axial load capacity

For Pnx , consider bendingg about x-axis,, M ux = 80kN.m


80
e= = 0.08m
1000
e 0.08
0 08
= = 0.2
h 0.4
= 0.01
Pnx
Read = 1.7ksi = 1.7 7 MPa = 11.9MPa
Ag
11.9A g 11.9 (160000)
Pnx = = = 2929 103 N = 2929kN
0.65

P0 = 1608(420) + (160000 1608)(0.85(28)) = 4446kN

Solution

3- Check the axial load capacity

1 1 1 1
= +
Pn 2929 2585 4446
Pn = 1987kN
0 1Po = 445kN < Pn OK (Brelser
0.1 (B l eq. is
i applicable)
li bl )
Pn = 0.65(1987) = 1291kN > Pu = 1000kN OK

Example 2

Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 12
Design of eccentrically loaded single
footings
Footing

Footings
g are structural elements used to support
pp columns and walls and transmit their
loads to the underlying soil without exceeding its safe bearing capacity below the
structure.
Loads

B B Column

L L Beam
P P
M

Footing

Soil


Isolated Footings
Isolated or single footings are used to support single columns. This is one of the most
economical types of footings and is used when columns are spaced at relatively long
distances.
P kN

B C2
C1


Isolated Footings
Deformation of isolated footings


Isolated Footings
Deformation of isolated footings


C
Concentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d dF
Footings
ti
If the resultant of the loads acting at the base of the footing coincides with the centroid
of the footing area, the footing is concentrically loaded and a uniform distribution of
soil pressure is assumed in design.

Centroidal axis

P/A


E
Eccentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d d Footings
F ti



E
Eccentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d d Footings
F ti
The pressure distribution on the base of footing that supports combined concentric load
(P) and moment (M) is given by the flexural formula:

P
P My P Pe y
q max = = e
min A I A I
Centroidal axis
P Pe (L/2) P 6e
= = 1
A BL 3 /12 A L y
L

P/A
where My/I
e: The eccentricity of the load relative to the
centroidal axis of footing base area.
I: The moment of inertia about the centroidal
axis.
y: The distance from the centroidal axis to the qmin
point where the pressure is being calculated. qmax

E
Eccentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d d Footings
F ti

This is referred to as Kern distance


distance.

If loads are applied within the kern, then the soil pressure distribution will be
compressive over the entire area of the footing.


E
Eccentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d d Footings
F ti


E
Eccentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d d Footings
F ti

In this case, compressive


ppressure develops
p over
the entire base of the
footing.


E
Eccentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d d Footings
F ti

Large eccentricities cause tensile stresses (uplift) on part of the base area of the
footing. In this case, the soil pressure cannot be calculated by the flexural
formula. To compute the soil pressure for such a situation it is necessary to
realize that the centroid of the upward soil pressure must coincide with the
centroid of the vertical component of the downward load (for equilibrium).
Assume that the distance to this point from the right end of the footing is a.
Then the soil pressure will spread over the distance 3a. The maximum soil
pressure is found as follows:


E
Example
l 1
Design an isolated footing to support an interior column 0.5m0.3m in cross section
and carry the following service loads and moments:
PD = 1000 kN and PL = 600 kN
MD = 120 kN.m
k and
d ML = 700 kN.m
k

Use fc= 25 MPa , fy = 420 MPa,


P
qall (gross) = 220 kN/m2, soil =17 kN/m3, conc =25 kN/m3
M

Df=11.00

0.5
0.3


Solution
The footing may be designed by one of two methods:

Method 1: The footing is placed concentric with the center of the column. In this case,
the soil pressure under the footing will be trapezoidal or triangular.

Method 2: Move the center of the footing a distance equal to the eccentricity e from
the center of the column. In this case, the soil pressure under the footing becomes
uniformly distributed and the footing can be design as a concentrically loaded footing.
Not good for moments induced by EQ or wind due to load reversals.

L L

Method 1 Method 2
Solution

Method
et od 1


Solution
1- Select a trial footing depth
Assume that the footingg is 0.6 m thick

2- Evaluate the net allowable soil pressure:


qall (net)
( ) = qall (gross)
( ) - s (Df - hc) - c hc

q all( net ) = 220 ( 1 0.6 ) 17 0.6 25 = 198.2 kN/m 2

3- Establish the required base area of the footing


Ps (1000 + 600)
Ag = = = 8.1m
81 2
q all(net) 198.2
8.1
Tryy L=4m,, B= = 2.02 Tryy B=2.5 m
4
2.5 4 3
(A = 2.5 4=10m and I =
2
= 13.33m 4 )
12
Try 16 for longitudinal reinforcement
d avg = 600-75-16 = 509 mm

Solution

Check pressure:
M (120 + 70)
e= = = 0.119 < 6L = 64 = 0 . 67 (within the kern)
P (1000 + 600)
Ps M s C 1600 190 4.02
q min = = = 132 kPa
kP > 0
A I 10 13.33
Ps M s y 1600 190 4.02
q max = + = + = 1 89 kPa < q all , net OK
A I 10 13 33
13.33

4- Evaluate the net factored soil pressure

L
Pu = 1.2 (1000 ) + 1.6(600) = 2160 kN
M u = 1.2 (120 ) + 1.6(70) = 256 kN .m 177.6 kPa
254.4 kPa
Pu M u C 2160 256 42
q u,m ax = + = + = 254.4 kN /m 2
A I 10 13.33
Pu M u C 2160 256 42
q u,m in = = = 177.6 kN /m 2
A I 10 13.33

Solution
L

P
M
B

254.4 kPa

177 6 kPa
177.6 kP
254.4 kPa

B L

177.6 kPa
254.4 kPa
254.4 kPa


x d2

Solution 1 2 3 4
d/2 d/2 d/2
d1

177.6 kPa
p1 254.4 kPa
p2 p3
p4
Slope
Pressure at key locations: 4 0.5 0.509
x3 = + + = 2.505
2 505m
254.4 177.6 2 2 2
Slope = = 0.0192kPa / mm
4000 p3 = 177.6 + 0.0192(2505) = 225.7kPa
4 0.5 0.509 4 0.5
x1 = = 1.496
1 496m x4 = + + 0.509
0 509 = 2.759
2 759m
2 2 2 2 2
p1 = 177.6 + 0.0192(1496) = 206.3kPa p 4 = 177.6 + 0.0192(2759) = 230.6kPa
4 0.5 4 0.5
x2 = + = 2.250
2 250m d1 = 0.509
0 509 = 1.241
1 241m
2 2 2 2
p 2 = 177.6 + 0.0192(2250) = 220.8kPa 4 0.5
d2 = = 1.750m
2 2
Solution
5- Check footing thickness for punching shear

bo = 2[ ( 509 + 500 ) + ( 509 + 300 ) ] = 3636 mm


206.3 + 225.7

C1+d
( 0.5 + 0.509 )( 0.3 + 0.509 ) = 1983.7kN

2..5m
Vu,max
, = 2160
2
C2+d
VC is the smallest of
4.0 m
0.33 fc ' bo d = 0.75
0 75 0.33 25 3636 509 = 2290 kN
d/2 d/2
2
0.17 fc ' 1 + bo d 177.6 kPa
c 225.7 kPa
254.4 kPa
2
=0.75 0.17 25 1 + 3636 509 = 2596 kN 206.3 kPa
0.5/0.3
d 40 509
0.083 fc ' 2 + s bo d=0.75 0.083 25 2 + 3636 509 = 4378kN
b o 509
VC = 2290 kN > Vu = 1983.7 kN OK


Solution

6- Check footing thickness for beam shear 1


In short direction (Sec 1-1)
2 2
230.6 + 254.4
Vu =

d
1.241 2.5 = 752 kN d

2..5m
2
Vc = 0.17 fc' bd = 0.75 0.17 25 2500 509
= 811 kN > Vu 4.0 m
1

d
In long direction (Sec 2-2)
230.6 kPa
177.6 + 254.4 2.5 0.3
Vu =
177.6 kPa 254.4 kPa
0.509 4.0
2 2
= 511 kN
Vc = 0.17 fc' bd
= 0.75 0.17 25 4000 509 = 1297 kN > Vu


Solution 1

7- Compute the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction


In long direction (Sec 11-1)
1)

5m
2.5
P1 =220.8 1.75 2.5=966kN
1
=0 5 (254.4
P2 =0.5 (254 4 220 8) 1.75
220.8) 1 75 22.5=73.5kN
5=73 5kN 40m
4.0

1.75 2
M u = 966 + 966 ( 1.75)=931 kN.m
2 3
177.6
0.85 25 254.4
2 931 106 220.8 kPa
= 1- 1- 2
420 0.9 ( 0.85 ) 25 2500 509
= 0.004 A s = 0.004 509 2500 = 5035 mm 2
As,min
s min = 0.0018 600 2500 = 2700 mm 2

As,req = 5035mm 2 2018 mm 220.8 kPa

254.4


Solution

7- Compute the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction


In short direction (Sec 2-2)
2.5 0.3
d3 = = 1.1m
2 2

2..5m
2
177.6 + 254.4 2
w ave = ( ) 4 = 864kN / m d3
2
w ave d 32 864 1.1
1 12 4.0 m
Mu = = = 523 kN .m
2 2
0.85 25 2 523 106
= 1-
1 11- 2
420 0.9 ( 0.85 ) 25 4000 509 177.6
254.4
= 0.00135
A s = 0.00135 509 4000=2754mm 2
A s ,min = 0.0018 4000 600 = 4320mm 2 > A s
Use A s = 4320mm 2


Solution

7- Compute the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction


In short direction (Sec 2-2)
2
Central band ratio = ,
1+

2..5m
2
2
Long side dimension of footing 4 d3
= = = 1.6
g 2.5
Short side dimension of footing 4.0 m

2
Central band reinforcement = 4320
1 + 1.6
= 3323mm 2
177.6
Use 1716mm in central band 254.4

F each
For h off th
the side
id bands,
b d
4320 3323
A s = = 500 mm
2

2
Use 316 mm in each of the two side bands.

Solution

8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete

For the column


A1 = 500 300 = 150000mm 2
Pn ,c = ( 0.85f cA1 ) = 0.65( 0.85 25 150000 ) = 2072 103 N = 2072kN

For the footing


No need to check (WHY?)

Pn = 2072kN < Pu = 2160 kN


Use dowel reinforcement
Pu Pn 2160 103 2072 103
A s ,req = = = 323mm 2
f y 0.65( 420 )
A s ,min = 0.005A1 = 0.005 500 300 = 750mm 2

Use 416, As,sup = 804 mm2


Solution

9- Check for anchorage of the reinforcement


1
Bottom longitudinal reinforcement in long direction (18mm)
=1.0 for bottom bars, =1.0 for uncoated bars
=1.0
1 0 <1.7
1 OKO

2.5m
=0.8 for 18mm, =1.0 for normal weight concrete
C the smallest of 75
75+18/2=84mm
18/2 84mm
1
[2500-2(75)-2(18/2)]/(18)(2)=65mm 4.0 m

i.e., C is taken as 65mm


C + K tr 65 + 0
= = 3.67 > 2.5
db 18
C + K tr
i.e.,use = 2.5
db
420 (1.0)(1.0)(0.8)(1.0)
l d = 18 = 435 mm
1.1
1 1 25 25
2.5
Available length =1750-75=1675> 300 mm > 435 mm OK

Solution

9- Check for anchorage of the reinforcement


Bottom longitudinal reinforcement in short direction (16mm)
=1.0 for bottom bars, =1.0 for uncoated bars
=1.0
1 0 <1.7
1 OKO
=0.8 for 16mm, =1.0 for normal weight concrete

2.5
C the smallest of 75
75+16/2=83mm
16/2 83mm 2

5m
2
[4000-2(75)-2(16/2)]/(16)(2)=120mm
i.e., C is taken as 83mm 4.0 m

C + K tr 83 + 0 C + K tr
= = 5.2 > 2.5 i.e.,use = 2.5
db 16 db
420 (1.0)(1.0)(0.8)(1.0)
(1 0)(1 0)(0 8)(1 0)
l d = 16 = 388 mm
1.1 25 2.5
Available length
g =1100-75=1025> 300 mm > 388 OK


Solution

9- Check for anchorage of the reinforcement


Dowel reinforcement (16mm):

0.24f y d b 0.24 420 16


= = 323
323mm
l dc = max fc' 25 = 323mm > 200mm
0.043 f d = 0.043 420 16=289mm
y b
Available length = 600-75-14-14 = 497 mm > 323 mm OK

Column reinforcement splices:

Considering that the column is reinforced with 16 bars


ls = 0.071f
0 071f y d b = 0.071
0 071 420 16 = 478 mm > 300 mm
taken as 48 cm > ls (compn.)


Solution

9- Prepare neat design drawings showing footing dimensions and provided


reinforcement

0.60 m

0.75m 2.50 m 0.75m

2.50 m
314

1716

314
1
1918

4.00 m


Solution

Method
et od 2


Solution
1- Select a trial footing depth
Assume that the footingg is 0.6 m thick

2- Evaluate the net allowable soil pressure:


qall (net)
( ) = qall (gross)
( ) - s (Df - hc) - c hc

q all ( net ) = 220 ( 1 0.6 ) 17 0.6 25 = 198.2 kN/m 2

3- Establish the required base area of the footing


Ps (1000 + 600)
Ag = = = 8.1m
81 2
q all(net) 198.2
8.1
Tryy L=4m,, B= = 2.02 Tryy B=2.5 m
4
2.5 4 3
(A = 2.5 4=10m and I =
2
= 13.33m 4 )
12
Try 16 for longitudinal reinforcement
d avg = 600-75-16 = 509 mm

Solution
119mm
M (1 2 0 + 7 0 )
e= = = 0 .1
119m
P (1 0 0 0 + 6 0 0 )
L/2

M = Pe
In order to have uniform soil
pressure under the footing, the
0.3
footing is to be positioned in
0.5
suchh a way to
t balance
b l the
th given
i
moment through shifting the L
centroid of the footing 119 mm
away from the centroid of the
column as shown in the figure.

Continue the design as a concentrically loaded footing supporting


only the axial loads transmitted by the column.

E
Example
l 2


Solution


Solution
Should use 1.2DL + 1.6LL

Pu = 1.2P
1 2PD + 1.6P
1 6PL = 69 tons


Solution

Should use as 0.75


Solution

Should use as 0.75


Solution

Sh ld use as 0.75
Should 0 75


Solution

0.85f c 2 105 M u
= 1 1 2

fy
0.85 f c bw d

0.85 250 2 105 0.87
= 1 1 2
= 0.00003
4200 0
0.85
85 0
0.99 250 400 (40
(40.9)
9)


Solution


Solution


Solution


Solution


Reinforced Concrete Design II

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 13
Design of combined footings
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Combined footings are used when two columns are so close that single footings cannot
be used. Or, when one column is located at or near a property line. In such a case, the
load on the footing will be eccentric and hence this will result in an uneven distribution
of load to the supporting soil.
P1 P2
P2 kN

L
PP1 kN
1 kN

B C2 C2
C1 C1

L1 L2 L2


C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Combined footings are used when:
(1) The two columns are so close that single footings cannot be used.
(2) When one column is located at or near a property line.
(3) A large difference exists between the magnitudes of the two column loads


C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Combined footings are either rectangular or trapezoidal. Rectangular footings are
favored due to their simplicity in terms of design and construction. However,
rectangular footings are not always practicable because of the limitations that may be
imposed on their longitudinal projections beyond the two columns or the large
diff
difference th
thatt may exist
i t between
b t the
th magnitudes
it d off the
th two
t column
l loads.
l d Under
U d these
th
conditions, the provision of a trapezoidal footing is more economical.


C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Deformation of combined footings


C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Deformation of combined footings


C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Deformation of combined footings


C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Pressure under combined footings and the shape of the footing
The shape of the footing is chosen such that the centroid of the area (of the footing base)
coincides with the resultant of the column loads supported by the footing. This leads to
producing
d i a constant uniform
if soil
il pressure under
d the
h footing.
f i


C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Pressure under combined footings and the shape of the footing
The shape of the footing is chosen such that the centroid of the area (of the footing base)
coincides with the resultant of the column loads supported by the footing. This leads to
producing
d i a constant uniform
if soil
il pressure under
d the
h footing.
f i


C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Pressure under combined footings and the shape of the footing
The shape of the footing is chosen such that the centroid of the area (of the footing base)
coincides with the resultant of the column loads supported by the footing. This leads to
producing
d i a constant uniform
if soil
il pressure under
d the
h footing.
f i
B2

B + 2B2 L
x bar = 1 3
B
1 + B 2

L B1 + B2 L = A
( )
c.g

2
Xbar

B1
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Cases:
1- Property line from one side:
A- Rectangular
B- Trapezoid
A B
2- Property lines from two sides: R
A- Rectangular
B- Trapezoid X

3- No property lines:
A- Rectangular
B- Trapezoid

For rectangular footings:


Length of footing = 2 the distance from the edge to the resultant of column loads X


C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Cases:
L
1- Property line from one side:
A B
A- Rectangular R

X
X L/2

B- Trapezoid

L L

A B A B
R R

X X < L/2 X X L

C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Cases:
L
2- Property lines from two sides:
A B
A- Rectangular R

X
X = L/2

B- Trapezoid

L L

A B A B
R R

X X < L/2 X X > L/2



C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Cases:
L
3- No property lines:
A B
A- Rectangular R

B- Trapezoid

L L

A B A B
R R

X X << L/2 X X >> L/2



D i
Designed
d procedure
d
1 Select a trial footing depth.
1-
2- Establish the required base area of the footing:
Uniform soil pressure is achieved by making the resultant of the service
column loads coincide with the centroid of the footingg base.
3- Evaluate the net factored soil pressure.
4- Check the footing thickness for punching shear.
5- Draw S.F.D and B.M.D for footing:
The shear force and bending moment diagrams for the footing are drawn,
considering the footing as an inverted beam subjected to a distributed load.
Column loads may be considered as concentrated loads to simplify the analysis.
6- Check footing thickness for beam shear.
Beam shear capacity is checked against critical factored shear evaluated
from S.F.D. The depth of the footing may be increased to satisfy beam shear
requirements.
i


D i
Designed
d procedure
d
7- Compute the area of flexural reinforcement:
The flexural reinforcement required in the longitudinal direction is
calculated. Furthermore, the areas of flexural reinforcement under the
columns in the transverse (short) direction are computed. In computing this
reinforcement, it will be assumed that each column load is uniformly
distributed over a band centered under the column and has a width extending
a distance d/2 from its faces. This area of reinforcement is uniformly
di ib d across the
distributed h bbandd width
id h (C2+d),
d) and
d the
h rest off the
h ffooting
i isi
provided with shrinkage and temperature reinforcement.
8- Check bearing strength of column and footing concrete.
9 Check
9- Ch k ffor anchorage
h off th
the reinforcement.
i f t
10- Prepare neat design drawings showing footing dimensions and
provided reinforcement.


E
Example
l 1:
1 Property
P line
li from
f one side:
id
Design a combined footing to support the two columns A (exterior) and B (interior)
spaced at distance 6.0 m center-to-center as shown in the figure. Column A is
0.4mx0.4m and carries a dead load of 500 kN and a live load of 300 kN. Column B is
also 0.4mx0.4m
0 4mx0 4m in cross section but carries a dead load of 750kN and a live load of 450
kN. Use fc= 25 MPa, fy = 420 MPa, and qall(net) = 150 kN/m2

Property
PD=500kN PD=750kN
limit
PL=300kN PL=450kN

A B
0.4 0.4
0.4 0.4

6m


Solution
1- Select a trial footing depth
Assume that the footing is 0.8 m thick
Average effective depth d = 800 75 20 = 705 mm

2 Establish
2- E bli h the
h required
i d base
b area off the
h footing
f i
PA + PB 500 + 300 + 750 + 450
Ag = = = 1 3 .33 m 2
q all(net) 150

Locate the resultant of the column forces


Ps=2000kN B
A
Ps=800kN Ps=1200kN

X
0.2 m 6m

M@start =0.0 800(0.2)+1200 (6.2) =2000 (x) x= 3.8 m


x > 6/2 use rectangular combined footing.
Solution A
Ps=2000kN
000 B
Ps=800kN Ps=1200kN

X=3.8 m X=3.8 m

L th off footing
Length f ti L=2L 2 (3.80)
(3 80) = 7.60m
7 60
Width of footing B =13.33/7.6 =1.754 m, taken as 1.80 m.

3- Evaluate the net factored soil pressure

PA, u = 1.2 (500 ) + 1.6(300) = 1080 kN


PB, u = 1.2 (750 ) + 1.6(450) = 1620 kN.m
PA, u + PB, u 1080 + 1620
qu = = = 197.4 kPa
A 7.6 1.8


Solution

4- Check footing thickness for punching shear

A B

1105
8m

105
1.8

11

5
753 1105

7.6 m
Column A
The factored shear force Vu =1080197.4(1.105)(0.753) =916 kN
bo =2(400+705/2)+400+705=2610 mm
VC is the smallest of
0.33 fc ' bo d = 0.75 0.33 25 2610 705 = 2277 kN
2 2
0.17 fc ' 1 + bo d =0.75 0.17 25 1 + 2610 705 = 3519 kN
c 0.4/0.4
d 30 705
0 083 fc ' 2 + s bo d=0.75
0.083 d 0 75 00.083
083 25 2 + 2610 705 = 5786 kN
bo 2610
VC = 2277 kN > Vu = 916 kN OK
Solution

4- Check footing thickness for punching shear [contd.]

A B

1105
8m

105
1.8

11

5
753 1105

7.6 m
Column B
The factored shear force Vu =1620197.4(1.105)2 =1379 kN
bo =4(400+705)=4420 mm
VC is the smallest of
0.33 fc ' bo d = 0.75 0.33 25 4420 705 = 3856 kN
2 2
0.17 fc ' 1 + bo d =0.75 0.17 25 1 + 4420 705 = 5959 kN
c 0.4/0.4
d 40 705
0.083 fc ' 2 + s bo d=0.75 0.083 25 2 + 4420 705 = 8128 kN
b o 4420
VC = 3856 kN > Vu = 1379 kN OK
Solution
5- Draw S.F.D and B.M.D for footing
Distributed line load under footing:
w = q B = 197.37 1.8 = 355.26 kN/m
1080kN 1620 kN

Maximum moments occur at


points of zero shear:
355.26 kN/m

Fy = 0
X3 =2.84 m 1122.6
798

355.26x1 1080= 0 71 0.915

x1=3.04m
497.4
1009 x1 x2
x2 = 6.2 3.04 = 3.16 m
1425.7

x3 = 3.04 0.2 = 2.84 m

7.10
348
Solution
6- Check footing thickness for beam shear
Effective depth d= 8007510=715
800 75 10=715 mm (lower layer)
Maximum factored shear force Vu is located at distance d from the face of column B,
Vu,critical
u critical =798
798 kN
Vc = 0.17 fc' bd
= 0.75 0.17 251800 715 = 820 kN > Vu OK
7- Compute the areas of flexural reinforcement
a) Top longitudinal reinforcement

0.85 25 2 1425.7 106


= 1- 1-
420 0.9 ( 0.85 ) 25 7152 1800
= 0.0044
A s,req = 0.0044 1800 715 = 5593mm 2
A s ,min = 0.0018B h = 0.0018(1800)(800) = 2592mm 2
A s ,min < A s ,req Use18 20mm
Solution

7- Compute the areas of flexural reinforcement [contd.]


b) Bottom longitudinal reinforcement
0.85 25 2 348 106
= 1- 1-
420 0.9 ( 0.85 ) 25 715 2
1800
= 0.00104
A s,req = 0.00104 1800 715 = 1320 mm 2
A s ,min = 0.0018
0 0018BBhh = 0.0018(1800)(800)
0 0018(1800)(800) = 2592mm 2
A s ,min > A s ,req A s,req = A s,min Use1316

c) Short Direction
Effective depth, d= 8007516 8=700 mm (Upper layer)
7.6 m
1.8 m

0.4 0.4
04
0.4 04
0.4

400+350 400+700
750 1100
Solution

Under Column A 7.6 m

1080

0.7
1.8

8m
0.4 0.4

1.8
0.4 0.4

400+350 400+700
750 1100

2
wl 2 (1080/1.8) 1.8 0.4
M A,u = = = 147 kN.m
2 2 2
0.85 25 2 147 106
= 1- 1-
420 0.9 ( 0.85 ) 25 700 2
750
= 0.00107
A s,req = 0.00107 750 700 = 560 mm 2
A s ,min = 0.0018B h = 0.0018 750 800 = 1080 mm 2
A s ,min > A s ,req A s,req = A s,min Use616

Solution

Under Column B
7.6 m

1620

0.7
1.8
8m
0.4 0.4
1.8

0.4 0.4

400+350 400+700
750 1100

2
wl 2 (1620/1.8) 1.8 0.4
M B,u = = =220.5 kN.m
2 2 2
0.85 25 2 220.5 106
= 1- 1-
420 0.9 ( 0.85 ) 25 7002 1100
= 0.00109
As,req = 0.00109 1100 700 = 841mm 2
As ,min = 0.0018
0 0018 1100 800 = 1585 mm 2
As ,min > A s ,req A s,req = A s,min Use 816

Solution

Shrinkage reinforcement in the short direction for the rest of the footing

A s,min = 0.0018 800 1000 = 1440mm 2 / m


Use 1014 /m

8- Check bearingg strength


g of column and footing
g concrete.
See notes from reinforced concrete design 1

9- Check for anchorage of the reinforcement.


See notes from reinforced concrete design 1

10- Prepare neat design drawings showing footing dimensions


and p
provided reinforcement.


Solution

0.4m 5.6 m 0.4m 1.2 m

1820 14@100 14@100


0.80 m

1316

616 14@100 816 14@100

0.75m 1.10 m

1820 T

1..80 m
@100

@100
16 B
16 B

81
14@

14@
61

1316 B

7.60 m


Example 2: No property lines:
Design a combined footing to support two columns A and B spaced at a distance
2.1 m center-to-center. Column A is 20 cm 30 cm and carries a dead load of 20
tons and a live load of 10 tons. Column B is 20 cm 40 cm in cross section but
carries a dead load of 30 tons and a live load of 15 tons. Width of footing is not to
exceed 1.0 m, and there is no property line restriction. Use fc= MPa, fy = 420
MPa, and qall(net)= 16.2 t/m2

Pa Pb
Solution

2.1 m
l1 x1 x2 l2

Continue as in Example 1
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 0
Syllabus
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Instructor Dr. Nader Okasha.

Email nao204@lehigh.edu

Office Hours As needed.

2
Reinforced Concrete Design III

References:
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and
commentary (ACI 318M-08). American Concrete Institute,
2008.

International building code (IBC 2009). International Code


Council, 2009.

3
Reinforced Concrete Design III

References:
Loads and Load Paths in Buildings: Principles of Structural
Design. Narendra Taly.

Reinforced Concrete, A fundamental Approach. Edward Nawy.

Reinforced Concrete Design. By Dr. Sameer Shihada.

4
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Additional references (internationally recognized books in


reinforced concrete design):

Design of Concrete Structure. Nilson A. et al.

Reinforced Concrete Design. Kenneth Leet.

Reinforced Concrete: Mechanics and Design. James K. Wight,


and James G. MacGregor.

Design of Reinforced Concrete. 7th edition, McCormac, J.C.


and Nelson, J.K., 2006. 5
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Course outline (tentative)

A- Design of beams and slabs


-Analysis of continuous beams in single and multistory structures.
-Introduction to ETABS.
-Design of hollow block and ribbed slabs.
-Equivalent frame method.

B- Calculation of design lateral forces


-Calculation of wind and earthquake loads using IBC 2009.
-Calculation of wind and earthquake loads using UBC 97.

C- Design of walls
-Design of shear walls.
-Design of retaining walls.
-Design of basement walls.
6
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Course outline (tentative)

D- Design of footings
-Design of combined footings.
-Design of wall footings.
-Design of continuous footings.
-Design of strap footings.
-Design of mat footings.

7
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Grading

Course work 20%


Mid-term exam 20%
Final exam 60%

8
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Exam Policy

Mid-term exam:
Open book.

Final exam:
Open book.

9
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Homework Policy

Show all your assumptions and work details. Prepare neat


sketches showing the reinforcement and dimensions.
Marking will consider primarily neatness of presentation,
completeness and accuracy of results.

You may get the HW points if you copy the solution from
other students. However, you will have lost your chance in
practicing the concepts through doing the HW. This will lead
you to loosing points in the exams, which you could have
gained if you did your HWs on your own.

No late HWs will be accepted.


10
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Policy towards cell-phone use

11
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Policy towards discipline during class

Zero tolerance will be practiced.

No talking with other students is allowed.

Raise your hand before answering or asking questions.

Leaving during class is not allowed (especially for


answering the cell-phone) unless a previous permission is
granted.

Violation of discipline rules may have you dismissed from


class and jeopardize your participation points. 12
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Policy towards missed classes

Any collectively missed class MUST be made up.

A collectively missed class will be made up either on a


Thursday or during the discussion lecture.

An absence from a lecture will loose you attendance points,


and the lecture will not be repeated for you. You are on your
own. You may use the lecture videos.

No late students will be allowed in class.

Anything mentioned in class is binding. No excuse for not


being there or not paying attention. 13
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Units used in class

In all equations, the input and output units are as follows:

Distance (L,b,d,h): mm
Area (Ac,Ag,As): mm2
Volume (V): mm3
Force (P,V,N): N
Moment (M): N.mm
Stress (fy, fc): N/mm2 = MPa = 106 N/m2
Pressure (qs): N/mm2
Distributed load per unit length (wu): N/mm
Distributed load per unit area (qu): N/mm2
Weight per unit volume (g): N/mm3 14
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Units used in class

However, these quantities may be presented as

Distance (L,b,d,h): cm , m
Area (Ac,Ag,As): cm2, m2
Volume (V): cm3, m3
Force (P,V,N): kN
Moment (M): kN.m
Pressure (qs): kN/m2
Distributed load per unit length (wu): kN/m
Distributed load per unit area (qu): kN/m2
Weight per unit volume (g): kN/m3
15
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Unit conversions
1 m = 102 cm = 103 mm
1 m2 = 104 cm2 = 106 mm2
1 m3 = 106 cm3 = 109 mm3
1 kN = 103 N
1 kN.m = 106 N.mm
1 kN/m2 = 10-3 N/mm2
1 kN/m3 = 10-6 N/mm3

You MUST specify the unit of each result you obtain

16
Reinforced Concrete Design III

ACI Equations
The equations taken from the ACI code will be indicated throughout the
slides by their section or equation number in the code provided in
shading.

Examples:
Ec 4700 f c ACI 8.5.1

f r 0.62 f c ACI Eq. 9-10

Some of the original equations may have included the symbol l = 1.0
for normal weight concrete and omitted in slides.

17
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Advices for excelling in this course:

Keep up with the teacher and pay attention in class.

Study the lectures up to date.

Re-do the lecture examples.

Look at additional resources.

DO YOUR HOMEWORK!!!!!

18
Reinforced Concrete Design III

ENJOY THE COURSE!!

19
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 1
Analysis of continuous beams in single
and multistory structures.
Continuity in beams
Continuity tends to reduce the maximum moment on a beam and makes
it stiffer.

Indeterminate analysis is needed to solve for the internal forces and


deflections.

For statically determinate beams, load arrangement is often obvious it


is not for continuous beams.

Some loads are fixed in their location and/or distribution, others can be
everywhere, somewhere or nowhere.

Influence lines can be used to determine where to place moveable loads. 2


Continuous beams in single story
structures:

1- Analysis by computer

3
Continuity in beams Influence lines

Qualitative Influence Lines

The Muller-Breslau principle states:

The influence line for a function (reaction,


shear, moment) is to the same scale as the
deflected ) shape of the beam when the beam is
acted on by the function.

4
Continuity in beams Influence lines

Qualitative Influence Lines

The Muller-Breslau principle:

Influence line for positive moment at a point in a beam:

5
Continuity in beams Influence lines

Qualitative Influence Lines

The Muller-Breslau principle:

Influence line for positive moment at a point in a beam:

6
Continuity in beams Influence lines

Qualitative Influence Lines

The Muller-Breslau principle:

Influence line for positive moment at a point in a beam:

7
Continuity in beams Influence lines

Qualitative Influence Lines

The Muller-Breslau principle:

Influence line for positive moment at a point in a beam:

8
Continuity in beams Influence lines

Qualitative Influence Lines

9
Continuity in beams Load patterns
Load Patterns using Qualitative Influence Lines

Alternate span loading

Adjacent span loading


10
Continuity in beams Load patterns
Load Patterns using Qualitative Influence Lines

Max. Positive Loading for Max. Negative Loading for


Moment at Moment at

11
Continuity in beams Load patterns

12
Continuity in beams Load envelopes

13
Continuity in beams Load envelopes

14
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/11, +1/16, -1/11)

15
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/16, +1/14, -1/10)

16
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/24, +1/14, -1/10)

17
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: 0, +1/11, -1/10)

18
Continuous beams in single story
structures:

2- Approximate analysis for hand


calculation

19
Continuity in beams ACI approximate method
Requirements: ACI 8.3.3
ACI Code permits the use of the following approximate moments and
shears for design of continuous beams and one-way slabs, provided:
There are two or more spans.
Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans
not greater than the shorter by more than 20 percent.
Loads are uniformly distributed.
Unfactored live load does not exceed three times the unfactored dead
load.
Members are of similar section dimensions along their lengths
(prismatic).

20
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3

l n = length of clear
span measured face-
to-face of supports.

For calculating negative


moments, l n is taken as
the average of the
adjacent clear span
lengths.
21
ACI approximate method

Support is column

Spandrel girder

Support is spandrel girder

22
Continuous beams in multistory
structures

23
Equivalent rigid frame method (for gravity loads)

24
Equivalent rigid frame method (for gravity loads)

Model of a beam supported by girders Model of a roof beam


supported by columns

Analysis of each equivalent


frame in its entirety shall be
permitted. Alternatively, for
gravity loading, a separate
analysis of each floor or roof
with far ends of columns
considered fixed shall be Model of a beam supported by columns
permitted.
ACI 13.7.2.5 25
Equivalent rigid frame method (for gravity loads)

Model of a beam supported by columns

For T beams, only the web is


considered because the moment of
inertia is much larger when the
moment is positive than when the
moment is negative.

26
ACI approximate method
ACI 8.3.3

27
Equivalent rigid frame method (for lateral loads)

For analysis of lateral loads, the entire frame must be


considered.

28
Example 1
The figure below shows a plan of a typical floor in a multistory reinforced concrete
building with 3m typical story height. The column dimensions are all 40cmX40cm. The
slab depth is 25 cm, and the beam depth is 50 cm. The live load is 2 kN/m2. The covering
materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live
load is 2 kN/m2. Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420 MPa. Determine using a computer program the
design moments in the beams in rows A and B and an exterior column. Beam B carries a
10 cm brick wall. A B

3@6 = 24
3@3 = 9
29 4@9 = 36
Continuous beam A
Ultimate own weight of slab = 1.20.2525 = 7.5 kN/m2
Ultimate own weight of beam = 1.20.50.425 = 6 kN/m
Ultimate floor covering material & partition load = 1.2(2.25+0.75) = 3.6 kN/m2
Ultimate floor live load = 1.62 = 3.2 kN/m2

wuL= 3.23=9.6 kN/m

wuD= 3.63+7.5(3-0.4)+6 =36.3 kN/m

E c 4700 f c 4700 25 23500MPa


30
Continuous beam A Dead load case

31
Continuous beam A Live load case 1

32
Continuous beam A Live load case 2

33
Continuous beam A
Design moment:

1 2 3 4 5

Load Case 1 2 3 4 5
DL 104.47 130.42- 32.93 130.42- 104.47
LL1 34.81 17.25- 17.25- 17.25- 34.81
LL2 8.625 17.25- 25.95 17.25- 8.625
LL3 25.28 40.13- 18.51 11.61- 5.805
LL4 2.815 5.63- 11.44 22.88- 32.47
LL5 32.47 22.88- 11.44 5.63- 2.815
LL6 5.805 11.61- 18.51 40.13- 25.28
Maximum
34 Combo 139.28 170.55- 58.88 170.55- 139.28
Continuous beam A
Design moment:

150

100

50

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

-50

-100

-150

Maximum
35
Combo 139.28 170.55- 58.88 170.55- 139.28
Continuous beam B
Ultimate own weight of slab = 1.20.2525 = 7.5 kN/m2
Ultimate own weight of beam = 1.20.50.425 = 6 kN/m
Ultimate floor covering material load = 1.22.25 = 2.7 kN/m2
Ultimate partition load = 1.25.6 = 6.72 kN/m
Ultimate floor live load = 1.62 = 3.2 kN/m2

wuL= 3.23=9.6 kN/m

wuD= 2.73+6.72+7.5(3-0.4)+6 =40.32 kN/m

E c 4700 f c 4700 25 23500MPa


36
Continuous beam B Frame model

37
Continuous beam B Dead load case

38
Continuous beam B Live load case 1

39
Continuous beam B Live load case 2

40
Continuous beam B Design moment:

Load Case 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
DL 83- 72.42 135- 57.65 135- 72.42 83-
LL1 22.4- 19.72 24.5- 4.96- 24.5- 19.72 22.4-
LL2 2.64 2.6- 7.6- 18.7 7.6- 2.6- 2.64
LL3 19.5- 17 33- 16.2 21.5- 3 2.3
LL4 0.33 0.5- 3- 2 25.5- 19.4 22-
LL5 22- 19.4 25.5- 2 3- 0.5- 0.33
LL6 2.3 3 21.5- 16.2 33- 17 19.5-
Max
41 Combo 105.4- 92.14 168- 76.35 168- 92.14 105.4-
Continuous beam B Design moment:

100

50

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

-50

-100

-150

Max
42
Combo 105.4- 92.14 168- 76.35 168- 92.14 105.4-
Exterior column moment

+ = 52.76 kN.m

DL max LL
43
Reinforced Concrete Design III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture
L t 2
Design of hollow block and ribbed slabs
PART I
One way ribbed slabs


Ribbed and hollow block slabs
Ribbed slabs consist of regularly spaced ribs monolithically built
with a toping slab. The voids between the ribs may be either light
material such as hollow blocks [figure 1] or it may be left unfilled
[figure 2].

Topping slab

Rib Hollow block Temporary form


Figure [1] Hollow block floor Figure [2] Moulded floor


Ribbed and hollow block slabs
The main advantage of using hollow blocks is the reduction in
weight by removing the part of the concrete below the neutral axis.
Additional advantages are:

1- Ease of construction.
2 Hollow
2- H ll bl k make
blocks k it possible
ibl to
t have
h smooth
th ceiling
ili which
hi h is
i
often required for architectural considerations.
33- Provides good sound and temperature insulation properties.

Hollow block floors proved economic for spans of more than 5 m


with light or moderate live loads, such as hospitals, offices or
residential buildings. They are not suitable for structures having
h
heavy li loads
live l d suchh as warehouses
h or parking
ki garages.

One-way v.s two-way ribbed slabs


If the ribs are provided in one direction only,
only the slab is classified as
being one-way, regardless of the ratio of longer to shorter panel
dimensions. It is classified as two-way if the ribs are provided in two
directions. One way spans typically span in the shorter direction.
One way ribbed slabs may be used for spans up to 6 - 6.5 m.

One-way slab Two-way slab


One-way ribbed (joist) slab

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Arrangements of ribbed slabs

Key components of ribbed slabs


a. Topping slab: ACI
C 8.
8.13.6.1
3.6.
Topping slab thickness (t) is not to be less than 1/12 the clear
distance (lc) between ribs, nor less than 50 mm
lc

t 12
50 mm
lc
andd sshould
ou d ssatisfy
s y for
o a uunit sstrip:
p: Slab thickness ((t))

w u l c2
t
1240 f c

Shrinkage reinforcement is provided in the topping slab in both


directions in a mesh form.

Key components of ribbed slabs


b. Regularly spaced ribs:
Minimum dimensions:
Ribs are not to be less than 100 mm in width, and a depth of not
more than
th 3.5
3 5 times
ti th minimum
the i i webb width
idth andd clear
l spacing
i
between ribs is not to exceed 750 mm.
ACI 8.13.2
l 750 mm
c
ACI 8.13.3

h 3.5 bw

bw 100

Key components of ribbed slabs


Shear strength:
g ACI 8.13.8
Shear strength provided by rib concrete Vc may be taken 10% greater
than those for beams.

Flexural strength:
Ribs are designed as rectangular beams in the regions of negative
moment at the supports and as T-shaped beams in the regions of
positive moments between the supports.

Effective
ff i flange
fl width
id h be is
i taken
k as half
h lf the
h distance
di b
between ribs,
ib
center-to-center. b
e

Keyy components
p of ribbed slabs
c. Hollow blocks:
Hollow blocks are made of lightweight
g g concrete or other
lightweight materials. The most common concrete hollow block
sizes are 40 25 cm in plan and heights of 14, 17, 20, and 24 cm.

Hollow blocks do not contribute to the strength of the slab. In fact,


theyy impose
p an additional weight
g on the slab. In some cases,, blocks
made of polystyrene, which is 1/15 of the weight of concrete
blocks, are used.

To avoid shear failures, the blocks are terminated near the support
and replaced
p byy solid pparts. Solid pparts are made under ppartitions
and concentrated walls.

To avoid cracking due to shrinkage in top concrete flange,


flange the
concrete blocks should be watered prior to concrete placing.

Cross (distribution) ribs


Transversal ribs or cross ribs are added to one one-way
way hollow block
floors for better distribution of the applied loads. They also help in
distributing the concentrated loads due to walls in the transverse
direction. The bottom reinforcement is taken as the reinforcement in
the main ribs, and the top reinforcement should be taken at least of
th bottom
the b tt reinforcement.
i f t Cross
C ribs
ib are usually
ll 10 cm wide.
id

Arrangement of regularly spaced cross rib according to Egyptian


code:

Cross (distribution) ribs

No cross ribs One cross rib Three cross ribs

Arrangement of hollow blocks and width of hidden beams


The number of blocks in each direction must be specified on the
construction drawings. Thus, the layout of the blocks must be
positioned so that enough solid parts are present near the supporting
beams. The normal width of solid part ranges between 0.8-2.0 m for
floors with hidden beams and ranges between 0.2-0.5 m for floors
with
ith projected
j t d beams.
b

The number of blocks (having sizes of 40 25 cm in plan) and the


width of the beams must satisfy:

In the rib direction (mm): Lc 1 = 250 n1 + 100 ncr

P
Perpendicular
di l to t rib
ib direction
di ti (mm):
( ) Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)

Arrangement of hollow blocks and width of hidden beams

bw =width of main rib


Lc 1 = 250 n1 + 100 ncr
Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)

Minimum thickness of one way slabs ACI Table 9.5(a)

Minimum Cover ACI 7.7.1


a - Concrete exposed to earth or weather
for <16mm------40 mm and for >16mm----- 50 mm
b - Concrete not exposed to earth or weather

for <32mm------20 mm, otherwise ------ 40 mm


Loads Assigned to Slabs
wu=1.2
1 2 D.L
D L + 1.6
1 6 L.L
LL

a- Dead Load (D
(D.L)
L) :
1- Weight of slab covering materials
2- Equivalent
q ppartition weight
g
3- Own weight of slab

b Live
b- Li LLoad
d (L
(L.L)
L)

a- Dead Load (D.L)


( )
1- Weight of slab covering materials, total =2.315 kN/m2
tiles (2.5cm thick) =0.02523 = 0.575 kN/m2
cement mortar (2.5cm thick) =0.02521 = 0.525 kN/m2
sand (5.0cm thick) =0.0518 = 0.9 kN/m2
plaster 0.015 21 = 0.315 kN/m2
(1.5cm thick) =0.01521

tiles 22.55 cm
cement mortar 2.5 cm
sand 5 cm

slab

plaster 1.5 cm

2-Equivalent partition weight


This load is usually taken as the weight of all walls (weight of 1m span
of wall total spans of all walls) carried by the slab divided by the floor
area and treated as a dead load rather than a live load.
To calculate the weight of 1m span of wall:
Each 1m2 surface of wall contains 12.5 blocks
A bl
blockk with
i h thickness
hi k 10 weighs
10cm i h 10 kg
k
A block with thickness 20cm weighs 20 kg

Each face of 1m2 surface has 30kg plaster

Load / 1m2 surface for 10 cm block =


12.5 10 +230=185 kg/m2 = 1.85 kN/m2

Load / 1m2 surface for 20 cm block =


20 cm
12.5 20 +230=310 kg/m2 = 3.1 kN/m2

Weight of 1m span of wall with height 3m:


For 10 cm block wt. = 1.85 kN/m2 3 = 5.6 kN/m
For 20 cm block wt. = 3.1 kN/m2 3 = 9.3 kN/m
3- Own weight of slab

Example
Find the total ultimate load per rib for the ribbed slab shown:

Assume depth of slab = 25 cm (20cm block +5cm toping slab)

Hollow blocks are 40 cm 25 cm 20 cm in dimension

Assume ribs have 10 cm width of web

Assume equivalent partition load = 0.75 kN/m2

Consider live load = 2 kN/m2.

3- Own weight of slab


Solution
Total volume (hatched) = 0.5 0.25 0.25 = 0.03125 m3

Volume of one hollow block = 0.4 0.20 0.25 = 0.02 m3

Net concrete volume = 0.03125 - 0.02 = 0.01125 m3

Weight of concrete = 0.01125 25= 0.28125 kN

Weight of concrete /m2 = 0.28125 /[(0.5)(0.25)] = 2.25 kN/m2

Weight of hollow blocks /m2 = 0.2/[(0.5)(0.25)] = 1.6 kN/m2

Total slab own weight


weight= 2.25
2 25 + 1.6 3 85 kN/m2
1 6 = 3.85

L dp
Load per rib
ib
Total dead load= 3.85 + 2.315 + 0.75 = 6.915 kN/m2
Ultimate load = 1.2(6.915) + 1.6(2) = 11.5 kN/m2

Ultimate load per rib = 11.5 0.5 = 5.75 kN/m


Minimum live Load values on slabs
Type of Use Uniform Live Load
kN/m2
Residential 2
Residential balconies 3
Computer use 5
b- Live Load ((L.L)) Offices 2
Warehouses
It depends on the function for Light storage 6
which the floor is constructed. Heavy Storage 12
Schools
Classrooms 2
Libraries
rooms 3
Stack rooms 6
Hospitals 2
Assembly Halls
Fixed seating 2.5
Movable seating 5
Garages (cars) 2.5
Stores
Retail 4
wholesale 5
Exit facilities 5
Manufacturing
Light 4
Heavy 6
Loads Assigned to Beams
Beams are usually designed to carry the following loads:
- Their own weight
- Weights of partitions applied directly on them
- Floor
Fl loads
l d

S1 S2

Shrinkage Reinforcement Ratio


According to ACI Code and for fy =420 MPa ACI 7.12.2.1
shrinkage = 0.0018 As , shrinkage = 0.0018 b h
where, b = width of strip, and h = slab thickness

Mi i
Minimum Reinforcement
R i f t Ratio
R ti for
f Main
M i Reinforcement
R i f t

min A s ,shrinkage
A s ,min shrinkage = 0.0018 b h ACI 10.5.4

Check shear capacity of the section


V u 1.1 V c = (1.1)0.17 f c ' b wd
Otherwise enlarge depth of slab

Spacing of Reinforcement Bars
a- Flexural Reinforcement Bars
Flexural reinforcement is to be spaced not farther than three times the slab
thickness (hs), nor farther apart than 45 cm, center-to-center.
3 hs
Smax smaller of ACI 10.5.4
45cm

b- Shrinkage Reinforcement Bars


Shrinkage reinforcement is to be spaced not farther than five times the slab
thickness, nor farther apart than 45 cm, center-to-center.
5 hs
Smax smaller
ll of ACI 7.12.2.2
7 12 2 2
45cm

Summary of one
one-way
way ribbed slab design procedure
1. The direction of ribs is chosen.
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both
directions.
4. The factored load on each of the ribs is computed.
5. The shear force and bending moment diagrams are drawn.
6. The strength of the web in shear is checked.
7. Design the ribs as T-section shaped beams in the positive moment
regions and rectangular beams in the regions of negative moment.
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the
reinforcement are to be prepared.
p p

Example 1
Determine the arrangement
of blocks and width of
hidden beams for the plan
p
shown. The blocks used
have the size of 40 20 cm
in plan. The live load is 4
kN/m2.

Solution

Note that the width of hollow blocks in Gaza is 250 mm NOT 200 mm

Solution

Solution

Solution

Example 2
Design a oneone-way
way ribbed slab to cover a 3.8
3 8 m x 10 m panel,
panel shown in the
figure below. The covering materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent
ppartition load is equal
q to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live load is 2 kN/m2.
Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420MPa
3.8 m

10 m

Solution
1. The direction of ribs is chosen:
Ribs are arranged in the short direction as shown in the figure

3.8 m
3
50m
5.0 50m
5.0
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t:
From ACI Table 9.5(a), hmin = 380/16 = 23.75cm use h = 24 cm.
L t width
Let b bw =10
idth off web, 10 cm
Use hollow blocks of size 40 cm 25 cm 17 cm (weight=0.17 kN)
pp g slab thickness = 24 17 = 7cm > lc/12 =40/12= 3.3cm > 5cm OK
Topping
For a unit strip of topping slab:
wu=[1.2(0.07 25 + 0.75 + 2.25) + 1.6(2)] 1m = 8.9 kN/m = 8.9 N/mm
w u l c2 8.9( 400 ) 2
t = = 16mm OK
1240 f c ( 0.9 )1240 25

Solution
3. Provide shrinkage
g reinforcement for the topping
pp g slab in both directions:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement, As=0.0018(1000)70=126 mm2
Use 5 6 mm/m in both directions.

4. The factored load on each of the ribs is to be computed:


Total volume (in 1m2 surface) 1.0 m
= 1.0 1.0 0.24 = 0.24 m3
Volume of hollow blocks in 1m2
= 8 0.4 0.25 0.17 = 0.136 m3 0.05 m
Net concrete volume in 1m2

1.0 m
= 0.24-
0 24 0.136 0 104 m3
0 136 = 0.104

0.25 m
Weight of concrete in 1m2
= 0.104 25 = 2.6 kN/m2
g of hollow blocks in 1m2
Weight
= 8 0.17= 1.36 kN/m2
0.4 m 0.1 m 0.4 m

7 cm
Total dead load /m2
= 2.25 + 0.75 + 2.6 + 1.36
0.244 m

= 7.0 kN/m2

Solution
wu=1.2(7)+1.6(2)=11.6
1.2(7) 1.6(2) 11.6 kN/m2
wu/m of rib =11.6x0.5= 5.8 kN/m of rib
5. Critical shear forces and bending moments are determined (simply supported beam):
Maximum factored shear force = wul/2 = 5.8 (3.8/2) = 11 kN
Maximum factored bending moment = wul2/8 = 5.8 (3.8)2/8 = 10.5 kN.m
6. Check rib strength for beam shear:
Effective depth d = 2420.60.6 =20.8 cm, assuming 12mm reinforcing
bars and 6 mm stirrups.
p

1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 25 100 208 = 14400 N = 14.4 kN > Vu,max = 11 kN

Though shear reinforcement is not required, 4 6 mm stirrups per meter


run are to be used to carry the bottom flexural reinforcement.

Solution
7. Design
g flexural reinforcement for the ribs:
There is only positive moments over the simply supported beam, and the
section of maximum positive moment is to be designed as a T-section
Assume that a<70mm and =0.90Rectangular
=0 90Rectangular section with b = be =500mm
50
0.85 25 2 10.5 106
= 1 1 7

kN.m
420 0.9 0.85
0 85 25 500 2082 24

105 k
As
= 0.0013
10
As = be d = 0.0013 500 208 = 135 mm 2

Use 210mm (As,sup= 157 mm2)

As f y 157 420
a= = = 6.2 mm < 70mm
0.85f c 'b e 0.85 25 500
The assumption is right

Solution
Check As,min
s min
0.25 f c ' 1.4
A s,min = max bw d ; bw d
f y fy
A s,min = 70 mm 2 < A s,sup = 157 mm 2 OK

Check =0.9
=0 9 (ductility of the section)
a 6.2
c= = = 7 .3 mm
1 00.85
85
dc 208 7 .3
t = 0.003 = 0.003
c 7.3
t = 0.083 >> 0 .005 Tension controlled = 0 .9 OK

Solution
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the reinforcement are to be
prepared

110 m

110 m
110 m

110 m
3.8 m A A

5.0 m 5.0 m
6mm stirrups 6mm mesh
@25 cm @20 cm
7cm
24cm
17cm

210mm 10 40 cm 10 210mm

S i A-A
Section AA

PART II
Two way ribbed slabs


Method of analysis

R i Li
i

Method of coefficients

1.0m
w = ws + wl

wS
S

w s = w

w l = w wl
L

Rectangularity ratio:

Case

L L 0.76L L L L 0.87L 0.76L 0.87L


r S S S 0.76S 0.87S S 0.87S 0.76S
S

Method of coefficients

ECP 203 load coefficients LL< 5kN/m2


r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85

0 35
0.35 0 29
0.29 0 25
0.25 0 21
0.21 0 18
0.18 0 16
0.16 0 14
0.14 0 12
0.12 0 11
0.11 0 09
0.09 0 08
0.08

Marcus load coefficients LL 5kN/m2


r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

0.292 0.355 0.411 0.470 0.526 0.577 0.623 0.663 0.699 0.730 0.757

0.292 0.240 0.198 0.165 0.137 0.114 0.095 0.079 0.067 0.056 0.047

Minimum slab thickness:


To avoid the complexity of calculating for a two way ribbed slab,
slab
one of three equations of the ACI 318-89 which provides an upper
bound for the deflection control of the slab thickness can be used for
simplicity.

l n (800 + f y /1.4)
h max =
36000

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:


The loads acting on beams have tributary areas which are bounded
by 45-degree lines drawn from the corners of the panels and the
centerlines of the adjacent panels parallel to the long sides.
S

S L

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:

qu(S/2)

Long beam
qu(S/2)
L

m
L
Short beam
S

An equivalent
q uniformlyy distributed load can be established for a beam in a two
way system.
For a triangular load distribution, the equivalent shear force coefficient Cs is
equal to 0.5 and the equivalent bending moment coefficient Cb is equal to 0.67.

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:


qu(S/2)

Lon
ng beam
qu(S/2)
L

L
Short beam
S

For a trapezoidal load distribution, Cs and Cb are given in the following table.
Shear and moment equivalent load coefficients for trapezoidal load distribution
r =L/S 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0

Cs 0.500 0.545 0.583 0.615 0.643 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750

Cb 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.852 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917

Design of beams in two way ribbed slabs:

Original distribution Equivalent distribution Equivalent distribution


for shear for moment

wu 0.5 wu 0.67 wu

S S S

wu Cs wu Cb wu

L L L

Summary of two-way ribbed slab design procedure

1. Evaluate overall slab thickness and key ribbed slab components.


2
2. Determine the total factored load on the slab.
slab
3. Determine load distributions in the two principal directions.
4
4. Determine the shear force and bending moments.
moments
5. Check web width for beam shear.
6
6. D i rib
Design ib reinforcement.
i f
7. Design drawing.

Example
p 3
Design the two-way ribbed slab shown in the figure below. The covering
materials weigh 1.5 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75
kN/ 2, concrete
kN/m t hollow
h ll bl k are 40cm25cm17cm
blocks 40 25 17 i dimension,
in di i
each 17 kg in weight and the live load is 4 kN/m2. All beams are 30 cm
wide. Use fc=30 MPa, fy=420 MPa.

8.0 m

8.0 m

8.0 m 8.0 m
S l ti
Solution:

1- Evaluate overall slab thickness and key ribbed slab components:

l n = 800 30 = 770cm

The largest slab thickness is given by:


l n (800 + f y /1.4)
h max =
36000
(770)(800 + 420 /1.4)
h max = = 23.5cm
36000

Take width of rib = 12 cm.

S l ti
Solution:

2- Determine
ee e thee total
o factored
c o ed load
o d on
o thee slab:
s b

Total volume (hatched) = 0.52 0.62 0.23 = 0.074152 m3

V l
Volume off hhollow
ll blocks 2[0 4 0.25
bl k = 2[0.4 0 25 0.17] 0 034 m3
0 17] = 0.034

Net concrete volume = 0.074152 - 0.034 = 0.040152 m3

Weight of concrete = 0.040152 25= 1.0038 kN

Weight of concrete /m2 = 1.0038 /[(0.52)(0.62)] = 3.11 kN/m2

Weight of hollow blocks /m2 = 0.17(2)/[(0.52)(0.62)] = 1.05 kN/m2

Total dead load= 3.11+1.05 + 1.5 + 0.75 = 6.41 kN/m2

Ultimate load = 1.2(6.41) + 1.6(4) = 14.1 kN/m2

S l ti
Solution:

33- Determine load distributions in the two principal directions: 0 52 m


0.52

L 8
r= = =1.0
S 8

8m
w1=w2=0.35(14.1) =4 92 kN/m2
=0 35(14 1) =4.92

Load per rib in Direction 1:

8m
0.62 m
wu/m of rib =4.92x0.62=
=4 92x0 62= 3.06
3 06 kN/m of rib

Load per rib in Direction 2:


wu/m of rib =44.92x0.52
92x0 52= 2.56
2 56 kN/m of rib 8m 8m

0.5
Direction 1
0.4
S l ti
Solution:

4- Determine
ee e thee shear
s e force
o ce and
d bending
be d g moments:
o e s

Using the ACI 8.3 coefficients


3 06 kN/m
3.06

Direction 1

Maximum factored shear force = 1.15wuln/2 = 1.15(3.06) (7.7/2) = 13.5 kN


Maximum factored negative moment = wuln2/9 = 3.06(7.7)2/9 = 20.2 kN.m
M i
Maximum ffactored iti momentt = wuln2/14 = 3.06(7.7)
t d positive 3 06(7 7)2/14 = 12.9
12 9 kN.m
kN
2.56 kN/m
Direction 2

Maximum factored shear force = 1.15w


1 15wuln/2 = 1.15(2.56)
1 15(2 56) (7
(7.7/2)
7/2) = 11.4
11 4 kN
Maximum factored negative moment = wuln2/9 = 2.56(7.7)2/9 = 16.9 kN.m
Maximum factored positive moment = wuln2/14 = 2.56(7.7)2/14 = 10.9 kN.m
S l ti
Solution:

55- C
Check
ec web width
w d for
o be
beam sshear:
e
Direction 1
Reinforcement is closest to the outside surface of concrete.
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 0.8 = 19.6 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.

1 1V c = 1.1
1.1 1 1 0.75
0 75 0.17
0 17 30 120 196 = 18067 N
= 18.1 kN > Vu,max = 13.5 kN
Direction 2
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 1.6 - 0.8 = 18.0 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.

1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 30 120 180 = 16593 N


= 16.6 kN > Vu,max = 11.4 kN

All though shear reinforcement is not required, 4 6 mm stirrups per meter


run are used to carry the bottom flexural reinforcement.

S l ti
Solution:

66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e

Direction 1

Positive moment Negative moment


Mu = 12.9 kN.m Mu = 20.2 kN.m

Use mm 1 100 aandd mm 1 12 Use mm 2 16 in each rib.


rib
reinforcing bars in each rib.

S l ti
Solution:

66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e

Direction 2

Positive moment Negative moment


Mu = 10.9 kN.m Mu = 16.9 kN.m

Use mm 1 100 aandd mm 1 12 Use mm 2 16 in each rib.


rib
reinforcing bars in each rib.

S l ti
Solution:

77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g

S l ti
Solution:

77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g

Reinforced Concrete Design III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 3
Equivalent Frame Method
(EFM)
R i Li
i

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Analysis
y of each equivalent
q frame in its entiretyy shall be ppermitted.
Alternatively, for gravity loading, a separate analysis of each floor or
roof with far ends of columns considered fixed shall be permitted.
ACI 13.7.2.5

Model of a beam supported by columns

Steps of the EFM:


0- Extract
0 E a single
i l storey from
f 3D frame
f f separate
for
analysis.

1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members.

2- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns.


2.aa Determine the stiffness of the columns.
2 columns
2.b Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms.
3.c Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns.

3- Analyse the frame using a computer software to


obtain the longitudinal distribution of moments.

4- Distribute
4 Di ib the
h obtained
b i d moments in
i the
h transverse
direction using the same DDM procedure
1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):

kEI sb
Ks =
l1

1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):


Determination of k:

1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):


Determination of Isb:

2- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

C
Concept off E
Equivalent
i l Column:
C l
The joint rotations for the two cases below can be easily calculated
from structural analysis.

2- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

Concept of Equivalent Column:


In the case of a slab connected to a column as shown below, the rotation at Point
A is greater than that of Point C because there is less restraint at this point.
point Also
the rotation of the slab parts between A and A transforms the moment from the
slab to the column in the form of torsional moment. To account for these effects
in the analysis, the column is assumed to be attached to the slab beam by the
transverse torsional arms AC and CA. The obtained column above and below
the slab with torsional arms on both sides of the column is called an equivalent
column.

2- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

Concept of Equivalent Column:

2.a Stiffness of the Columns ((Kc)):


kEI
Kc =
lc

2.a Stiffness of the Columns ((Kc)):


kEI
Kc =
lc

2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):


Cross section of torsioanl arms ACI 13.7.5.1
Torsional members shall be assumed
to have a constant cross section
th
throughout
h t their
th i length
l th consisting
i ti off
the largest of (a),
(b), aand
d (c):

(a) A portion of slab having a width


equall tot that
th t off the
th column,
l bracket,
b k t or
capital in the direction of the span for
which
w c moments
o e ts area e being
be g determined;
dete ed;
(b) For monolithic or fully composite
construction, the portion of slab
specified
ifi d in
i (a)
( ) plus
l that
h part off
the transverse beam above and below
tthee slab;
s ab;
(c) The transverse beam as defined in

13.2.4.
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):
Cross section of torsioanl arms

Definition of the equivalent beam:


ACI 13.2.4
be = bw+X
be = bw+2X

X= min(hb, 4 hf)

2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):

Condition (a) No transverse beams framing into columns

9 E cs C
Kt = The summation is for the
c2 3
l 2 (1 ) arms on both sides
l2

Condition ((b)) Transverse beams framing


g into columns
I sb 9 E cs C
Kt =
Is
c2 3
l 2 (1 )
l2

2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):


Cross section constant C

0.63x x 3y
C = 1
y 3

2.c- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

The summation is for the


columns top and bottom.

Stiffness of a column from the stiffness of the


equivalent column:
The equivalent column stiffness is distributed to the stiffness of the column
above and below the slab in proportion to their flexural stiffnesses.

4 EI
4EI
K c1 =
lc

For symmetric
y conditions:

K eq
K c1 = K c 2 =
2

Arrangement of live load:

When the unfactored live load is variable but does not exceed three-
quarters of the unfactored dead load, or the nature of live load is such that
all
ll panels
l will
ill be
b loaded
l d d simultaneously,
i lt l it shall
h ll be
b permitted
itt d to
t assume
that maximum factored moments occur at all sections with full factored
live
ve load
oad on
o entire
e e slab
s ab system.
sys e .
ACI 13.7.6.2

Example
p
Find the equivalent 2D frame for a typical storey of the E-W interior frame of
the flat pplate structure shown below. The slab is 25 cm thick. All columns are
35x35 cm in cross section. Storey height = 3.0 m. Ultimate distributed load
over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
76m
7.6 76m
7.6 76m
7.6 7.6 m

6.0 m

6.0 m

6.0 m

6.0 m

Solution
0- Extract a single storey from 3D frame for separate analysis

3.0 m

30m
3.0

7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m

Solution
1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members
l 2 h s3 600(25) 3
I sb = = = 781250cm 4
12 12
c1 35
= = 0.046
l 1 760
c2 35
= = 0.058
l 2 600
k = 4.047
kEI sb 4.047(781250) E
Ks = = = 4160 E
l1 760

Solution
2.a- Determine the stiffness of the columns
c 1c 23 35(35) 3
I sb = = = 125052cm 4
12 12
l c = 300cm
l u = 300 25 = 275cm
l c 300
= = 1.1
lu 275
t a = t a = 25 / 2 = 12.5
t a 12.5
= = 1.0
t b 12.5
k = 5.09
kEI c
Kc = =
lc
5.09(125052) E
Kc = = 2122 E
300

Solution
2.b- Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms

0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 35cm
y 3
0.63(25) (25) 3 35
C = (1 )( ) = 100260cm 4 25cm
35 3
9 E cs C
Kt =
c
l 2 (1 2 ) 3
l2
9(100260) E
K t = 2( ) = 3602 E
35 3
600(1 )
600

Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns

Kt Kc
K ec =
Kt + Kc
3602 E (2 2122 E )
K ec = = 1948 E
3602 E + 2122 E

The stiffness of each of the columns ((same dimensions):


)
K ec
K ct = K cb = = 974 E
2
K l 974 E (300)
I rc = ct c = = 292243cm 4
E E
K s l 1 4160 E (760)
( 60)
I rs = = = 3161719cm 4
E E
Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns

292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4

3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4

292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4

Solution
3- Analyse the frame using ETABS to obtain the longitudinal distribution of
moments.
moments
wu = (15)(6) = 90 kN/m

Reinforced Concrete Design III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 3
Equivalent Frame Method
(EFM)
R i Li
i

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Analysis
y of each equivalent
q frame in its entiretyy shall be ppermitted.
Alternatively, for gravity loading, a separate analysis of each floor or
roof with far ends of columns considered fixed shall be permitted.
ACI 13.7.2.5

Model of a beam supported by columns

Steps of the EFM:


0- Extract
0 E a single
i l storey from
f 3D frame
f f separate
for
analysis.

1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members.

2- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns.


2.aa Determine the stiffness of the columns.
2 columns
2.b Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms.
3.c Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns.

3- Analyse the frame using a computer software to


obtain the longitudinal distribution of moments.

4- Distribute
4 Di ib the
h obtained
b i d moments in
i the
h transverse
direction using the same DDM procedure
1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):

kEI sb
Ks =
l1

1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):


Determination of k:

1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):


Determination of Isb:

2- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

C
Concept off E
Equivalent
i l Column:
C l
The joint rotations for the two cases below can be easily calculated
from structural analysis.

2- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

Concept of Equivalent Column:


In the case of a slab connected to a column as shown below, the rotation at Point
A is greater than that of Point C because there is less restraint at this point.
point Also
the rotation of the slab parts between A and A transforms the moment from the
slab to the column in the form of torsional moment. To account for these effects
in the analysis, the column is assumed to be attached to the slab beam by the
transverse torsional arms AC and CA. The obtained column above and below
the slab with torsional arms on both sides of the column is called an equivalent
column.

2- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

Concept of Equivalent Column:

2.a Stiffness of the Columns ((Kc)):


kEI
Kc =
lc

2.a Stiffness of the Columns ((Kc)):


kEI
Kc =
lc

2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):


Cross section of torsioanl arms ACI 13.7.5.1
Torsional members shall be assumed
to have a constant cross section
th
throughout
h t their
th i length
l th consisting
i ti off
the largest of (a),
(b), aand
d (c):

(a) A portion of slab having a width


equall tot that
th t off the
th column,
l bracket,
b k t or
capital in the direction of the span for
which
w c moments
o e ts area e being
be g determined;
dete ed;
(b) For monolithic or fully composite
construction, the portion of slab
specified
ifi d in
i (a)
( ) plus
l that
h part off
the transverse beam above and below
tthee slab;
s ab;
(c) The transverse beam as defined in

13.2.4.
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):
Cross section of torsioanl arms

Definition of the equivalent beam:


ACI 13.2.4
be = bw+X
be = bw+2X

X= min(hb, 4 hf)

2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):

Condition (a) No transverse beams framing into columns

9 E cs C
Kt = The summation is for the
c2 3
l 2 (1 ) arms on both sides
l2

Condition ((b)) Transverse beams framing


g into columns
I sb 9 E cs C
Kt =
Is
c2 3
l 2 (1 )
l2

2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):


Cross section constant C
0.63x x 3 y torsional constant
C = 1
y 3

The cross section is to be divided into separate rectangular parts and


carrying out the summation given in such away to give the largest value of C,
as shown in the figure.
x is
i the
h shorter
h dimension
di i off the
h rectangular
l part off the
h cross section
i
and y is the longer dimension of the rectangular part of the cross section.
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):
Cross section constant C

0.63x x 3y
C = 1
y 3

2.c- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

The summation is for the


columns top and bottom.

Stiffness of a column from the stiffness of the


equivalent column:
The equivalent column stiffness is distributed to the stiffness of the column
above and below the slab in proportion to their flexural stiffnesses.

4 EI
4EI
K c1 =
lc

For symmetric
y conditions:

K eq
K c1 = K c 2 =
2

Arrangement of live load:

When the unfactored live load is variable but does not exceed three-
quarters of the unfactored dead load, or the nature of live load is such that
all
ll panels
l will
ill be
b loaded
l d d simultaneously,
i lt l it shall
h ll be
b permitted
itt d to
t assume
that maximum factored moments occur at all sections with full factored
live
ve load
oad on
o entire
e e slab
s ab system.
sys e .
ACI 13.7.6.2

Example
p
Find the equivalent 2D frame for a typical storey of the E-W interior frame of
the flat pplate structure shown below. The slab is 25 cm thick. All columns are
35x35 cm in cross section. Storey height = 3.0 m. Ultimate distributed load
over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
76m
7.6 76m
7.6 76m
7.6 7.6 m

6.0 m

6.0 m

6.0 m

6.0 m

Solution
0- Extract a single storey from 3D frame for separate analysis

3.0 m

30m
3.0

7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m

Solution
1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members
l 2 h s3 600(25) 3
I sb = = = 781250cm 4
12 12
c1 35
= = 0.046
l 1 760
c2 35
= = 0.058
l 2 600
k = 4.047
kEI sb 4.047(781250) E
Ks = = = 4160 E
l1 760

Solution
2.a- Determine the stiffness of the columns
c 1c 23 35(35) 3
I sb = = = 125052cm 4
12 12
l c = 300cm
l u = 300 25 = 275cm
l c 300
= = 1.1
lu 275
t a = t a = 25 / 2 = 12.5
t a 12.5
= = 1.0
t b 12.5
k = 5.09
kEI c
Kc = =
lc
5.09(125052) E
Kc = = 2122 E
300

Solution
2.b- Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms

0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 35cm
y 3
0.63(25) (25) 3 35
C = (1 )( ) = 100260cm 4 25cm
35 3
9 E cs C
Kt =
c
l 2 (1 2 ) 3
l2
9(100260) E
K t = 2( ) = 3602 E
35 3
600(1 )
600

Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns

Kt Kc
K ec =
Kt + Kc
3602 E (2 2122 E )
K ec = = 1948 E
3602 E + 2122 E

The stiffness of each of the columns ((same dimensions):


)
K ec
K ct = K cb = = 974 E
2
K l 974 E (300)
I rc = ct c = = 292243cm 4
E E
K s l 1 4160 E (760)
( 60)
I rs = = = 3161719cm 4
E E
Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns

292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4

3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4

292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4

Solution
3- Analyse the frame using ETABS to obtain the longitudinal distribution of
moments.
moments
wu = (15)(6) = 90 kN/m

Reinforced Concrete Design III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 3
Equivalent Frame Method
(EFM)
R i Li
i

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Introduction:

Analysis
y of each equivalent
q frame in its entiretyy shall be ppermitted.
Alternatively, for gravity loading, a separate analysis of each floor or
roof with far ends of columns considered fixed shall be permitted.

ACI 13.7.2.5

Steps of the EFM:


0- Extract
0 E a single
i l storey from
f 3D frame
f f separate
for
analysis.

1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members.

2- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns.


2.aa Determine the stiffness of the columns.
2 columns
2.b Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms.
3.c Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns.

3- Analyze the frame using a computer software to


obtain the longitudinal distribution of moments.

4- Distribute
4 Di ib the
h obtained
b i d moments in
i the
h transverse
direction using the same DDM procedure
1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):

kEI sb
Ks =
l1

1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):


Determination of k:

1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):


Determination of Isb:

2- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

C
Concept off E
Equivalent
i l Column:
C l
The joint rotations for the two cases below can be easily calculated
from structural analysis.

2- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

Concept of Equivalent Column:


In the case of a slab connected to a column as shown below, the rotation at Point
A is greater than that of Point C because there is less restraint at this point.
point Also
the rotation of the slab parts between A and A transforms the moment from the
slab to the column in the form of torsional moment. To account for these effects
in the analysis, the column is assumed to be attached to the slab beam by the
transverse torsional arms AC and CA. The obtained column above and below
the slab with torsional arms on both sides of the column is called an equivalent
column.

2- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

Concept of Equivalent Column:

2.a Stiffness of the Columns ((Kc)):


kEI
Kc =
lc

2.a Stiffness of the Columns ((Kc)):


kEI
Kc =
lc

2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):


Cross section of torsioanl arms ACI 13.7.5.1
Torsional members shall be assumed
to have a constant cross section
th
throughout
h t their
th i length
l th consisting
i ti off
the largest of (a),
(b), aand
d (c):

(a) A portion of slab having a width


equall tot that
th t off the
th column,
l bracket,
b k t or
capital in the direction of the span for
which
w c moments
o e ts area e being
be g determined;
dete ed;
(b) For monolithic or fully composite
construction, the portion of slab
specified
ifi d in
i (a)
( ) plus
l that
h part off
the transverse beam above and below
tthee slab;
s ab;
(c) The transverse beam as defined in

13.2.4.
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):
Cross section of torsioanl arms

Definition of the equivalent beam:


ACI 13.2.4
be = bw+X
be = bw+2X

X= min(hb, 4 hf)

2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):

Condition (a) No transverse beams framing into columns

9 E cs C
Kt = The summation is for the
c2 3
l 2 (1 ) arms on both sides
l2

Condition ((b)) Transverse beams framing


g into columns
I sb 9 E cs C
Kt =
Is
c2 3
l 2 (1 )
l2

2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):


Cross section constant C
0.63x x 3 y torsional constant
C = 1
y 3

The cross section is to be divided into separate rectangular parts and


carrying out the summation given in such away to give the largest value of C,
as shown in the figure.
x is
i the
h shorter
h dimension
di i off the
h rectangular
l part off the
h cross section
i
and y is the longer dimension of the rectangular part of the cross section.
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):
Cross section constant C

0.63x x 3y
C = 1
y 3

2.c- Stiffness of the Equivalent


q Columns ((Kec)):

The summation is for the


columns top and bottom.

Stiffness of a column from the stiffness of the


equivalent column:
The equivalent column stiffness is distributed to the stiffness of the column
above and below the slab in proportion to their flexural stiffnesses.
c1
c2
4 EI c
K c1 =
lc
c 2c 13
Ic =
12

For symmetric conditions:

K eq
K c1 = K c 2 =
2

Arrangement of live load:

When the unfactored live load is variable but does not exceed three-
quarters of the unfactored dead load, or the nature of live load is such that
all
ll panels
l will
ill be
b loaded
l d d simultaneously,
i lt l it shall
h ll be
b permitted
itt d to
t assume
that maximum factored moments occur at all sections with full factored
live
ve load
oad on
o entire
e e slab
s ab system.
sys e .
ACI 13.7.6.2

Example
p
Find and analyze the equivalent 2D frame for a typical storey of the E-W
interior frame of the flat pplate structure shown below. The slab is 25 cm thick.
All columns are 35x35 cm in cross section. Storey height = 3.0 m. Ultimate
distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
76m
7.6 76m
7.6 76m
7.6 7.6 m

N
6.0 m

6.0 m

6.0 m

6.0 m

Solution
0- Extract a single storey from 3D frame for separate analysis

3.0 m

30m
3.0

7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m

Solution
1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members
l 2 h s3 600(25) 3
I sb = = = 781250cm 4
12 12
c1 35
= = 0.046
l 1 760
c2 35
= = 0.058
l 2 600
k = 4.047
kEI sb 4.047(781250) E
Ks = = = 4160 E
l1 760

Solution
2.a- Determine the stiffness of the columns
c 2c 13 35(35) 3
Ic = = = 125052cm 4
12 12
l c = 300cm
l u = 300 25 = 275cm
l c 300
= = 1.1
lu 275
t a = t a = 25 / 2 = 12.5
t a 12.5
= = 1.0
t b 12.5
k = 5.09
kEI c
Kc =
lc
5.09(125052) E
Kc = = 2122 E
300

Solution
2.b- Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms

0.63x x 3 y
C = 1
y 3 35cm

0.63(25) (25) 3 35
C = (1 )( ) = 100260cm 4 25cm
35 3
9 E cs C
Kt =
c2 3
l 2 (1 )
l2

9(100260) E
Kt = 2 = 3602 E
600(1 35 ) 3
600

Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns

Kt Kc
K ec =
Kt + Kc
3602 E (2 2122 E )
K ec = = 1948 E
3602 E + 2 2122 E

The stiffness of each of the columns (same dimensions):


K ec
K c1 = K c 2 = = 974 E
2
K l K l 974 E (300)
I r1 = I r2 = c 1 c = c 2 c = = 292243cm 4
E E E
K s l 1 4160 E (760)
I rs = = = 3161719cm 4
E E
Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns

292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4

3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4 3161719cm 4

292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4 292243cm 4

Solution
3- Analyze the frame using ETABS to obtain the longitudinal distribution of
moments.
moments
wu = (15)(6) = 90 kN/m

Reinforced Concrete Design


g III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 4
Calculation of earthquake loads using
IBC 2009
PART I
Introduction

Introduction:

Mechanism of Earthquakes:

Earth's crust is composed of several layers of hard tectonic plates, called


lithospheres, that float on the softer, underpinning, fluid medium called
mantle. These plates or rock masses, when fractured, form fault lines. The
adjoining plates or rock masses are prevented by the interacting frictional
forces from moving past one another most of the time. However, when
this frictional ultimate resistance is reached because of the continuous
motion of the underlying fluid any two plates can impact on one another,
generating seismic waves that can cause large horizontal and vertical
ground motions. These ground motions translate into inertia forces in
structures.

Introduction:
Tectonic Plates

Introduction:

The focus is the point of initial movement on the fault where slip occurs.
occurs
Seismic waves radiate from the focus. The epicenter is the point on the
earths surface directly above the focus.
Introduction:
Strike-slip fault

Introduction:
Normal fault

Introduction:
Thrust fault

Introduction:
Effects of earthquakes on structures

Introduction:

El Centro, California earthquake of May 1940, N-S component


Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics

T: Fundamental period of vibration

Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics

Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics

Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics

Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:

Standards and Specifications: Detailed statement of


procedures for design (i.e., AISC Structural Steel Spec;
ACI 318 Standards, ANSI/ASCE7-05). Not legally
binding. Think of as Recommended Practice.

Code: Systematically arranged and comprehensive


collection of laws and regulations.
regulations


Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:

Model Codes: Consensus documents that can be adopted


by government agencies as legal documents.

3 Model Codes in the U.S.


1. Uniform Building
g Code ((UBC):) published
p byy International
Conference of Building Officials (ICBO).

2. BOCA National Building Code (NBC): published by Building


Officials and Code Administrators International (BOCA).

3. Standard Building Code (SBC): published by Southern Building


Code Congress International (SBCCI).


Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
3 Model
M d l Codes
C d iin th
the U
U.S.
S


Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
I
International
i l Building
B ildi Code (IBC) published by International
C d (IBC):
Code Council (2000 ,1st edition). To replace the 3 model codes for
national and international use.

Building Code: covers all aspects related to structural safety -


loads, structural design using various kinds of materials (e.g., structural
steel, reinforced concrete, timber), architectural details, fire protection,
plumbing,
l bi HVAC.
HVAC Is I a legal
l l document.
d t Purpose
P off bbuilding
ildi codes:
d to t
establish minimum acceptable requirements considered necessary for
preserving public health, safety, and welfare in the built environment.


Introduction:
Methods of analysis

Introduction:
Equivalent lateral force analysis:


PART II
Determination of base
shear

Determination of base shear

Determination of base shear:


Design Base Shear V

V = CS W
The base shear is a percentage, CS of the total dead load W.

Total Dead Load W


All the dead load of the structure including the partitions.
Plus 25% of the floor live load in storage & warehouse occupancies & the
weight of snow when the design snow load is greater than 1.44kN/m2.
Total
T l weight
i h off permanent equipment
i shall
h ll be
b included.
i l d d

Determination of base shear:

Seismic Response
p Coefficient CS
The IBC and UBC provisions are based on consideration of the site
conditions of the structure and application of maximum considered
earthquake ground motion maps for site class B.

Therefore, the design EQ response acceleration for site class B, and


certain structural conditions can be found from the maps of the IBC.
However, they must be corrected for the actual conditions of the site and
designed structure
structure. To make this possible,
possible several factors are obtained
from the code in order to correct the extracted response acceleration. The
result is the seismic response coefficient Cs. Once this is known, the base
shear can be calc
calculated
lated from previous
pre io s slide equation.
eq ation

Determination of base shear:

Seismic Response
p Coefficient CS
To calculate the seismic response coefficient, the following must first be
obtained:

1. Ss and S1: Mapped acceleration


2. Site class category
3. Fa and Fv: Site coefficients
4. SMS and SM1: Maximum spectral response acceleration
5
5. SDS and SD1: Design spectral response acceleration
6. R: Response modification factor
7. Seismic use group
8
8. I: occupancy
occ panc importance factor
9. CT and x: factors for calculating the fundamental period
10. Ta: Approximate the fundamental period
11. Cs: Seismic
i i response coefficient
ffi i

Determination of base shear:

1- Ss and S1: Mapped


pp spectral
p accelerations
Ss: The mapped spectral accelerations for short periods
S1: The mapped spectral accelerations for 1-second periods

These spectral response accelerations are determined from maps prepared


for a particular region. Next slide shows maps of S1 for the US.

Determination of base shear:

Determination of base shear:

2- Site class category


g y

Determination of base shear:

2- Site class category


g y
When the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to
determine the site class, Site Class D shall be used unless the building
official
ffi i l or geotechnical
h i l data
d determines
d i that
h Site
Si Class
Cl E or F soil il is
i
likely to be present at the site.

Determination of base shear:


3- Fa and Fv: Site coefficients
Fa

Fv

Determination of base shear:

4- SMS and SM1: Maximum earthquake spectral response accelerations

Ss & S1, must be modified for the soil conditions at the site. The
maximum considered earthquake spectral response accelerations adjusted
f site
for it class
l effects,
ff t are:

S MS = FaS s
S M 1 = Fv S 1

5- SDS and SD1: Maximum earthquake spectral response accelerations

For 5% damped design,


design the spectral response acceleration becomes:

2
S DS = S MS
3
2
S D1 = S M 1
3
Determination of base shear:

6- R: Response modification factor


The response modification factor, R reduces the design loads to account
for the redundancy and ductility of the structural system.

Determination of base shear:


77- Seismic Use Group:

Determination of base shear:


8- I: occupancy importance factor

Determination of base shear:

99- CT andd x:: factors


c o s for
o calculating
c cu g thee fundamental
u d e period
pe od

Determination of base shear:


10- Ta: Approximate fundamental period:

The building period can be estimated using the empirical formula

T = C t hn x

hn = The height of the building in meter above the base to the highest
level of the structure.

An alternative formula is provided for steel and concrete moment


frame buildings twelve stories or less in height and with story
heights at least 3 m:
Ta =0.1 N
where N is the number of stories.
where, stories

Determination of base shear:

11- Cs: Seismic response


p coefficient
The seismic response coefficient is determined from the
formula:
S DS
CS =
R /I

Determination of base shear:

11- Cs: Seismic response


p coefficient

Determination of base shear:

V: Design Base Shear


V = CS W
The base shear is a percentage, CS of the total dead load W.

PART III
Vertical distribution of
seismic loads

Vertical distribution of seismic loads


The seismic force at any level is a portion of the total base shear:

Fx = C vxV
where
h
w x hx k
C vx = n

i i
w h
i =1
k

wi,w
wx= the portion of the dead load at or assigned to level i or x
hi,hx= height above the base to level i or x
k = an exponent
p related to the buildingg pperiod as follows:
For buildings with T0.5 seconds, k=1.0.
If T2.5 seconds, k=2.0.
For
F bbuildings
ildi with
ith a period
i d between
b t 0 5 andd 2.5
0.5 2 5 seconds,
d it may be
b taken
t k
as 2.0 or determined by linear interpolation between 1.0 and 2.0:

Vertical distribution of seismic loads

Vertical distribution of seismic loads

Overturning moment
n
M x = Fi (hi hx )
i =x

= 1.0 for the top 10 stories


= 0.8
0 8 for the 20th story from the top and below & is
interpolated between 0.8 & 1.0 for stories in between.

Overturning effects on every element shall be carried


down to the foundation.

PART IV
Horizontal distribution of
seismic loads

Horizontal distribution of seismic loads


Torsional eccentricityy
Torsional eccentricity is the distance between y
the center of mass C.M. and center of rigidity
C R Loads act through the C
C.R. C.M.
M , while Lx
lateral resistance is centered at the C.R. The
distance between them, referred to as
eccentricity causes the generation of
eccentricity,
C.R
torsional moments.
Vx

ey

Ly
Center of mass:

L
C.M
xm =
xW ym =
yW ex

W W yr

Center of rigidity:
x
xr =
x x I xi yr =
yII yj xr
I xi I yj Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Torsional eccentricityy
The stiffnesses of structural members may y
change causing a relocation of the CR.
Therefore the IBC imposes an accidental
Therefore, Lx
minimum eccentricity that must be added to
the calculated eccentricity.
C.R
e min,x = 0.05L x
Vx

ey
i y = 0.05L y

Ly
e min,

L
ex C.M
etx = e x e min,x
yr
= x m x r 0.05L x

etyt = e y e min,
i y x
= y m y r 0.05L y xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Torsional moment
M Tx =V x ety y
Lx
M Ty =V y etx

C.R
Torsional stiffness of all walls
Vx

ey
K t = I xii x i + I yjj y j

Ly
2 2

L
i j ex C.M

yr

x
xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

Total shear force in the walls y


Lx
Fxi = Fv 1 FTi
I yi M Tx I yi y i
Fxi = Vx
I yi Kt C.R

Vx

ey

Ly
Fyj = Fvj FTj ex C.M
I xj M Ty I xj x j
Fyj = Vy
I xj Kt yr

x
xr
Vy

Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

Sense of shear forces in the walls


Fv1 FT1
Lx

W3 W1 W3 W1 W3 W1
C.R C.R C.R MTx

ey

ey
ey

Vx
= +
Ly

C.M C.M C.M

W2 W2 W2

Fv2 FT2
Fx 1 = Fv 1 FT 1 Fx 2 = Fv 2 + FT 2
Reduce M Tx by using: etx = e x + e min,x
etx = e x e min,x
PART V
Example

Example
Determine the EQ induced forces in walls W1 and W2 acting in their principal
di ti Th
direction. The walls
ll are partt off a residential
id ti l building
b ildi to
t be
b built
b ilt in
i Gaza
G City.
Cit The
Th
2
floor dead load is 9 kN/m . The thickness of all shear walls = 30 cm.

6 3@18m
6m 3@18

W1
3m6sstory

6m3@118m W2

Elevation

4m
Plan
Example
p
Part I: Base shear calculation
1- Ss and S1: Mapped spectral accelerations
1
Ss = 1.24g
S1 = 0.56g

2- Site class category

Site class D

3- Fa and Fv : Site coefficients

Fa = 1.0
Fv = 1.5

4- SMS and SM1: Maximum earthquake spectral response accelerations


S MS = FaS s = 1.0 1.24 g = 1.24 g
S M 1 = Fv S 1 = 1.5 0.56 g = 0.84 g
Fa and Fv: Site coefficients
Fa

Fv

Example
5- SDS and SD1: Maximum earthquake
q spectral
p response
p accelerations

2 2
S DS = S MS = 1.24 g = 0.83g
3 3
2 2
S D 1 = S M 1 = 0.84 g = 0.56 g
3 3

6- R: Response modification factor

R=6

Example
7- Seismic Use Group:

Residential building Seismic Use Group I

8- I : occupancy importance factor


I = 1.0

Example
9- CT and x : factors for calculating the fundamental period

Ct = 0.055 x = 3/4

Example
10- Ta: Approximate fundamental period:

T = C t hn x = 0.055 183/ 4 = 0.48sec

11- Cs: Seismic response coefficient

S DS 0 83
0.83
CS = = = 0.138 Controls
R / I 6 /1.0

S D1 0.56
C s ,max = = = 0.19
T (R / I ) 0.48(6 /1)

C s ,min = 0.044S DS I = 0.044(0.83)(1) = 0.036

S DS S D1
0.044S DS I = 0.036 C S = = 0.138 = 0.19
R /I T (R / I )
Example
12- V : Design Base Shear

w i = 18 18 9 = 2916kN
W = 6 2916 = 17496kN
V = C sW = 0.138 17496 = 2410kN

Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads


w x hx k
Fx = C vxV = n
V
i i
w h
i =1
k

k = an exponent related to the building period as follows:


For buildings with T0.5 seconds, k=1.0.

T = 0.48 k = 1.0

Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads
Floor wi hi wihik w x hx k Fx Vx Mx
n

w
i =1
h
i i
k

6 2916 18 . . 0 0

5 2916 15 . . . .

4 2916 12 . . . .

3 2916 9 .
.
.

.

2 2916 6 . . . .

1 2916 3 . . . .

0 0 0 0 0 0
. .

17496 183708
Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads

n
M x = Fi (hi hx )
i =x
6
M 6 = 1 Fi ( hi h6 ) = F6 (h6 h6 ) = 0
i =6
6
M 5 = 1 Fi ( hi h5 ) = F5 (h5 h5 ) + F6 (h6 h5 )
i =5

= 0 + 688.73(3) = 2066.2kN .m
6
M 4 = 1 Fi ( hi h4 ) = F4 (h4 h4 ) + F5 (h5 h4 ) + F6 (h6 h4 )
i =4

= 0 + 573.94(3)
573 94(3) + 688.73(6)
688 73(6) = 5854.2
5854 2kN
kN .m
#

Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

W1
Center of mass:

ym =
yW =
18
= 9m
W 2

Center of rigidity:

yr =
yI yj
Ii =
bi l i 3 yr
I yj 12 W2

Wall y b L Iy yIy y2Iy


. . . 97.2
yr = = 13.9
13 9m
. . . 7
SUM . .
Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

e min, y = 0.05L y = 0.05(18) = 0.9m W1


C.R

ety = e y e min, y

ey
= y m y r 0.05L y
= 9 13.9 0.9 = 4m ; 5.8m
W2

K t = I yj y j 2 = 1749.6m 6
j

Fxi = Fv 1 FTi
I yi M Tx I yi y i
Fxi = Vx
I yi Kt

M Tx =V x ety
Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Fv11 FT1
Lx

W1 W1 W1
CR
C.R C.R C.R

Vx

ey

ey
ey

C.M Ly
= + MTx

W2 W2 W2

Fv2 FT2

55.44 (2410 4)97.2


4)97 2
Fx 1 = 2410 = 1326kN Forces are subtracted use e = 4 m
7 1749.6

1.66
1 (2410 5.8)0
5 8)0
Fx 2 = 2410 + = 551kN Forces are added use = 5.8 m
7 1749.6

Reinforced Concrete Design


g III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 4
Calculation of earthquake loads using
IBC 2009
PART I
Introduction

Introduction:

Mechanism of Earthquakes:

Earth's crust is composed of several layers of hard tectonic plates, called


lithospheres, that float on the softer, underpinning, fluid medium called
mantle. These plates or rock masses, when fractured, form fault lines. The
adjoining plates or rock masses are prevented by the interacting frictional
forces from moving past one another most of the time. However, when
this frictional ultimate resistance is reached because of the continuous
motion of the underlying fluid any two plates can impact on one another,
generating seismic waves that can cause large horizontal and vertical
ground motions. These ground motions translate into inertia forces in
structures.

Introduction:
Tectonic Plates

Introduction:

The focus is the point of initial movement on the fault where slip occurs.
occurs
Seismic waves radiate from the focus. The epicenter is the point on the
earths surface directly above the focus.
Introduction:
Strike-slip fault

Introduction:
Normal fault

Introduction:
Thrust fault

Introduction:
Effects of earthquakes on structures

Introduction:

El Centro, California earthquake of May 1940, N-S component


Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics

T: Fundamental period of vibration

Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics

Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics

Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics

Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:

Standards and Specifications: Detailed statement of


procedures for design (i.e., AISC Structural Steel Spec;
ACI 318 Standards, ANSI/ASCE7-05). Not legally
binding. Think of as Recommended Practice.

Code: Systematically arranged and comprehensive


collection of laws and regulations.
regulations


Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:

Model Codes: Consensus documents that can be adopted


by government agencies as legal documents.

3 Model Codes in the U.S.


1. Uniform Building
g Code ((UBC):) published
p byy International
Conference of Building Officials (ICBO).

2. BOCA National Building Code (NBC): published by Building


Officials and Code Administrators International (BOCA).

3. Standard Building Code (SBC): published by Southern Building


Code Congress International (SBCCI).


Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
3 Model
M d l Codes
C d iin th
the U
U.S.
S


Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
I
International
i l Building
B ildi Code (IBC) published by International
C d (IBC):
Code Council (2000 ,1st edition). To replace the 3 model codes for
national and international use.

Building Code: covers all aspects related to structural safety -


loads, structural design using various kinds of materials (e.g., structural
steel, reinforced concrete, timber), architectural details, fire protection,
plumbing,
l bi HVAC.
HVAC Is I a legal
l l document.
d t Purpose
P off bbuilding
ildi codes:
d to t
establish minimum acceptable requirements considered necessary for
preserving public health, safety, and welfare in the built environment.


Introduction:
Methods of analysis

Introduction:
Equivalent lateral force analysis:


PART II
Determination of base
shear

Determination of base shear

Determination of base shear:


Design Base Shear V

V = CS W
The base shear is a percentage, CS of the total dead load W.

Total Dead Load W


All the dead load of the structure including the partitions.
Plus 25% of the floor live load in storage & warehouse occupancies & the
weight of snow when the design snow load is greater than 1.44kN/m2.
Total
T l weight
i h off permanent equipment
i shall
h ll be
b included.
i l d d

Determination of base shear:

Seismic Response
p Coefficient CS
The IBC and UBC provisions are based on consideration of the site
conditions of the structure and application of maximum considered
earthquake ground motion maps for site class B.

Therefore, the design EQ response acceleration for site class B, and


certain structural conditions can be found from the maps of the IBC.
However, they must be corrected for the actual conditions of the site and
designed structure
structure. To make this possible,
possible several factors are obtained
from the code in order to correct the extracted response acceleration. The
result is the seismic response coefficient Cs. Once this is known, the base
shear can be calc
calculated
lated from previous
pre io s slide equation.
eq ation

Determination of base shear:

Seismic Response
p Coefficient CS
To calculate the seismic response coefficient, the following must first be
obtained:

1. Ss and S1: Mapped acceleration


2. Site class category
3. Fa and Fv: Site coefficients
4. SMS and SM1: Maximum spectral response acceleration
5
5. SDS and SD1: Design spectral response acceleration
6. R: Response modification factor
7. Seismic use group
8
8. I: occupancy
occ panc importance factor
9. CT and x: factors for calculating the fundamental period
10. Ta: Approximate the fundamental period
11. Cs: Seismic
i i response coefficient
ffi i

Determination of base shear:

1- Ss and S1: Mapped


pp spectral
p accelerations
Ss: The mapped spectral accelerations for short periods
S1: The mapped spectral accelerations for 1-second periods

These spectral response accelerations are determined from maps prepared


for a particular region. Next slide shows a map of Ss for the US.

Determination of base shear:

Determination of base shear:

2- Site class category


g y

Determination of base shear:

2- Site class category


g y
When the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to
determine the site class, Site Class D shall be used unless the building
official
ffi i l or geotechnical
h i l data
d determines
d i that
h Site
Si Class
Cl E or F soil il is
i
likely to be present at the site.

Determination of base shear:


3- Fa and Fv: Site coefficients
Fa

Fv

Determination of base shear:

4- SMS and SM1: Maximum earthquake spectral response accelerations

Ss & S1, must be modified for the soil conditions at the site. The
maximum considered earthquake spectral response accelerations adjusted
f site
for it class
l effects,
ff t are:

S MS = FaS s
S M 1 = Fv S 1

5- SDS and SD1: Maximum earthquake spectral response accelerations

For 5% damped design,


design the spectral response acceleration becomes:

2
S DS = S MS
3
2
S D1 = S M 1
3
Determination of base shear:

6- R: Response modification factor


The response modification factor, R reduces the design loads to account
for the redundancy and ductility of the structural system.

Determination of base shear:


77- Seismic Use Group:

Determination of base shear:


8- I: occupancy importance factor

Determination of base shear:

99- CT andd x:: factors


c o s for
o calculating
c cu g thee fundamental
u d e period
pe od

Determination of base shear:


10- Ta: Approximate fundamental period:

The building period can be estimated using the empirical formula

T = C t hn x

hn = The height of the building in meter above the base to the highest
level of the structure.

An alternative formula is provided for steel and concrete moment


frame buildings twelve stories or less in height and with story
heights at least 3 m:
Ta =0.1 N
where N is the number of stories.
where, stories

Determination of base shear:

11- Cs: Seismic response


p coefficient
The seismic response coefficient is determined from the
formula:
S DS
CS =
R /I

Determination of base shear:

11- Cs: Seismic response


p coefficient

Determination of base shear:

V: Design Base Shear


V = CS W
The base shear is a percentage, CS of the total dead load W.

PART III
Vertical distribution of
seismic loads

Vertical distribution of seismic loads


The seismic force at any level is a portion of the total base shear:

Fx = C vxV
where
h
w x hx k
C vx = n

i i
w h
i =1
k

wi,w
wx= the portion of the dead load at or assigned to level i or x
hi,hx= height above the base to level i or x
k = an exponent
p related to the buildingg pperiod as follows:
For buildings with T0.5 seconds, k=1.0.
If T2.5 seconds, k=2.0.
For
F bbuildings
ildi with
ith a period
i d between
b t 0 5 andd 2.5
0.5 2 5 seconds,
d it may be
b taken
t k
as 2.0 or determined by linear interpolation between 1.0 and 2.0:

Vertical distribution of seismic loads

Vertical distribution of seismic loads

Overturning moment
n
M x = Fi (hi hx )
i =x

= 1.0 for the top 10 stories


= 0.8
0 8 for the 20th story from the top and below & is
interpolated between 0.8 & 1.0 for stories in between.

Overturning effects on every element shall be carried


down to the foundation.

may taken as 1.0 for all stories.

PART IV
Horizontal distribution of
seismic loads

Horizontal distribution of seismic loads


Torsional eccentricityy
Torsional eccentricity is the distance between y
the center of mass C.M. and center of rigidity
C R Loads act through the C
C.R. C.M.
M , while Lx
lateral resistance is centered at the C.R. The
distance between them, referred to as
eccentricity causes the generation of
eccentricity,
C.R
torsional moments.
Vx

ey

Ly
Center of mass:

L
C.M
xm =
xW ym =
yW ex

W W yr

Center of rigidity:

x I yI x
xr = x xi
yr = yj

I xi I yj
xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Torsional eccentricityy
The stiffnesses of structural members may y
change causing a relocation of the C.R.
Therefore the IBC imposes an accidental
Therefore, Lx
minimum eccentricity that must be added to
the calculated eccentricity.
C.R
e min,x = 0.05L x
Vx

ey
i y = 0.05L y

Ly
e min,

L
ex C.M
etx = e x e min,x
yr
= x m x r 0.05L x

etyt = e y e min,
i y x
= y m y r 0.05L y xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

y
Torsional moment Lx

M Tx =V x ety
C.R
M Ty =V y etx Vx

ey

Ly
L
ex C.M

yr

x
xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

Torsional stiffness of all walls y


x3
W2 Iy2
W2,
K t = I xi x i + I yj y j
2 2

i j
W3, Ix3
y2
C.R

Vx
C.M
For the example of walls shown in the plan:
K t = I x 3 x 3 2 + I y 1 y 12 + I y 2 y 2 2 y1

W1 Iy1
W1, x
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

Total shear force in the walls y


Lx
Fxi = Fv 1 FTi
I yi M Tx I yi y i
Fxi = Vx
I yi Kt C.R

Vx

ey

Ly
Fyj = Fvj FTj ex C.M
I xj M Ty I xj x j
Fyj = Vy
I xj Kt yr

x
K t = I xi x i 2 + I yj y j 2 xr
i j Vy

Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

Sense of shear forces in the walls


Fv1 FT1
Lx

W3 W1 W3 W1 W3 W1
C.R C.R C.R
MTx

ey

ey
ey

Vx
= +
Ly

C.M ex C.M ex C.M


ex

W2 W2 W2

Fv2 FT2
Fx 1 = Fv 1 FT 1 Fx 2 = Fv 2 + FT 2
Reduce M Tx by using: etx = e x + e min,x
etx = e x e min,x
PART V
Example

Example
Determine the EQ induced forces in walls W1 and W2 acting in their strong principal
di ti Th
direction. The walls
ll are partt off a residential
id ti l building
b ildi to
t be
b built
b ilt in
i Gaza
G City.
Cit The
Th
2
floor dead load is 9 kN/m . The thickness of all shear walls = 30 cm.

6 3@18m
6m 3@18

W1
3m6sstory

6m3@118m
W4 W3

W2

Elevation

4m
Plan
Example
p
Part I: Base shear calculation
1- Ss and S1: Mapped spectral accelerations
1
Ss = 1.24g
S1 = 0.56g

2- Site class category

Site class D

3- Fa and Fv : Site coefficients

Fa = 1.0
Fv = 1.5

4- SMS and SM1: Maximum earthquake spectral response accelerations


S MS = FaS s = 1.0 1.24 g = 1.24 g
S M 1 = Fv S 1 = 1.5 0.56 g = 0.84 g
Fa and Fv: Site coefficients
Fa

Fv

Example
5- SDS and SD1: Maximum earthquake
q spectral
p response
p accelerations

2 2
S DS = S MS = 1.24 g = 0.83g
3 3
2 2
S D 1 = S M 1 = 0.84 g = 0.56 g
3 3

6- R: Response modification factor

R=6

Example
7- Seismic Use Group:

Residential building Seismic Use Group I

8- I : occupancy importance factor


I = 1.0

Example
9- CT and x : factors for calculating the fundamental period

Ct = 0.055 x = 3/4

Example
10- Ta: Approximate fundamental period:

T = C t hn x = 0.055 183/ 4 = 0.48sec

11- Cs: Seismic response coefficient

S DS 0 83
0.83
CS = = = 0.138 Controls
R / I 6 /1.0

S D1 0.56
C s ,max = = = 0.19
T (R / I ) 0.48(6 /1)

C s ,min = 0.044S DS I = 0.044(0.83)(1) = 0.036

S DS S D1
0.044S DS I = 0.036 C S = = 0.138 = 0.19
R /I T (R / I )
Example
12- V : Design Base Shear

w i = 18 18 9 = 2916kN
W = 6 2916 = 17496kN
V = C sW = 0.138 17496 = 2410kN

Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads


w x hx k
Fx = C vxV = n
V
i i
w h
i =1
k

k = an exponent related to the building period as follows:


For buildings with T0.5 seconds, k=1.0.

T = 0.48 k = 1.0

Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads
Floor wi hi wihik w x hx k Fx Vx Mx
n

w
i =1
h
i i
k

6 2916 18 . . 0 0

5 2916 15 . . . .

4 2916 12 . . . .

3 2916 9 .
.
.

.

2 2916 6 . . . .

1 2916 3 . . . .

0 0 0 0 0 0
. .

17496 183708
Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads

n
M x = Fi (hi hx )
i =x
6
M 6 = 1 Fi ( hi h6 ) = F6 (h6 h6 ) = 0
i =6
6
M 5 = 1 Fi ( hi h5 ) = F5 (h5 h5 ) + F6 (h6 h5 )
i =5

= 0 + 688.73(3) = 2066.2kN .m
6
M 4 = 1 Fi ( hi h4 ) = F4 (h4 h4 ) + F5 (h5 h4 ) + F6 (h6 h4 )
i =4

= 0 + 573.94(3)
573 94(3) + 688.73(6)
688 73(6) = 5854.2
5854 2kN
kN .m
#

Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

W1
Center of mass:

ym =
yW =
18
= 9m
W 2 W4 W3
Center of rigidity:

yr =
yI yj
Ii =
bi l i 3 yr
I yj 12 W2

Wall y b L Iy yIy
. . . 97.2
. . yr = = 13.9
13 9m
7
SUM .
Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

e min, y = 0.05L y = 0.05(18) = 0.9m W1


C.R

ety = e y e min, y

ey
W4 W3
= y m y r 0.05L y
= 9 13.9 0.9 = 4m ; 5.8m
W2
K t = I xi x i 2 + I yj y j 2
i j
0.3 63 0.3 43
I y1 = Ix 3 = Ix 4 = = 5.4m 4 Iy2 = = 1.6m 4
12 12
y 2 = y r = 13.9m
y 1 = 18 y r = 4.1m
x 3 = x 4 = 18 / 2 = 9m (due
(d tot symmetry)
t )

K t = I y 1 y 12 + I y 2 y 2 2 + I x 3x 32 + I x 4 x 4 2 = 5.4(4.1) 2 + 1.6(13.9) 2 + 5.4(9) 2 + 5.4(9)2 = 1275m 6


Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Fv11 FT1
Lx

W1 W1 W1
CR
C.R C.R C.R

Vx W4 W3

ey

ey
W3
ey

W3 W4
C.M Ly
= W4
+ MTx

W2 W2 W2

I yi M Tx I yi y i Fv2 FT2
Fxi = Vx
I yi Kt M Tx =V x ety
5.4 (2410 4)5.4 4.1 Forces are subtracted use e = 4 m
Fx 1 = 2410 = 1692kN
7 1275
1.6 (2410 5.8)1.6 13.9
Fx 2 = 2410 + = 794kN Forces are added use e = 5.8 m
7 1275
Reinforced Concrete Design
g III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 5
Calculation of wind loads using IBC 2009
PART I
Introduction

Introduction:

Mechanism of Wind Loads:

Wind loads come from the kinetic energy in the airflow converted to
pressure on the structure.

Wind loads change rapidly and even abruptly. Motion of wind is


turbulent.

Introduction:

Mechanism of Wind Loads:

Superimposed on the mean speed is the turbulence of the wind. It causes


deviations in the wind speed above and below the mean value.

Turbulence results in gust pressures developing over the height of a


structure.

This is accounted for by the gust factor G.

Introduction:

Distribution of Pressures and Suctions:

Introduction:

Distribution of Pressures and Suctions:

Wind speed and pressure change with height and terrain, and this is accounted
for by the factor Kz.

Introduction:

Distribution of Pressures and Suctions:


Three distinct pressure areas develop around a building.
1. Positive-pressure
p zone on the upstream
p face ((Region
g 1).
)
2. Negative pressure zones at the upstream corners (Regions 2).
3. Negative pressure zone on the downstream face (Region 3).

windward face leeward face

Introduction:

Distribution of Pressures and Suctions:

Assumed stepwise wind distribution on

Actual wind distribution the windward side


Introduction:

Distribution of Pressures and Suctions:

Introduction:

Methods of analysis:
Method 1: Simplified procedure
Method 2: Analytical procedure
M h d 3:
Method 3 Wind
Wi d tunnell procedure
d

Introduction:

Methods of analysis:
Method 1: Simplified procedure

In general, it is limited to buildings of five stories or fewer.

Introduction:

Methods of analysis:
Method 2: Analytical procedure

We will consider this method.

Introduction:

Methods of analysis:
Method 3: Wind tunnel procedure

PART II
Determination of wind
pressure

Determination of wind p
pressure:

Design
g pprocedure

Determination of wind p
pressure:

Design
g pprocedure

Determination of wind pressure:


p

1- Basic wind speed V:

Determination of wind p
pressure:

22- Exposure terrain

Exposure A terrain Exposure B terrain


Large city center with at least 50% Suburban residential area with
of the buildings having heights in mostly single family buildings. The
access of 21 m.
m The subject structure subject structure must have this
must have this terrain for at least 0.5 terrain for at least 1.5 mile in any
mile in any direction.
direction.
Determination of wind pressure:
p

22- Exposure terrain

Exposure C terrain Exposure D terrain


O
Open tterrain
i with
ith scattered
tt d Buildings on shorelines.
obstructions having heights less than
10 m. The subject structure must
have this terrain for at least 1.5 mile

in any direction.
Determination of wind p
pressure:

33- Occupancy category:

Determination of wind p
pressure:

44- Importance factor, I:

Determination of wind p
pressure:

55- Gust effect factor, G:


The gust factor relates the dynamic properties of the wind and the
structure. For flexible buildings it is calculated. For most buildings
that tend to be stiff, it is taken to be equal to 0.85.

Determination of wind pressure:


p

66- Internal pressure coefficient, GCpi:

Determination of wind p
pressure:
7- The wind directionality factor, Kd :

Determination of wind p
pressure:

88- The topographic factor, Kzt :

For no topographic features, Kzt = 1.0

Determination of wind p
pressure:

9- The velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kz:

Determination of wind p
pressure:
9- The velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kz:

Determination of wind pressure:


p
10- External pressure coefficient, Cp:

Determination of wind pressure:


p
10- External pressure coefficient, Cp:
Therefore, only the windward side is considered with qz . Accordingly,
wind pressure changes on the windward side as q changes with height, and
qq=qqz changes
g according g of Kz along
g to the change g the height
g of the
building.

On the other sides,


sides the pressure is constant along the height of the building.
building

Determination of wind p
pressure:

11- Wind velocityy ppressure

Velocity pressure, qz, evaluated at height z shall be calculated by


the following equation:

q z = 0.613K z K zt K dV 2 I

where Kd is the wind directionality factor, Kz is the velocity


pressure exposure coefficient , Kztt is the topographic factor
factor, I
is the importance factor, and V is the basic 3 second gust wind
speed.

Determination of wind p
pressure:

12- Design
g wind ppressure

Design wind pressures for the main wind force-resisting system of


buildings of all heights shall be determined by the following equation:

p = qqGC p q i (GC pi )

where
q = qz is the velocity pressure evaluated at height z above the ground
on the windward wall, or q = qh the pressure (suction) on the roof,
leeward walls, and sidewalls, evaluate at the mean roof height, h,
qi is the internal pressure or suction on the interior of the walls and
roof of the building evaluate at the mean roof height,
G = gust effect factor,
Cp = external
t l pressure coefficient,
ffi i t andd
(GCpi ) = internal pressure coefficient.

Determination of wind p
pressure:

12- Design
g wind ppressure

Design wind pressures for the main wind force-resisting system of


buildings of all heights shall be determined by the following equation:

p = qqGC p q i (GC pi )

Therefore
q
Windward:
q = qz
Leeward:
q = qh

qi = qh

Determination of wind p
pressure:

12- Design
g wind ppressure

Design wind pressures for the main wind force-resisting system of


buildings of all heights shall be determined by the following equation:

p = qqGC p q i (GC pi )

Therefore

Windward:
p = q z GC p q h (GC pi )
Leeward:
p = q hGC p q h (GC ppi )

Determination of wind p
pressure:

Load combinations

PART V
Example

Example
Determine the wind forces in walls W1 and W2 acting in their principal
strong direction. The walls are part of a residential building to be built in
Gaza City. The thickness of all shear walls = 30 cm.

6 3@18
6m3@18m

W1
3m6sstory

6m3@118m W2

Elevation

4m
Plan
Example
p
1- Basic wind speed V:

V = 40 m/s

2- Exposure terrain
Terrain B (may also conservatively consider terrain D)

3- Occupancy category:
C t
Category II

4 Importance
4- I factor,
f I:

I = 1.00

Example
p

5- Gust effect factor,, G:

G = 0.85

6- Internal pressure coefficient, GCpi:

GCpi = + 0.18; - 0.18

7- The wind directionality factor, Kd :

Kd = 0.85

Example
p

88- The topographic factor, Kzt :


No topographic features Kzt = 1.0

9- The velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kz:

Example
p
10- External pressure coefficient, Cp:
L/B = 18/18 = 1

11- Wind velocity pressure

q z = 0.613
0 613K z K zt K dV 2 I

12- Design
g wind ppressure

p = qGC p q h (GC pi )
Example
p
Leeward Side:

q z = 0.613K z K zt K dV 2 I
q18 = 0.613(0.85)(1.0)(0.85)(40)
( )( )( )( ) 2 ((1.0)) = 709N / m 2

p = q hGC p q h (GC pi )
p = 709(0.85)( 0.5) 709(0.18) = 429; 174N / m 2

USE :
p = 0.429 kN / m 2
Force in each wall = pressure x height of building x tributary width
F = 0.429 18 18 / 2 = 69.45kN

Example

Leeward Side:
Tributary area

6 3@18
6m3@18m

W1
Tributary hheight

6m3@118m
Tributaryy width
T

W2

Elevation

4m
Plan
q z = 0.613K z K zt K dV 2 I
Example
p p = q z GC p q h (GC pi )
Windward Side: GCpi = + 0.18; - 0.18
Height
H i ht Height
H i ht F
Force F
Force
qz p+ p- max p
Level of top of level Kz in wall 1 in wall 2
(N/m2) (N/m2) (N/m2) (kN/m2)
(m) (m) (kN) (kN)
. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .


.
. .
.
. .
.

.
.

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .


.
.
. .
. .

.
.
.

Sum . .
Example
p
Pressure distribution:

0.61 kN/m2

0.59 kN/m2

/ 2
0.56 kN/m
0.53 kN/m2
0.429 kN/m2
0.50 kN/m2

0.48 kN/m2

0.45 kN/m2

Force in each level = max pressure at the level x height of the level x tributary width

EXAMPLE: Force in level 1 = 0.45 x 4.6 x 18/2 = 18.72 kN


Example
p
Force distribution in wall 1:

15.40 kN

15.88 kN
15.62 kN
7.10 kN 69.45 kN
6.79 kN

6.49 kN

18.72 kN

BASE SHEAR = 86+69.45 = 155.21 kN


Example
p

Base shear in the walls:

DESGIN BASE SHEAR IN WALL 1 = 0.9D+1.6W+1.6H


0 9D+1 6W+1 6H
=0.9(0) + 1.6(155.21) +1.6(0)= 228.34 kN

DESGIN BASE SHEAR IN WALL 2 = 0.9D+1.6W+1.6H


=0 9(0) + 1.6(155.21)
=0.9(0) 1 6(155 21) +1.6(0)=
+1 6(0)= 228.34
228 34 kN

Reinforced Concrete Design


g III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 6
Calculation of earthquake loads using
UBC 97
PART I
Introduction

Determination of base shear

M th d off analysis:
Methods l i
The following are methods provided by the UBC-97:

Simplified Static
The simplified static lateral-force procedure may be used for the following
structures off Occupancy Category 4 or 5:
Buildings of any occupancy (including single-family dwellings) not more than
three stories in height excluding basements that use light-frame construction.
Other buildings not more than two stories in height excluding basements.

Static
The static lateral force procedure may be used for the following structures:
All structures, regular or irregular, in Seismic Zone 1 and in Occupancy
Categories 4 and 5 in Seismic Zone 2.2
Regular structures under 73.152 m in height.
Irregular structures not more than five stories or 19.812 m in height (Section
4 3 1 4)
4.3.1.4)

Methods of analysis:
Dynamic
The dynamic lateral-force procedure shall be used for all other structures,
including the following:
Structures 73.152 m or more in height.
Structures having a stiffness, weight or geometric vertical irregularity of Type 1, 2
or 3, or structures having irregular features.
Structures over five stories 19.812 m in height
g in Seismic Zones 3 and 4 not
having the same structural system throughout their .
Structures, regular or irregular, located on Soil Profile Type S that has a period
F

greater than 0.7


0 7 second.
second The analysis shall include the effects of the soils at the
site.

The static procedure will be explained.


explained

Regular vs
vs. irregular structures
Regular structures
R l structures have
Regular h no significant
i ifi physical
h i l discontinuities
di i i i ini plan
l or vertical
i l
configuration or in their lateral-force-resisting systems such as the irregular
features described in the following slides.

Irregular structures
Structures having
g anyy of the features listed in Table 16-L or 16-M.

Regular vs
vs. irregular structures
Irregular structures

Regular vs. irregular structures


Irregular structures

Stiffness Irregularities

Regular vs. irregular structures


Irregular structures

In-Plane Discontinuity in Vertical Lateral


Weight (Mass) Irregularity g Elements
Force Resisting

Regular vs
vs. irregular structures
Irregular structures

Vertical Geometry Irregularity Discontinuity


sco u y in
Capacity - Soft
Story
Regular vs
vs. irregular structures
Irregular structures

Regular vs
vs. irregular structures
Irregular structures

Re-entrant Corners


Regular vs
vs. irregular structures
Irregular structures

Nonparallel Systems

Out of Plane Offsets


Out-of-Plane

Diaphragm discontinuity
Regular vs
vs. irregular structures
Irregular structures

Torsional Irregularities

PART II
Determination of base
shear

Determination of base shear:

Base shear V
To calculate the seismic base shear, the following must be obtained:

1. Z: Seismic zone factor


2. Soil profile type
3. Ca and Cv: Seismic coefficients
4. R: Structural system coefficient
5. I: occupancy importance factor
6. Ta: Approximate fundamental period
7. W: Totall Deadd Loadd
8. V: Base shear

Determination of base shear:

1- Z: Seismic zone factor

Determination of base shear:

2- Soil profile type:

When the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the site
class, Soil profile SD shall be used unless the building official or geotechnical data
determines that Site Class E or F soil is likely to be present at the site.

Determination of base shear:


3- Ca and Cv: Seismic coefficients
Ca

Cv

Determination of base shear:


4- Structural system coefficient, R

Determination of base shear:


4- R: Structurall system coefficient
ffi i

Determination of base shear:


5- I: occupancy importance factor

Determination of base shear:


5- I: occupancy importance factor

Determination of base shear:


6- Ta: Approximate fundamental period:

The building period can be estimated using the empirical formula

T = C t hn 3 / 4

hn = The height of the building in meter above the base to the highest
level of the structure.

Ct = 0.0853
0 0853 for steel moment
moment-resisting
resisting frames.
frames
0.0731 for reinforced concrete moment-resisting frames.
0.0731 for eccentric braced frames.
0.0488 for all other buildings.

Determination of base shear:

7- W: Total Dead Load

W : The total seismic dead load and applicable portions of other loads listed
below.
1 In storage and warehouse occupancies,
1. occupancies a minimum of 25 percent of the floor
live load shall be applicable.
2. Where a partition load is used in the floor design, a load of not less than 0.50
kN/ 2 shall
kN/m h ll be
b included.
i l d d
3. Total weight of permanent equipment shall be included.

Determination of base shear:

8- V: Base shear
The seismic response coefficient is determined from the
formula:

Cv I
V = W
RT

The total design base shear need not exceed the following

2.5C a I
V max = W
R

The total design base shear shall not be less than the following:

Vmin = 0.11 Ca IW

PART III
Vertical distribution of
seismic loads

Vertical distribution of seismic loads


The base shear V is distributed over the height of the structure as a
force at each level Fi, plus an extra force Ft at the top:

n
V = Ft + Fi
i =1

The extra force at the top is


Ft = 0.07TV 0.25V if T > 0.7 sec
Ft = 0.0
00 if T 0.7
0 7 sec

The remaining portion of the total base shear (V-Ft) is distributed over
the height including the top by the formula

(w x hx )
Fx = (V Ft ). n

w
i =1
i hi

Vertical distribution of seismic loads


W6

i=6 F6 + Ft

i=5
hi Wx
i=4
i=3 Fx
W1
h4 i=2
hx
i=1
h1

i=1 Wi hi= W1 h1+ W2 h2+ W3 h3+ W4 h4+ W5 h5+ W6 h6

Overturning moment
The overturning moment M at storey x (Mx) is given by the
following equation:

n
M x = Ft (hn hx ) + Fi (hi hx )
i =x

Overturning effects on every element shall be carried


down to the foundation.

PART IV
Horizontal distribution of
seismic loads

Horizontal distribution of seismic loads


Torsional eccentricityy
Torsional eccentricity is the distance between y
the center of mass C.M. and center of rigidity
C R Loads act through the C
C.R. C.M.
M , while Lx
lateral resistance is centered at the C.R. The
distance between them, referred to as
eccentricity causes the generation of
eccentricity,
C.R
torsional moments.
Vx

ey

Ly
Center of mass:

L
C.M
xm =
xW ym =
yW ex

W W yr

Center of rigidity:

x I yI x
xr = x xi
yr = yj

I xi I yj
xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Torsional eccentricityy
The stiffnesses of structural members may y
change causing a relocation of the C.R.
Therefore the IBC imposes an accidental
Therefore, Lx
minimum eccentricity that must be added to
the calculated eccentricity.
C.R
e min,x = 0.05L x
Vx

ey
i y = 0.05L y

Ly
e min,

L
ex C.M
etx = e x e min,x
yr
= x m x r 0.05L x

etyt = e y e min,
i y x
= y m y r 0.05L y xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

y
Torsional moment Lx

M Tx =V x ety
C.R
M Ty =V y etx Vx

ey

Ly
L
ex C.M

yr

x
xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

Torsional stiffness of all walls y


x3
W2 Iy2
W2,
K t = I xi x i + I yj y j
2 2

i j
W3, Ix3
y2
C.R

Vx
C.M
For the example of walls shown in the plan:
K t = I x 3 x 3 2 + I y 1 y 12 + I y 2 y 2 2 y1

W1 Iy1
W1, x
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

Total shear force in the walls y


Lx
Fxi = Fv 1 FTi
I yi M Tx I yi y i
Fxi = Vx
I yi Kt C.R

Vx

ey

Ly
Fyj = Fvj FTj ex C.M
I xj M Ty I xj x j
Fyj = Vy
I xj Kt yr

x
K t = I xi x i 2 + I yj y j 2 xr
i j Vy

Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

Sense of shear forces in the walls


Fv1 FT1
Lx

W3 W1 W3 W1 W3 W1
C.R C.R C.R
MTx

ey

ey
ey

Vx
= +
Ly

C.M ex C.M ex C.M


ex

W2 W2 W2

Fv2 FT2
Fx 1 = Fv 1 FT 1 Fx 2 = Fv 2 + FT 2
Reduce M Tx by using: etx = e x + e min,x
etx = e x e min,x
PART V
Example

Example
Determine the EQ induced forces in walls W1 and W2 acting in their strong principal
di ti Th
direction. The walls
ll are partt off a residential
id ti l building
b ildi to
t be
b built
b ilt in
i Gaza
G City.
Cit The
Th
2
floor dead load is 9 kN/m . The thickness of all shear walls = 30 cm.

6 3@18m
6m 3@18

W1
3m6sstory

6m3@118m
W4 W3

W2

Elevation

4m
Plan
Example
p
Part I: Base shear calculation

1- Z: Seismic zone factor


Zone 2A
Z = 0.15g

2- Soil profile type:

SD

Example
p
3- Ca and Cv: Seismic coefficients
Ca= 0.22
Cv= 0.32
Ca

Cv

Example
p
4- Structural system coefficient, R
R = 5.5
55

Example
p
5- I: occupancy importance factor
I = 1.0
10

Example
p
6- Ta: Approximate fundamental period:

T = C t hn 3 / 4 = 0.0488(18)3 / 4 = 0.43sec

7 W:
7- W Total
T t l Dead
D d Load
L d

w i = 18 18 9 = 2916kN
W = 6 2916 = 17496kN

8- V: Base shear
Cv I 0 .3 2 1 .0
V = W = 17496 = 2387k N
RT 5 .5 0 .4 3
2 .5C a I 2 .5 0 .2 2 1 .0
V m ax = W = 17496 = 1750k N
R 5 .5
V m in = 0 .1 1C a IW = 0 .1 1 0 .2 2 1 .0 1 7 4 9 6 = 4 2 3 k N

V = 1 7 5 0 k N
Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads

T = 0.43sec < 0.7sec

The extra force


Th f at the
h top is
i
Ft = 0.0

(w x hx ) (w x hx )
Fx = (V Ft ). n
=V . n

w
i =1
i hi w
i =1
i hi

Note:
If Ft was not 0.0, the extra force at the top would be
calculated and added to F6

Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads
Floor wi hi wihi w x hx Fx Vx Mx
n

w
i =1
i hi

6 2916 18 . . 0 0

5 2916 15 . . . .

4 2916 12 . . . .

3 2916 9 .
.
. .

2 2916 6 . . . .

1 2916 3 . . .

0 0 0 0 0 .
.

7496 183708
Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads

n n
M x = Ft ( hn hx ) + Fi ( hi hx ) = Fi ( hi hx )
i =x i =x
6
M 6 = Fi ( hi h6 ) = F6 (h6 h6 ) = 0
i =6
6
M 5 = Fi ( hi h5 ) = F5 (h5 h5 ) + F6 ( h6 h5 )
i =5

= 0 + 499.89(3) = 1499.7 kN .m
6
M 4 = Fi ( hi h4 ) = F4 (h4 h4 ) + F5 (h5 h4 ) + F6 ( h6 h4 )
i =4

= 0 + 416.57(3) + 499.89(6) = 4249.03kN .m


#

Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

W1
Center of mass:

ym =
yW =
18
= 9m
W 2 W4 W3
Center of rigidity:

yr =
yI yj
Ii =
bi l i 3 yr
I yj 12 W2

Wall y b L Iy yIy
. . . 97.2
. . yr = = 13.9
13 9m
7
SUM .
Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads

e min, y = 0.05L y = 0.05(18) = 0.9m W1


C.R

ety = e y e min, y

ey
W4 W3
= y m y r 0.05L y
= 9 13.9 0.9 = 4m ; 5.8m
W2
K t = I xi x i 2 + I yj y j 2
i j
0.3 63 0.3 43
I y1 = Ix 3 = Ix 4 = = 5.4m 4 Iy2 = = 1.6m 4
12 12
y 2 = y r = 13.9m
y 1 = 18 y r = 4.1m
x 3 = x 4 = 18 / 2 = 9m (due
(d tot symmetry)
t )

K t = I y 1 y 12 + I y 2 y 2 2 + I x 3x 32 + I x 4 x 4 2 = 5.4(4.1) 2 + 1.6(13.9) 2 + 5.4(9) 2 + 5.4(9)2 = 1275m 6


Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Fv11 FT1
Lx

W1 W1 W1
CR
C.R C.R C.R

Vx W4 W3

ey

ey
W3
ey

W3 W4
C.M Ly
= W4
+ MTx

W2 W2 W2

I yi M Tx I yi y i Fv2 FT2
Fxi = Vx
I yi Kt M Tx =V x ety
5.4 (1750 4)5.4 4.1 Forces are subtracted use e = 4 m
Fx 1 = 1750 = 1229kN
7 1275
1.6 (1750 5.8)1.6 13.9
Fx 2 = 1750 + = 577 kN Forces are added use e = 5.8 m
7 1275
Reinforced Concrete Design
g III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 7
Calculation of wind loads using UBC 97
PART I
Introduction

Introduction:
UBC procedures for wind load calculations:

The design wind speed in the UBC 97 is based on the fastest-mile


wind speed, whereas the design wind speed in the IBC 2009 is
based on the 3-second gust wind speed.

Introduction:

Wind speed conversion:


The 3-second gust basic wind speed,V3S can be converted to
fastest-mile wind speed,Vfm, using:

In mph:

Introduction:
UBC procedures for wind load calculations:

Method 1 (normal force method): Its provisions are not applicable to


buildings taller than 122 m. The normal force method is applicable to all
structures, and must be applied to all gabled frames. It assumes that
wind pressures act perpendicular to the surface of roof, windward and
leeward walls simultaneously. For pressures on roofs and leeward walls,
Ce shall be evaluated at the mean roof height.
g

Method 2 (projected area method): Its provisions are not applicable to


buildings taller than 61 m. The projected area method is easier to use
than method 1 in that it assumes that wind pressures act on the projected
horizontal and vertical areas of the structure instead of on individual
surfaces of roof and walls.

Any building, including those not covered by the UBC, may be designed
using wind-tunnel test results.
Introduction:

Distribution of Pressures and Suctions:

Assumed stepwise wind distribution on

Actual wind distribution the windward side


PART II
Determination of wind
pressure

Determination of wind p
pressure:

Design
g pprocedure

1- Basic wind speed V


2- Exposure category
3- Importance factor, Iw
4- Combined height, exposure and gust factor coefficient, Ce
5- The pressure coefficient, Cq
6- Wind stagnation pressure, qs
7- Design wind pressure, p

Determination of wind pressure:


p

1- Basic wind speed V:

Determination of wind p
pressure:

22- Exposure category:


The UBC distinguishes between three exposure categories; B,
C, and D:
Exposure B: has terrain with buildings, forest, or surface
irregularities, covering at least 20% of the ground level area
extending 1 mile (1.61
(1 61 km) or more from the site.
site
Exposure C: has terrain that is flat and generally open,
extending one-half mile (0.81 km) or more from the site in
any full quadrant.
Exposure D: represents the most severe exposure in areas of
basic wind speeds of 80 mph (129 km/h) or greater
greater, and has
terrain that is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies of
water over one mile (1.61 km) or more in width relative to
any quadrant of the building site.
site Exposure D extends inland
from shoreline one-fourth mile (0.4 km) or 10 times the
building height, whichever is greater.
Determination of wind p
pressure:

33- Importance factor, Iw:

Determination of wind p
pressure:

33- Importance factor, Iw:

Determination of wind pressure:


p

44- Combined height, exposure and gust factor coefficient, Ce:

(m)
- .
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.


.
.

Determination of wind p
pressure:

5- The pressure coefficient, Cq:

Determination of wind p
pressure:

6- Wind stagnation
g ppressure, qs:

q s = 0.613V 2

pressure, p:
7 Design wind pressure
7-
P = C eC q q s I w

Determination of wind p
pressure:

Load combinations

PART III
Example

Example
Determine the wind forces in walls W1 and W2 acting in their principal strong
di ti The
direction. Th wallsll are partt off a residential
id ti l building
b ildi to
t be
b built
b ilt in
i Gaza
G City.
Cit The
Th
thickness of all shear walls = 30 cm.

6 3@18
6m3@18m

W1
3m6sstory

6m3@118m
W2

Elevation

4m
Plan
Example
p
1- Basic wind speed V:

V = 35 m/s

2- Exposure category:

Exposure category B (may also conservatively consider category D)

3- Importance factor, Iw:


Category 4
I w= 1.00

Example
p

4- Combined height,
g , exposure
p and ggust factor coefficient,, Ce:

(m)
- .
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.


.
.

Example
p
5- The pressure coefficient, Cq:

Example
p
6- Wind stagnation pressure, qs:

q s = 0.613V 2 = 0.613 352 = 751 N / m 2

7 Design
7- i d pressure, p:
D i wind

P = C eC q q s I w

Leeward Side:
P = 0.95
0 95 00.5
5 751 11.0
0 = 357 N / m 2
Force in each wall= pressure x height of building x tributary width
F = 0.357 18 18 / 2 = 58kN

Windward Side:
P = C e 0.8
0 8 751 1.0
1 0 = 601C e N / m 2
Force in each wall = pressure x height of building x tributary width

F = 0.601C e 18 18 / 2 = 97.32C e kN
Example

Tributary area

6 3@18
6m3@18m

W1
Tributary hheight

6m3@118m
Tributaryy width
T

W2

Elevation

4m
Plan
Example
p
Windward Side:
Height Height Force Force
P
Level of top of level Ce in wall 1 in wall 2
(N/m2)
(m) (m) (kN) (kN)
. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .


.
.
.
.
.

. . . . .

. . . . .

Sum
.
.

Example
p
Pressure distribution:

0 571 kN/m2
0.571

0 508 kN/m2
0.508
0.457 kN/m2
0.357 kN/m2
0.433 kN/m2

0.403 kN/m2

0.373 kN/m2

Force in each level = max pressure at the level x height of the level x tributary width

EXAMPLE: Force in level 1 = 0.373 x 4.6 x 18/2 = 15.42 kN


Example
p
Force distribution in wall 1:

15 40 kN
15.40

14.08
14 08 kN
6.16 kN 58 kN
5.84 kN

5.43 kN

15.42 kN

BASE SHEAR = 76.73+58 = 134.73 kN


Example
p

Base shear in the walls:

DESGIN BASE SHEAR IN WALL 1 = 0.9D+1.6W+1.6H


0 9D+1 6W+1 6H
=0.9(0) + 1.6(134.73) +1.6(0)= 215 kN

DESGIN BASE SHEAR IN WALL 2 = 0.9D+1.6W+1.6H


=0.9(0) + 1.6(134.73) +1.6(0)= 215 kN

Reinforced Concrete Design


g III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 7
Calculation of wind loads using UBC 97
PART I
Introduction

Introduction:
UBC procedures for wind load calculations:

The design wind speed in the UBC 97 is based on the fastest-mile


wind speed, whereas the design wind speed in the IBC 2009 is
based on the 3-second gust wind speed.

Introduction:

Wind speed conversion:


The 3-second gust basic wind speed,V3S can be converted to
fastest-mile wind speed,Vfm, using:

In mph:

Introduction:
UBC procedures for wind load calculations:

Method 1 (normal force method): Its provisions are not applicable to


buildings taller than 122 m. The normal force method is applicable to all
structures, and must be applied to all gabled frames. It assumes that
wind pressures act perpendicular to the surface of roof, windward and
leeward walls simultaneously. For pressures on roofs and leeward walls,
Ce shall be evaluated at the mean roof height.
g

Method 2 (projected area method): Its provisions are not applicable to


buildings taller than 61 m. The projected area method is easier to use
than method 1 in that it assumes that wind pressures act on the projected
horizontal and vertical areas of the structure instead of on individual
surfaces of roof and walls.

Any building, including those not covered by the UBC, may be designed
using wind-tunnel test results.
Introduction:

Distribution of Pressures and Suctions:

Assumed stepwise wind distribution on

Actual wind distribution the windward side


PART II
Determination of wind
pressure

Determination of wind p
pressure:

Design
g pprocedure

1- Basic wind speed V


2- Exposure category
3- Importance factor, Iw
4- Combined height, exposure and gust factor coefficient, Ce
5- The pressure coefficient, Cq
6- Wind stagnation pressure, qs
7- Design wind pressure, p

Determination of wind pressure:


p

1- Basic wind speed V:

Determination of wind p
pressure:

22- Exposure category:


The UBC distinguishes between three exposure categories; B,
C, and D:
Exposure B: has terrain with buildings, forest, or surface
irregularities, covering at least 20% of the ground level area
extending 1 mile (1.61
(1 61 km) or more from the site.
site
Exposure C: has terrain that is flat and generally open,
extending one-half mile (0.81 km) or more from the site in
any full quadrant.
Exposure D: represents the most severe exposure in areas of
basic wind speeds of 80 mph (129 km/h) or greater
greater, and has
terrain that is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies of
water over one mile (1.61 km) or more in width relative to
any quadrant of the building site.
site Exposure D extends inland
from shoreline one-fourth mile (0.4 km) or 10 times the
building height, whichever is greater.
Determination of wind p
pressure:

33- Importance factor, Iw:

Determination of wind p
pressure:

33- Importance factor, Iw:

Determination of wind pressure:


p

44- Combined height, exposure and gust factor coefficient, Ce:

(m)
- .
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.


.
.

Determination of wind p
pressure:

5- The pressure coefficient, Cq:

Determination of wind p
pressure:

6- Wind stagnation
g ppressure, qs:

q s = 0.613V 2

pressure, p:
7 Design wind pressure
7-
P = C eC q q s I w

Determination of wind p
pressure:

Load combinations

PART III
Example

Example
Determine the wind forces in walls W1 and W2 acting in their principal strong
di ti Th
direction. The walls
ll are partt off a residential
id ti l building
b ildi to
t be
b built
b ilt in
i Gaza
G City.
Cit The
Th
thickness of all shear walls = 30 cm.

6 3@18
6m3@18m

W1
3m6sstory

6m3@118m
W2

Elevation

4m
Plan
Example
p
1- Basic wind speed V:

V = 35 m/s

2- Exposure category:

Exposure category B (may also conservatively consider category D)

3- Importance factor, Iw:


Category 4
I w= 1.00

Example
p

4- Combined height,
g , exposure
p and ggust factor coefficient,, Ce:

(m)
- .
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.


.
.

Example
p
5- The pressure coefficient, Cq:

Example
p
6- Wind stagnation pressure, qs:

q s = 0.613V 2 = 0.613 352 = 751 N / m 2

7 Design
7- i d pressure, p:
D i wind

P = C eC q q s I w

Leeward Side:
P = 0.95
0 95 00.5
5 751 11.0
0 = 357 N / m 2
Force in each wall= pressure x height of building x tributary width
F = 0.357 18 18 / 2 = 58kN

Windward Side:
P = C e 0.8
0 8 751 1.0
1 0 = 601C e N / m 2
Force in each wall = pressure x height of level x tributary width

F = 0.601C e height of level 18 / 2 (kN )


Example

Tributary area

6 3@18
6m3@18m

W1
Tributary hheight

6m3@118m
Tributaryy width
T

W2

Elevation

4m
Plan
Example
p
Windward Side:
Height Height Force Force
P
Level of top of level Ce in wall 1 in wall 2
(N/m2)
(m) (m) (kN) (kN)
. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .


.
.
.
.
.

. . . . .

. . . . .

Sum
.
.

Example
p
Pressure distribution:

0 571 kN/m2
0.571

0 508 kN/m2
0.508
0.457 kN/m2
0.357 kN/m2
0.433 kN/m2

0.403 kN/m2

0.373 kN/m2

Force in each level = max pressure at the level x height of the level x tributary width

EXAMPLE: Force in level 1 = 0.373 x 4.6 x 18/2 = 15.42 kN


Example
p
Force distribution in wall 1:

15 40 kN
15.40

14.08
14 08 kN
6.16 kN 58 kN
5.84 kN

5.43 kN

15.42 kN

BASE SHEAR = 76.73+58 = 134.73 kN


Example
p

Base shear in the walls:

DESGIN BASE SHEAR IN WALL 1 = 0.9D+1.6W+1.6H


0 9D+1 6W+1 6H
=0.9(0) + 1.6(134.73) +1.6(0)= 215 kN

DESGIN BASE SHEAR IN WALL 2 = 0.9D+1.6W+1.6H


=0.9(0) + 1.6(134.73) +1.6(0)= 215 kN

Reinforced Concrete Design


g III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 8
Design of Shear Walls
PART I
Introduction

Part I:

Structural walls:
Structural walls are walls proportioned to resist combinations of shears,
moments, and axial forces. A shear wall is a structural wall.

Major factors that affect the design of structural walls:


(a) The structural function of the wall relative to the rest of the structure.
(b) The types of loads the wall resists.
- The way the wall is supported and braced by the rest of the structure.

- The way the wall supports and braces the rest of the structure.

(c) The location and amount or reinforcement.

Part I:
T
Types off structural
t t l walls:
ll

Bearing walls:
These are walls that are laterally supported and braced by the rest of the
structure, that resist primarily in-plane vertical loads acting downward
on the top of the wall. The vertical load may act eccentrically with
respect to the wall thickness causing weak axis bending.

Part I:

Types of structural walls:

Shear walls:
Walls that primarily resist lateral loads due to wind or earthquakes acting
on the building and acting parallel to the plane of the wall are called
shear walls. These walls often provide lateral bracing to the rest of the
structure. They resist gravity loads transferred to them by the parts of
th structure
the t t tributary
t ib t to
t the
th wall,ll plus
l the
th lateral
l t l loads
l d andd moments t
about strong axis of the wall.

Part I:
T
Types off structural
t t l walls:
ll

Nonbearingg walls:
Walls that do not support gravity in-plane loads other than their own
weight.
g These walls mayy resist shears and moments due to pressures
p or
loads acting on one or both sides of the wall. Examples are basement
walls and retaining walls used to resist lateral soil pressures.

Part I:

Types of structural walls:

Wall assemblies:
They are groups of walls that are interconnected to act as a single member
to resist lateral forces. Their three
three-dimensional
dimensional shape serves to enclose
stairwells and elevator shafts.

Part I:

Types of structural walls:

Tilt-up walls:
These are very slender
Th l d wallsll that
h are cast in i a horizontal
h i l position
i i adjacent
dj
to the structure. They are then tilted into their intended vertical
position and fastened to the foundation, to the roof or floor diaphragm,
and to the adjacent panels. They are designed to resist vertical and
lateral loads.

Part I:
L d combinations
Load bi ti

Part I:
1- Critical combination for combined (axial load and moment)
normal stress calculations:
For axial load: U = 1.2D + 1.0Ev + 1.0L (9-5)
For moment: U = 1.0Eh (9-5)
where:
Ev = 0.2SDSD
Eh = QE
= the reliability factor (see next slide)
QE = the effect of horizontal seismic forces
Note: Combo 9-5 controls for this analysis for giving maximum effect of both axial and bending.

Load factor for small live loads:

Part I:

2- Critical combination for flexural strength calculations


(case of gravity loads that stabilize overturning in shear
walls)
U = 0.9D (9-6) (9-7)

3- Critical combinations for flexural and shear design in


shear walls
U = 1.6W (9-6)
U = 1.0Eh (9-7)

Note: Only horizontal shear and horizontal forces contributing to the overturning
moment are involved in these analyses and these are normally causes by wind and EQEQ.

Part I:

Redundancy factor
6.1
6 1
1 = 2 1.5
rmax A B

AB is the ground floor area of the structure in square meter


rmax is the maximum element-story shear ratio. For shear walls rmax shell
b taken
be k as equall to the
h shear
h in i the
h most heavily
h il loaded
l d d wall ll or wall
ll
pier multiplied by 3.3/lw & divided by the total story shear, where lw is
the length of the shear wall in meter.

is assigned a value of 1.0 for seismic design categories A, B and C.


iis taken
t k as 1.0
1 0 in
i all
ll cases in
i Wight
Wi ht andd Macgregor
M 2009
2009.
is taken as 1.3 for seismic design categories D, E and F in Nilson et al.
2010.

Part I:

Seismic design category:


Part I:

ACI 318-08 provisions for shear walls:

For shear walls designed against wind:


- Chapter 14 for walls

For shear walls designed against EQ:


- Chapter 14 for walls
` - Chapter 21 for EQ

Part I:
C
Coupled
l d shear
h walls:
ll
These are shear walls that are connected (coupled) by beams or
slabs or both spanning across a doorway or similar
opening. The two walls act as one solid cantilever if the
coupling-beam stiffness is high. Each wall segment in that
case is
i called
ll d pier.
i


Part I:
Shear wall foundations:
Because tensile uplift stresses are difficult to resist, they should
b avoided.
be id d This
Thi is
i done
d by
b increasing
i i theth size
i off the
th wall
ll
footing. If footing size becomes excessive, possible
solutions are:

(1) Replace the rectangular footing with an H-shaped footing


to increase the radius of gyration of the footing.

(2) Use mat foundation.


(3) Use pile foundation.
(4) Use coupled shear walls.


Part I:

Minimum Cover ACI 7.7.1


a - Concrete exposed to earth or weather
for <16mm------40 mm and for >16mm----- 50 mm

b - Concrete not exposed to earth or weather


for <32mm------20
<32mm 20 mm,
mm otherwise ------ 40 mm

Part I:
lw
Terminology

lw = horizontal length of the entire wall


or of a segment of wall considered
in the direction of the shear force.

hw = height of wall
wall.

h = thickness of wall.

hw

h
PART II
Layout, Size, Drift Control, and
Minimum Wall Reinforcement

Part II:
Layout of buildings with structural walls:
The major considerations in selecting a structural system for a
multistory building with structural walls are:
(1) The building must have enough rigidity to withstand the service loads without
excessive deflections or vibrations.

(2) It is desirable that the wall be loaded with enough vertical load to resist any
uplift of parts of the wall foundations due to lateral walls.

(3) The locations of frames and walls should minimize torsional deformations of
the building about the vertical axis of the building.

(4) The walls must have adequate strength in shear and in combined flexure and
axial loads.

(5) The wall must have enough cover on the reinforcement.


reinforcement

(6) Multiple walls should be used to minimize demands on footings.


(7) For
F structures whereh substantial
b i l torsional
i l moments may be
b generated,
d a wide
id
distribution of shear walls around the perimeter of the floor plan would be most

efficient for resisting torsion.


Part II:
Required size of wall:
The major considerations in determining the size of shear wall section:
(1) It must have enough strength to resist the factored moments, shears and axial
loads actingg on it.

(2) It must have enough stiffness to limit the lateral deflections.

Initial sizing based on wind induced deflection:

Part II:
Required size of wall:
Initial sizing based on wind induced deflection:

Maximum allowable slope at top = 1/500 National building code of Canada

I = 0.70Ig ACI 10.10.4.1


ws = (wind
( ind press
pressure
re on windward
ind ard side at top + wind
ind pressure
press re on
leeward side)* dimension of building perpendicular to wind.

hw = height of wall
By setting the service-load story drift (slope) equal to the maximum
top, the minimum total Ig for the walls parallel
allowable slope at top
to the wind direction is:

Part II:
Required size of wall:
Minimum wall thickness:

(1) hmin = Lu / 20 Wight and Macgregor 2009

(2) Must satisfy:


0 83 f ch (0.8
V n = 0.83 (0 8lw ) Ultimate base shear ACI 11.9.3/4
11 9 3/4
(3) h should be large enough to allow the concrete to be placed
without honeycombing.
honeycombing

h
lw

Part II:
Required size of wall:

When EQ-resistant
Wh EQ i t t construction
t ti i being
is b i considered,
id d it is i tot beb
remembered that the relatively stiff parts of the structure will
attract more forces than will the more flexible parts. A structure
with reinforced shear walls is quite stiff and thus will attract large
EQ forces. If the shear walls are brittle and fail, the rest of the
structure mayy not be able to take the shock. But if the shear walls
are ductile (and they will be if properly reinforced), they will be
very effective in resisting EQ forces.

Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
Story drift:

The difference between the deflections of the center of mass of the top and
bottom of the story considered. Story drift control is important for:

1- Stability of the structure.

2- Potential damage to nonstructural elements.

3- Human comfort.

P-delta
P delta effects should be included in the

analysis in ETABS to find the story deflections.

Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
Story drift:

Part II:
Story Drift Limits:

ACI 11.9.3/4
11 9 3/4

Part II:
Story Drift Limits:

Part II:
Story Drift Limits:

Part II:
Distributed and concentrated reinforcement:
The reinforcement in shear walls is generally made up of:

(1) Distributed horizontal and vertical reinforcement spread uniformly over


the length between the boundary elements and over the height of the
wall.

((2)) Concentrated vertical reinforcement is located in boundaryy elements at


or near the edges of the wall and is tied in much the same way that
column cages are.

Part II:
Distributed shear reinforcement:
Shear reinforcement for structural walls always consists of evenly
distributed vertical and horizontal reinforcement. In many cases, shear
cracks are inclined with respect to a horizontal line less than 45 degrees,
so vertical reinforcement is just as effective if not more effective as
horizontal reinforcement.

However, the shear strength contribution from wall reinforcement is based


However
on the size and spacing of the horizontal reinforcement.

Part II:
Distributed and concentrated reinforcement:
Reinforcement in two layers:

At least two curtains of reinforcement shell be used in the wall if:


-Vu exceeds 0.17 Acv f c ' ACI 21.9.2.2
21 9 2 2
-The wall thickness is more than 250 mm ACI 14.3.4

Acv = lw h

Part II:
Minimum wall reinforcement: ACI 11.9.9

Minimum percentage of vertical (longitudinal) steel


hw
If < 2.5
lw
Av ,vert hw
l ,min = = 0.0025 + 0.5(2.5 )( t 0.0025) 0.0025
hs 1 lw
h
hw lw
If 2.5
25
lw
Av ,vert
l ,min
min = = 0.0025
h 1
hs

Part II:
Minimum wall reinforcement: ACI 11.9.9

Minimum percentage of horizontal (transverse) steel

Av , horiz
t ,min = 0.0025
h 2
hs

Maximum spacing h
S1,max = smaller of {lw/3, 45 cm, 3h} lw
S2,max = smaller of {lw/5, 45 cm, 3h}

Notes
hw
If 2 0 l t
2.0
lw

Av ,vert and Av , horiz are for two bars if two curtains are used
Part II:
Ties for vertical reinforcement

Wight and Macgregor 2009

PART III
Design of
boundary elements

Part III:
Boundary elements:

Boundary elements are regions at the ends of the cross section of the wall that are
reinforced as columns as given in ACI 21.6.4.4 (with some exceptions), with
the reinforcement enclosed by hoop reinforcement. They generally are thicker
than the walls to give room for concentrated vertical reinforcement that is tied
like a tied column. However, the ACI allows them to have the same thickness
as the
h wall.
ll Boundary
B d elements
l strengthen
h the
h edges
d off the
h walls
ll to resist
i stress
reversals and prevent reinforcement buckling near the edges.

Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for
boundary elements:
(1) Displacement-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.2): This applies to walls that are
effectivelyy continuous from the base of the structure to the top
p of the wall and
are designed to have a single critical section for axial loads and bending at the
base of the wall. In this case, boundary elements are required if:
lw
c> u / hw 0.007
600 (u / hw )
where:
c = depth from the extreme compression fiber to the neutral axis.
lw = horizontal length of the entire wall or of a segment of wall considered in the
direction of the shear force.

u = design
g displacement,
p , defined as the total lateral displacement
p deflection at the
top of the building for the design-basis earthquake.

hw = height of the entire wall, or of the segment of wall considered.


Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for
boundary elements:
(1) Displacement-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.2): In this method, the boundary
element must extend horizontallyy from the extreme compression
p fiber a distance
not less than: max{c0.1lw ;c/2}

Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for boundary
elements:
(1) Displacement-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.2): In the vertical direction, the special
boundaryy elements must extend from the critical section a distance ggreater than or
equal to: max{lw ; Mu/4Vu}.

Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for
boundary elements:
(2) Stress-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.3):
I this
In hi case, BE are required
i d if:
if

Pu M u lw
+ 0.2f c '
Ag Ig 2

Special boundary elements can be

discontinued where the compressive

stress is less than 0.15fc.

Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
If special boundary elements are not required by ACI 21.9.6.2/3, then:
(1) If the longitudinal reinforcement ratio at the wall boundary is greater than
2.8/fy, provide boundary elements where the maximum longitudinal spacing of
transverse reinforcement in the boundary element shall not exceed 200 mm.

(2) If V u < 0.083Acv f c ' , provide boundary elements .

Otherwise:
needed. Horizontal reinforcement terminating at the
No boundary element is needed
edges of structural walls without boundary elements shall have a standard hook
engaging the edge reinforcement or the edge reinforcement shall be enclosed in
U stirrups having the same size and spacing as
U-stirrups as, and spliced to,
to the horizontal
reinforcement.

Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
ACI 21.9.6.4(b)
In flanged sections:

In flanged sections, the boundary element shall include the effective flange
width in compression and shall extend at least 300 mm into the web.

300 mm

Part III:
Design of longitudinal reinforcement in the boundary
elements:

If Mu > Mn additional reinforcement is needed in the BE calculated by:


M u M n
A s ,add =
0.9f y d

More information is given in Part IV next


Part III:
Design of longitudinal reinforcement in the boundary
elements:
When the wall is subjected to Vu from the left, tension reinforcement is
needed on the left (Figure a). When the wall is subjected to Vu from the
right, tension reinforcement is needed on the left (Figure b). Since Vu
can come from both sides
sides, tensile reinforcement is needed on both sides
(Figure c).

(c)
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Transverse reinforcement benefits:
(1) To confine the concrete.
(2) To prevent buckling of the compression bars.
(3) To provide adequate shear strength.
(4) To confine
fi lap
l splices.
li

Seismic hook:
A hook on a stirrup, hoop or cross-tie having a bend not less than 135
degrees.

Cross tie:
Continuous reinforcing bar having a seismic hook at one end and a hook
not less than 90 at the other end.
end The 90 degree hooks are alternated
end for end.

Hoop:
A closed tie.

Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:

Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Area of hoop and crossties: ACI 21.6.4.4
The total cross-sectional area of rectangular hoop reinforcement, Ash, shall
not be less than required by

Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Spacing of hoop and crossties: ACI 21.6.4.3
Spacing of transverse reinforcement s shall not exceed the smallest of:

((1)) One third of the least dimension of the boundaryy element.


(2) Six times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar.
(3) so, as defended
d f d d bby:

The value of so shall not exceed 150 mm and need not be taken
less than 100 mm.

Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:

3
o

Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Anchorage of horizontal reinforcement of the wall web in the
boundary element:
Horizontal reinforcement in the wall web shall be anchored to develop fy within
the confined core of the boundary element.
AC 21.7.5
ACI 21
For a bar with 90 degree hook:
f y db

5.4 f c
ld
l dh max 8d b
150mm

For a straight bar:

l d = 3.25l dh

Part III:
General notes

PART IV
Flexural strength analysis of shear walls

Part IV:

Strength requirement for flexure

M d = M n M u
M d Design moment strength (also known as moment resistance)
Mu Internal ultimate moment

M n Theoretical or nominal resisting moment


moment.

Shear walls generally are tension


controlled and the -factor for
flexure is usually 0.9

Part IV:

Cases of shear walls in flexural analysis


C
Case 1
1:
Rectangular walls with uniform reinforcement.

Case 2:
Walls with boundary elements and walls with flanges.

Case 3:
Wall assemblies.

Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Assumptions:

(1) All steel in the tension zone yields in tension.


(2) All steel in the compression zone yields in
compression.
(3) The tension force acts at middeption of the
tension zone.
(4) The compression force (sum of steel and
concrete contributions) acts at middepth of
the compression
p zone.

As is first determined based on


minimum reinforcement requirements.

Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Derivation of expressions:

A st f y Nu
= =
A h
w fc ' Aw hff c '

Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Procedure:

A st f y
=
A w h fc '
Nu
=
Aw hf c '

M d = M n M u ?
Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Load and resistance factors:

The combinations for dead loads that


minimize the axial load and thus
minimize the wall minimum moment
and
d give
i the
h most critical
i i l case are:

Nu = 0.9D ((9-6)) ((9-7))

Shear walls generally are tension


controlled and the -factor for
flexure is usually 0.9

Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Examples:

For these walls, the


contribution
t ib ti from
f the
th
vertical reinforcement in
the web in the Mn
calculation is usually
ignored because it is very
small compared
p to the
contribution of the
vertical reinforcement
concentrated at the edges
of the wall.

Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Width of flanges for flexural analysis: ACI 21.9.5.2

l

B 1 = min
i 2
0.25hw

Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Flanges for BE design: ACI 21.9.6.4(b)

In flanged sections, the boundary element shall include the effective flange
width in compression and shall extend at least 300 mm into the web.

300 mm

Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Derivation of expressions:

T = As f y

T + Nu
a=
0.85bf c

a l a
M n = T (d ) + N u ( w )
2 2

d = 0.8lw
Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Procedure:

As is based on minimum
reinforcement requirements
or an initial
i iti l guess.

T = As f y

T + Nu
a=
0.85bf c

a l a
M n = T (0.8lw ) + N u ( w )
2 2

Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Reinforcement:

If Mu > Mn additional reinforcement is needed in the BE; calculated by:


M u M n
A s ,add =
0.9f y d
Part IV:
Case 3: Flexural strength of wall assemblies:
Derivation of expressions:

M 1 =0

M 3 =0

T1 T3
As 1 = > A s ,min As 3 = > A s ,min As2 is based on minimum
0.9f y 0.9f y reinforcement requirements.
PART V
Shear strength analysis of shear walls

Part V:

Strength requirement for shear

V d = V n V u
Vd Design shear strength (also known as shear resistance)

Vu Internal ultimate shear

Vn Theoretical or nominal shear resistance


resistance.

The -factor for shear is 0.75. However, if shear strength is less than the shear
corresponding
co espo d g too thee development
deve op e ofo thee flexural
e u strength
s e g of w thee -
o thee wall
factor for shear is 0.6.
ACI 9.3.4(a)

Part V:

Strength requirement for shear

The nominal shear force is generally resisted by concrete and shear


reinforcement:
Vn = Vc + Vs ACI Eq. 11-2
Vc = nominal shear force resisted by concrete
Vs = nominal shear force resisted by shear reinforcement

Vu = Vn

Vu
Vs = V c

Part V:

Strength requirement for shear

Three cases of shear requirement:


Case 1:
For Vu Vc shear reinforcement is required

Case 2:
For 0 50Vc minimum
F Vu 0.50V i i shear
h reinf.
i f is
i required
i d (ACI 11.9.9).
11 9 9)

Case 3:
For Vu < 0.50Vc min. shear reinf. is required (ACI 11.9.9 or ACI 14.3)
.

Part V:

Strength requirement for shear

Alternatively two cases of shear requirement:


Alternatively,
Case 1:
For Vu Vn shear reinforcement is required

Case 2:
F Vu V
For Vn minimum
i i shear
h reinf.
i f is
i required
i d (ACI 11.9.9).
11 9 9)

.
Summary:

If V n V u No additional shear reinforcement is needed

Otherwise: Calculate Vc and then Vs to find the additional reinf.

Part V:

Strength requirement for shear


The nominal shear strength Vn

(
V n = Acv c f c ' + t f y ) ACI 21.9.4

where c is
0.25 for hw/lw 1.5
0.17 for hw/lw 2
varies linearly between 0.25 & 0.17 for hw/lw between 1.5 & 2
hw = height of entire wall of wall considered
lw = length of entire wall in the direction of shear force
Acv = hlw
.

Part V:

Upper limit for Vn

ACI Code requires that the maximum force resisted by shear


Vn is as follows

V n 0.83 f c ' hd ACI 11.9.3

If this condition is not satisfied


Section dimensions must be increased

Part V:

Strength requirement for shear


For walls subject to axial compression Nu , moment Mu and shear Vu:
Vc shall be permitted to be the lesser of the values computed by:

ACI 11.9.6

Part V:

Design for shear:


Shear reinforcement is required when
Vu Vc ACI 11.4.7.1
Vu
Vs = V c

The bar size of the horizontal reinforcement is established and the
spacing is calculated:

Avf yd Av fyd
Vs = s = ACI Eq
Eq. 11-15
11 15
s Vs
h Av = the
where th area off shear
h reinforcement
i f t within
ithi spacing
i s

Part V:

Distributed shear reinforcement:


Shear reinforcement for structural walls always consists of evenly
distributed vertical and horizontal reinforcement. In many cases, shear
cracks are inclined with respect to a horizontal line less than 45 degrees,
so vertical reinforcement is just as effective if not more effective as
horizontal reinforcement.

However, the shear strength contribution from wall reinforcement is based


However
on the size and spacing of the horizontal reinforcement.

PART VI
Example 1

Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:

Check the shear wall layout against the ASCE-7 code drift limits. Consider
only the E-W direction.

N
6 3@18
6m3@18m

W1
3m6sstory

6m3@118m
W4 W3

W2

Elevation

4m
Plan
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:

From the tributary area shown,


the axial loading on the wall at 6 3@18
6m3@18m
each story:
W1

Pu = 3129 = 324 kN

6m3@118m
W4 W3

You should include the P-delta


effects in ETABS.
W2

4m
Plan
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
From lecture 4:

I E = 1.0, g
0
0.7 I = 0.7(5.4
0 ( 4 + 1
1.6)
6) = 4
4.9
9 m 4

Floor Fx

6 .

5 .

4 .

3 .

2 .

1 .
.

0 0
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:

max

Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:

Cd
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:

From ETABS, the elastic deflections xe are obtained as shown in the table:

Story xe x max

. . . .
.
.

.
.
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .

PART VI
Example 2

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Design the reinforcement for a shear wall having a total height


off hw = 45 m, length
l th off lw = 8 m andd thickness
thi k off h = 0.5
05m
for EQ resistance.

The total dead load is Wd = 27100 kN and total live load is Wl


= 4500 kN.

From the equivalent lateral force analysis, the base shear was
found as V = 3030 kN, and the overturning moment at base as
M = 48150 kN.m.

The building is residential (Seismic Use Group I) with SD1 =


0.15g and SDS = 0.6g.

Use fc = 30 MPa and fy = 420 MPa.

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 1: Prepare the factored forces

SD1 = 0.15g and SDS = 0.6g From the tables, the seismic design categories are C and D.
Use D
= 1.3
13

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 1: Prepare the factored forces

For combined normal stress calculations:


Pu = 1.2D + 1.0Ev + 1.0L
1 2Wd +0.2
= 1.2 +0 2SDSWd + 0.5
0 5Wl
= 1.2Wd +0.2(0.6)Wd + 0.5Wl
= 1.32Wd + 0.5Wl = 1.3227100+0.54500 = 38000 kN
1 0Eh = QE = 1.3
Mu = 1.0 1 3 (48150) = 62600 kN.m
kN m

For flexural strength analysis:


Nu = 0.9Wd = 0.927100 = 24400 kN

For flexural and shear design


Vu = 1.0Eh = QE = 1.3 ( 3030) = 3940 kN
Mu = 1.0Eh = QE = 1.3 ( 48150) = 62600 kN.m

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 2: Boundary element check

hlw 3 0.5 83
Ig = = = 21.33m 4
12 12
A g = 8 0.5 = 4m 2
c = lw / 2 = 8 / 2 = 4 m
Pu M u c 38000 103 62600 106 4000
fc = = = 21.3MPa
Ag Ig 4 10 6
21.33 1012

0 2f c = 00.2(30)
f c ,max = 0.2 2(30) = 6MPa < f = 21.3
21 3MPac
Boundary elements are needed.

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 3: Number of distributed reinforcement curtains check:

Acv = lw h = 8000 500 = 4 106 mm 2


0.17 Acv f c ' = 0.17 4 106 30
= 3725 103 N = 3725kN
V u = 3940 > 0.17 Acv f c ' = 3725kN

Also h = 50 cm > 25 cm

Therefore, two curtains of reinforcement are needed.

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 4: Design of distributed reinforcement:


16@30cm
Vertical steel: 30cm
hw 45
= =5.625
5 625 > 2.5
25
lw 8
Av ,vert 30cm
l ,min
min = = 0.00
0.00255
hs 1
Try using 16 Av ,vert =2Abar =2(201)=402mm 2
Av ,vert 402
s1 = = =320mm
h (0.0025) 500(0.0025)
Smax = smaller of {{l w /3,, 45 cm,, 3h}}
= smaller of { 800/3,45,3(50)}
= smaller of { 267,45,150}= 45 cm>s1
Use 116 @ 30cm at each side of the wall in the vertical direction

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 4: Design of distributed reinforcement:


16@30cm
Horizontal steel: 30cm
Av , horiz
t ,min = h i
= 0.0025
hs 2
30cm
Try using 16 Av , horiz =2Abar =2(201)=402mm 2

Av , horiz 402
s2 = = =320mm
h (0.0025) 500(0.0025)
Smax = smaller
ll off {l w /5,
/5 45 cm, 3h} 16@30cm
= smaller of { 800/5,45,3(50)}
= smaller of { 160,45,150}
160,45,150}= 45 cm
cm>ss 2

Use 116 @ 30cm at each side of the wall in the horizontal direction

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 5: Shear design:


hw 45
= =5.625 > 2 c = 0.17
lw 8
Av , horiz 402
t = = = 0.00268
hs 2 500 300
Acv = lw h = 8000 500 = 4 106 mm 2

(
V n = Acv c f c ' + t f y )
V n = 4 106 0.17 (
0 17 30 + 0.00268
0 00268 420 )
V n = 8227 103 N = 8227 kN
d = 0.8
0 8lw = 6400mm
0.83 f c ' hd = 0.83 30 500 6400 = 14546kN > V n
Wall cross section is adequate
V n = 0.6 8227 kN = 4396kN >V u

No additional horizontal shear reinforcement is needed


Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 6: Design the development length and size of boundary element:

f y db f y db 420 16
= = 227 mm
5.4 f c 5.4 f c 5.4 30

l dh max 8d b = max 8(16) = 128mm
150mm 150mm


l dh = 227 mm
l d = 3.25
3 25l dh = 33.25(227)
25(227) = 800mm
Use depth of boundary element le = 1300mm
and width of boundary element bb= 850 mm
l e = 1.3m

bw = 0.5
0 5m b = 0.85
0 85m

lw = 8m
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 7: Design the longitudinal reinforcement of the boundary elements:

Try using 39 32 Abar =804mm 2 A s =39 804=31356mm 2


T = A s f y = 31356 420 = 13170kN
T + N u 13170 103 + 24400 103
a= = = 1733mm
0.85bf c 0.85 850 30
a l a
M n = T (d ) + N u ( w )
2 2
1733 8000 1733
M n = 13170 103 (6400 ) + 24400 103 ( )
2 2
M n = 149324 106 N .mm = 149324kN .m
M n = 0.9 149324kN .m
M n = 134393kN .m > M u = 62600kN .m
No
N need
d ffor additional
ddi i l reinforcement
i f

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 7: Design the longitudinal reinforcement of the boundary elements:

Check amount of reinforcement provided:


134393
Factor of safety= = 2.2
22
62600
Longitudinal reinforcement in boundary element can be reduced.

Check the size of the boundary element:


0.05(f c ' 28)
1 = 0.85
0 85 > 0.
0 65 f or f c ' = 30MPa > 28 MPa
7
0.05(30 28)
1 = 0.85 = 0.836 > 0.65
7
a 1733
c= = = 2074
1 0.836
max{c / 2 = 1037;c 0.1lw = 1274} < l e = 1300mm
OK
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 8: Detailing of the boundary elements:

Try 16 (Abar =201mm 2 ) hoops and crossties spaced at s = 100 mm

Short direction:
bc = 1300 2(40 + 16 / 2) = 1204mm
sb f 100 1204 30 bc
A sh = 0.09 c c = 0.09 = 774mm 2
fy 420

Use three 16 crossties, for a total of five legs being provided


including the hoop every 100 mm along the boundary element length.
A s,sup =5 201 =1005mm 2 > 774mm 2 OK

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 8: Detailing of the boundary elements:

Long direction:
bc = 850 2(40
( + 16 / 2)) = 754mm
sb f 100 754 30
A sh = 0.09 c c = 0.09 = 485mm 2
fy 420
bc

Use one 16 crosstie, for a total of three legs being provided


i l di the
including th hoop
h every 100 mm along l the
th boundary
b d element
l t length.
l th
A s,sup =3 201 =603mm 2 > 485mm 2 OK

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 8: Detailing of the boundary elements: hx

Check spacing s=100mm of confinement reinforcement:


16
850 2 40 2 5 32
hx = 2 = 148.5mm
5 1
350 hx 350 148.5
148 5
s o = 100 + = 100 +
3 3
s o = 167 mm > 150mm s o = 150mm
min{850 / 3 = 283;6 32 = 192;150} = 150mm > s = 100mm
OK

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

16 closed hoops at @ 100 mm


16 crossties at @ 100 mm
3932
16 @ 300 mm both ways 3932

850 mm
m
500 mm

1300 mm 1300 mm

8000 mm

The end

Reinforced Concrete Design


g III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 8
Design of Shear Walls
PART I
Introduction

Part I:

Structural walls:
Structural walls are walls proportioned to resist combinations of shears,
moments, and axial forces. A shear wall is a structural wall.

Major factors that affect the design of structural walls:


(a) The structural function of the wall relative to the rest of the structure.
(b) The types of loads the wall resists.
- The way the wall is supported and braced by the rest of the structure.

- The way the wall supports and braces the rest of the structure.

(c) The location and amount or reinforcement.

Part I:
T
Types off structural
t t l walls:
ll

Bearing walls:
These are walls that are laterally supported and braced by the rest of the
structure, that resist primarily in-plane vertical loads acting downward
on the top of the wall. The vertical load may act eccentrically with
respect to the wall thickness causing weak axis bending.

Part I:

Types of structural walls:

Shear walls:
Walls that primarily resist lateral loads due to wind or earthquakes acting
on the building and acting parallel to the plane of the wall are called
shear walls. These walls often provide lateral bracing to the rest of the
structure. They resist gravity loads transferred to them by the parts of
th structure
the t t tributary
t ib t to
t the
th wall,ll plus
l the
th lateral
l t l loads
l d andd moments t
about strong axis of the wall.

Part I:
T
Types off structural
t t l walls:
ll

Nonbearingg walls:
Walls that do not support gravity in-plane loads other than their own
weight.
g These walls mayy resist shears and moments due to pressures
p or
loads acting on one or both sides of the wall. Examples are basement
walls and retaining walls used to resist lateral soil pressures.

Part I:

Types of structural walls:

Wall assemblies:
They are groups of walls that are interconnected to act as a single member
to resist lateral forces. Their three
three-dimensional
dimensional shape serves to enclose
stairwells and elevator shafts.

Part I:

Types of structural walls:

Tilt-up walls:
These are very slender
Th l d wallsll that
h are cast in i a horizontal
h i l position
i i adjacent
dj
to the structure. They are then tilted into their intended vertical
position and fastened to the foundation, to the roof or floor diaphragm,
and to the adjacent panels. They are designed to resist vertical and
lateral loads.

Part I:
L d combinations
Load bi ti

Part I:
1- Critical combination for combined (axial load and moment)
normal stress calculations:
For axial load: U = 1.2D + 1.0Ev + 1.0L (9-5)
For moment: U = 1.0Eh (9-5)
where:
Ev = 0.2SDSD
Eh = QE
= the reliability factor (see next slide)
QE = the effect of horizontal seismic forces

Load factor for small live loads:

Part I:

2- Critical combination for flexural strength calculations


(case of gravity loads that stabilize overturning in shear
walls)
U = 0.9D (9-6) (9-7)

Critical combinations for flexural and shear design in


shear walls
U = 1.6W (9-6)
U = 1.0Eh (9-7)
where:
h

Eh = QE
= the reliability factor (see next slide)
QE = the effect of horizontal seismic forces
Part I:

Redundancy factor
6.1
6 1
1 = 2 1.5
rmax A B

AB is the ground floor area of the structure in square meter


rmax is the maximum element-story shear ratio. For shear walls rmax shell
b taken
be k as equall to the
h shear
h in i the
h most heavily
h il loaded
l d d wall ll or wall
ll
pier multiplied by 3.3/lw & divided by the total story shear, where lw is
the length of the shear wall in meter.

is assigned a value of 1.0 for seismic design categories A, B and C.


iis taken
t k as 1.0
1 0 in
i all
ll cases in
i Wight
Wi ht andd Macgregor
M 2009
2009.
is taken as 1.3 for seismic design categories D, E and F in Nilson et al.
2010.

Part I:

Seismic design category:


Part I:

ACI 318-08 provisions for shear walls:

For shear walls designed against wind:


- Chapter 14 for walls

For shear walls designed against EQ:


- Chapter 14 for walls
` - Chapter 21 for EQ

Part I:
C
Coupled
l d shear
h walls:
ll
These are shear walls that are connected (coupled) by beams or
slabs or both spanning across a doorway or similar
opening. The two walls act as one solid cantilever if the
coupling-beam stiffness is high. Each wall segment in that
case is
i called
ll d pier.
i


Part I:
Shear wall foundations:
Because tensile uplift stresses are difficult to resist, they should
b avoided.
be id d This
Thi is
i done
d by
b increasing
i i theth size
i off the
th wall
ll
footing. If footing size becomes excessive, possible
solutions are:

(1) Replace the rectangular footing with an H-shaped footing


to increase the radius of gyration of the footing.

(2) Use mat foundation.


(3) Use pile foundation.
(4) Use coupled shear walls.


Part I:

Minimum Cover ACI 7.7.1


a - Concrete exposed to earth or weather
for <16mm------40 mm and for >16mm----- 50 mm

b - Concrete not exposed to earth or weather


for <32mm------20
<32mm 20 mm,
mm otherwise ------ 40 mm

Part I:
lw
Terminology

lw = horizontal length of the entire wall


or of a segment of wall considered
in the direction of the shear force.

hw = height of wall
wall.

h = thickness of wall.

hw

h
PART II
Layout, Size, Drift Control, and
Minimum Wall Reinforcement

Part II:
Layout of buildings with structural walls:
The major considerations in selecting a structural system for a
multistory building with structural walls are:
(1) The building must have enough rigidity to withstand the service loads without
excessive deflections or vibrations.

(2) It is desirable that the wall be loaded with enough vertical load to resist any
uplift of parts of the wall foundations due to lateral walls.

(3) The locations of frames and walls should minimize torsional deformations of
the building about the vertical axis of the building.

(4) The walls must have adequate strength in shear and in combined flexure and
axial loads.

(5) The wall must have enough cover on the reinforcement.


reinforcement

(6) Multiple walls should be used to minimize demands on footings.


(7) For
F structures whereh substantial
b i l torsional
i l moments may be
b generated,
d a wide
id
distribution of shear walls around the perimeter of the floor plan would be most

efficient for resisting torsion.


Part II:
Required size of wall:
The major considerations in determining the size of shear wall section:
(1) It must have enough strength to resist the factored moments, shears and axial
loads actingg on it.

(2) It must have enough stiffness to limit the lateral deflections.

Initial sizing based on wind induced deflection:

Part II:
Required size of wall:
Initial sizing based on wind induced deflection:

Maximum allowable slope at top = 1/500 National building code of Canada

I = 0.70Ig ACI 10.10.4.1


ws = (wind
( ind press
pressure
re on windward
ind ard side at top + wind
ind pressure
press re on
leeward side)* dimension of building perpendicular to wind.

hw = height of wall
By setting the service-load story drift (slope) equal to the maximum
top, the minimum total Ig for the walls parallel
allowable slope at top
to the wind direction is:

Part II:
Required size of wall:
Minimum wall thickness:

(1) hmin = Lu / 20 Wight and Macgregor 2009

(2) Must satisfy:


0 83 f ch (0.8
V n = 0.83 (0 8lw ) Ultimate base shear ACI 11.9.3/4
11 9 3/4
(3) h should be large enough to allow the concrete to be placed
without honeycombing.
honeycombing

h
lw

Part II:
Required size of wall:

When EQ-resistant
Wh EQ i t t construction
t ti i being
is b i considered,
id d it is i tot beb
remembered that the relatively stiff parts of the structure will
attract more forces than will the more flexible parts. A structure
with reinforced shear walls is quite stiff and thus will attract large
EQ forces. If the shears walls are brittle and fail, the rest of the
structure mayy not be able to take the shock. But if the shear walls
are ductile (and they will be if properly reinforced), they will be
very effective in resisting EQ forces.

Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
Story drift:

The difference between the deflections of the center of mass of the top and
bottom of the story considered. Story drift control is import for:

1- Stability of the structure.

2- Potential damage to nonstructural elements.

3- Human comfort.

P-delta
P delta effects should be included in the

analysis in ETABS to find the story deflections.

Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
Story drift:

Part II:
Story Drift Limits:

ACI 11.9.3/4
11 9 3/4

Part II:
Story Drift Limits:

Part II:
Story Drift Limits:

Part II:
Distributed and concentrated reinforcement:
The reinforcement in shear walls is generally made up of:

(1) Distributed horizontal and vertical reinforcement spread uniformly over


the length between the boundary elements and over the height of the
wall.

((2)) Concentrated vertical reinforcement is located in boundaryy elements at


or near the edges of the wall and is tied in much the same way that
column cages are.

Part II:
Distributed shear reinforcement:
Shear reinforcement for structural walls always consists of evenly
distributed vertical and horizontal reinforcement. In many cases, shear
cracks are inclined with respect to a horizontal line less than 45 degrees,
so vertical reinforcement is just as effective if not more effective as
horizontal reinforcement.

However, the shear strength contribution from wall reinforcement is based


However
on the size and spacing of the horizontal reinforcement.

Part II:
Distributed and concentrated reinforcement:
Reinforcement in two layers:

At least two curtains of reinforcement shell be used in the wall if:


-Vu exceeds 0.17 Acv f c ' ACI 21.9.2.2
21 9 2 2
-The wall thickness is more than 250 mm ACI 14.3.4

Acv = lw h

Part II:
Minimum wall reinforcement: ACI 11.9.9

Minimum percentage of vertical (longitudinal) steel


hw
If < 2.5
lw
Av ,vert hw
l ,min = = 0.0025 + 0.5(2.5 )( t 0.0025) 0.0025
hs 1 lw
h
hw lw
If 2.5
25
lw
Av ,vert
l ,min
min = = 0.0025
h 1
hs

Part II:
Minimum wall reinforcement: ACI 11.9.9

Minimum percentage of horizontal (transverse) steel

Av , horiz
t ,min = 0.0025
h 2
hs

Maximum spacing h
S1,max = smaller of {lw/3, 45 cm, 3h} lw
S2,max = smaller of {lw/5, 45 cm, 3h}

Maximum spacing
hw
If 2 0 l t
2.0
lw

Av ,vert and Av , horiz are for two bars if two curtains are used
Part II:
Ties for vertical reinforcement

Wight and Macgregor 2009

PART III
Design of
boundary elements

Part III:
Boundary elements:

Boundary elements are regions at the ends of the cross section of the wall that are
reinforced as columns as given in ACI 21.6.4.4 (with some exceptions), with
the reinforcement enclosed by hoop reinforcement. They generally are thicker
than the walls to give room for concentrated vertical reinforcement that is tied
like a tied column. However, the ACI allows them to have the same thickness
as the
h wall.
ll Boundary
B d elements
l strengthen
h the
h edges
d off the
h walls
ll to resist
i stress
reversals and prevent reinforcement buckling near the edges.

Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for
boundary elements:
(1) Displacement-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.2): This applies to walls that are
effectivelyy continuous from the base of the structure to the top
p of the wall and
are designed to have a single critical section for axial loads and bending at the
base of the wall. In this case, boundary elements are required if:
lw
c> u / hw 0.007
600 (u / hw )
where:
c = depth from the extreme compression fiber to the neutral axis.
lw = horizontal length of the entire wall or of a segment of wall considered in the
direction of the shear force.

u = design
g displacement
p , defined as the total lateral displacement
p deflection at the
top of the building for the design-basis earthquake.

hw = height of the entire wall, or of the segment of wall considered.


Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for
boundary elements:
(1) Displacement-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.2): In this method, the boundary
element must extend horizontallyy from the extreme compression
p fiber a distance
not less than: max{c0.1lw ;c/2}

Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for boundary
elements:
(1) Displacement-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.2): In the vertical direction, the special
boundaryy elements must extend from the critical section a distance ggreater than or
equal to: max{lw ; Mu/4Vu}.

Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for
boundary elements:
(2) Stress-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.3):
I this
In hi case, BE are required
i d if:
if

Pu M u lw
+ 0.2f c '
Ag Ig 2

Special boundary elements can be

discontinued where the compressive

stress is less than 0.15fc.

Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
If special boundary elements are not required by ACI 21.9.6.2/3, then:
(1) If the longitudinal reinforcement ratio at the wall boundary is greater than
2.8/fy, provide boundary elements where the maximum longitudinal spacing of
transverse reinforcement in the boundary element shall not exceed 200 mm.

(2) If V u < 0.083Acv f c ' , provide boundary elements .

Otherwise:
needed. Horizontal reinforcement terminating at the
No boundary element is needed
edges of structural walls without boundary elements shall have a standard hook
engaging the edge reinforcement or the edge reinforcement shall be enclosed in
U stirrups having the same size and spacing as
U-stirrups as, and spliced to,
to the horizontal
reinforcement.

Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
ACI 21.9.6.4(b)
In flanged sections:

In flanged sections, the boundary element shall include the effective flange
width in compression and shall extend at least 300 mm into the web.

300 mm

Part III:
Design of longitudinal reinforcement in the boundary
elements:

If Mu > Mn additional reinforcement is needed in the BE calculated by:


M u M n
A s ,add =
0.9f y d

More information is given in Part IV next


Part III:
Design of longitudinal reinforcement in the boundary
elements:
When the wall is subjected to Vu from the left, tension reinforcement is
need on the left (Figure a). When the wall is subjected to Vu from the
right, tension reinforcement is need on the left (Figure b).Since Vu can
come from both sides
sides, tensile reinforcement is needed on both sides
(Figure c).

(c)
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Transverse reinforcement benefits:
(1) To confine the concrete.
(2) To prevent buckling of the compression bars.
(3) To provide adequate shear strength.
(4) To confine
fi lap
l splices.
li

Seismic hook:
A hook on a stirrup, hoop or cross-tie having a bend not less than 135
degrees.

Cross tie:
Continuous reinforcing bar having a seismic hook at one end and a hook
not less than 90 at the other end.
end The 90 degree hooks are alternated
end for end.

Hoop:
A closed tie.

Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:

Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Area of hoop and crossties: ACI 21.6.4.4
The total cross-sectional area of rectangular hoop reinforcement, Ash, shall
not be less than required by

Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Spacing of hoop and crossties: ACI 21.6.4.3
Spacing of transverse reinforcement s shall not exceed the smallest of:

((1)) One third of the least dimension of the boundaryy element.


(2) Six times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar.
(3) so, as defended
d f d d bby:

The value of so shall not exceed 150 mm and need not be taken
less than 100 mm.

Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:

3
o

Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Anchorage of horizontal reinforcement of the wall web in the
boundary element:
Horizontal reinforcement in the wall web shall be anchored to develop fy within
the confined core of the boundary element.
AC 21.7.5
ACI 21
For a bar with 90 degree hook:
f y db

5.4 f c
ld
l dh max 8d b
150mm

For a straight bar:

l d = 3.25l dh

Part III:
General notes

PART IV
Flexural strength analysis of shear walls

Part IV:

Strength requirement for flexure

M d = M n M u
M d Design moment strength (also known as moment resistance)
Mu Internal ultimate moment

M n Theoretical or nominal resisting moment


moment.

Shear walls generally are tension


controlled and the -factor for
flexure is usually 0.9

Part IV:

Cases of shear walls in flexural analysis


C
Case 1
1:
Rectangular walls with uniform reinforcement.

Case 2:
Walls with boundary elements and walls with flanges .

Case 3:
Wall assemblies.

Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Assumptions:

(1) All steel in the tension zone yields in tension.


(2) All steel in the compression zone yields in
compression.
(3) The tension force acts at middeption of the
tension zone.
(4) The compression force (sum of steel and
concrete contributions) acts at middepth of
the compression
p zone.

As is first determined based on


minimum reinforcement requirements.

Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Derivation of expressions:

A st f y Nu
= =
A h
w fc ' Aw hff c '

Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Procedure:

A st f y
=
A w h fc '
Nu
=
Aw hf c '

M d = M n M u ?
Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Load and resistance factors:

The combinations for dead loads that


minimize the axial load and thus
minimize the wall minimum moment
and
d give
i the
h most critical
i i l case are::

Nu = 0.9D ((9-6)) ((9-7))

Shear walls generally are tension


controlled and the -factor for
flexure is usually 0.9

Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Examples:

For these walls, the


contribution
t ib ti from
f the
th
vertical reinforcement in
the web in the Mn
calculation is usually
ignored because it is very
small compared
p to the
contribution of the
vertical reinforcement
concentrated at the edges
of the wall.

Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Width of flanges for flexural analysis: ACI 21.9.5.2

l

B 1 = min
i 2
0.25hw

Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Flanges for BE design: ACI 21.9.6.4(b)

In flanged sections, the boundary element shall include the effective flange
width in compression and shall extend at least 300 mm into the web.

300 mm

Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Derivation of expressions:

T = As f y

T + Nu
a=
0.85bf c

a l a
M n = T (d ) + N u ( w )
2 2

Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Procedure:

As is based on minimum
reinforcement requirements
or an initial
i iti l guess.

T = As f y

T + Nu
a=
0.85bf c

a l a
M n = T (d ) + N u ( w )
2 2

Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Reinforcement:

If Mu > Mn additional reinforcement is needed in the BE calculated by:


M u M n
A s ,add =
0.9f y d
Part IV:
Case 3: Flexural strength of wall assemblies:
Derivation of expressions:

M 1 =0

M 3 =0

T1 T3
As 1 = As 3 = As2 is based on minimum
0.9f y 0.9f y reinforcement requirements.
PART V
Shear strength analysis of shear walls

Part V:

Strength requirement for shear

V d = V n V u
Vd Design shear strength (also known as shear resistance)

Vu Internal ultimate shear

Vn Theoretical or nominal shear resistance


resistance.

The -factor for shear is 0.75. However, if shear strength is less than the shear
corresponding
co espo d g too thee development
deve op e ofo thee flexural
e u strength
s e g of w thee -
o thee wall
factor for shear is 0.6.
ACI 9.3.4(a)

Part V:

Strength requirement for shear

The nominal shear force is generally resisted by concrete and shear


reinforcement:
Vn = Vc + Vs ACI Eq. 11-2
Vc = nominal shear force resisted by concrete
Vs = nominal shear force resisted by shear reinforcement

Vu = Vn

Vu
Vs = V c

Part V:

Strength requirement for shear

Three cases of shear requirement:


Case 1:
For Vu Vc shear reinforcement is required

Case 2:
For 0 50Vc minimum
F Vu 0.50V i i shear
h reinf.
i f is
i required
i d (ACI 11.9.9).
11 9 9)

Case 3:
For Vu < 0.50Vc min. shear reinf. is required (ACI 11.9.9 or ACI 14.3)
.

Part V:

Strength requirement for shear

Alternatively two cases of shear requirement:


Alternatively,
Case 1:
For Vu Vn shear reinforcement is required

Case 2:
F Vu V
For Vn minimum
i i shear
h reinf.
i f is
i required
i d (ACI 11.9.9).
11 9 9)

.
Summary:

If V n V u No additional shear reinforcement is needed

Otherwise: Calculate Vc and then Vs to find the additional reinf.

Part V:

Strength requirement for shear


The nominal shear strength Vn

(
V n = Acv c f c ' + t f y ) ACI 21.9.4

where c is
0.25 for hw/Lw 1.5
0.17 for hw/Lw 2
varies linearly between 0.25 & 0.17 for hw/Lw between 1.5 & 2
hw = height of entire wall of wall considered
Lw = length of entire wall in the direction of shear force
Acv = hLw
.

Part V:

Upper limit for Vn

ACI Code requires that the maximum force resisted by shear


Vn is as follows

V n 0.83 f c ' hd ACI 11.9.3

If this condition is not satisfied


Section dimensions must be increased

Part V:

Strength requirement for shear


For walls subject to axial compression Nu , moment Mu and shear Vu:
Vc shall be permitted to be the lesser of the values computed by:

ACI 11.9.6

Part V:

Design for shear:


Shear reinforcement is required when
Vu Vc ACI 11.4.7.1
Vu
Vs = V c

The bar size of the horizontal reinforcement is established and the
spacing is calculated:

Avf yd Av fyd
Vs = s = ACI Eq
Eq. 11-15
11 15
s Vs
h Av = the
where th area off shear
h reinforcement
i f t within
ithi spacing
i s

Part V:

Distributed shear reinforcement:


Shear reinforcement for structural walls always consists of evenly
distributed vertical and horizontal reinforcement. In many cases, shear
cracks are inclined with respect to a horizontal line less than 45 degrees,
so vertical reinforcement is just as effective if not more effective as
horizontal reinforcement.

However, the shear strength contribution from wall reinforcement is based


However
on the size and spacing of the horizontal reinforcement.

PART VI
Example 1

Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:

Check the shear wall layout against the ASCE-7 code drift limits. Consider
only the E-W direction.

N
6 3@18
6m3@18m

W1
3m6sstory

6m3@118m
W4 W3

W2

Elevation

4m
Plan
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:

From the tributary area shown,


the axial loading on the wall at 6 3@18
6m3@18m
each story:
W1

Pu = 3129 = 324 kN

6m3@118m
W4 W3

You should include the P-delta


effects in ETABS.
W2

4m
Plan
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
From lecture 4:

I E = 1.0, g
0
0.7 I = 0.7(5.4
0 ( 4 + 1
1.6)
6) = 4
4.9
9 m 4

Floor Fx

6 .

5 .

4 .

3 .

2 .

1 .
.

0 0
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:

max

Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:

Cd
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:

From ETABS, the elastic deflections xe are obtained as shown in the table:

Story xe x max

. . . .
.
.

.
.
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .

PART VI
Example 2

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Design the reinforcement for a shear wall having a total height


off hw = 45 m, length
l th off lw = 8 m andd thickness
thi k off h = 0.5
05m
for EQ resistance.

The total dead load is Wd = 27100 kN and total live load is Wl


= 4500 kN.

From the equivalent lateral force analysis, the base shear was
found as V = 3030 kN, and the overturning moment at base as
M = 48150 kN.m.

The building is residential (Seismic Use Group I) with SD1 =


0.15g and SDS = 0.6g.

Use fc = 30 MPa and fy = 420 MPa.

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 1: Prepare the factored forces

SD1 = 0.15g and SDS = 0.6g From the tables, the seismic design categories are C and D.
Use D
= 1.3
13

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 1: Prepare the factored forces

For combined normal stress calculations:


Pu = 1.2D + 1.0Ev + 1.0L
1 2Wd +0.2
= 1.2 +0 2SDSWd + 0.5
0 5Wl
= 1.2Wd +0.2(0.6)Wd + 0.5Wl
= 1.32Wd + 0.5Wl = 1.3227100+0.54500 = 38000 kN
1 0Eh = QE = 1.3
Mu = 1.0 1 3 (48150) = 62600 kN.m
kN m

For flexural strength analysis:


Nu = 0.9Wd = 0.927100 = 24400 kN

For flexural and shear design


Vu = 1.0Eh = QE = 1.3 ( 3030) = 3940 kN
Mu = 1.0Eh = QE = 1.3 ( 48150) = 62600 kN.m

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 2: Boundary element check

bw lw 3 0.5 83
Ig = = 21.33m 4
12 12
A g = 8 0.5 = 4m 2
c = lw / 2 = 8 / 2 = 4 m
Pu M u c 38000 103 62600 106 4000
fc = = = 21.3MPa
Ag Ig 8000 500 21.33 1012

0 2f c = 00.2(30)
f c ,max = 0.2 2(30) = 6MPa < f = 21.3
21 3MPac
Boundary elements are needed.

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 3: Number of distributed reinforcement check:

Acv = lw h = 8000 500 = 4000000mm 2


0.17 Acv f c ' = 0.17 4000000 30
= 3725 103 N = 3725kN
V u = 3940 > 0.17 Acv f c ' = 3725kN

Also h = 50 cm > 25 cm

Therefore, two curtains of reinforcement are needed.

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 4: Design of distributed reinforcement:


16@30cm
Vertical steel: 30cm
hw 45
= =5.625
5 625 > 2.5
25
lw 8
Av ,vert 30cm
l ,min
min = = 0.00
0.00255
hs 1
Try using 16 Av ,vert =2Abar =2(201)=402mm 2
Av ,vert 402
s1 = = =320mm
h (0.0025) 500(0.0025)
Smax = smaller of {{l w /3,, 45 cm,, 3h}}
= smaller of { 800/3,45,3(50)}
= smaller of { 800/3,45,3(50)}= 45 cm>s1
Use 116 @ 30cm at each side of the wall in the vertical direction

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 4: Design of distributed reinforcement:


16@30cm
Horizontal steel: 30cm
Av , horiz
t ,min = h i
= 0.0025
hs 2
30cm
Try using 16 Av , horiz =2Abar =2(201)=402mm 2

Av , horiz 402
s2 = = =320mm
h (0.0025) 500(0.0025)
Smax = smaller
ll off {l w /5,
/5 45 cm, 3h} 16@30cm
= smaller of { 800/5,45,3(50)}
= smaller of { 800/5,45,3(50)}
800/5,45,3(50)}= 45 cm
cm>ss 2

Use 116 @ 30cm at each side of the wall in the horizontal direction

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 5: Shear design:


hw 45
= =5.625 > 2 c = 0.17
lw 8
Av , horiz 402
t = = = 0.00268
hs 2 500 300
Acv = lw h = 8000 500 = 4000000mm 2

(
V n = Acv c f c ' + t f y )
V n = 4000000 0.17 (
0 17 30 + 0.00268
0 00268 420 )
V n = 8227 103 N = 8227 kN
d = 0.8
0 8lw = 6400mm
0.83 f c ' hd = 0.83 30 500 6400 = 14546kN >V n
Wall cross section is adequate
V n = 0.6 8227 kN = 4396kN >V u

No additional horizontal shear reinforcement is needed


Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 6: Design the development length and size of boundary element:

f y db f y db 420 16
= = 227 mm
5.4 f c 5.4 f c 5.4 30

l dh max 8d b = max 8(16) = 128mm
150mm 150mm


l dh = 227 mm
l d = 3.25
3 25l dh = 33.25(227)
25(227) = 800mm
Use depth of boundary element le = 1300mm
and width of boundary element bb= 850 mm
l e = 1.3m

bw = 0.5
0 5m b = 0.85
0 85m

lw = 8m
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 7: Design the longitudinal reinforcement of the boundary elements:

Try using 39 32 Abar =804mm 2 A s =9 804=31356mm 2


T = A s f y = 31356 420 = 13170kN
T + N u 13170 103 + 24400 103
a= = = 1733mm
0.85bf c 0.85 850 30
a l a
M n = T (d ) + N u ( w )
2 2
1733 8000 1733
M n = 13170 103 (6400 ) + 24400 103 ( )
2 2
M n = 149324 106 N .mm = 149324kN .m
M n = 0.9 149324kN .m
M n = 134393kN .m > M u = 62600kN .m
No
N need
d ffor additional
ddi i l reinforcement
i f

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 7: Design the longitudinal reinforcement of the boundary elements:

Check amount of reinforcement provided:


134393
Factor of safety= = 2.2
22
62600
Longitudinal reinforcement in boundary element can be reduced.

Check the size of the boundary element:


0.05(f c ' 28)
1 = 0.85
0 85 > 0.
0 65 f or f c ' = 30MPa > 28 MPa
7
0.05(30 28)
1 = 0.85 = 0.836 > 0.65
7
a 1733
c= = = 2074
1 0.836
max{c / 2 = 1037;c 0.1lw = 1274} < l e = 1300mm
OK
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 8: Detailing of the boundary elements:

Try 16 (Abar =201mm 2 ) hoops and crossties spaced at s = 100 mm

Short direction:
bc = 1300 2(40 + 16 / 2) = 1204mm
sb f 100 1204 30 bc
A sh = 0.09 c c = 0.09 = 774mm 2
fy 420

Use three 16 crossties, for a total of five legs being provided


including the hoop every 100 mm along the boundary element length.
A s,sup =5 201 =1005mm 2 > 774mm 2 OK

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 8: Detailing of the boundary elements:

Long direction:
bc = 850 2(40
( + 16 / 2)) = 754mm
sb f 100 754 30
A sh = 0.09 c c = 0.09 = 485mm 2
fy 420
bc

Use one 16 crosstie, for a total of three legs being provided


i l di the
including th hoop
h every 100 mm along l the
th boundary
b d element
l t length.
l th
A s,sup =3 201 =603mm 2 > 485mm 2 OK

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

Step 8: Detailing of the boundary elements: hx

Check spacing s=100mm of confinement reinforcement:


16
850 2 40 2 5 32
hx = 2 = 148.5mm
5 1
350 hx 350 148.5
148 5
s o = 100 + = 100 +
3 3
s o = 167 mm > 150mm s o = 150mm
min{850 / 3 = 283;6 32 = 192;150} = 150mm > s = 100mm
OK

Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design

16 closed hoops at @ 100 mm


16 crossties at @ 100 mm
3932
16 @ 300 mm both ways 3932

850 mm
m
500 mm

1300 mm 1300 mm

8000 mm

The end

Reinforced Concrete Design


g III

Dr. Nader Okasha

Lecture 9
Design of Mat Foundations
PART I
Introduction

Part I:

Mat foundations:

Part I:

Mat foundations:
A mat (raft) foundation is essentially a very large spread footing that
usually encompasses the entire footprint of the structure (but this is not
a requirement).

If the bearing capacity of the soil is so low that even using mat
foundations is insufficient , deep foundations such as piles must be
used.
used

Mat foundations develop large bearing areas and their continuity and
rigidity provides some advantages as explained next.
next

Whenever possible, it is recommended to extend the mat foundation


beyond
y the edge
g of columns a distance that ranges
g from 0.5 m to 1.0 m.

Part I:
Types of mat foundations:

Part I:
Types of mat foundations:

Part I:
Reasons for using mat foundations:

1- The structure loads are so high or the soil conditions are so poor that the
spread footings would be exceptionally large. If spread footings would
cover more than about one half of the building area, a mat will be more
economical.

2 The
2- h soil
il is
i very erratic
i andd prone to excessive
i differential
diff i l settlements.
l
The continuity and rigidity of the mat foundation helps in reducing
differential settlement of individual columns relative to each other.

33- Structural loads are erratic.


erratic The flexural strength of the mat will absorb
these irregularities.

4- The uplift loads are larger than what spread footings can accommodate.

Part I:
Reasons for using mat foundations:

5- Lateral loads are not uniformly distributed through the structure and
thus may cause differential horizontal movements in spread footings.

6 The bottom of the structure


6- str ct re is located below
belo the groundwater
gro nd ater table,
table so
waterproofing is an important concern. The weight of the mat also
h l resist
helps i hydrostatic
h d i uplift
lif forces
f from
f the
h groundwater
d

Part I:
Philosophies of designing mat foundations:

Rigid mat approach:

Considers the mat far more rigid than the surrounding soils, so flexure of the
mat (there are no flexural deflections) doesnt affect the distribution of the
b i pressure andd becomes
bearing b simple
i l to define.
d fi However, these h deflections
d fl i
are important because they influence the bearing pressure distribution.

Flexible (non-rigid) mat approach:

y of the mat relative to the soil and the deformations of


Considers the flexibility
the mat and their influence on the bearing pressure distribution.

Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:

The rigid (conventional) method:

This is an approximate method in which the mat is divided into strips


loaded by soil pressure. Each strip is then analyzed as a combined
f i This
footing. hi method
h d can be
b usedd where
h the h mat is
i very rigid
i id andd the
h
column pattern is fairly uniform in both spacing and load.

The approximate flexible method:

gg
This is a method suggested byy ACI Committee 336 ((1988)) with design
g
aids. It may be used with computer programs.

Discrete element methods:

In these methods, the mat is divided into elements by gridding:


1- Finite-difference method.
2- Finite-grid method.
3- Finite-element method.
Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Finite-difference method.

Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Finite-grid method.

Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Finite-element method.

Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Finite-element method.

Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Finite-element method.

Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Coefficient (modulus) of subgrade reaction :

Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Coefficient (modulus) of subgrade reaction :

Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Coefficient (modulus) of subgrade reaction :

Typical values of k0.3:

Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Coefficient (modulus) of subgrade reaction :

Approximate value:

Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Spring stiffness:

PART II
The conventional rigid design method

Part II:
Design procedure:

1- Select a trial footing depth:

ACI 15.7 specifies that the depth of footing above reinforcement is not to be
less than 15 cm for footings on soil.
soil Noting that 7.5
7 5 cm of clear concrete
cover is required if concrete is cast against soil, a practical minimum depth
i taken
is k as 25
2 cm. The
h depth
d h off the
h ffooting
i isi first
fi selected
l d andd later
l
checked for punching and beam shear. As a role of thumb, it is a common
practice to assume the thickness of the mat for multistory buildings to be
equal to the number of stories multiplied by 80 mm to 100 mm.

Part II:
Design procedure:

2- Evaluate the net allowable soil p


pressure:
qall (net) = qall (gross) - c hc - s (Df - hc)
P

Df
hc

qall(net)
where
hc is the assumed footingg depth,
p ,
Df is the distance from ground surface to the contact surface between footing base and soil,
c is the weight density of concrete, and
s is the weight density of soil on top of footing.

Part II:
Design procedure:

3- Check soil pressure:

The resultant of columns service loads


equals:
Ptotal = P1 + P2 + P3 + ... = Pi

Th X-coordinate
The X di off the
h resultant
l off loads:
l d
P1x 1 + P2 x 2 + P3x 3 + ...
X '=
Ptotal
t t l

where x1, x2, x3 are the X-coordinates


of P1, P2, P3:

The Y-coordinate of the resultant of loads:


P1 y 1 + P2 y 2 + P3 y 3 + ...
Y '=
Ptotal

where y1, y2, y3 are the Y-coordinates of P1, P2, P3:


Part II:
Design procedure:

3- Check soil pressure:

The coordinate of the eccentricities


of the resultant from the C.G. of the
raft ex & ey are given by:

B
e x = X '
2
L
e y =Y '
2
Total moments:

Mx = moment of applied loads about


the i = Ptotal ey + Mx
h x-axis
My = moment of applied loads about
the x-axis = Ptotal ex + My

Part II:
Design procedure:

3- Check soil pressure:


The mat section properties are;

A = area of the raft (BL)


Ix = moment of inertia of the raft about
x-axis = BL3/12
Iy = moment of inertia of the raft about
y-axis = LB3/12

The soil pressure at any point can be


obtained
bt i d by:
b
Ptotal M x M
q= y y x
A Ix Iy
Compare the maximum soil pressures at
the corner points of the mat with the net
allowable
ll bl soil
il pressure:

q q all ( net ) ? If not, enlarge mat or use piles


Part II:
Design procedure:

4- Calculate ultimate pressure


under the columns:

The soil pressure at each column is


obtained by:
Pu ,total Mx M
qu = y y x
A Ix Iy

All the
th loads
l d have
h to
t be
b factored.
f t d

Part II:
Design procedure:

5 Check footing thickness for p


5- punching
nching shear.
shear
When loads are applied over small areas of slabs and footings with no beams, punching
failure mayy occur. The sloping
p g failure surface takes the shape
p of a truncated py
pyramid in
case of rectangular columns, and a truncated cone in case of circular columns.

The ACI Code assumes that failure takes place on vertical planes located at distance d/2
from the faces of the column.
ACI 11.11.1.2

Part II:
Design procedure:

5- Check footing
g thickness for p
punching
g shear [[contd.]]
The depth of the footing must be checked so that the shear capacity of the concrete equals
or exceeds the critical shear forces produced by factored loads
Vu Vc
The critical punching shear force Vu can be evaluated under an interior column as follows

V u = Pu qu (C 1 + d )(C 2 + d )
C1 + d

C1
ACI 11.11.1.2
C2 + d

C2

Since there are two layers of reinforcement, an average value of d may be used:
d = h 7.5cm db , where db is the bar diameter.
Part II:
Design procedure:

5- Check footing thickness for punching shear [contd.]


Punching shear force resisted by concrete Vc is given as the smallest of
2
V C = 0.17
0 17 1 + f c 'bo d C1 + d

c
V C = 0.33 f c 'bo d C1

C2 + d

C2
s d
V C = 0.083 2 + f c 'bo d
bo

c = long side/short side of column,


s = 40 for interior, 30 for exterior, and 20 for corner columns,
bo =length of critical perimeter around the column, for interior column = 2[(C1+d)+(C2+d)]
Interior
ACI 11.11.2.1
V u V c
If not, enlarge depth of mat Corner Exterior
Part II:
Design procedure:

6- Draw the shear and moment diagrams:

Divide the raft into several strips in the X-direction (B1, B2, B3) and in the Y-
direction (B4, B5, B6, B7)

The soil pressure at the center-line


of the strip is assumed constant
along the width of the strip.
strip For
example, the average soil pressures
for strip GBIHEJ:

q (u ) B + q (u ) E
q (u )avg =
2

Part II:
Design procedure:

6- Draw the shear and moment diagrams:

The total soil reaction (RB-E)


for the stripp B-E is equal
q to:

R B E = q (u )avg B 2 L

where B2 is the width of the


strip.
strip

The total soil reaction (RB-E) for


the strip B
B-E
E is equal to:

PB E = P(u )5 + P(u )6 + P(u )7 + P(u )8

Part II:
Design procedure:

6- Draw the shear and moment diagrams:


The achieve equilibrium, columns loads and soil reaction must be modified such
that the sum of the forces is equal to zero
R B E + PB E
P(u )avg =
2
The modified soil p
pressure equals:
q
P(u )avg
q mod =
L

The modified columns loads are obtained by multiplying each of the applied
loads by the factor given by:
P(u )avg
=
PB E

The shear & bending moment diagrams can be drawn using regular structural analysis.
The same process should be carried out for all the strips in the mat foundation.
Part II:
Design procedure:

7- Check footing thickness for beam shear


Compare the maximum shear obtained from the shear diagram with the beam
shear capacity calculated by:

V c = 0.17 f c ' B d V max ? Vmax

If not
not, enlarge depth of mat

Part II:
Design procedure:

8- Determine the required amount of reinforcement for each of the


strips.

0.85f c 2M u
= 1 1 2

fy 0.85 f B d
c

A s ,reqq = B d
A s ,min = 0.0018Bh A s ,req

It is customary to reinforce the mat


with a bottom basic reinforcement
mesh and basic top reinforcement
mesh. Additional reinforcement is
provided at locations where the
capacity is exceeded.

Part II:
Design procedure:

9- Check bearing strength under the columns.


See notes from Design I

10 Check
10- Ch k reinforcing
i f i barsb for
f anchorage
h lengths.
l th
See notes from Design I

PART III
Example

Part III:
Example:

Design the reinforced


concrete
t matt foundation
f d ti
shown in the figure. The
cross section of all columns
is 40x40 cm. The net
allowable soil pressure is
kN/ 2. The
120 kN/m Th material
t i l
properties are: fy = 420
MPa, and fc' = 30 MPa. The
column loads are shown
in the table next slide.
Column spacing in the x
direction is 6 m and in the
y direction is 5 m.
m

Part III:

Column Pd Pl Pserv Pu
















S
Sum

Part III:
S l ti
Solution:

1- Select a trial footing depth:

Assume h = 75 cm

2- Evaluate the net allowable soil pressure:


qall (net) = 120 kN/m2 (Given)

3- Check soil pressure:

Ptotal = P1 + P2 + P3 + ...
P1x 1 + P2 x 2 + P3x 3 + ...
X '=
Ptotal
P1 y 1 + P2 y 2 + P3 y 3 + ...
Y '=
Ptotal

Part III:

Take moment of loads about point D:

Column Pserv x y xPserv yPserv


. .
. .
. .
. .


.
.


. .


. .



. .
. .
. .
. .


. .


Sum
Part III:

Take moment of loads about point D:

Ptotal = P1 + P2 + P3 + ... = 14980 kN

P1x 1 + P2 x 2 + P3x 3 + ... 93476


X '= = = 6.24m
Ptotall 14980

P1 y 1 + P2 y 2 + P3 y 3 + ... 116096
Y '= = = 7.75m
Ptotal 14980

B 12.4
e x = X ' = 6.24 = 0.04 m
2 2
L 15.4
e y = Y ' = 7.75 = 0.05 m
2 2
Total moments:

Mx = Ptotal ey = 14980 (0.05) = 750 kN.m

My = Ptotal ex = 14980 (0.04) = 600 kN.m


Part III:
The mat section properties are:
A = BL = 12.4*15.4 = 190.96 m2
Ix = BL3/12 = 3774 m4
Iy = LB3/12 = 2446.8 m4

The soil pressure at any point can be obtained by:

Ptotal M x M 14980 750 600


q= y y x = + y + x
A Ix Iy 190.96
190 96 3774 2446.8
2446 8

Corners x y q
A .- . .
C .
. .
. .
.
D .- .- .
F
. -
.
.
q max = 81.5 < 120kN/m 2 OK
Part III:
4 Calculate ultimate pressure under the columns:
4-

Column x y q
Mx = Ptotal ey = 19288 (0.05)
(0 05)
= 966 kN.m - . .
- . .
My = Ptotal ex = 19288 (0.04) - .- .
= 773 kN.m
- .- .
My
. .
Ptotal M x
q= y x . .
A Ix Iy
19288 966 773 .- .
= + y + x
190.96 3774 2446.8 .- .

.
.
. .
-
.
.
.- .
Part III:

5- Check footing thickness for punching shear.

Average effective depth davgg = 75-7.5-2 = 65.5cm (assuming 20)

Under internal columns:


C1 + d
Vu = P q( 0.4 + 0.655 )( 0.4 + 0.655 )

bo = 4 ( 0.40 + 0.655) =4.22 m


C1

C2 + d

C2
VC is the smallest of
0.33 fc ' bo d = 0.75 0.33 30 4220 655 = 3747 kN
2 2
0 17 fc ' 1 + bo d = 0.75
0.17 0 75 00.17
17 30 1 + 4220 655 = 5790 kN
c 0.4/0.4
d 40 655
0.083 fc ' 2 + s bo d = 0.75 0.083 30 2 + 4220 655 = 7736 kN
bo 4220
VC = 3747 kN Compare with punching shear under internal columns (see next)
Part III:

5- Check footing thickness for punching shear.

Under external columns:


C1 + d/2

Vu = P q( 0.4 + 0.655 / 2 )( 0.4 + 0.655 )


C1

C2 + d
bo = ( 0.40 + 0.655) +2(0.40+0.655/2)=2.51 m

C2
VC is the smallest of
0.33 fc ' bo d = 0.75 0.33 30 2510 655 = 2228 kN
2 2
0.17 fc ' 1 + bo d = 0.75 0.17 30 1 + 2510 655 = 3444 kN
c 0.4/0.4
0 4/0 4
d 30 655
0.083 fc ' 2 + s bo d = 0.75 0.083 30 2 + 2510 655 = 5509 kN
bo 2510
VC = 2228 kN Compare with punching shear under external columns (see next)

Part III:

5- Check footing thickness for punching shear.

Under corner columns:


C1 + d/2

C1

Vu = P q( 0.4 + 0.655 / 2 )( 0.4 + 0.655 / 2 )

C2
C2 + dd/2
bo = 2(0.40+0.655/2)=1.455m

VC is the smallest of
00.33 fc ' bo d = 0.75
0 0.33 30 14
1455 6655 = 1291 kN
k
2 2
0.17 fc ' 1 + bo d = 0.75 0.17 30 1 + 1455 655 = 1996 kN
c 0.4/0.4
0 4/0 4
s d 20 655
0.083 fc ' 2 + b
o d = 0.75 0.083 30 2 + 1455 655 = 3575 kN
b o 1455
VC = 1291 kN Compare with punching shear under corner columns (see next)

Part III:

5- Check footing thickness for punching shear.

Summary:
Column Pu qu Vu Vc Check
.
.
.
OK
. . . OK
. . . OK
. . . OK
. . . OK


.
.
. OK
. . . OK
.
. .
. .
. OK
O
. . . OK
. . . OK
. . . OK
. . . OK
Part III:

6- Draw the shear and moment diagrams for strip GHJI:

q (u )5 + q (u )8 102.99 + 99.1
102 99 1
q (u )avg = = = 101kN / m 2
2 2
Column P P
R B E = q (u )avg B 2 L = 101 6 15.4 = 9333kN
.
PB E = P(u )5 + P(u )6 + P(u )7 + P(u )8 .
= 1400 + 3720 + 3720 + 1400 = 10240kN

.
.
R B E + PB E 9333 + 10240
P(u )avg = = = 9787 kN
2 2
P(u )avg 9787
q modd = = = 636kN / m
L 15.4

P(u )avg 9787


= = = 0.96
0 96
PB E 10240

Part III: . . . .

6- Draw the shear

and moment


diagrams for

strip GHJI:
-

P -
Column P -
.
.
.
.

. .

Part III:
. . . .

Location of maximum bending



moments:

Maximum moments occur at


points of zero shear:

Fy = 0
-

636x1 1338 = 0 x1=2.1m -


-

3555 2 = 0
636x2 1338 3555.2
636 x1
x2=7.7m
x2
636x3 1338 3555.2 3555.2 = 0 x3
x3=13.3m

7 Check
7- Ch k footing
f ti thithickness
k ffor b
beam shear
h
Vc = 0.75 0.17 30 6000 655 = 2745 kN > 1966kN OK
Part III:

8- Determine the required amount of reinforcement for the strip

F maximum
For i positive
iti momentt (1901 kN.m):
kN )
1901
Moment per unit width= = 317 kN .m / m
6
0.85f c 2M u
= 1 1 2

fy
0.85 f c Bd

0.85(30) 2(317 106 )


= 1 1 = 0.001987
420 0.85 (0.9) (30)(1000)(655) 2

A s ,req = Bd = 0.001987(1000)(655) = 1302mm 2
A s ,min = 0.0018
0 0018BBhh = 0.0018(1000)(750)
0 0018(1000)(750) = 1350 mm 2 > A s ,req
1350mm
A s ,req = 1350mm 2
Use 716 per meter (1407mm 2 )

Part III:

8- Determine the required amount of reinforcement for the strip

F maximum
For i negative
ti momentt (1901 kN.m):
kN )
1141
Moment per unit width= = 190kN .m / m
6
0.85f c 2M u
= 1 1 2

fy
0.85 f c B d

0.85(30) 2(190 106 )


= 1 1 = 0.001184
420 0.85 (0.9) (30)(1000)(655) 2

A s ,req = B d = 0.001184(1000)(655) = 775mm 2
A s ,min = 0.0018Bhh = 00.0018(1000)(750)
0 0018B 0018(1000)(750) = 1350 mm 2 > A s ,req
1350mm
A s ,req = 1350mm 2
Use 716 per meter (1407mm 2 )

Part III:

9- Check bearing strength under the columns.


See notes from Design I

10 Check
10- Ch k reinforcing
i f i barsb for
f anchorage
h lengths.
l th
See notes from Design I

You might also like